Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout066065-V5 - Construction-Related - Contract - Webber Waterworks LLCCSC No. 6606515 ORTWORTH, CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility City Project No. C01239 Mattie Parker Jesus "Jay" Chapa Mayor City Manager Chris Harder Director, Water Department Prepared for The City of Fort Worth Water Department VOLUME 5 OF 12 APRIL 2026 EXECUTED PLUMMER Plummer Associates, Inc j *=• ........... • • • • • • • *�� 1320 S University Drive, Suite 300 JOSHUA P. FRISINGER OFFICIAL RECORD Fort Worth, Texas 76107 it ° 97545 ✓ CITY SECRETARY TBPE Firm No. F-13 111 /QHAL �.. FT. WORTH, TX In Association with 6/10/2026 GAIJF Gupta & Associates, Inc ` " �uYC CONSULTING ENGINEERING Automation - Jacobs A company of Infrastructure `vJ McKIM&CREED LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 00 01 07 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Joshua P. Frisinger, P.E. #97545 Section Number and Title Division 00 Procurement And Contracting Division 01 General Requirements (Except 01 45 33 Special Inspection Observation and Testing and 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing) Division 02 Demolition 06 70 00 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Products & Fabrications 06 74 13 Fiberglass Weirs and Baffles 13 34 23.33 Precast Concrete Buildings 22 14 29 Submersible Sump Pump 32 31 00 Fences and Gates 33 01 10.58 Disinfection Potable Water Piping and Tanks 33 05 13 Manholes 33 05 39.41 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 32 26 Ejector Pumps 35 20 16.25 Fabricated Slide Gates and Stop Logs 40 01 05 Field Testing of Piping Systems 40 05 05 Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods 40 05 15 Piping Support Systems 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 24 Steel Pipe 40 05 31.13 PVC and CPVC Process Pipe 40 05 33 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Process Pipe 40 05 36 Piping System, Fiberglass Pressure Pipe 41 22 13.13 Overhead Cranes 41 22 23.16 Portable Davit Crane and Winch 41 22 23.19 Monorail Hoists 43 22 10 Common Requirements for Pumps 43 40 01 Polyethylene Storage Tank 43 23 69 44 42 56.16 Chemical Feed Systems -rE'�q�ll Peristaltic Hose Pump I JOSHUA P. FRISINGER r --------------- � 1� O- 97545 3/30/2026 Joshua P. Frisinger, P.E. #97545 i.-� MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Paula A. Monaco, PhD, P.E. #132844 Section Number and Title 40 75 00.01 Bioreactor Instrumentation System 40 05 74.13 Diaphragm Valves for Aeration Control 43 11 12 Blower High Speed Turbo 43 21 39 Pumps, Dry -Pit Submersible Centrifugal 43 22 56.01 Submersible Mixers 4442 25.02 Aluminum Flat Panel Cover System 4442 56.04 Submersible Pumps 4445 16.02 Fine Bubble Air Diffuser System 46 25 34 FOG and Scum Mixing Equipment PAULA A. MONACO a# 132844 iQr % 1,1���\ 3/30/2026 Paula A. Monaco, PhD, P.E. #132844 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-2 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Jenny Beth Murray, P.E. #142379 Section Number and Title 44 42 19.04 Rotary Positive Displacement Blower 4442 56.13 Progressing Cavity Pumps 46 51 21 Aeration System, Coarse Bubble Membrane Diffusers .�P�E ?L ...t 1 *; ...............................:.... JENNY BETH MURRAY .................................... 142379 : c 3/30/2026 Jenny Beth Murray, P.E. #142379 MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07-3 MARYS CREEK WRY SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Bradley Deaton, P.E. #133296 Section Number and Title 44 42 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps 44 42 56.04 Submersible Pumps — O / BRADLEY T. DEATON II 133296 tom.•.,, O.c' LENS . ""370/2026 Bradley Deaton, P.E. #133296 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Hannah Salinas Frels, P.E. #130165 Section Number and Title 13 34 23 Prefabricated Fiberglass Shelters 33 21 00 Non -Chlorinated, Non -Potable Plant Water System 40 05 36.13 Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 40 05 64.43 Fiberglass Dampers 43 1119 Foul Air Fans 44 3111 Biological Tower Type Odor Control System 44 3116 Carbon Adsorber Odor Control System 44 31 83 Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing HANNAH E. SALINAS FRELS 130165 L ENb'� 03/31/2026 Hannah Salinas Frels, P.E. #130165 MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07-5 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-13 Raviola Wenno, P.E. #142677 Section Number and Title 46 46 23 Tank Washdown and Booster Pump System NAt '.\' 3/30/2026 Raviola Wenno, P.E. #142677 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY GUPTA AND ASSOCIATES, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-2593 Andrew Reed, P.E. #123384 Section Number and Title Division 26 Electrical 40 41 00 Electrical Heat Tracing �P�E OF r jANDREW A..REED� �9�•.•.123384 ENS �.•� 03/30/2026 Andrew Reed, P.E. #123384 MARCH 23, 2026 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMIVR ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 000107-7 MARYS CREEK WRY SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY SIGNATURE AUTOMATION TBPE FIRM NO. F-4711 Anthony V. Scudieri, P.E. #89088 Section Number and Title 28 00 05 Electronic Security System 40 61 00 Process Control Systems General Provisions 40 61 21 Process Control System — Testing 40 61 21A Instrument Calibration Certificate 40 61 21B Unwitnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21 C Witnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21D Operational Readiness Test Forms 40 61 21E Functional Demonstration Test Forms 40 61 21F Site Acceptance Test Forms 40 61 26 Process Control Systems — Training 40 61 93 Process Control Systems Input Output List 40 61 96 Control Descriptions 40 62 00 Computer Hardware and Software 40 63 00 PLC Hardware and Software 40 66 00 Network Equipment 40 66 33 Fiber -Optic Communication Cabling and Connectors 40 6643 Radio Equipment and Systems 40 66 66 Communication Towers 40 67 00 Control Panels and Components 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Supplies 40 68 00 Applications Engineering Services 40 71 00 Flow Instruments 40 72 00 Level Instruments 40 73 00 Pressure Instruments 40 74 00 Temperature Instruments 40 75 00 Liquid Analytical Instruments 40 76 00 Gas Analytical Instruments Anthony V. Scudieri, P.E. #89088 /)J? O ANTHONY V. SCUDIERI .............................. -. 89088 ; � �t��FSS�C E N S NG��AW 6 3�3 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JQ-IMEG LLC TBPE FIRM NO. F-26651 Ovidiu M. Sipos, P.E. #111707 Section Number and Title 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 23.1 Borrow 31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control 31 37 00 Riprap 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 13 20 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, and Barrier Free Ramps 32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 33 4110 Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Pipe Culverts 33 49 10 Storm Drain Manholes and Junction Boxes 33 49 20 Curb and Drop Inlets OF Tf 1�+ J / w : ...........:.... OVIDIU M. SIPOS 111707 !ONA L f Ovidiu M. Sipos, P.E. #111707 MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07-9 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY CCA LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS, INC. TBAE# 3027 Jaclyn Clark Szafranic, Registered Landscape Architect #3165 Section Number and Title 01 56 39 Tree Protection, Removal, and Pruning 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation System 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 32 93 00 Landscaping 03/30/2026 Jaclyn Clark Szafranic, Registered Landscape Architect #3165 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07- 10 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Lei Wei, PE No. 99776 Section Number and Title 31 1000 31 23 13 31 23 16 31 23 19.01 31 2323 31 23 23.15 314100 Site Clearing Subgrade Preparation Excavation Dewatering Fill and Backfill Trench Backfill Shoring MARCH 31, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 00 01 07 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Alex Shefferman, P.E. Section Number and Title 21 13 13 2831 00 ALEX F RMAN j 1, -- 14.:::: 09 i 3/30/26 Alex Shefferman, P.E. Wet -Pipe Sprinkler Systems Fire Detection and Alarm MARCH 31, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 00 01 07- 12 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Brian Lee Hendon, Registered Architect No. 25284 Section Number and Title 04 21 13.13 Masonry Veneer 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 06 82 00 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 07 13 53 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07 21 01 Therman Insulation 07 26 16 Below Grade Vapor Retarders 07 27 26 Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers 07 40 00 Roofing and Siding Panels 07 42 13.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 70 00 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 08 11 16 Aluminum Flush Doors 08 12 16 Interior Aluminum Frames and Doors 08 16 13 Fiberglass Doors 08 31 23 Floor Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents 09 22 16 Nonstructural Metal Framing 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 00 Tiling 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 Fluid -Applied Flooring 09 77 01 Fiberglass -Reinforced Plastic (FPR) Panel Walls 09 80 00 Acoustical Wall Panel System 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 10 14 00 Signage 10 21 00 Toilet Compartments 10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection and Safety Equipment 10 51 00 Lockers 10 73 00 Metal Awnings and Canopies ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 23, 2026 0001 07 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 10 8113 Architectural Bird Control 11 31 00 Appliances 12 35 53.13 Metal Laboratory Casework 12 48 16 Entrance Floor Grilles March 30. Brian Lee Hendon, Registered Architect No. 25284. MARCH 23, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07 - 11 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Phillip K. Dewolfe, P.E. Section Number and Title 23 05 14B HVAC Adjustable Frequency Drives 23 05 48B Vibration Isolation and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93B Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00B HVAC Insulation 23 09 00B Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC 23 09 13 HVAC Controls — Field Components and Instruments 23 09 23B Direct Digital Control System for HVAC 23 23 00B Refrigerant Piping 23 31 13B Metal Ducts and Accessories 23 3116.16B Thermoset Fiberglass -Reinforced Plastic Ducts and Accessories 23 34 00B HVAC Fans 23 36 00B Air Terminal Units 23 37 00B Air Outlets and Inlets 23 77 00 Air Handling Units 23 81 00 Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment 23 82 00 Terminal Heating and Cooling Units ,IIJ PFGILLOP fit_ pEW'OLFE �.. .................. - 3+34,'6 Phillip K. DeWolfe, P.E. No. 102003 MARCH 31, 2026 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 0001 07- 15 MARYS CREEK WRF Section Number and Title 22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 01 Plumbing Piping and Accessories 22 10 01.02 Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.03 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.04 Acid -Resistant Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.06 Acid -Resistant Polypropylene Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.08 High -Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings — Water and Sewer Service 22 10 01.12 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings — Natural Gas Service 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures . .............. � PHILLIP K DEVVOLFE 3/30.2 Phillip K. DeWolfe, P.E. No. 102003 ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE MARCH 31, 2026 0001 07- 16 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRY SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Alex Bannerot, P.E. No. 91686 Section Number and Title 01 45 33 Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing 03 01 32 Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces 03 01 33 Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories 03 21 00 Steel Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 40 00 Precast Concrete 03 62 00 Grouting 03 63 00 Concrete Doweling 03 64 23 Epoxy Injection Grouting Injection Grouting 03 64 24 Polyurethane Injection Grouting 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 05 05 19 Post -Installed Anchors 05 05 23 Welding 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 21 19 Open Web Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 41 00 Structural Metal Stud Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 51 19 Aluminum Stairs and Platforms 05 52 16 Aluminum Guardrails (Railings) 05 53 00 Metal Gratings 06 82 00 Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Plastic 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 33 16 13.15 Prestressed Concrete Tank with Steel Diaphragm ALEX SANNEROT 916B6 iur,kr 34 Wit 2026 aacbns Enginearirar� Group inc. Alex Bannerot, P.E. No. 91686 Texas Risiration 42966 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 00 01 07-17 MARYS CREEK WRF SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP TBPE FIRM NO. F-2966 Arifur Rahman, PE No. 133452 Section Number and Title 4442 56.13 Progressing Cavity Pumps 4444 63.01 Polymer Feed System, Liquid 4446 13.02 Screw Conveyor System 4446 26.03 Rotary Drum Thickeners .• �.1 ..Ir ••AI•, . •. * . 00 ■.a+.....................i Ar ARIFUR RAHI.IA - I� R� 135 342 .• 30 March 2026 Arifur Rahman, PE No. 133452. MARCH 31, 2026 ©C0PYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER ENGINEER'S SEALS PAGE 0001 07- 18 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY Volume 1 Section Number and Title DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 00 00 Cover 00 01 07 Engineer's Seals Pages 00 0110 Table of Contents 00 05 10 Mayor and Council Communications (M&C) 00 05 15 Addendum 1, 2 and 3 Volume 2 DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 0005 15 Addendum 4 Volume 3 DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 05 15 Addendum 5, 6, 7, and 8 Volume 4 DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 1113 Invitation to Offerors 00 2113 Instructions to Offerors 00 35 13 Conflict of Interest Statement 00 41 00 Proposal Form 00 42 43 Offeror's Proposal Form 0043 13 Proposal Security 00 43 37 Vendor Compliance to State Law Non Resident Proposer 00 45 12 Subcontractor and Major Equipment Supplier List 00 45 26 Contractor Compliance with Workers Compensation Law 00 52 43 Agreement 0061 13 Performance Bond 0061 14 Payment Bond 00 6119 Maintenance Bond 00 61 25 Certificate of Insurance 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 00 01 10 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 00 - CONTINUED 00 80 00 TWDB Required Documents 00 80 01 TWDB Forms and Templates DIVISION 01 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 11 17 Installation of Pre -Selected Equipment 01 12 16 Sequence of Construction 01 2110 Unit Bid Items 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 26 13 Requests for Information 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 13 Project Coordination 01 31 19 Preconstruction Meetings 01 31 20 Project Meetings 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 33 Preconstruction Video 01 32 35 Aerial Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 35 13 Special Project Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms 01 43 33 Manufacturer's Field Services 01 45 16.13 Contractor Quality Control 01 45 23 Testing and Inspection Services 01 45 33 Special Inspection Observation and Testing 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 56 39 Tree Protection, Removal, and Pruning 01 57 13 Storm Water Pollution Prevention 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements 01 70 00 Mobilization and Remobilization 01 71 23 Construction Staking and Survey 01 73 00 Execution Requirements 01 7423 Cleaning 01 75 01 Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing 01 76 00 Asset Management List 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 36 Warranties 01 78 39 Project Record Documents TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 000110-2 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 01- CONTINUED 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing 01 9114 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup DIVISION 02 02 41 00 Demolition DIVISION 03 03 01 32 Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces 03 01 33 Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories 03 21 00 Steel Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 40 00 Precast Concrete 03 62 00 Grouting 03 63 00 Concrete Doweling 03 64 23 Epoxy Resin Injection Grouting 03 64 24 Polyurethane Injection Grouting Volume 5 DIVISION 04 0421 13.13 Masonry Veneer 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 05 05 19 Post -Installed Anchors 05 05 23 Welding 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 2119 Open Web Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 41 00 Structural Metal Stud Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 5119 Aluminum Stairs and Platforms July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-3 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 05 - CONTINUED 05 52 16 Aluminum Guardrails Railings 05 53 00 Metal Gratings DIVISION 06 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 06 70 00 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Products & Fabrications 06 74 13 Fiberglass Weirs and Baffles 06 82 00 Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Plastic DIVISION 07 07 13 53 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07 21 01 Thermal Insulation 07 26 16 Belowgrade Vapor Retarders 0727 26 Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers 07 40 00 Roofing and Siding Panels 07 42 13.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 70 01 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies DIVISION 08 08 11 16 Aluminum Flush Doors 08 12 16 Interior Aluminum Frames and Doors 08 16 13 Fiberglass Doors 08 31 23 Floor Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 000110-4 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 09 09 22 16 Nonstructural Metal Framing 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 00 Tiling 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 Fluid -Applied Flooring 09 77 01 Fiberglas Reinforced Plastic Panel Walls 09 80 00 Acoustic Wall Panel System 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 09 90 01 Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) 09 90 02 Paint Product Data Sheet (PDS) 09 96 35 Chemical -Resistant Coatings DIVISION 10 10 14 00 Signage 10 21 00 Toilet Compartments 10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Projection and Safety Equipment 10 51 00 Lockers 10 73 00 Metal Awnings and Canopies 10 8113 Architectural Bird Control 10 90 00 Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging DIVISION 11 11 31 00 11 53 13 Appliances Laboratory Fume Hoods Related Products and DIVISION 12 12 35 53.13 Metal Laboratory Casework 12 48 16 Entrance Floor Grilles DIVISION 13 13 21 50 Laboratory Environmental Controlled Chambers and Rooms 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 13 34 23 Prefabricated Fiberglass Shelters 13 34 23.33 Precast Concrete Buildings July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-5 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 21 2113 13 Wet -Pipe Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 01 Plumbing Piping and Accessories 22 10 01.02 Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.03 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.04 Acid -Resistant Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.06 Acid -Resistant Polypropylene Waste and Vent Pipe Fittings 22 10 01.08 High -Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.12 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings for Gas 22 14 29 Submersible Sump Pump 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures Volume 6 DIVISION 23 23 05 14 HVAC Adjustable Frequency Drives 23 05 48 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control For HVAC Piping And Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC 23 09 13 HVAC Controls, Field Components, and Instruments 23 09 23 Direct -Digital Control System for HVAC 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 3113 Metal Ducts and Accessories 23 3116.16 Thermoset Fiberglass -Reinforced Plastic Ducts and Accessories 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 77 00 Air Handling Units 23 81 00 Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment 23 82 00 Terminal Heating and Cooling Units DIVISION 26 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 13 MV Cables 26 05 19 LV Wires and Cables TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 000110-6 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMIER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 26 - CONTINUED 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding System 26 05 29 Electrical Support Hardware 26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures, and Fittings 26 05 36 Cable Trays 26 05 43 Underground System 26 05 73 Power System Study 26 12 19 Pad Mounted Transformers 26 13 13 Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear 26 20 00 Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors 26 22 13 Distribution Dry -Type Transformers 26 24 13 LV Distribution Switchboards 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 24 19 LV Motor Control Centers 26 25 02 MV Metal -Enclosed Bus Duct 26 27 13 Power Metering and Protective Relays 26 27 26 Light Switches and Receptacles 26 28 16 LV Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Safety Switches Vnlnmo 7 DIVISION 26 - CONTINUED 26 29 23 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives 26 29 86 Mechanical Equipment Control Panels 26 29 87 Electrical Control Panels 26 32 13 Engine Generator Set 26 33 00 Station Battery System 26 33 54 3 -Phase Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 36 23 LV Enclosed Automatic Transfer Switches 26 41 00 Lightning Protection System 26 43 13 LV AC Surge Protective Devices 26 50 00 Lighting System DIVISION 28 28 00 05 Electronic Security System 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-7 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 31 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 13 Subgrade Preparation 31 23 16 Excavation 31 23 19.01 Dewatering 31 23 23 Fill and Backfill 31 23 23.1 Borrow 31 23 23.15 Trench Backfill 31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control 31 3700 Riprap 31 41 00 Shoring DIVISION 32 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 13 20 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, and Barrier Free Ramps 32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 17 23 Pavement markings 32 31 00 Fences and Gates 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation System 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 32 93 00 Landscaping DIVISION 33 33 0110.58 Disinfection Potable Water Piping and Tanks 33 05 13 Manholes 33 05 39.41 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 16 13.15 Prestressed Concrete Tank with Steel Diaphragm 33 21 00 Non -Chlorinated, Non -Potable Water System 33 32 26 Ejector Pumps 33 4110 Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Pipe Culverts 33 49 10 Storm Drain Manholes and Junction Boxes 33 49 20 Curb and Drop Inlets DIVISION 35 35 20 16.25 Fabricated Slide Gates and Stop Logs TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 00 01 10 - 8 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY Volume 8 DIVISION 40 40 01 05 Field Testing of Piping Systems 40 05 05 Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods 40 05 15 Piping Support Systems 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 24 Steel Pipe 40 05 31.11 Piping System, Chemical Feed 40 05 31.13 Polyvinyl Chloride and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Process Pipe 40 05 33 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Process Pipe 40 05 36 Piping System, Fiberglass Pressure Pipe 40 05 36.13 Foul Air Fiberglass Ductwork 40 05 64.43 Fiberglass Dampers 40 05 74.13 Diaphragm Valves for Aeration Control 40 27 02 Process Valves and Operators 40 41 00 Electrical Heat Tracing 40 42 13 Process Piping Insulation 40 46 16 Protective Liquid Linings and Coatings for Substrates Exposed to Corrosive Wastewater Environment 40 47 00 Dumpster Conveyor System 40 61 00 Process Control Systems General Provisions 40 61 21 Process Control System — Testing 40 61 21A Instrument Calibration Certificate 40 61 21B Unwitnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21C Witnessed Factory Test Forms 40 61 21D Operational Readiness Test Forms 40 61 21E Functional Demonstration Test Forms 40 61 21F Site Acceptance Test Forms 40 61 26 Process Control Systems — Training 40 61 93 Process Control Systems Input Output List 40 61 96 Control Descriptions 40 62 00 Computer Hardware and Software 40 63 00 PLC Hardware and Software July 30, 2026 TABLE OF CONTENTS COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 000110-9 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY Volume 9 DIVISION 40 - CONTINUED 40 66 00 Network Equipment 40 66 33 Fiber -Optic Communication Cabling and Connectors 40 6643 Radio Equipment and Systems 40 66 66 Communication Towers 40 67 00 Control Panels and Components 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Supplies 40 68 00 Applications Engineering Services 40 71 00 Flow Instruments 40 72 00 Level Instruments 40 73 00 Pressure Instruments 40 74 00 Temperature Instruments 40 75 00 Liquid Analytical Instruments 40 75 00.01 Bioreactor Instrumentation System 40 76 00 Gas Analytical Instruments Volume 10 DIVISION 41 41 22 13.13 Overhead Cranes 41 22 23.16 Portable Davit Crane and Winch 41 22 23.19 Monorail Hoists DIVISION 43 43 11 12 Blower High -Speed Turbo 43 11 19 Foul Air Fans 43 21 39 Pumps, Dry -Pit Submersible Centrifugal 43 22 10 Common Requirements for Pumps 43 22 56.01 Submersible Mixers 43 32 69 Chemical Feed Systems 43 40 01 Polyethylene Storage Tank DIVISION 44 44 3111 Biological Tower Type Odor Control System 44 3116 Carbon Adsorber Odor Control System 44 31 83 Foul Air Collection System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 44 42 19.04 Rotary Positive Displacement Blower 4442 25.02 Aluminum Flat Panel Cover System 4442 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 00 01 10 - 10 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMIER TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY DIVISION 44 - CONTINUED 4442 56.04 Submersible Pumps 4442 56.13 Progressing Cavity Pumps 44 42 56.16 Peristaltic Hose Pump 4444 63.01 Polymer Feed System, Liquid 4445 16.02 Fine Bubble Air Diffuser System 44 46 13.02 Screw Conveyor System 4446 26.03 Rotary Drum Thickeners DIVISION 46 46 25 34 FOG and Scum Mixing Equipment 46 46 23 Tank Washdown and Booster Pump System 46 51 21 Aeration Systems, Coarse -Bubble Membrane Diffusers July 30, 2026 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10- 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MARY'S CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY The following documents are for information: Volume 11 APPENDIX I — Selection of Membrane Equipment System Supplier for the Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Appendix 1 1 P,-eselectio., Package 1 Proposal Documents Appendix I.2 Approved Veolia Submittal APPENDIX II — Selection of Preselection Package 2 for the Mary's Creek Water Reclamation Facility Appendix ff1 Preselection Package 2 Proposal Documents Appendix II.2 Vulcan — Coarse Screens Appendix II.3 Old Castle— Grit Removal Appendix II.4 Saveco — Fine Screens Volume 12 6 APPENDIX H — Continued Appendix II.5 Trojan — UV System Appendix II.6 Vaughan — Submersible Chopper Pump Appendix II.7 Vaughan — Submersible Chopper Pump Appendix II.8 GEA — Dewatering System APPENDIX III — Funding Requirements 00 75 43 Employment Requirements and Wage Rates DB-0 154 Davis Bacon Wage Rate Monthly Compliance — Owner DB-0 155 Davis Bacon Wage Rate Monthly Compliance TWDB-0100 Clean Water State Revolving Fund Loan Program TWDB-0551 Supplemental Construction Contract Conditions for Non -Equivalency Projects under the Clean Water State Revolving Fund Programs TWDB-1106A AIS Monthly Certificate of Compliance — Owner TWDB-1 106B AIS De Minimis Log TWDB-1106C AIS Final Certificate TWDB-1109A Project Signage WIFIA Funding Requirements APPENDIX IV — Geotechnical Report APPENDIX V — City Obtained Permits TABLE OF CONTENTS July 30, 2026 00 01 10 - 12 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 04 21 13.13 MASONRY VENEER PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. c. B370, Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. d. C90, Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. e. C9 1, Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. f. C126, Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units. g. C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. h. C1501C150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. i. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. j. C216, Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). k. C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 1. C652, Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). m. C979/C979M, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. n. D 1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials — Sponge or Expanded Rubber. o. E96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. p. E2178, Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MASONRY VENEER 04 21 13.13 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Manufacturer's product information for each different item specified. b. Mix designs for mortar. c. Details for cast stone units and special brick shapes and assemblies. 2. Samples: a. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing full range of exposed color, texture, and dimensions to be expected in completed construction. Match selected Samples at Engineer's office or listed in Finish Schedule. 1) Include size variation data verifying that actual range of sizes for brick falls within ASTM C216 dimension tolerances for brick where modular dimensioning is indicated. b. Colored masonry mortar Samples for each color required showing full range of colors expected in finished construction. Label Samples to indicate type and amount of colorant used. c. Stone and cast stone Samples not less than 12 inches in length showing full range of colors and textures expected in finished construction. d. Accessories embedded in masonry. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Experience record of mortar color pigment proposed for use. 2. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance for masonry units specified herein. 3. Method and materials for removal of efflorescence. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: For masonry construction meet requirements of the International Building Code and as supplemented by these Specifications. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: 1. Store all masonry materials off ground and protected from precipitation. 2. Protect veneer materials from mud splatters and staining. MASONRY VENEER PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 04 21 13.13-2 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Temperature: Do not lay masonry when ambient temperature is below 32 degrees F on a rising temperature or below 40 degrees F on a falling temperature, or when there is a probability of such conditions occurring within 48 hours, unless express approval of Engineer is obtained. In such case, make special provisions for heating materials and protecting finished Work. Protect masonry against freezing for a minimum of 48 hours after being laid. Protect tops of walls from precipitation at all times. Cover with waterproof paper when rain or snow is imminent and the Work is discontinued. B. Humidity: Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in an ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F (37 degrees C) in the shade with relative humidity less than 50 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS A. Color, Texture, and Pattern: Match submitted Samples approved by Engineer. B. Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU)Veneer: 1. General: a. Solid Masonry Units. b. Furnish special shapes for corners, jambs, lintels, and other areas shown or required. c. Special units shall match texture of standard units. d. Where units are placed so end of unit is exposed, such as at a corner or at a wall opening, exposed end of that block shall have surface to match texture of sides of other units. e. Furnish sound, dry, clean units free of cracks and chips. 2. Basis Of Design: a. Manufacturer: Featherline — Abelene, Texas. b. Product: "White", Split -Face Units. 3. Concrete Masonry Unit Veneer (CMUV): a. ASTM C90: Medium weight. b. Nominal Size: 16 inches long by 8 inches high by thickness shown on Drawings. Furnish special shapes in sizes shown on Drawings. c. Compressive Strength: 1,900 psi minimum, in accordance with ASTM C90, Table 2. d. Color of Units: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MASONRY VENEER 04 21 13.13-3 MARY'S CREEK WRY e. Surface Texture on Exposed Surfaces: Standard pattern, split -face finish. f. Surface Texture on Interior and Concealed Exterior Surfaces: Smooth. 4. Water -repellant admixture. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, low alkali content (0.03 percent maximum). B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, low alkali content (0.60 percent maximum). C. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S. Consisting of one part portland cement, from 1/4 part to 1/2 part lime putty or hydrated lime, and clean well -graded sand in the proportion of three times the sum of the cementitious material; or 1/2 part portland cement, one part masonry cement, and clean well -graded sand in the proportion of three times the sum of the cementitious material. 1. If color is added, add in a consistent manner to provide final uniformity. 2. No antifreeze liquid, salts, or other substances are allowed to lower freezing point. No calcium chloride is allowed in mortar. E. Tuck -Pointing Mortar: Prehydrated Type N, one part portland cement, one part Type S hydrated lime, and six parts sand, by volume. F. Mortar Color: 1. Pure, concentrated mineral, pigment specially processed for mixing in to mortar; ASTM C979. 2. Manufacturer and Product: a. Davis Colors, True Tone Cement Colors. b. Solomon Colors, Mortar Colors. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. G. Sand: ASTM C 144, in addition not less than 5 percent passes the No. 100 sieve. H. Water: Fresh, clean, and free of deleterious acids, alkalis, chlorides, and organic materials. MASONRY VENEER PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 04 21 13.13-4 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.03 MORTAR PREPARATION A. Place one-half the water and aggregate in operating mixer; add cement; add remaining aggregate and water and mix for at least 2 minutes. Add lime and continue mixing as long as needed to secure a uniform mass, but no less than 3 minutes after the addition of lime. Time the addition of admixture in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the procedure used for adding it to the mix shall provide good dispersion. B. Mix mortar in machine with mixing drums clean and free of debris and dried mortar. Use mortar before the initial setting of the cement has taken place. Do not retemper mortar in which the cement has started to set. C. Retemper mortar boards by adding water within a basin formed with the mortar and the mortar reworked into the water. Dashing or pouring water over mortar and retempering of harsh, nonplastic mortar is not permitted. D. Where color tinting of mortar is required, add sufficient lime -proof color -fast mineral pigment to mortar. 2.04 MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS A. ASTM D1056, closed cell neoprene sponge, 3 inches wide by 3/8 inch thick. 2.05 COMPRESSIBLE PADS A. ASTM D1056, closed cell neoprene sponge, 3 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick, with pressure sensitive adhesive applied on one side. 2.06 AIR AND WATER BARRIER A. Air and water barrier, fluid applied, one component, vapor permeable membrane, cures on masonry or concrete surfaces to form a resilient, monolithic, fully -bonded elastomeric sheet, 40 mils minimum dry thickness, meeting requirements of ASTM E2178 for air permeance. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Grace, Perma-A-Barrier Liquid VP. 2. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash Liquid VP. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MASONRY VENEER 04 21 13.13-5 MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.07 THROUGH -WALL FLASHING A. Copper: 1. ASTM B370. 2. 16 ounces, 0.0216 inch thick, smooth through wall masonry flashing. 3. Manufacturers: a. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; MFL-STF. b. Cheney Flashing Co., sawtooth. 2.08 VENEER ANCHORS A. Seismic Anchors: 1. Horizontal Ladder Eye with Seismic Hook Anchors and Continuous Wire: a. Two parallel No. 9 wires weld connected to No. 9 perpendicular cross wire and double wire eyes at 16 inches on center. b. Double Wire Seismic Hooks: 9 -gauge steel wire Pintel swaged for insertion of continuous wire. c. Continuous Wire: 9 -gauge steel wire. d. Clean and free from loose rust, scale, and any coatings that reduce bond; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. e. Furnish special manufactured corner and wall intersection pieces. f. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; 270 ML Ladder and SH Hook and Wire. 2) Wire -Bond; Series 800 Ladder Level - Eye, Seismic Hook and Wire. 2. Dovetail Slots and Seismic Anchors: a. 20 -gauge steel anchor slots with mating. b. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M, 16 -gauge steel anchor tie. Tie length as required by 1 -1/4 -inch minimum width, swagged to engage 9 -gauge horizontal wire. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; 305 Slot and 303-SV Anchor with Wire. 2) Wire -Bond; 1304 Slot and 2222 Anchor with Wire. 3. Adjustable Anchor Ties: a. 16 -gauge stainless steel plate with slot. b. Anchor Tie: 12 -gauge stainless steel pintle plate capable of being inserted into slotted plate. MASONRY VENEER PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 04 21 13.13-6 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF c. Engage or enclose No. 9 -gauge Type stainless steel wire joint reinforcing with anchor tie. d. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; HB 213S with HB 213. 2) Wire -Bond; DT -721 Seismic. 2.09 CAVITY WEEPS A. Weep Vents: 1. Honeycomb, polypropylene; 3/8 inch by size of head joint; match color of mortar. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Hohmann and Barnard; QV Quadro Vent. b. Wire -Bond; 3601 Cell Vent. 2.10 MORTAR BLOCK A. HDPE mesh specifically designed to trap or block mortar droppings in masonry cavity walls allowing free passage of trapped water to weep holes below; 10 inches high by thickness of wall cavity. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Hohmann and Barnard; Mortar Trap. 2. Heckmann Building Products; Weep-Thru Mortar Deflector. 2.11 MASONRY ACCESSORIES AND ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Reglets for Masonry: 1. Stainless steel, 0.015 inch. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Fry Reglet Corp.; Fry Springlok Type MA and Springlok Flashing. b. Cheney Flashing Co.; Type B reglet and Snap Lock Cap Flashing. B. Felt: ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15) plain, unperforated asphalt saturated felt. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MASONRY VENEER FEBRUARY 24, 2026 04 21 13.13-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of masonry veneer. B. Examine rough -in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 AIR AND WATER BARRIER A. Cleaning of Substrate: 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive membrane following membrane manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Treat as necessary to remove laitance, loose material on surface, grease, oil, and other contaminants that will affect bond of the membrane. 3. Vacuum clean or clear water wash surfaces and allow to dry completely. B. Fill voids and control joints with sealant and overcoat with nonflow membrane material. Fill or coat visible shrinkage cracks to minimum 2 inches either side of crack. C. Follow manufacturer's directions for application including limitations because of weather, temperature, and concrete cure time. Apply by brush or spray following manufacturer's recommended coverage and coating rates. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Provide or cut special shapes for corners, jambs, lintels, and other areas as shown or as required. Match color and texture of standard units. B. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. C. Anchoring: 1. Anchor all veneer types to structural backing wall or to structural columns as shown on Drawings and in conformance to the International Building Code. 2. Maintain a space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry wall and concrete members. MASONRY VENEER PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 04 21 13.13 - 8 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Keep space free of mortar or other rigid material to permit differential movement between backing wall and masonry. 4. Attach veneer to backing with anchor ties. a. Use one anchor tie for each 1.77 square feet of wall area. b. Maximum Space between Adjacent Ties: 1) Vertically: 16 inches. 2) Horizontally: 24 inches. c. Embed ties at least 2 inches in horizontal joint of veneer. d. Provide additional ties at openings: 1) Maximum Spacing Around Perimeter: 24 inches. 2) Install within 12 inches of opening. 3.04 MASONRY VENEER WALL CONSTRUCTION —GENERAL A. Mortar Beds: Lay masonry with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent units in -place. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting in -place. Where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started to set, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar. B. Horizontal and Vertical Face Joints: 1. Nominal Thickness: 3/8 inch. 2. Construct uniform joints. 3. Shove vertical joints tight. 4. Tool joints concave in exposed surfaces when thumbprint hard using jointing tool. 5. Concave tool exterior joints below grade. 6. Flush cut all joints not tooled. 7. Fill horizontal joints between top of masonry partition and underside of concrete beams with mortar. C. Tuck -Point Joints: 1. Rake mortar joints to a depth of 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch. 2. Saturate exposed joints with clean water. 3. Fill joints solidly with pointing mortar. 4. Tool joints to match existing. D. Movement Joints: Keep clean of all mortar and debris. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MASONRY VENEER 04 21 13.13-9 MARY'S CREEK WRY E. Masonry Control Joints: 1. Provide continuous vertical control joints in masonry as shown on Drawings. 2. Omit mortar from vertical joints. Place control joint material as wall is built. F. Through -Wall Flashing: 1. Place flashing on bed of mortar. 2. Lap cross joints of through -wall flashing at least 2 inches. 3. Extend flashing beyond exterior face of wall and provide drip edge. 4. Cover flashing with mortar. G. Mortar Block: Install continuously in cavity space on flashing against inside face of brick veneer, zig-zag side up. No adhesive or fasteners required. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. H. Flashing: Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections that might puncture, gouge, or otherwise damage flashing material. I. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes in head joints in first course immediately above all flashing leaving head joint free and clean of mortar. 1. Maximum Spacing: 24 inches OC. 2. Keep weep holes and area above flashing free of mortar droppings. J. Weep Vents: Provide weep vents in head joints in first course immediately above all flashing leaving head joint free and clean of mortar. 1. Maximum Spacing: 24 inches OC. 2. Keep weep holes and area above flashing free of mortar droppings. K. Sealant Joints: Retain sealant joints around outside perimeters of exterior doors, window frames, and other wall openings: a. Uniform Depth: 3/4 inch. b. Uniform Width: 1/4 inch. L. Pointing: Cut out defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set at end of each day's Work and after final pointing. MASONRY VENEER PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 04 21 13.13 - 10 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.05 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT VENEER INSTALLATION A. General: Do not install cracked, broken, or chipped masonry units exceeding ASTM C216 allowances. Thoroughly wet masonry just before laying except in freezing weather where units are laid dry. Prewetting may also be omitted if the units at the time of laying has a rate of absorption not exceeding 0.025 ounce of water per square inch of surface after being placed in 1/8 inch of water for 1 minute. 1. Coordinate installation with backup walls, through wall flashing, and other construction. Use masonry saws to cut and fit exposed units. Lay units plumb, true to line, with level courses accurately spaced, and do not furrow bed joints. 2. Finish horizontal run by racking back in each course; toothing not permitted. Adjust all units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. If units are displaced after mortar has stiffened, remove, clean joints and units of mortar, and relay with fresh mortar. 3. Bond unexposed units in wythe by lapping a minimum of 2 inches. Adjust ledger support members to keep Work level at proper elevation. Provide pressure relieving joints by placing a continuous compressible pad under ledger support members. 4. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry: a. Remove loose concrete masonry unit and mortar. b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry. B. Pattern: Lay masonry in running bond. 3.06 CLEANING A. Cleaning Agents: I . Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. B. Follow masonry and mortar color manufacturer's recommendations for use of cleaning agents. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MASONRY VENEER FEBRUARY 24, 2026 04 21 13.13 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Application: 1. Thoroughly wet surface of masonry on which no efflorescence appears before using cleaning agent. 2. Scrub with acceptable cleaning agent. 3. Immediately rinse with clean water. 4. Work small sections at a time. 5. Work from top to bottom. 6. Protect sash, metal lintels, and other materials, which may corrode when masonry is cleaned with acid solution. 7. Remove efflorescence in accordance with masonry manufacturer's recommendations. D. Leave Work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings, and broken masonry. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY CONTROL A. At least once a week while installation of masonry veneer is in progress, take mortar Samples for testing. Continue on that basis for duration of installation of masonry veneer at discretion of Engineer. B. Take Samples in accordance with ASTM C270. C. Owner -Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in Statement of Special Inspections Plan in Supplement located at end of Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. D. Contractor -Furnished Quality Control: Inspect and test as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Wall Covering: During erection, cover top of wall with strong waterproof membrane at end of each day or shutdown and as follows: 1. Cover partially completed walls when Work is not in progress. 2. Extend cover minimum of 24 inches down both sides. 3. Hold cover securely in -place. MASONRY VENEER PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 04 21 13.13 - 12 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Protect sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar drippings or other damage during construction. Remove misplaced mortar immediately. Protect face materials against staining. Protect the door jambs and corners from damage during construction. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MASONRY VENEER FEBRUARY 24, 2026 04 21 13.13 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A82/A82M, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. d. C90, Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. e. C140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. f. C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. g. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. h. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. i. C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. j. C404, Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. k. C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. 1. C618 12 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. m. C744, Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. n. C979, Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. o. C989, Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast - Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. p. C1314, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. q. C1403, Standard Test Method for Rate of Water Absorption of Masonry Mortars. r. C 1611/Cl 611 M, Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of Self - Consolidating Concrete. s. E514/E514M, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY MARCH 19, 2026 04 22 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 2. The Masonry Society (TMS): a. TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5; Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures and Companion Commentaries. (MSJC Code and Commentary). b. TMS 602/ACI530.1/ASCE6; Specification for Masonry Structures. c. 602/American Concrete Institute ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, Specification for Masonry Structures and Companion Commentaries. (Masonry Standards Joint Committee Specifications and Commentary). 3. International Code Council (ICC): a. International Building Code (IBC). b. ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) Reports. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Data Sheets: a. Horizontal joint reinforcement. b. Preformed control joint materials. c. Water repellant masonry sealer. d. Grout mix design. e. Mortar mix design. f. Grout sand gradation in accordance with ASTM C404. 3. Samples: a. Sample: 1) Two of each type of masonry unit to be used on Project from the proposed manufacturer. 2) Two of each, textured, glazed, and sound absorbing units for selection of color and texture for each batch of manufacturer. b. Mortar colors for color selection. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Method and Location of Placing Grout: High lift or low lift. 2. Mix design test results. 3. Certifications: a. Units comply with ASTM C55 and ASTM C90. b. Grout test results conform to ASTM C1019. c. Grout aggregates conform to requirements of ASTM C33, including nonreactivity. d. Mortar sand conform to requirements of ASTM C 144. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 042200-2 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Test results of Project samples from masonry unit manufacturer stating that units comply with ASTM C90. Documentation of material testing shall be one less than 1 year old. 5. Test results of proposed grout mix deign stating that units comply with ASTM C1019. Documentation of material testing shall be 1 year old or less. 6. Test reports stating aggregates for mortar meet requirements of ASTM C 144. 7. Test reports or letter of certification stating aggregates for grout meet requirements of ASTM C404. 8. Method and materials for removal of efflorescence. 9. Field test results to qualify materials. a. Grout tests in accordance with ASTM C1019. b. Prism tests per ASTM C1314. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: 1. Required Meeting Attendees: a. Masonry subcontractor, including masonry foreman. b. Ready -mix producer. c. Admixture representative. d. Testing and sampling personnel. e. Design Structural Engineer. 2. Schedule and conduct prior to start of masonry construction. 3. Notify Engineer of location and time. 4. Agenda shall include: a. High lift and low lift procedures. b. Mortar, grout, unit, and reinforcing submittals. c. Types and locations of rebar splices. d. Joint tooling. e. Admixture types, dosage, performance, and redosing at Site. f. Mix designs and test of mix. g. Placement methods, techniques, equipment, consolidation, and reconsolidation. h. Protection procedures for environmental conditions. i. Other specified requirements requiring coordination. 5. Submit conference minutes as specified in Section 01 3119, Project Meetings. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Keep units and mortar/grout cementitious ingredients, including lime, dry. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY MARCH 19, 2026 04 22 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY ASSEMBLAGE A. Minimum 28 -Day Specified Compressive Strength (f m) of Masonry: 2,000 psi. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. ASTM C90: Normal weight. 1. Net Area Compressive Strength: 4,950 psi minimum, in accordance with TMS 602, Table 2. 1) Manufacturers and Products: a) W.R. Grace & Co.; Dry -Block Block Admixture. b) BASF Construction Chemicals; Rheopel Plus. 2. Nominal Size: 16 inches long by 8 inches high by thickness shown on Drawings. 3. Color of Units: Natural. 4. Surface Texture on Exposed Surfaces: Smooth. 5. Surface Texture: Smooth on interior, concealed exterior, and surface 1 foot below finished grade. B. General Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) Requirements: 1. Furnish or cut special shapes for corners, jambs, lintels, and other areas shown or required. 2. Special units shall match color and texture of standard units. 3. Where units are placed so end of unit is exposed, such as at a corner or intersection, exposed end of that block shall have surface to match color and texture of sides of other units. 4. Furnish sound, dry, clean units free of cracks, prior to placing in structure. 5. Vertical Cells to be Grouted: Capable of alignment sufficient to maintain clear, unobstructed continuous vertical cell dimensions in accordance with TMS 602, Table 7. 6. Masonry unit size and shape shall allow for all placement patterns. Use vertical grout dams to prevent materials, such as grout, from escaping from cell being filled to adjacent cells where material is not intended to be placed. C. Sound Absorbing Concrete Masonry Units (SCMU): 1. Meet same requirements as structural concrete masonry units. 2. Vertical slot in one face of each cavity. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 042200-4 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Noncombustible fibrous filler in cavities. Minimum NRC rating of 0.65. 4. Manufacturer: Acme Brick Company. a. Product designation: Soundcell ACMU, poly-ecapsulated noise attenuating, incombustible, fibrous filler with grout shields. 2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement -Lime Mortar: 1. ASTM C270. 2. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II portland cement. 3. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S hydrated. 4. Aggregates: a. Non -reactive in accordance with ASTM C33, Appendix X1. b. Mortar: ASTM C144, sand. B. Water: Fresh, clean, and potable. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1. W.R. Grace; DRY -BLOCK. 2. Harris Specialty Chemicals. 3. Axim Italcementi Group; Intrapel. 4. BASF Chemical Co.; Rheopel Admixture. D. Mortar Color Admixture: 1. Meet the requirements of ASTM C979. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Davis Colors, Los Angeles, CA; True Tone Mortar Color. 3. Color shall be selected by Architect. 2.04 GROUT MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I portland cement. B. Slag Cement: In accordance with ASTM C989, Grade 100 or Grade 120. C. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S hydrated. D. Aggregates: 1. ASTM C404, fine and coarse. 2. Non -reactive in accordance with ASTM C33, Appendix Xl. E. Water: Fresh, clean, and potable. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY MARCH 19, 2026 04 22 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcement: Clean and free from loose rust, scale, and coatings that reduce bond. B. Deformed Bars: As specified in Section 03 21 00, Steel Reinforcement. C. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: 1. Two parallel, ASTM A82/A82M, No. 9 wires, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M, weld connected to No. 9 perpendicular or diagonal cross wire at 16 inches, maximum, center. 2. Furnish special manufactured corner and wall intersection pieces. 3. Manufacturer: Dayton Superior/Dur-O-Wal, Dayton, OH. 2.06 PREFORMED CONTROL JOINTS A. Solid rubber cross -shape extrusions as manufactured by: 1. Dayton Superior/Dur-O-WalDayton, OH; DA 2001 Control Joint Regular Rubber. 2. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc, Hauppauge, NY; #RS -Standard. 2.07 MORTAR MIXES A. In accordance with ASTM C270, Type S and MSJC Specifications. B. Mix Method: 1. Property Method: Minimum average mortar 28 -day compressive strength 1,800 psi. C. Mixing: Machine mix in approved mixers in accordance with ASTM C270. Time addition of approved admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Procedure used for adding it to mix shall provide good dispersion. D. Where colored masonry units are used, color mortar to match. Inert coloring pigments may be added, but shall not exceed 6 percent by weight of cement. 2.08 GROUT MIXES A. Compressive Strength Property: 1. Minimum 2,000 psi at 28 days. Grout strength shall not exceed two times the minimum specified strength. 2. Proportions: Conform to ASTM C476, Table 1. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 042200-6 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Mix Design: 1. Proportions: Design mix to meet property/strength requirements. 2. Slump: 8 -inch minimum, 11 -inch maximum. C. Mixing: 1. Do not use water reducers, air entrainment, plasticizing, high -range water reducers, or other non -specified admixtures in grout mixes. 2. Transit -Mixed Grout: Meet requirements of ASTM C476. 3. For high lift grouting, add approved grout expansion admixture in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Fluid consistency suitable for placing without segregation with a slump of 8 inches to 11 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Meet requirements of 2021 IBC, Chapter 21 and The Masonry Society (TMS) 602/American Concrete Institute (ACI)530.1/ASCE 6, Specification for Masonry Structures and Companion Commentaries (MSJC), Part 3, Execution, except as modified in this section. B. Moisture Protection: 1. Keep units dry while stored on Site. 2. Do not wet units prior to laying. C. Provide measures to prevent moisture from entering incomplete walls and open cells. D. Cold Weather: Meet requirements of MSJC Specification Section "Cold Weather Construction". E. Hot Weather: Meet requirements of MSJC Specification Section "Hot Weather Construction". F. After construction during cold weather, maintain newly constructed masonry temperature above 32 degrees F for a minimum of 24 hours using MSJC or other approved cold weather methods. G. After construction and during hot weather, fog spray newly constructed masonry in accordance with MSJC hot weather construction requirements. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY MARCH 19,2026 042200-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete Foundations: Meet tolerance requirements of ACI 117 prior to starting any masonry work. B. Prepare surface contact area of foundation concrete for initial mortar placement by removing laitance, loose aggregate, and other materials, and anything that would prevent mortar from bonding to foundation. C. Patch or grind out -of -tolerance foundation surfaces to receive mortar prior to starting masonry work. D. Clean reinforcement dowels and projecting embeds by removing laitance, spillage, or items that will adversely affect grout bond. E. Prevent surface damage to foundation concrete that will be exposed to view outside of contact area. 3.03 LAYING MASONRY UNITS A. General: 1. Finish Tolerances (Measured on Interior Surfaces): Meet requirements of "Site Tolerance" requirements of Part 3, Execution, of the MSJC Specifications. 2. Place units with chipped edges or corners such that chipped area is not exposed to view. B. Wall Units: 1. General: a. If necessary to move a unit after once set in -place, remove from wall, clean, and set in fresh mortar. b. Toothing of masonry units is not permitted. 2. Running Bond: a. Unless otherwise shown, lay up walls in straight, level, and uniform courses using a running bond pattern. b. Place units for continuous vertical cells and mortar joints to prevent materials, such as grout, from escaping from cell being filled to adjacent cells where material is not intended to be placed. c. Corners: Lay standard masonry bond for overlapping units and grout solid. d. Intersecting Walls: Half unit appearance shall not extend and be visible on exterior side of intersecting wall. Provide hooked corner bars in bond beam units and joint reinforcement as shown on Drawings. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 042200-8 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Stack Bond: Provide only where specifically indicated on Drawings. Lay up in straight, uniform courses with vertical joints aligned and plumb. 4. Glazed Concrete Masonry Units: a. Single -faced units may be installed through wall where walls or partitions are shown to have glazed masonry unit finish on one side only. b. Use facing for dimensional and plane reference in installation. c. Where glazed masonry unit finish is indicated on both sides of a wall or partition, install coved bases of two -unit construction or two-faced units through the wall. d. Install coved bases flush with finished surfaces above, except as otherwise specified. 5. Special Shapes: a. Provide and place such special units as corner block, doorjamb block, lintel block fillers, and similar blocks as may be required. b. Use required shapes and sizes to work to corners and openings, maintaining proper bond throughout wall. 3.04 BUILT-IN ITEMS A. Position door frames, windows, vents, louvers, and other items to be built in wall, and construct wall around them. B. Install masonry anchors to secure items to wall. C. Fill spaces around items with grout except use mortar at mortar joints. D. Do not place electrical, instrumentation, or water conduits in a cell containing parallel reinforcement, unless approved in writing by Engineer. Additionally, pipes, sleeves, and conduits shall meet requirements of TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (MSJC Code) and MSJC specification construction requirements. 3.05 MORTAR JOINTS A. General: 1. Meet masonry erection requirements of MSJC, Part 3, Execution, 3.3B. 2. As units are laid, remove excess mortar from grout space of cells to be filled. Final grout space, including any remaining mortar projections, shall be as required by MSJC Table "Grout Space Requirements". 3. Place mortar before initial setting of cement takes place. Retemper only as required for it to remain plastic. Retempering of colored mortar is not allowed. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY MARCH 19, 2026 04 22 00 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Exposed Joints: 1. Tool joints exposed to view after final construction, unless otherwise noted or shown. 2. Cut joints flush and as mortar takes its initial set; tool to provide a concave joint. 3. Perform tooling with tool that compacts mortar, pressing excess mortar out. 4. Perform tooling when mortar is partially set, but still sufficiently plastic to bond rather than dragging it out. 5. Rake out joints that are not tight at time of tooling, point, and then tool. 6. Rake and tool joints at split -face surfaces, interior and exterior. C. Concealed Joints: Strike flush with no further treatment required. 3.06 CONTROL JOINTS A. Preformed Control Joints: 1. Omit mortar from vertical joints. 2. Place in units fabricated to receive rubber control joint material as wall is built. 3. After wall is grouted, cured, and cleaned, install backing rod and sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 4. Place and tool sealant to match depth of typical joint. 3.07 REINFORCING A. Foundation Dowels: 1. Locate first foundation dowel at end of wall in center of first cell; typically 4 inches from end of wall. 2. Locate at each side of control joints and openings and below beam and joist seats, and then locate at maximum required spacing between these bars. 3. Size, number, and location of foundation dowels shall match all typical and additional vertical wall reinforcing, unless otherwise noted. 4. When foundation dowel does not line up with vertical core, do not slope more than 1 horizontal to 6 vertical to bring it into alignment. B. Vertical Reinforcing: 1. Use deformed bars. 2. Hold in position near ends of bars by wire ties to dowels or by reinforcing positioners. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 0422 00 - 10 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. For high lift grouting, hold in position at maximum intervals of 160 bar diameters by reinforcing positioners. 4. Lap reinforcing bars as shown or approved. 5. Wire tie splices together. 6. Minimum Bar Clearance: 1/2 -inch from masonry for coarse grout, 1/4 -inch from masonry for fine grout, from formed surfaces, and from parallel bars in same grout space. C. Horizontal Reinforcing: 1. Use deformed bars. 2. Lay on webs of bond beam units and place as wall is built. Increase web depth to ensure 1/2 -inch cover over top of rebar. 3. Lap reinforcing bars where spliced and wire tie together. 4. Minimum Bar Clearance: 1/2 inch from masonry for coarse grout 1/4 inch from masonry for fine grout, from formed surfaces, and from parallel bars in same grout space. 5. Terminate reinforcing bars 2 inches clear from control joints except horizontal bars at roof and floor courses shall be continuous through joints. D. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: 1. Use where indicated on Drawings. 2. Use manufactured corner and other wall intersection pieces. 3.08 MORTAR PRODUCTION A. Mix bulk materials in accordance with MSJC Specification. B. Mix prebagged materials with water to produce a workable consistency. C. Remix or retemper to maintain workability. Discard mortar that has begun to stiffen or is not used within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing. 3.09 GROUT PLACEMENT A. Do not mix, convey, or place with equipment constructed of aluminum. B. Secure vertical and horizontal reinforcement, ties, bolts, anchors, and other required embedments in place; inspect and verify before placing grout. C. Grout beams over openings in one continuous operation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY MARCH 19, 2026 042200-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY D. Maintain vertical alignment in accordance with ACT 530.1, Table 7: 1. Place grout within 1-1/2 hours of addition of water to mix. 2. Use reinforcing positioners to secure vertical reinforcement. E. Grouting Requirements: 1. Solid grout all walls. 2. For multi-wythe construction, space vertical grout barriers maximum 30 feet horizontally, extending full height of wall. a. Slump: 8 inches to 11 inches. b. Do not start grouting until wall mortar has cured for 24 hours, minimum. 3. Fully embed horizontal steel with grout in an uninterrupted pour. 4. Do not construct wall more than one course above top of grout pour prior to placing grout. 5. Partial Grouting Requirements: a. Fill cells containing reinforcing steel, anchor bolts, and other embedded items as shown with grout. b. Construct cells to be filled to confine grout within cell. c. Cover tops of unfilled vertical cells under a bond beam with metal lath to confine grout fill to bond beam section. d. Form horizontal construction joints between pours by stopping grout pour 1-1/2 inches below a mortar joint, except at a bond beam; stop pour 1/2 inch below top of masonry unit. F. Vibration: 1. Use internal "pencil" type, low energy vibrator to thoroughly consolidate grout and reduce amount of air voids. Do not use concrete vibrators. 2. After initial water loss and settlement has occurred, but before it has taken any set, reconsolidate grout. 3. Waiting period for reconsolidation will vary depending upon weather conditions and block absorption rates, but under "normal" weather conditions with average masonry units the waiting period should be between 30 minutes and 60 minutes. G. Cleanouts: 1. Construct in accordance with MSJC specification. 2. Provide for grout pours heights over 5 feet 4 inches. 3. Provide of sufficient size to permit cleaning of cell, positioning of reinforcing, and inspection at bottom of every vertical cell containing reinforcing and maximum of 32 inches on center. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 0422 00 - 12 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Location: Concealed from view after final construction, unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 5. After wall has been inspected and approved and prior to grouting, cap cleanouts in a manner that will seal them from grout leakage and provide a flush finish. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner -Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in the Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. B. Contractor -Furnished Quality Control: Inspection and testing as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. C. Masonry shall be tested by testing agency retained by Owner. D. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of masonry prisms, mortar samples, and grout samples, as applicable, onsite for first 24 hours, and for additional time as may be required before transporting to test lab. E. Masonry Testing: 1. Masonry strength shall be determined using unit strength method as shown. 2. Masonry test prisms, when required or desired, shall be constructed onsite with same materials and workmanship to be used for Project and in accordance with ASTM C1314 Method and frequency of prism testing shall be as shown on the Special Inspection and Testing Plan. 3. Unit Strength Method: a. Method and frequency for mortar, grout, and masonry unit sampling and testing shall be as shown. b. Provide masonry units for test samples required. F. Corrective Action: 1. If compressive strength tests made prior to construction of permanent structure fail to meet Specifications, adjustments shall be made to mix designs for mortar, or grout, or both, as needed to produce specified strength. 2. If strength tests performed on materials representative of in -place construction fail to meet Specifications, prisms or cores shall be cut from constructed walls in sufficient locations to adequately determine strength in accordance with TMS 402 / 602. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY MARCH 19, 2026 04 22 00 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.11 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of grouting, clean masonry surfaces of excess mortar, grout spillage, scum, stains, dirt, and other foreign substances using clean water and fiber brushes. B. Clean walls not requiring painting or sealing so there are no visible stains. 3.12 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Do not allow grout and mortar stains to dry on face of exposed masonry. B. Protect tops of walls at all times. Cover tops of walls with waterproof paper when rain or snow is imminent and when the Work is discontinued. C. Adequately brace walls until walls and roof are completed. D. Provide sufficient bracing to protect walls against damage from elements, including wind and snow. E. Protect masonry against freezing for minimum 72 hours after being laid. F. Protect masonry from damage until final acceptance of the Work. Damaged units will not be accepted. END OF SECTION CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 0422 00 - 14 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 05 0519 POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. b. 355.2, Qualification of Post -Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete. c. 355.4, Qualification of Post -Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete. 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Stainless Steel Type 316. 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. c. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. d. E488/E488M, Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements. e. F436/F436M, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. f. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. g. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. h. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 5. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Uniform ES (IAPMO-UES): Evaluation Reports for Concrete and Masonry Anchors. 6. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES): a. Evaluation Reports for Concrete and Masonry Anchors. b. AC 193, Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. c. AC308, Acceptance Criteria for Post -Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. Evaluation Reports for Concrete and Masonry Anchors. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS MARCH 23, 2026 05 05 19- 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 7. Specialty Steel Industry of North America (SSINA): a. Specifications for Stainless Steel. b. Design Guidelines for the Selection and Use of Stainless Steel. c. Stainless Steel Fabrication. d. Stainless Steel Fasteners. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Corrosive Area: Containment area or area exposed to delivery, storage, transfer, or use of chemicals. B. Exterior Area: Location not protected from weather by a building or other enclosed structure to include buried roof structures. C. Interior Dry Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is not subject to liquid spills or wash down, and where wall or roof slab is not common to a water -holding or earth -retaining structure. D. Interior Wet Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is sloped to floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or wash down, or where wall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water -holding or earth -retaining structure. E. Submerged: Location at or below top of wall of open water -holding structure, such as a basin or channel, or wall, ceiling, or floor surface inside a covered water -holding structure, or exterior belowgrade wall or roof surface of water - holding structure, open or covered. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Shop Drawings: Specific instructions for concrete anchor installation, including drilled hole size and depth, preparation, placement, procedures, and instructions for safe handling of anchoring systems. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Concrete and Masonry Anchors: a. Manufacturer's product description and installation instructions. b. Current ICC-ES or IAPMO-UES Report for each type of post -installed anchor to be used. c. Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification. POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 05 19- 2 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Passivation method for stainless steel members. 3. Hot -Dip Galvanizing: Certificate of Compliance signed by galvanizer, with description of material processed and ASTM standard used for coating. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers of adhesive anchors horizontally or upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads shall be certified by an applicable certification program. Certification shall include written and performance tests in accordance with the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Installer Certification Program or equivalent. 2. Galvanized Coating Applicator: Company specializing in hot -dip galvanizing after fabrication and following procedures of Quality Assurance Manual of the American Galvanizers Association. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package stainless steel items in a manner to provide protection from carbon impregnation. B. Protect hot -dip galvanized finishes from damage because of metal banding and rough handling. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated, meet the following requirements: Item ASTM Reference Stainless Steel: Threaded Rods F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW Nuts* F594, AISI Type 316, Condition CW Carbon Steel: Threaded Rods F1554, Grade 36 A193/A193M, Grade B7 Flat and Beveled Washers Hardened F436/F436M Nuts* A 194/A 194M, Grade 2H PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS 05 05 19- 3 MARY'S CREEK WRF Item ASTM Reference Galvanized Steel: All A153/A153M *Nuts of other grades and styles having specified proof load stresses greater than specified grade and style are also suitable. Nuts must have specified proof load stresses equal to or greater than minimum tensile strength of specified threaded rod. 2.02 B. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: Use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, and zinc -plated steel material types as indicated in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. POST -INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS A. General: 1. AISI Type 316 stainless, or hot -dip galvanized, as shown in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. 2. Post -installed anchor systems used in concrete shall be approved by ICC Evaluation Services Report or equivalent for use in cracked concrete and for short-term and long-term loads including wind and earthquake. 3. Mechanical Anchors: Comply with the requirements of ICC-ES AC 193 or ACI 355.2. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Comply with the requirements of ICC-ES AC308 or ACI 355.4. B. Torque -Controlled Expansion Anchors (Wedge Anchors): Manufacturers and Products: a. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; KWIK Bolt-TZ2 Expansion Anchor Safe Set System with hollow drill bit and vacuum and SI-AT-A22 tool with adaptive torque for applicable sizes (ESR-4266). b. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY; Power -Stud +SD1, +SD2, +SD4, or +SD6 Anchors (ESR-2502 and ESR-2818). c. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Strong -Bolt 2 Anchors (ESR- 1771 and ESR-3037). C. Undercut Anchors: Manufacturers and Products: a. USP Structural Connectors, Burnsville, MN; DUC Undercut Anchor (ESR-1970). b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HDA Undercut Anchor (ESR-1546). POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 05 19-4 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF c. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; TORQ-CUT Self -Undercutting Anchor (ESR-2705). d. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY; CCU+ Undercut Anchor (ESR-48 10). D. Self -Tapping Concrete Screw Anchors: 1. Do not use for equipment anchorage unless specifically shown on the Drawings. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY; Screw -Bolt+ (ESR-3889). b. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY; Hangermate+ Rod Hanger Screw Anchor (ESR-3889). c. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY; Snake+ Flush Mount Screw Anchor (ESR-2272). d. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Kwik HUS, KH-EZ, KH-EZ CRC, KH-EZ SS316, KH-EZ C, KH-EZ E, KH-EZ I, and KH-EZ P Screw Anchor Safe Set System with hollow drill bit and vacuum (ESR-3027). e. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Titen HD Screw Anchor (ESR-2713 and IAPMO UES-493). E. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Threaded Rod: a. Diameter as shown on the Drawings. b. Length as required to provide minimum depth of embedment indicated and thread projection required. c. Clean and free of grease, oil, or other deleterious material. 2. Adhesive: a. Two -component, insensitive to moisture, designed to be used in adverse freeze/thaw environments. b. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and anticipated environmental conditions. 3. Packaging and Storage: a. Disposable, self-contained system capable of dispensing both components in proper mixing ratio and fitting into a manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun. b. Store adhesive on pallets or shelving in a covered storage area. c. Package Markings: Include manufacturer's name, product name, batch number, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions. d. Dispose of When: 1) Shelf life has expired. 2) Stored other than in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS MARCH 23, 2026 05 05 19- 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT Doweling Anchor System, HIT-HY 200 V3 Safe Set System with HIT -Z ROD or HAS threaded rod (ESR-4868), HIT RE 500 V3 Safe Set System with HAS threaded rod (ESR-3814), or HIT -RE 500 V3 Safe Set System with Hilti Roughening Tool (HIT RT) with HAS threaded rod (ESR-3814) for diamond cored holes. b. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; SET -3G Epoxy Adhesive Anchors. (ESR-4057). c. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster NY; Pure 220+ Epoxy adhesive anchor system with Dust X+ System (ESR-5144). F. Adhesive Threaded Inserts: 1. Type 316 stainless steel, internally threaded inserts. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIS -RN Insert with HIT -RE 500-V3 or HIT-HY 200 adhesive. 2.03 POST -INSTALLED MASONRY ANCHORS A. General: AISI Type 316 stainless, or hot -dip galvanized, as shown in Fastener Schedule at end of section. B. Current ICC Evaluation Report indicating acceptance for anchors at structural applications in masonry. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT-HY 270 Safe Set System with Hilti hollow drill bit and vacuum (ESR-4143) for solid grouted masonry, HIT-HY 200 V3 Safe Set System with Hilti hollow drill bit and vacuum (ESR-4878) for solid grouted masonry, HIT-HY 270 Safe Set System with Hilti hollow drill bit and vacuum (ESR-4144) for unreinforced three-wythe brick. 2. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Strong -Bolt 2 (IAPMO ER 240) for grout filled CMU, Titen-HD (ESR-1056) for grout filled or hollow CMU, AT -XP (IAPMO ER -28 1) for grout filled CMU. 3. DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Brewster NY; Power -Stud+ SD1 (ESR-2966) for grout -filled masonry, Screw -Bolt+ (ESR-4042) for grout -filled masonry, AC 100+ Gold with Dust X+ System for unreinforced three- wythe brick (ESR-2966 2582). POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 05 19- 6 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS A. Begin installation only after concrete or masonry to receive anchors is a minimum of 21 days old or has attained design strength whichever requires a longer duration. B. Locate existing reinforcing with ground penetrating radar or other method approved by the Engineer prior to drilling. Coordinate with the Engineer to adjust anchor locations where installation would result in hitting reinforcing. C. Install in accordance with written manufacturer's instructions. D. Provide minimum embedment, edge distance, and spacing as indicated on the Drawings. E. Use only drill type, bit type, and diameter recommended by anchor manufacturer. Use rotary hammer drill unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Core drilling may only be used if specifically allowed by the Engineer. F. Clean hole of debris and dust per manufacturer's requirements. G. When unidentified embedded steel, rebar, or other obstruction is encountered in drill path, slant drill to clear obstruction. If drill must be slanted more than indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions to clear obstruction, notify the Engineer for direction on how to proceed. H. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer and adhesive manufacturer: a. Do not install adhesive anchors when temperature of concrete or masonry is below 40 degrees F or above 100 degrees F. b. Do not install prior to concrete attaining an age of 21 days. c. Remove any standing water from hole with oil -free compressed air. Inside surface of hole shall be dry. d. Do not disturb anchor during recommended curing time. e. Do not exceed maximum torque as specified in manufacturer's instructions. 2. For hollow -unit masonry, install screen tube in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Prestressed Concrete: Do not use drilled -in anchors in prestressed or post -tensioned concrete members without the Engineer's prior approval unless specifically shown on the Drawings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS 05 05 19- 7 MARY'S CREEK WRY 3.02 3.03 3.04 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner -Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in the Statement of Special Inspections Plan as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. B. Contractor -Furnished Quality Control: Inspection and testing as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Adhesive and Mechanical Anchors: Conduct Site training of installation personnel for proper installation, handling, and storage of adhesive anchor system. Notify the Engineer of time and place for sessions. FASTENER SCHEDULE A. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide fasteners as follows: Service Use and Location Product Remarks 1. Post -Installed Anchors for Metal Components to Cast -in -Place Concrete (such as, Ladders, Handrail Posts, Electrical Panels, Platforms, and Equipment) Interior Dry Areas Anchor material type to Verify product match material being acceptability and anchored (for example, manufacturer's stainless steel anchors to requirements if anchor anchor stainless steel installation will occur in equipment, galvanized an overhead application anchors to anchor galvanized equipment). Submerged, Exterior, Stainless steel adhesive Verify product Interior Wet, and anchors acceptability and Corrosive Areas manufacturer's requirements if anchor installation will occur in an overhead application POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 05 19- 8 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Service Use and Location Product Remarks 2. Anchors in Grout -Filled Concrete Masonry Units Interior Dry Areas Anchor material type to match material being anchored (for example, stainless steel anchors to anchor stainless steel equipment, galvanized anchors to anchor galvanized equipment). Submerged, Exterior, Stainless steel anchors Interior Wet, and Corrosive Areas 3. Anchors in Hollow Concrete Masonry Units Interior Dry Areas Anchor material type to Adhesive anchors shall match material being be installed with screen anchored (for example, tubes. stainless steel anchors to anchor stainless steel equipment, galvanized anchors to anchor galvanized equipment). Exterior, Interior Wet, Stainless steel anchors Adhesive anchors shall and Corrosive Areas be installed with screen tubes. 4. All Others All service uses and Stainless steel fasteners locations B. Antiseizing Lubricant: Use on all stainless steel threads. C. Do not use adhesive anchors to support fire -resistive construction or where ambient temperature will exceed 120 degrees F. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS MARCH 23, 2026 05 05 19- 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 05 05 23 WELDING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. BPVC SEC V, Nondestructive Examination. b. BPVC SEC IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 2. American Society of Nondestructive Testing (ASNT): SNT-TC-1A, Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): A370, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products. 4. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. b. A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and Definitions. c. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code —Steel. d. Dl. 8/D1.8M, Structural Welding Code —Seismic Supplement. e. D1.2/D1.2M, 1.2M, Structural Welding Code —Aluminum. f. D1.3/1.3M, Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel. g. Dl .4/D 1.4M, Structural Welding Code —Reinforcing Steel. h. D1.6/D1.6M, Structural Welding Code —Stainless Steel. i. QCI, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. CJP: Complete Joint Penetration. B. CWI: Certified Welding Inspector. 1. Contractor's Welding Inspector: Contractor's CWI acts for, and on behalf of, the Contractor for all inspection and quality matters within the scope of the Contract Documents. Contractor is required to provide a welding inspector to oversee welding operations and be responsible for visual inspection and necessary correction of all deficiencies in materials and workmanship required to meet referenced welding codes. This type of Quality Control Inspection is not classified as Special Inspection. 2. Verification Inspector: This independent inspection is the prerogative of the Owner, who may employ their own, independent CWI, or waive this supplementary, independent CWI inspection. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WELDING JULY 23, 2026 05 05 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. MT: Magnetic Particle Testing. D. NDE: Nondestructive Examination. E. NDT: Nondestructive Testing. F. PJP: Partial Joint Penetration. G. PQR: Procedure Qualification Record. H. PT: Liquid Penetrant Testing. I. Special Inspection: Nondestructive weld examination including MT, PT, UT, and RT. 1. Special Inspection personnel report to, and are retained by the Owner, except as noted below: a. Contractor and fabricator are required to complete nondestructive weld examinations for welded steel tanks, welded steel pipe, and process piping. 2. See additional requirements in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. J. RT: Radiographic Testing. K. UT: Ultrasonic Testing. L. VT: Visual Inspection/Testing. M. WPQ: Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualification Record. N. WPS: Welding Procedure Specification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Shop and field WPSs and PQRs. b. NDT procedure specifications prepared in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC V. c. Welding Data (Shop and Field): Submit welding data together with Shop Drawings as a complete package. 1) Show on Shop Drawings, or on a weld map, complete information regarding base metal ASTM specifications, and location, type, size, and length of welds. WELDING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 050523-2 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2) Identify WPS to be used, and NDE requirements in tail of welding symbol. 3) Clearly distinguish between shop and field welds. 4) Indicate, by welding symbols or sketches, details of welded joints and preparation of base metal. Provide complete joint welding details showing bevels, groove angles, and root openings for welds. 5) Welding and NDE Symbols shall be in accordance with AWS A2.4. Welding terms and definitions shall comply with AWS A3.0. B. Informational Submittals: 1. WPQs. 2. CWI credentials. 3. Testing agency NDE inspector credentials. 4. CWI visual inspection (VT) reports. 5. Welding Documentation: Submit on forms provided in referenced welding codes. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. WPSs: In accordance with AWS DL1/D1.1M (Annex J Forms) for shop or field welding; or ASME BPVC SEC IX (Forms QW-482 and QW-483) for shop welding only. B. WPQs: In accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex J Forms); or ASME BPVC SEC IX (Form QW-484). C. CWI: Certified in accordance with AWS QC1 and having prior experience with specified welding codes. Alternate welding inspector qualifications require prior approval by Engineer. D. Testing Agency: Personnel performing tests shall be NDT Level II certified in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1 A. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Unless otherwise specified, Submittals required in this section shall be submitted and approved prior to commencement of welding operations. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WELDING JULY 23, 2026 05 05 23 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fabricator's CWI shall be present whenever shop welding is performed. CWI shall perform inspection at suitable intervals, prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding, and after welding. CWI shall perform inspections as required in AWS Dl .1 /D 1.1 M or referenced welding code and as follows: 1. Verify conformance of specified job materials and proper storage. 2. Monitor conformance with approved WPSs. 3. Monitor welder performance and conformance with approved WPQs. 4. Inspect weld joint fit -up and perform in -process inspections. 5. Provide 100 percent visual inspection of completed welds. 6. Coordinate with nondestructive testing personnel and review NDE results. 7. Maintain records and prepare reports documenting results of CWI VT and required NDE complies with the Work and referenced welding codes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Welding and Fabrication by Welding: Conform to governing welding codes referenced in attached Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table. B. Qualify welding procedure specifications for pressure piping for notch toughness by limiting heat input. Conduct Charpy testing of weld metal and heat -affected zone as part of the welding procedure qualification in accordance with ASTM A370, at a test temperature of 30 degrees F. The minimum average energy of the test coupons shall not be less than 25 foot-pounds. 3.02 NONDESTRUCTIVE WELD TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Quality Control Inspection: 1. All Welds: 100 percent VT by Contractor's CWI. 2. Acceptance Criteria: a. Structural Pipe and Tubing: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 10.24. b. All Other Structural Steel: AWS Dl .1/D 1.1 M, Paragraph 8.9, Visual Inspection, Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. c. Stud Connections: AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, Paragraph 9.8.1. WELDING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 050523-4 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Nondestructive Testing Requirements: 1. NDT frequency shall be as specified below, as required by referenced fabrication or welding codes, or as specified in the attached table. In case there is a conflict, the higher frequency level of NDT shall apply. a. Nontubular Connections: 1) CJP Butt Joint Groove Welds: 10 percent random RT. Use UT for CJP butt joint groove welds that cannot be readily radiographed. 2) All Other CJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random UT 3) Fillet Welds and PJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random PT or MT. b. Tubular Connections: 1) CJP butt joint groove welds made from one side without backing: 100 percent RT or UT in accordance with AWS Dl. l/D1.1M, Paragraph 10.25.2 requirements. 2) CJP Butt Joint Groove Welds made with back -gouging: 10 percent random RT. 3) CJP Butt Joint Groove Welds made with backing and other butt joint groove welds that cannot be readily radiographed: 10 percent random UT. 4) All Other CJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random UT. 5) Fillet Welds and PJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random PT or MT. 2. NDT Procedures and Acceptance Criteria: a. Nontubular Connections: 1) RT: Perform in accordance with AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, Clause 8, Part E. Acceptance criteria per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 8.12.1. 2) UT: Perform in accordance with AWS Dl. lID 1.1 M, Clause 8, Part F. Acceptance criteria per AWS Dl. 1/D1.1M, Paragraph 8.13.1. 3) PT and MT: a) Perform on fillet and PJP groove welds in accordance with AWS Dl. 1 /D 1.1 M, Paragraph 8.14.4 and Paragraph 8.14.5. b) Acceptance criteria per AWS Dl. l/D 1.1 M, Paragraph 8.9, Visual Inspection, Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. b. Tubular Connections: 1) RT: Comply with requirements for Nontubular Connections and additional requirements of AWS Dl. 1 /D 1.1 M, Clause 10, Paragraph 10.27, and Paragraph 10.28. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WELDING JULY 23, 2026 05 05 23 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2) UT: Comply with requirements for Nontubular Connections and additional requirements of AWS Dl .1 /D 1.1 M, Clause 10, Paragraph 10.26, and Paragraph 10.29. 3) PT and MT: a) Perform on fillet and PJP groove welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D 1.1 M, Paragraph 8.14.4 and Paragraph 8.14.5. b) Acceptance criteria per AWS D1.1/D 1.1 M, Paragraph 10.24. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor's CWI shall be present whenever field welding is being done and shall perform inspection, at suitable intervals, prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding, and after welding. CWI shall perform inspections as required in AWS Dl .1 /D 1.1 M or referenced welding code and as follows: 1. Verify conformance of specified job materials and proper storage. 2. Monitor conformance with approved WPS. 3. Monitor welder performance and conformance with approved WPQs. 4. Inspect weld joint fit -up and perform in -process inspection. 5. Provide 100 percent visual inspection of all welds in accordance with Paragraph Quality Control Inspection. 6. Coordinate with nondestructive testing personnel and review test results. 7. Maintain records and prepare reports confirming results of inspection and testing comply with the Work. 3.04 WELD DEFECT REPAIR A. Repair and retest rejectable weld defects until sound weld metal have been deposited in accordance with appropriate welding codes. 3.05 SUPPLEMENT A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is a part of this specification. Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table. END OF SECTION WELDING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 050523-6 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Welding and Nondestructive Testing Submit Written NDT Governing Onsite Procedure Specification Welding Codes or Submit Submit CWI Specification Section Standards WPS WPQ Required? s NDT Requirements 03 21 00 AWS Dl.4/D1.4M, Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT and 100% Steel Structural Welding MT of all rebar Reinforcement Code —Reinforcing splices; also see Steel Section 03 21 00 03 40 00 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT; also see Precast Structural Welding Section 03 40 00 Concrete Code —Steel and AWS Dl.4/D1.4M, Structural Welding Code —Reinforcing Steel 05 12 00 AWS Dl.1/Dl.1M, Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT and 10% Structural Steel Structural Welding UT or RT of all Framing Code —Steel groove -and -butt joint welds; 10% MT of all fillet welds; also see Section 05 12 00 05 2119 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, [A: Yes] [A: Yes] Yes [A: Yes] 100% VT; also see Open Web Steel Structural Welding [B: No] [B: No] [B: No] Section 05 21 19 Joists Framing Code —Steel 05 31 00 AWS Dl.1/D1.IM, Yes Yes Yes [A: Yes] 100% VT; also see Steel Decking Structural Welding [B: No] Section 05 31 00 Code —Steel or AWS Dl.3/D1.3M, Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel 05 41 00 AWS Dl.1/Dl.1M, [A: Yes] [A: Yes] Yes [A: Yes] 100% VT; also see Structural Metal Structural Welding [B: No] [B: No] [B: No] Section 05 41 00 Stud Framing Code —Steel or AWS D1.3/1.3M, Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel 05 5000 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Yes Yes Yes [A: Yes] 100% VT; also see Metal Structural Welding [B: No] Section 05 50 00 Fabrications Code —Steel or AWS Dl.2/Dl.2M, Structural Welding Code —Aluminum or AWS Dl.6/Dl.6M, Structural Welding Code —Stainless Steel PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WELDING JULY 23, 2026 05 05 23 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Welding and Nondestructive Testing Submit Written NDT Governing Onsite Procedure Specification Welding Codes or Submit Submit CWI Specification Section Standards WPS WPQ Required? s NDT Requirements [A: 05 52 16 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, No No No No 100% VT; also see Aluminum Structural Welding Section [A: 05 52 16, Railings] Code —Steel or Aluminum Railings] [B: 05 52 19 AWS D1.2/D1.2M, [B: 05 52 19, Steel Steel Railings] Structural Welding Railings] Code —Aluminum 05 53 00 AWS Dl.1/Dl.1M, No No No No 100% VT; also see Metal Gratings Structural Welding Section 05 53 00 Code —Steel or AWS D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code —Aluminum 33 16 19 ASME BPV Code, Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT and Elevated Section IX or AWWA D100; also Potable -Water AWS D1.1/D1.1M, see Section 33 16 19 Storage Tanks Structural Welding Code —Steel 33 16 13.13 ASME BPV Code, Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT and Welded Steel Section IX or AWWA D100; also Tank AWS D1.1/D1.1M, see Structural Welding Section 33 16 13.13 Code —Steel 33 16 13.12 ASME BPV Code, Yes Yes Yes [A: Yes] 100% VT and Bolted Steel Section IX or [B: No] AWWA D103; also Storage Tank AWS D1.1/D1.1M, see Structural Welding Section 33 16 13.12 Code —Steel 31 4116 AWS Dl.1/Dl.1M, [A: Yes] [A: Yes] Yes [A: Yes] 100% VT; also see Sheet Piles Structural Welding [B: No] [B: No] [B: No] Section 31 41 16 Code —Steel 31 62 16 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT; also see Steel Piles Structural Welding Section 31 62 16 Code —Steel 33 Don, 0,m Welded ASME BPV Code, Section IX; and Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT; also see Pipe and AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 6 ittings Structural Welding 40 05 24, Steel Code —Steel Pipe Section 33 05 01.01 33 05 01.04 ASME BPV Code, Yes Yes Yes [A: Yes] 100% VT; also see Bar -Wrapped Section IX; and [B: No] Section 33 05 01.04 Concrete AWS D1.3/Dl.3M, Cylinder Pipe Structural Welding and Fittings Code — Sheet Steel WELDING 05 05 23 SUPPLEMENT -2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Welding and Nondestructive Testing Submit Written NDT Governing Onsite Procedure Specification Welding Codes or Submit Submit CWI Specification Section Standards WPS WPQ Required? s NDT Requirements 33 05 23.16 ASME BPV Code, Yes Yes [A: Yes] [A: Yes] 100% VT; also see Utility Pipe Section IX; and [B: No] [B: No] Section 33 05 23.16 Jacking AWS D1.1/D1.IM, Structural Welding Code —Steel 40 27 00 ASME BPV Code, Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT and 5% Process Section IX; and RT; also see Piping— ASME B31.3 Section 40 27 00 General Normal Fluid Service Category 44 44 57 ASME BPV Code, [A: Yes] [A: Yes] [A: Yes] [A: Yes] 100% VT; also see Parallel Plate Section IX; and [B: No] [B: No] [B: No] [B: No] Section 44 44 57 Settler System AWS Dl .611.6M, Structural Welding Code —Stainless Steel PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WELDING JULY 23, 2026 05 05 23 SUPPLEMENT - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Galvanizers Association (AGA): Quality Assurance Manual. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 207, Standard for Certification Programs. b. 303, Code of Standard Practices for Steel Buildings and Bridges. c. 325, Steel Construction Manual. d. 326, Detailing for Steel Construction. e. 341, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. f. 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. g. 420, Certification Standard for Shop Application of Complex Protective Coating Systems. 3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D 1.1/D 1.1M, Structural Welding Code —Steel. b. Dl. 8/D1.8M, Structural Welding Code —Seismic Supplement. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A6/A6M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. b. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. c. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded and Seamless. d. A123/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. e. A143/A143M, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot -Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. f. Al53/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. g. A384/A384M, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot -Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. h. A385/A385M, Standard Practice for Providing High -Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot -Dip). i. A500/A500M, Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. j. A563, Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200- 1 MARY'S CREEK WRY k. A572/A572M, Standard Specification for High -Strength Low Alloy Columbium -Vanadium Structural Steel. 1. A780/A780M, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings. m. A992/A992M, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. n. A1065/1065M, Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Electric Fusion (Arc) Welded High -Strength Low -Allow Structural Tubing in Shapes with 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point. o. A1085/A1085M, Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow Structural Sections (HSS). p. B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. q. D6386, Standard Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting. r. D7803, Standard Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Powder Coating. s. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. t. F959, Standard Specification for Compressible -Washer -Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. u. F 1136, Standard Specification for Zinc/Aluminum Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners. v. F3125, Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions. w. F3148, Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolt Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 144 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch Dimensions. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 6. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): Specification for Structural Joints using High -Strength Bolts. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Provide Shop Drawing details showing: a. Erection plans. b. Members, including piece numbers, sizes, grades, dimensions, cambers, and connection details. c. Anchor bolt layouts. d. Hardened washer details. Connection material specifications. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 051200-2 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF f. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts. g. Joint details for complete penetration welds. h. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 2. Product specifications, including primer and other coatings. 3. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical high strength bolted connections. 4. Locations of Class A, or higher, faying surfaces. 5. Weld access hole dimensions, surface profile, and finish requirements. 6. Location of demand critical shop welds. 7. Gusset plates drawn to scale when they are detailed to accommodate inelastic rotation. 8. Nondestructive testing (NDT) where performed by the fabricator. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Schedule for submittal of shop and erection drawings. 2. Name and address of manufacturer(s). 3. Mill Certificates of tests made in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M. 4. Manufacturers' testing procedures and standards. 5. Preparation and installation or application instructions, as appropriate. 6. Proposed method to resolve misalignment between anchor bolts and bolt holes in steel members. 7. High -Strength Bolts: a. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, that products meet specified chemical and mechanical requirements. b. Manufacturer's inspection test report results for production lot(s) furnished to include: 1) Tensile strength. 2) Yield strength. 3) Reduction of area. 4) Elongation and hardness. Certified Mill Test Reports for Bolts and Nuts: 1) Name and address of manufacturer. 2) Bolts correctly marked. 3) Marked bolts and nuts used in required mill tests and manufacturer's inspection tests. 8. Direct Tension Indicators (DTIs): Manufacturer's test report meeting requirements of ASTM F959. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF 9. Twist -Off -Type Tension -Control (TC) Bolts: Manufacturer's test report meeting requirements of ASTM F3125 Grade F1852 or ASTM F3125 Grade F2280. 10. Welding Procedures, Qualifications, and Inspection Reports: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 11. Hot -Dip Galvanizing: Certificate of compliance signed by galvanizer with description of material processed and ASTM standard used for coating. 12. AISC Quality Certification: AISC certificate showing name and address of certified firm, effective date, and category of certification; or, for erectors, documentation of similar project experience to include project name, location, date of completion, and name and phone number of owner's contact person. 13. Charpy V -notch test results. 14. Nondestructive Testing (NDT) report. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Welding qualifications as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Galvanized Coating Applicator: Company specializing in hot -dip galvanizing after fabrication and following procedures of AGA's Quality Assurance Manual. B. Certifications: 1. Mill identification marks, heat number, size of section, and length in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M. 2. AISC Quality Certification for Fabricator: A fabricator who participates in the AISC Certification program and is designated an AISC Building Fabricator. 3. AISC Quality Certification for Erector: An installer who participates in the AISC Certification program and is designated an AISC Certified Erector, or documented experience in erection of at least five similar structural steel facilities over past 10 years in lieu of AISC certification. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Load structural members in such a manner that they will be transported and unloaded without damage to coatings and without being excessively stressed, deformed, or otherwise damaged. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 051200-4 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Storage: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Store in a dry area and keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. a. Do not store materials in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials as directed. 2. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. a. Fasteners may be repackaged provided testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and sealing of containers. b. Clean and lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. c. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. C. Handle materials to avoid distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: 1. Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than the following: a. W -Shapes: 60 percent. b. Channels, Angles, S -Shapes: 60 percent. c. Plate and Bar:25 percent. d. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent. e. Steel Pipe: 25 percent. f. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent. B. Rolled Plates, Shapes except W -Shapes and Bars: ASTM A572/A572M Grade 50, unless indicated otherwise. C. W -Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-5 MARY'S CREEK WRY E. S -Shapes and M -Shapes: ASTM A572 Grade 50. F. Channels: ASTM A992/A992M. G. Angles: ASTM A572/A572M Grade 50. H. Round Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): ASTM A500/A500M, Grade C (Fy equals 46 ksi). I. Square and Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): ASTM A500/A500M, Grade C (Fy equals 50 ksi). J. For hot -dip galvanized steel that is exposed to view and does not receive paint, limit combined phosphorus and silicon content to 0.04 percent. For steels that require a minimum of 0.15 percent silicon, such as plates over 1.5 inches thick for ASTM A36/A36M and ASTM A572/A572M steels, limit maximum silicon content to 0.21 percent and phosphorous content to 0.03 percent. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Anchor Bolts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. B. Post -Installed Anchors: As specified in Section 05 05 19, Post -Installed Anchors. C. High -Strength Bolts: 1. ASTM F3125 Grade A325, Type 1, plain uncoated or hot -dip galvanized or Grade A490, bolt Type 1, plain uncoated. 2. Bolt Length and Thread Length: As required for connection type shown, with hardened washers as required. D. Direct Tension Indicators (DTIs) or Load Indicator Washers: 1. ASTM F959, coating type to match bolt finish. 2. Type A325 or Type A490, to match bolt grade. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. TurnaSure LLC, Langhorne, PA; DTIs. b. Applied Bolting Technology Products, Ludlow, VT; DTIs, regular or Squirter type. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 051200-6 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Twist -Off -Type Tension -Control (TC) Bolts: 1. High -strength, ASTM F3125 Grade F1852, bolt Type plain uncoated or mechanically galvanized. 2. Manufacturers: a. LeJeune Bolt Company, Burnsville, MN. b. Nucor Fastener, Saint Joe, IN. c. Haydon Bolts, Philadelphia, PA. d. Vermont Fasteners Manufacturing, Swanton, VT. F. Torque -and -Angle Fixed -Spline Structural Bolting Assembly: 1. ASTM F3148 Grad 144 bolt Type plain uncoated or, mechanically galvanized. 2. Manufacturers: LeJeune Bolt Company, Burnsville, MN. G. Nuts: ASTM A563, type to match bolt type and fmish. H. Hardened Steel Flat and Beveled Washers: ASTM F436, type to match bolt finish. I. Stud Shear Connectors: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 2.03 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Surface Preparation and Primer: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. B. Grout: As specified in Section 03 62 00, Grout. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate as shown and in accordance with AISC 360 and AISC 303. 2. Columns: Full-length members without splices, unless shown otherwise or approved by Engineer. 3. Mark and match mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete assembly, including bolting and welding of units, before start of finishing operations. 5. Fabricate to agree with field measurements. 6. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 7. Provide camber as indicated on Drawings. 8. Fillet re-entrant cuts and corners to radius of not less than 1/2 inch. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING MARCH23,2026 051200-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Connections: 1. Shop Connections: Weld or bolt as shown on Drawings. 2. Meet requirements of AISC 325 for bolted double -angle shear connections, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Meet OSHA requirements for one independent bolt at beams framing into column web connections. 4. Provide oversized holes for anchor bolts in column baseplate in accordance with AISC 325, unless indicated otherwise. C. Welded Construction: 1. As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Groove and Butt Joint Welds: Complete penetration, unless otherwise indicated. D. Preheating of Heavy Shapes and Plates: 1. For ASTM A6/A6M, steel shapes and plates thicker than 2 inches. 2. Minimum Preheat Temperature: a. Groove Weld Splices: 350 degrees F. b. Thermal Cutting of Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes: 150 degrees F. E. Interface with Other Work: 1. Holes: a. As necessary or as indicated for securing other Work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other Work through steel framing members shall be approved by Engineer. b. No flame -cut holes are permitted without prior approval of Engineer. 2. Weld threaded nuts to framing members, and other specialty items to receive other Work. F. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): Fabricate in accordance with AISC 303, Section 10. 2.05 FINISHES A. Shop Paint Primer: 1. Surface Preparation and painting as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 051200-8 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Do not shop prime the following surfaces, unless indicated otherwise: a. Within 2 inches of field -welded connections. b. Steel members to be completely encased in reinforced concrete or coated with cementitious fireproofing. 3. Apply shop primer to top flange surfaces of composite steel beams, unless indicated otherwise. 4. Shop primer for steel members to be coated with intumescent fireproofing shall be compatible with specified fireproofing. B. Galvanizing: 1. All steel members, fasteners, hardware, fabrications, framing, base plates, assemblies, and accessories shall be hot dip galvanized. 2. Fabricate steel to be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A143/A143M, ASTM A384/A384M, and ASTM A385/A385M. Avoid fabrication techniques that could cause distortion or embrittlement of steel. 3. Surfaces of hot -dip galvanized iron and steel that will receive an application of powder coating materials, shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM D7803. 4. Surfaces of hot -dip galvanized iron and steel that will be painted, shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM D6386. 5. Remove welding slag, splatter, burrs, grease, oil, paint, lacquer, and other deleterious material prior to delivery for galvanizing. 6. Remove, by blast cleaning or other methods, surface contaminants and coatings not removable by normal chemical cleaning process in galvanizing operation. 7. Hot -dip galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. 8. Hot -dip galvanize ASTM F3125 Grade A325 bolts, nuts, washers, and hardware components in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Oversize holes to allow for zinc alloy growth. Shop -assemble bolts, nuts, and washers with special lubricant and test in accordance with ASTM F3125 and ASTM A563. 9. Mechanically zinc coat ASTM F3125 Grade F1852 twist -of -type tension -control (TC) bolts, nuts, and washers in accordance with ASTM F3125 and ASTM B695, Class 50. 10. Coat ASTM F3125 Grade F2280 twist -off -type tension -control (TC) bolts, nuts, and washers in accordance with ASTM F1136. 11. Galvanize components of bolted assemblies separately before assembly. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-9 MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Slip Critical Bolted Connections: 1. Coated Faying Surfaces: Coat faying surfaces of slip critical bolted connections specified or shown with a paint primer with a Class A or Class B coating in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts and as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. Protect against overspray by use of masking. Remove inadvertent overspray from the faying surfaces. 2. Galvanized Faying Surfaces: Prepare as required for Class A faying surface. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Charpy V -Notch Test: Hot -rolled shapes with flanges exceeding 2 inches thick in accordance with the following: a. ASTM A6/A6M Supplementary Requirement S30. b. Minimum average value of 20 foot-pounds absorbed energy at 70 degrees F. 2. Built-up shapes with cross sections consisting of plates with a thickness exceeding 2 inches in accordance with the following: a. ASTM A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S5. b. Minimum average value of 20 foot-pounds absorbed energy at 70 degrees F. c. Impact test in accordance with ASTM A673/A673M, frequency P. B. Heavy Shapes and Plates: Thermally cut surfaces of beam copes and weld access holes shall be inspected and tested by an independent testing agency, retained by Owner. C. Welding: 1. Contractor's Certified Welding Inspector (CWI): Inspect and test fabrication welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Visually inspect fabrication welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria. 3. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform the inspection and testing of fabrication welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 4. Repair and retest defective welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 12 00 - 10 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Special inspection of fabrication process and shop welding will be provided by Owner as indicated on Drawings. E. Hot -Dip Galvanizing: 1. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner. 2. Visually inspect and test for thickness and adhesion of zinc coating for minimum of three test samples from each lot in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M. 3. Reject and retest nonconforming articles in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M. PART 3 3.01 EXECUTION ERECTION A. General: 1. Meet requirements of AISC 360 and AISC 303, with exceptions as specified. 2. Install Contractor -designed temporary construction bracing to provide necessary support until components are in place and construction is complete. 3. Provide additional field connection material as required by AISC 303. 4. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on Shop Drawings. B. Field Assembly: 1. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. 2. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations shown. 3. Align and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. 4. Level and plumb individual members of structure within tolerances shown in AISC 303. 5. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be completed and in service. 6. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for minor discrepancies in elevations and alignment. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-11 MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Setting Baseplates and Bearing Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. 2. Clean bottom surface of baseplates and bearing plates. 3. Set loose and attached baseplates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, leveling nuts, or other adjustable devices. Use leveling plates where indicated. 4. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to placing grout. Weld plate washer to baseplate where indicated. 5. Grout Under Baseplate: As specified in Section 03 62 00, Grout, prior to placing loads on structure. D. Anchor Bolts: 1. Coordinate installation of anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to in -place work. 2. Provide templates and other devices for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 3. Projection of anchor bolts beyond face of concrete and threaded length shall be adequate to allow for full engagement of threads of hold-down nuts, adjustment of leveling nuts, washer thicknesses, and construction tolerances, unless indicated otherwise. 4. Placement Tolerances: a. As required by AISC 303, unless indicated otherwise. b. Embedded anchor bolts shall not vary from dimensions shown on Dr, 1) 2) 3) E. Connections: wings by more than the following: Center -to -Center of Any Two Bolts Within an Anchor Group: 1/8 inch. Center -to -Center of Adjacent Anchor Bolt Groups: 1/4 inch. Variation from Perpendicular to Theoretical Bearing Surface: 1:50. High -Strength Bolted: a. Tighten in accordance with RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts. b. Pretension all bolts unless noted otherwise on Drawings. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 051200-12 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Hardened Washers: 1) Provide at locations required by Washer Requirements section of RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts, to include pretensioned and slip critical connections using slotted or oversized holes or F3125 Grade A490 bolts. 2) Use beveled style and extra thickness where required by RCSC Specification. 3) Use square or rectangular beveled washers at inner flange surfaces of American Standard beams and channels. 4) Do not substitute DTIs for hardened flat washers required at slotted and oversize holes. d. For snug -tightened connections (N, X), tighten to snug tight condition. Use hardened washer over slotted or oversize holes in outer plies. 2. Pretensioned Bolted: a. Use DTIs or twist -off -type tension -control (TC) bolts at slip critical (SC) and pretensioned bearing -type connections. b. DTIs: 1) Position within bolted assembly in accordance with ASTM F959. 2) Install bolts, with DTIs plus hardened washers as required, in holes of assembly and tighten until plies are in firm contact and fasteners are uniformly snug tight. c. Final tightening bolts begin at most rigid part of bolted connection and progress toward free edges until final twist -off -type tension - control (TC) bolts or until DTIs have been compressed to an average gap equal to or less than shown in ASTM F959, Table 2. 3. Welded: a. As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. b. Groove and Butt Joint Welds: Complete penetration, unless otherwise indicated. 3.02 MISFITS A. At Bolted Connections: 1. Immediately notify Engineer for approval of one of the following methods of correction: a. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts and use oversized bolts. b. Plug weld misaligned holes and redrill holes to admit standard size bolts. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING MARCH 23, 2026 05 12 00 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF c. Drill additional holes in connection, conforming to AISC for bolt spacing and end and edge distances, and add additional bolts. d. Reject member containing misfit, incorrect sized, or misaligned holes and fabricate new member to ensure proper fit. 2. Do not enlarge incorrectly sized or misaligned holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins. B. At Anchor Bolts: 1. Resolve misalignments between anchor bolts and bolt holes in steel members in accordance with approved Shop Drawing. 2. Do not flame cut to enlarge holes without prior approval of Engineer. C. Gas Cutting: 1. Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural framing. 2. Secondary members not under stress and concealed in finished structure may be corrected by gas cutting torches, if approved by Engineer. 3. Finish flame -cut sections equivalent to sheared and punched appearance. 3.03 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Clean shop primer from field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas immediately after erection. B. Remove and grind smooth tack welds, fit -up -lugs, and weld runoff tabs. C. Remove weld back-up bars and grind smooth where indicated on Drawings. D. Apply touchup paint primer by brush or spray of same thickness and material as that used in shop application and as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. E. Hot -Dip Galvanized Coating Repair: 1. Conform to ASTM A780/A780M. 2. For minor repairs at abraded areas, use sprayed zinc conforming to ASTM A780/A780M. 3. For flame cut or welded areas, use zinc -based solder, or zinc sticks, conforming to ASTM A780/A780M. 4. Use magnetic gauge to determine thickness is equal to or greater than base galvanized coating. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 051200-14 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.04 FIELD FINISH A. Field finish in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner -Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. B. Contractor -Furnished Quality Control: Inspect and test as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. C. High -Strength Bolted Connections: 1. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform the following inspection and testing in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts: a. Marking identification and conformance to ASTM standards. b. Alignment of bolt holes. c. Placement, type, and thickness of hardened washers. d. Tightening of bolts. 2. Snug -Tightened Connections (N, X): Snug tight condition with plies of joint in firm contact. 3. Pretensioned Bearing and Slip Critical (SC) Connections: a. Conduct preinstallation test. b. Monitor installation and tightening of DTIs or TC bolts. c. Monitor condition of faying surfaces for slip critical connections. 4. Preinstallation Test: a. Conduct test in accordance with Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM F3125 Grade A325 or Grade A490 bolts prior to using bolt tension measuring device. b. Select representative sample of not less than three bolts of each diameter, length, and grade. c. Include DTIs and flat hardened washers as required to match actual connection assembly. 5. Nondestructive Testing (NDT): Inspect bolted connections and perform corrections as required to meet code acceptance criteria per RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts. 6. Defective Connections: Correct and reinspect defective and improperly tightened high -strength bolted connections. Retest pretensioned bolts as necessary to demonstrate compliance of completed work. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00- 15 MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Welding: 1. Contractor's Certified Welding Inspector (CWI): Inspect and test field welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria. 3. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform inspection and testing of field welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 4. Repair and retest defective welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. E. Special inspection will be provided by Owner as indicated on Drawings. F. Stud Shear Connectors: Inspect and test stud shear connectors as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 12 00 - 16 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 05 21 19 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design. b. Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. c. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 3. Steel Joist Institute (SJI): a. Standard Specifications and Load Tables: 1) Open -Web Steel Joists, K -Series. 2) Long Span Steel Joists, LH-Series, and Deep Long Span Steel Joists, DLH-Series. 3) Super Longspan Steel Joists, SLH-Series. 4) Joist Girders. b. Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Plan view layout of joists and bridging. 2. Elevation view of each type of joist showing configuration, chord and web member sizes, panel point dimensions, and chord extensions. 3. Connection and bearing details. 4. Special joist reinforcing and connections for supported items, such as monorails and mechanical equipment. 5. Bridging member sizes and connection details. 6. Complete design, including stress and deflection calculations, for joists, joist members, and connections for design load and equipment weight as indicated, plus any construction loads applied by Contractor's operations. 7. Calculations shall include check of joist chord bending stresses for concentrated loads applied between panel points. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING MARCH 12, 2026 05 2119 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 8. Registered Professional Engineer's stamp, valid in same state as Project, on structural calculations. 9. Procedure for handling, erection, and bracing of steel joists. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Joist manufacturer's installation requirements. 2. Welding Procedures, Qualifications, and Inspection Report: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Design and fabricate steel joists and bridging to meet requirements of SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables. B. Certification: SJI Membership, with certification for joist types as indicated on Drawings. C. Qualifications for Field Welding: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Protect joist paint system from abrasion at steel bands and other joists. C. Store joists and bridging off ground on wood sleepers. D. Support joists so there is no danger of tipping, sliding, rolling, shifting or material damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL JOISTS AND BRIDGING A. Provide type of joist, chord configuration, and depth as indicated on Drawings. B. Design and Manufacture: 1. In accordance with the applicable SJI Standard Specifications. 2. Chord Members: Rolled double angle sections only. OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 2119 - 2 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Provide the following where indicated, in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables: a. Bottom chord bracing and end anchorage for uplift design criteria. b. Ceiling extension to within 1 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated. c. Top chord extension, as indicated. d. Bottom chord extension and stabilizer plates for joist girders. e. Full camber, unless otherwise indicated. C. Joist Bridging: 1. In accordance with applicable SJI Standard Specifications for type of joist. 2. Furnish bridging of minimum size and type as indicated. 3. Provide anchorage connection to walls and girders at bridging lines as indicated. 2.02 SHOP PRIMER A. Apply one shop coat of rust -inhibitive primer in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications. 1. Remove loose scale, rust, and slag from welds before painting. 2. Apply primer within 8 hours after surface preparation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel joists. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erection: SJI Standard Specifications and approved shop drawings. B. Welded Connections: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. C. High -Strength Bolted Connections: Install as specified in Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel Framing. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING MARCH 12, 2026 05 2119 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 3.03 TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Immediately following erection, remove debris from completed installation. B. Clean field welds, bolted connections, rust spots, and abraded areas. C. Repair damaged painted and galvanized surfaces as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Welding: 1. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to visually inspect field welded connections in accordance with AWS D1.1, Table 6.1, and as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Repair defective welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. B. High -Strength Bolted Connections: 1. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform inspection and testing in accordance with the AISC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts. 2. Inspect and test as specified in Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel Framing. C. Special inspection will be provided by Owner where indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 2119 - 4 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A61 1, Standard Specification for Structural Steel (SS), Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled. b. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. c. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings. d. A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 4. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): a. Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks. b. Diaphragm Design Manual. 5. Factory Mutual (FM): a. Factory Mutual Approval Guide. b. FM Research Corporation (FMRC): Approval Requirements for Steel Roof Deck Construction. 6. International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): Evaluation Reports for Deck Fasteners. 7. UL: Fire Resistance Directory. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Plan view layout of decking showing type and section properties of deck panels, reinforcing channels, pans, special jointing, and accessories. 2. Location of openings, deck laps, and deck attachment details. 3. Location of temporary shoring for placement of concrete topping. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 STEEL DECKING JULY 23, 2026 053100-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY B. Informational Submittals: 1. Decking manufacturer's installation requirements. 2. Welding Procedures, Qualifications, and Inspection Report: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 3. Operation manuals for mechanical fastener installation tools. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: For metal decking section properties, meet requirements of AISI Specifications for Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members. B. FM Requirements: 1. Steel Roof Deck: Listed in Factory Mutual "Approval Guide" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 wind uplift rating. 2. Mechanical Fasteners: Packing containers shall show name of manufacturer and product and FMRC approval mark. C. Qualifications for Field Welding: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store deck bundles on platforms or pallets, with one end elevated to provide drainage. C. Protect bundles against condensation with a ventilated waterproof covering. D. Stack bundles so there is no danger of tipping, sliding, rolling, shifting or material damage. E. Architecturally exposed deck shall be appropriately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL DECKING A. Provide metal deck as shown on the Drawings. STEEL DECKING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 31 00 - 2 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Materials and Finishes: 1. Galvanized Deck: a. Sheet steel for galvanized deck and accessories shall conform to ASTM A653 Structural Quality Grade 33 or higher, as shown in Steel Deck Schedule. b. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A924 with coating class of G60 or G90 as defined in ASTM A653 and as shown in Steel Deck Schedule. 2. Painted Deck: a. Sheet steel for primer painted roof deck and accessories shall conform to ASTM A611 with minimum yield strength of 33, or higher as indicated. b. Steel deck shall have a coat of manufacturer's standard rust - inhibitive primer. C. Manufacturers: 1. Vulcraft Division of Nucor Co., Brigham City, UT. 2. BHP Steel Building Products, USA, Inc., West Sacramento, CA. 3. Verco Manufacturing, Inc., Phoenix, AZ. 4. United Steel Deck, Inc., Summit, NJ. 8 Kequirements'. 2.02 SHOP PRIMER A. Clean and coat with shop paint primer where shown in Finish Schedule. B. Surface Preparation and Primer: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide pour stops, column closures, end closures, cover plates, girder fillers, ridge and valley plates, finish strips, reinforcing channels, and other accessories as required for complete installation. B. Accessories shall be minimum 22 -gauge, except edge forms shall be sized as required by the deck manufacturer, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 STEEL DECKING JULY 23, 2026 053100-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. Self -Drilling Screws: 1. Self -drilling, self -tapping screws with hexagonal washer head and corrosion -resistant finish. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL; ICH Traxx Self -Drilling Fasteners with Climaseal Coating and Autotraxx Standup Installation Tool. b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Kwik-Pro HWH Self -Drilling Screws with Kwik-Cote Treatment and Kwik-Tapper Screwdriver. B. Powder Driven Fasteners: 1. Knurled shank, minimum 1/2 -inch diameter steel washer, corrosion -resistant coating. 2. Pin diameter and length to suit deck type and flange thickness of steel support member. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL; Buildex BX14 pins with yellow dichromate galvanizing and BX900 Installation Tool. b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; ENP-series fasteners with electroplated zinc coating and DX -750 Installation Tool. 2.05 SHEAR CONNECTORS FOR COMPOSITE DECK A. Welded headed anchor studs: Size and spacing as indicated on Drawings and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel deck. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of support framing members. B. Install at right angles to supporting members in a three span minimum lay-up, unless shown otherwise, and in accordance with Specification and manufacturer's installation recommendation. STEEL DECKING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 31 00 - 4 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Bearing: 1-1/2 inches, minimum. D. Endlaps: Minimum of 2 inches and located over supports. E. Do not stretch sidelaps. F. Closure Plates: 1. Install closure and cover plate accessories as recommended by the metal deck manufacturer, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 2. Floor Deck and Form Deck Closures: a. Fasten column closures, cell closures, and zee closures to deck to provide tight fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking. b. Fasten cell closures at changes of direction of deck units unless otherwise indicated. G. Holes and Openings 1. Cut and fit around roof openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to decking. 2. Locate holes and openings as shown to clear structural framing and bracing members. 3. Reinforcement around openings: a. Roof Deck: For hole sizes of at least 6 inches across, but not more than 12 inches across in roof deck, reinforce with 0.0474 -inch design thickness steel plate, painted or galvanized to match deck coating. Extend plate at least 12 inches beyond opening in all directions and attach to top of roof deck with No. 10 self -drilling screws at 6 -inch spacing and at all corners. For openings larger than 12 inches across, reinforce roof deck with framing as shown on Drawings. b. Composite Floor Deck and Form Deck: Reinforce openings as indicated on Drawings. H. Protect deck areas from heavy concentrated loads or wheel traffic with planking or other approved means. I. Install temporary shoring, if required, to meet strength and deflection limitations, before placing any concrete topping on deck panels. Completed Deck: Free from buckles and irregularities, and in accordance with FM and UL requirements. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 STEEL DECKING JULY 23, 2026 053100-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.03 DECK ATTACHMENT A. Fasten panels as shown on Drawings. B. Welded Connections: Weld deck sidelaps, attachment to framing, and accessories in accordance with AWS D1.3 and as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. C. Mechanical Fasteners: Self -Drilling Screws: a. Install screws in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with special installation tool. Do not over -torque. b. Remove and redrive screws at sidelaps where upper sheet is not drawn tightly against lower sheet. 2. Powder Driven Fasteners: a. Install fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with special installation tool. b. Minimum Sidelap Edge Distance: 3/8 inch. c. Minimum End/End Lap Distance: 1 inch. d. Head Projection: As specified by manufacturer for correct penetration into flange of steel support member. 3.04 TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Immediately following erection, remove unused deck edge trimmings, screws, fasteners, welding washers, butt ends of welding rods, and debris from completed installation. B. Clean field welds, bolted connections, rust spots, and abraded areas. C. Repair damaged painted surfaces as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. D. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces with zinc -rich spray paint in accordance with ASTM A780; color to match galvanized deck. E. Use magnetic gauge to determine that thickness of repair is equal to or greater than base painted or galvanized coating. STEEL DECKING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 31 00 - 6 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform following inspections. 1. Welded Connections: Visually inspect in accordance with AWS D1.3, Section 7, and as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Mechanical Fasteners: Visually inspect, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, for each type of fastener. B. Repair or replace defective welds and fasteners. C. Special inspection will be provided by Owner where indicated on Drawings. D. Welded Shear Studs: Inspect and test as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 STEEL DECKING JULY 23, 2026 053100-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 05 41 00 STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): a. Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members. b. Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual. c. Design Guide for Cold -Formed Steel Trusses. d. Fasteners for Residential Steel Framing. 2. American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS): a. C1.1, Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding. b. C1.3, Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding Coated Low Carbon Steels. c. D1.3, Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A370, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products. b. A500, Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. c. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. d. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings. e. C954, Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness. f. C955, Standard Specification for Load -Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases. 4. Center for Cold -Formed Steel Structures (CCFSS): Technical Bulletin, Vol. 2, No. 1, February 1993, Screw Connections. 5. International Code Council (ICC): Evaluation Reports for Cold -Formed Steel Framing and Fasteners. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING MARCH 19, 2026 05 41 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Plan and elevation views of all metal framing systems, including location and framing of all openings. 2. Material specifications, member sizes, and properties. 3. Details of track, web stiffeners, stud bracing, blocking, bridging, and other members as required to provide a complete installation. 4. Details of connections including welding, mechanical fasteners, and accessory items. 5. Installation and erection instructions, including sequence of operations and requirements for temporary bracing and bridging. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's installation requirements. 2. Welding Procedures, Qualifications, and Inspection Report: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 3. Operation manuals for mechanical fastener installation tools. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: For member section properties, meet requirements of AISI, Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members. B. Qualifications for Welding: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver to Site in bundles marked with name of manufacturer, section type, thickness, grade of material, and length. B. Store bundles on wood blocking, flat and off ground, to keep clean and to prevent any damage or permanent distortion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide size and type of members as indicated on Drawings. B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G-60 galvanized coating. C. Cold -Formed Members and Accessories: ASTM C955. STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 41 00 - 2 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Dimensions and Properties: Calculate section properties in accordance with AISI Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual. 2.02 STUDS AND JOISTS A. Material: 1. ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33, or High -Strength Low -Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Type A or B, Grade 50. 2. Section: Type, size, and thickness as indicated on Drawings. 3. Flanges: Stiffened with return lip. 4. Webs: a. Studs: Punched. b. Joists: Unpunched, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. B. Accessories: 1. Track: Size as required to fit over studs, same thickness as stud material, unpunched. 2. Blocking, Bridging, and Fire Stops: Same depth as studs or joists, 0.0566 -inch minimum design thickness, unpunched. 3. Bracing Straps, Angle Bracing, Clip Angles: Size and thickness as indicated on Drawings. 4. Mounting Plates: 0.0566 -inch minimum design thickness by 8 inches by 18 inches. 5. Accessories shall be from same manufacturer as studs and joists. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1. AMS, Los Angeles, CA; Angeles Metal Systems. 2. Clark Steel, Middleton, OH; Steel Framing Systems. 3. Dale Industries; Dearborn, MI; Dale/Incor Steel Framing. 4. Dietrich Industries, Pittsburgh, PA; Lightgauge Metal Framing Products. 5. Knorr Steel Framing Systems, Salem, OR; Light Gauge Steel Framing. 6. Marino/Ware, South Plainfield, NJ; Stud -Rite Lightweight Steel Framing Systems. 7. Unimast Incorporated, Schiller Park, IL; Steel Framing Systems. 2.03 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. Self -Drilling Screws: 1. Self -drilling, self -tapping screws with hexagonal washer head and corrosion -resistant finish. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING MARCH 19, 2026 05 41 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL; ICH Traxx Self -Drilling Fasteners with Climaseal Coating and Autotraxx Standup Installation Tool. b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Kwik-Pro HWH Self -Drilling Screws with Kwik-Cote Treatment and Kwik-Tapper Screwdriver. B. Powder -Driven Fasteners: 1. Knurled shank, minimum 1/2 -inch diameter steel washer, corrosion - resistant coating. 2. Pin diameter and length to suit deck type and flange thickness of steel support member. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL; Buildex BX14 pins with yellow dichromate galvanizing and BX900 Installation Tool. b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; ENP-series fasteners with electroplated zinc coating and DX -750 Installation Tool. 2.04 CONCRETE ANCHORS A. Drilled anchors, size and type as shown on Drawings and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 2.05 PREFABRICATION A. Structural wall framing panels may be prefabricated prior to erection. B. Prefabricated assemblies shall be not more than 1/8 inch out of square within length of assembly and shall be braced against racking. Use jig templates for layout and fabrication. C. Protect prefabricated panels from damage during handling. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all prefabricated assemblies and repair any damage. B. Examine bearing support surfaces for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of metal framing systems. C. Provide smooth level bearing surfaces for bottom track of load -bearing walls. D. Clean all member and bearing surfaces that will be in contact after assembly. STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 41 00 - 4 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install framing systems as indicated on Drawings, complete and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide temporary bracing for support of all construction loads until framing system is installed complete with sheathing or decking. 3. Install framing in true line, plumb, level, and in proper alignment. 4. Cut ends of framing members with saw or shear to bear uniformly against abutting members. Flame cutting is not permitted. 5. All structural framing members shall be full-length without splices, unless indicated otherwise. 6. Fasten members together in accordance with AISI, Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual, Part IV, Connections. Wire tying is not permitted. B. Stud Bearing Walls: 1. Secure bottom track to floor slab with concrete anchors as indicated on Drawings. 2. Seat studs squarely and firmly within track before securing with fasteners. Gap between end of stud and track shall be less than 1/16 inch. 3. Install studs with spacing as shown and not more than 2 inches from abutting walls. 4. Provide double studs at jambs of openings wider than stud spacing. 5. Provide triple studs at corners and at jambs of openings wider than 48 inches, unless indicated otherwise. 6. Track shall be continuous. Center splices between studs and splice with stud section full length between studs. 7. Frame wall penetrations for pipes and ducts larger than stud spacing to avoid cutting structural members. 8. Fire stop stud walls and partitions with unpunched blocking full width of stud at midpoint or where required for nailers, in conformance with applicable building code. 9. Provide blocking for support of mechanical items. 10. Do not remove the web knockouts within 10 inches of either end of load -bearing studs. 11. Provide bracing straps with gusset plates and anchor holddown assemblies where indicated on Drawings. 12. Tolerances: a. Stud Plumbness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. b. Stud Spacing: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING MARCH 19, 2026 05 41 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Joists: 1. Position joists directly over bearing studs and attach to track. 2. Joists shall be one-piece within a single span. For multiple spans, lap joists and splice as shown on Drawings. 3. Immediately install bridging and solid blocking to support joists. Maximum spacing of bridging shall be 5 feet. 4. Install web stiffeners where indicated 5. Web Penetrations: a. Drilled holes for other trades shall be limited to the middle 1/3 of the joist depth within the middle 1/3 of the span, unless indicated otherwise. Minimum spacing between drilled holes shall be 1-1/2 times the joist depth. Notching of joist flanges and flame cutting of holes are not permitted. 6. Tolerances: a. Joist Spacing: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. b. Joist Levelness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.03 FASTENERS A. Self -Drilling Screws: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with special installation tool. 2. Screw type, diameter, and length shall be in accordance with AISI, Fasteners for Residential Steel Framing, minimum two screws per connection unless indicated otherwise. 3. Use clamp to hold members together. Drive screw from lighter to heavier gauge, to allow plies to be pulled together without stripping metal. Do not over torque. A minimum of three exposed threads shall extend through steel. 4. Minimum screw spacing, end distance, and edge distance shall be 3 diameters. B. Powder -Driven Fasteners: 1. Use only for connecting cold -formed steel to structural steel members, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with special installation tool. C. Welded Connections: 1. Welding shall not be used for material thinner than 0.0451 inch. 2. Weld framing members and accessories in accordance with AWS D1.3. STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 41 00 - 6 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Resistance welding for prefabricated framing shall be in accordance with AWS C1.1 and AWS C1.3. 4. Repair galvanized surfaces damaged by welding with zinc -rich spray paint in accordance with ASTM A780. D. Concrete Anchors: Install in accordance with Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency shall be retained by Contractor and approved by Engineer to perform following inspections. 1. Welded Connections: Visually inspect in accordance with AWS D1.3, Section 7, and as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Mechanical Fasteners: Visually inspect, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, for each type of fastener. B. Repair or replace defective welds and fasteners. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING MARCH 19,2026 054100-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA): The Aluminum Design Manual. 2. American Galvanizers Association (AGA): a. Inspection of Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel Products. b. Quality Assurance Manual. 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Stainless Steel Types. 4. American Ladder Institute (ALI): A14.3, Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements. 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 6. American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE): A10.11, Safety Requirements for Personnel and Debris Nets. 7. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel. b. Dl .2/D 1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. c. D 1.6/D 1.6M, Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel. 8. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A48/A48M, Specification for Gray Iron Castings. c. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. d. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold -Finished. e. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. f. A143/A143M, Standard for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot -Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. g. Al53/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. h. Al93/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. i. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 23, 2026 055000-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY lc. m. n. 0. p. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. A283/A283M, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. A380, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. A384/A384M, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot -Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. q. A385/A385M, Standard Practice for Providing High -Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot -Dip). r. A489, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes. s. A500/A500M, Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. t. A501, Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. u. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. v. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. w. A780/A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings. x. A786/A786M, Standard Specification for Hot -Rolled Carbon, Low -Alloy, High -Strength Low -Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. y. A793, Standard Specification for Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel. z. A967, Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts. aa. A992/A992M, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. bb. A1085, Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow Structural Sections (HSS). cc. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. dd. B308/B308M, Standard Specification for Aluminum - Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. ee. B429/B429M, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-2 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF ff. B632/B632M, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate. gg. C881/C881M, Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. hh. D 1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. ii. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. jj. F468, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use. kk. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 11. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. mm. F844, Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use. nn. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910.27, Fixed Ladders. b. 29 CFR 1926.105, Safety Nets. c. 29 CFR 1926.502, Fall Protection Systems Criteria and Practices. 10. Specialty Steel Industry of North America (SSINA): a. Specifications for Stainless Steel. b. Design Guidelines for the Selection and Use of Stainless Steel. c. Stainless Steel Fabrication. d. Stainless Steel Fasteners. 11. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Sheet and Plate. 12. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 13. OSHA 1910.27 — Fixed Ladders. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Anchor Bolt: Cast -in -place anchor; concrete or masonry. B. Corrosive Area: Containment area or area exposed to delivery, storage, transfer, or use of chemicals. Corrosive area includes areas exposed to corrosive atmosphere such as hydrogen sulfide from wastewater. C. Exterior Area: Location not protected from weather by building or other enclosed structure. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-3 MARY'S CREEK WRY D. Interior Dry Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is not subject to liquid spills or washdown, nor where wall or roof slab is common to a water -holding or earth -retaining structure. E. Interior Wet Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is sloped to floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or washdown, or where wall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water -holding or earth -retaining structure. F. Submerged: Location at or below top of wall of open water -holding structure, such as basin or channel, or wall, ceiling or floor surface inside a covered water -holding structure, or exterior belowgrade wall or roof surface of water -holding structure, open or covered. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Metal fabrications, including welding and fastener information. 2. Samples: Color samples of abrasive stair nosings. 3. Samples: Ladder components B. Informational Submittals: 1. U -Channel Concrete Inserts: a. Manufacturer's product description. b. Allowable load tables. 2. Pre-engineered Ladders: Letter of certification that ladder meets OSHA 29 CFR 1910.27 requirements. 3. Passivation method for stainless steel members. 4. Galvanized coating applicator qualifications. 5. Hot -Dip Galvanizing: Certificate of compliance signed by galvanizer, with description of material processed and ASTM standard used for coating. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product. D. Ladder and Platform Shop Drawings: 1. Detail fabrication and erection of each ladder indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3. Provide reaction loads for each hanger and bracket. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-4 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Qualification Data: Refer to Quality Assurance provisions for submittal requirements evidencing experience, certifications and resources. F. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Galvanized Coating Applicator: Company specializing in hot -dip galvanizing after fabrication and following procedures of Quality Assurance Manual of the American Galvanizers Association. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing aluminum metal ladders similar to those indicated for this Project. 1. Record of successful in-service performance. 2. Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 3. Professional engineering competent in design and structural analysis to fabricate ladders in compliance with industry standards and local codes. C. Installer Qualifications: Competent and experienced firm capable of selecting fasteners and installing ladders to attain designed operational and structural performance. D. Product Qualification: Product design shall comply with OSHA 1910.27 minimum standards for ladders. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Insofar as practical, factory assemble specified items. Package assemblies, which have to be shipped unassembled to protect materials from damage and tag to facilitate identification and field assembly. B. Package stainless steel items to provide protection from carbon impregnation. C. Protect painted coatings and hot -dip galvanized finishes from damage as a result of metal banding and rough handling. Use padded slings and straps. D. Store fabricated items in dry area, not in direct contact with ground. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-5 MARY'S CREEK WRY 1.06 1.07 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at option of Owner, removal and replacement of sidewalk doors and floor hatches found defective during a period of 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in General Conditions. EXTRA MATERIALS a I: Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following extra materials: Item Quantity Neoprene Gasket Two for each location requiring neoprene gaskets. 4 inches wide by 50 feet long One roll for each location requiring Neoprene Gasket Material neoprene gaskets. Neoprene Gasket Adhesive One (manufacturer's recommended) for each location requiring neoprene gaskets. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All metal fabrications shall be hot -dip galvanized steel, or stainless steel, or aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. B. For hot -dip galvanized steel that is exposed to view and does not receive paint, limit the combined phosphorus and silicon content to 0.04 percent. For steels that require a minimum of 0.15 percent silicon (such as plates over 1.5 inches thick for ASTM A36/A36M steel), limit maximum silicon content to 0.21 percent and phosphorous content to 0.03 percent. C. All aluminum products except aluminum checkered plates are to be anodized. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-6 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Unless otherwise indicated, meet the following requirements: Item ASTM Reference Steel Wide Flange Shapes and Channels A992/992M Other Steel Shapes and Plates A36/A36M or A572/A572M, Grade 50 or A992/A992M for other steel shapes Steel Pipe A500, Grade C Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) A500/A500M, Grade C Aluminum: Aluminum Plates B209, Alloy 6061-T6 Aluminum Structural Shapes B308/B308M, Alloy 6061-T6 Stainless Steel: Bars and Angles A276, AISI Type 316 (316L for welded connections) Shapes A276, AISI Type 304 (304L for welded connections) Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip A240/A240M, AISI Type 316 316L for welded connections) Bolts, Threaded Rods, Anchor Bolts, and Anchor Studs F593, AISI Type 316, Group 2, Condition SH Nuts F594, AISI Type 316, Condition CW Steel Bolts and Nuts: Carbon Steel A307 bolts, with A563 nuts High -Strength A325, Type 1 bolts, with A563 nuts Anchor Bolts and Rods F1554, Grade 36 and 55, with weldability supplement S 1. Eyebolts A489 Threaded Rods A36/A36M Flat Washers (Unhardened) F844 Flat and Beveled Washers (Hardened) F436 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 23, 2026 055000-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Item ASTM Reference Thrust Ties for Steel Pipe: Threaded Rods A193/A193M, Grade B7 Nuts A194/A194M, Grade 2H Plate A283/A283M, Grade D Welded Anchor Studs A108, Grades C-1010 through C-1020 Aluminum Bolts and Nuts F468, Alloy 2024-T4 Cast Iron A48/A48M, Class 35 E. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: Use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, zinc - plated steel, and aluminum material types as indicated in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. 2.02 2.03 ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES A. Cast -In -Place Anchor Bolts: 1. Headed type, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Material type and protective coating as shown in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. B. Anchor Bolt Sleeves: 1. Plastic: a. Single unit construction with corrugated sleeve. b. Top of sleeve shall be self -threading to provide adjustment of threaded anchor bolt projection. c. Material: High -density polyethylene. 2. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A36/A36M. POST -INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS A. See Section 05 05 19, Post -Installed Anchors. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-8 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS A. Headed anchor studs (HAS), or threaded anchor studs (TAS),or stud shear connectors, as indicated on Drawings. 1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A108, Standard Quality Grades 1010 through 1020, inclusive either semikilled or killed aluminum or silicon dioxidation, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW, where indicated. B. Manufacturers: 1. Nelson Stud Welding, FabriSteel Co., Elyria, OH. 2. Stud Welding Associates, Inc., Elyria, OH. 2.05 PIPE SLEEVES A. ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves with continuously welded 3/16 -inch -thick seep ring with outside diameter 3 inches greater than sleeve outside diameter. Hot -dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. 2.06 EMBEDDED STEEL SUPPORT FRAMES FOR FLOOR PLATE AND GRATING A. Steel angle support frames to be embedded in concrete shall be stainless steel, ASTM A276, AISI Type 316, unless indicated otherwise. B. Welded anchors for stainless steel support frames shall also be stainless steel. 2.07 ABRASIVE NOSING FOR STAIRS A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, furnish flush type abrasive nosings on stairs. B. Nosing Components: 1. Homogeneous epoxy abrasive, with minimum 50 percent aluminum oxide content, formed and cured upon an extruded aluminum base. 2. Epoxy abrasive shall extend over and form curved front edge of nosing. 3. Base of Nosing: Extruded aluminum alloy, 6063-T5, heat -treated. C. Anchoring System: Double -set anchors consisting of two rows of integrally extruded anchors. D. Size: 3 inches wide by 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch thick by length as shown. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 23, 2026 055000-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Color: Selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard color range. F. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Wooster Products, Inc., Wooster, OH; Spectra Type WP3C. 2. American Safety Tread Co., Inc., Helena, AL; Type FA -311D. 2.08 FLOOR PLATE A. Material: 1. Galvanized Steel: Carbon steel, ASTM A786/A786M, commercial grade, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A793, AISI Type 304. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B632/B632M, Alloy 6061-T6. B. Minimum Thickness: 1. Steel: 1/4 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 2. Aluminum: 3/8 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. C. Surface: Raised -lug pattern or diamond tread, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. D. Slip -Resistant Surface: 1. Provide where indicated on Drawings. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. IKG/Borden, Clark, NJ; MEBAC 2. b. W.S. Molnar Co., Detroit, MI; SLIPNOT Grade 2 —Medium. 2.09 EXTRUDED FLOOR PLATE A. Extruded Deck Plate: 1. Minimum Section Height: As shown on Drawings. 2. Minimum Section Width: 12 inches. 3. Accessories: Dovetail interlock strips Anchor clamp fixtures Toeboard, 1 -inch raised lip. 4. Manufacturer and Product: Alcoa Building Products, Inc., Sidney, OH; Standard Diamondback. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-10 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Extruded Tread Plate: 1. Minimum Section Height: 0.360 inch, plus serrations. 2. Section Width: 12 inches. 3. Accessories: Edgebands, tongue -and -groove attachment. 4. Manufacturer and Product: Alcoa Building Products, Inc., Sidney, OH; Standard Diamondback. 2.10 SIDEWALK DOORS A. Load Capacity: 300 psf with maximum deflection of 1/150th of span. Provide H-20 wheel loading capacity where indicated on Drawings. B. Sidewalk doors — Aluminum: Component Fabrication: a. Access Door Leaf(s): 1/4 -inch aluminum diamond pattern plate. Provide stainless steel safety chain and attachments for end of double -leaf door assembly when open. b. Channel Frame: 1/4 -inch -thick extruded aluminum trough frame with continuous anchor flange around perimeter. Weld 1- 1/2 -inch diameter drain coupling, and drain pipe, to frame trough at front right corner, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. c. Safety Grate: Aluminum grating with 300 psf live load capacity, 5 -inch by 5 -inch grate openings, permanent hinging system that locks grate in 90 -degree position, and opening arm with vinyl grip handle and locking device. 2. Door Hardware: 3. Hinges: Heavy-duty brass or stainless steel with stainless steel pins through -bolted to cover plate with tamper -proof stainless steel bolts flush with top of cover and to outside leg of channel frame with stainless steel bolts and locknuts. 4. Lifting Mechanism: Stainless steel compression lift springs enclosed in telescoping vertical housing or stainless steel torsion lift springs. 5. Hold -Open Arm: a. Locks automatically in open position. b. Disengages with slight pull on vinyl grip with one hand. c. Door can be easily closed with one hand by pulling forward and down on vinyl grip. 6. Snap Lock: a. Stainless steel snap lock mounted on bottom of door leaf with removable topside key wrench and inside fixed lever handle. b. Threaded plug for flush outside surface with key wrench removed. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 23, 2026 055000-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 7. Aluminum: Mill finished with protective coating applied to surfaces to be in contact with concrete, as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 8. Manufacturers and Products: 9. Bilco Co., New Haven, CT; J Series. 10. Nystrom Products Co., Minneapolis, MN; FG Series. 11. U.S.F. Fabrication, Hialeah, FL; T Series. 12. ITT Flygt Corporation, Trumbull, CT; FDRN Series. 13. Thompson Fabricating Co., Birmingham, AL; TE Series. 14. Halliday Products, Orlando, FL; WS Series. C. Sidewalk doors — Stainless Steel: 1. Component Fabrication: a. Access Door Leaf(s): 1/4 inch aluminum diamond patter,, plate. Provide stainless steel safety chain and attachments for end of double leaf door- assembly when en Minimum 3/16 inch (or 1/4 inch where heavy-duty is required) stainless steel diamond pattern plate (Type 304 unless otherwise indicated; Type 316 for corrosive environments). Provide stainless steel safety chain and attachments for end of double -leaf door assembly when open. b. Channel Frame: 1/4 inch thick extruded aluminum trough frame with continuous uou anchor flange -around -perimeter. Weld 1 1/2 inch diameter drain coupling, and drain pipe, to frame trough at front right corner, „less indicated otherwise on Wings. Minimum 1/4 inch -thick stainless steel trough frame with continuous anchor flange around perimeter. Weld 1-1/2 inch diameter stainless steel drain coupling and drain pipe to frame trough at front right corner, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. c. Safety Grate: Aluminum num grating g with 300 psf live lead capacity, 5 inch by 5 inch grate openings, permanent hinging system that leeks grate in 90 de-, position, and opening arm with vinyl grip handle and locking device. Stainless steel bar grating with 300 psf live load capacity, 5 inch by 5 inch maximum openings, permanent hinging system that locks grate in 90 -degree position, and opening arm with vinyl grip handle and locking device. 2. Door Hardware: a. Hinges: Heavy duty brass or stainless steel with stainless stool pins through bolted to cover plate with tamper proof stainless steel belts flush with top of cove, and to outside leg of channel fame with stainless steel belts and locks ts. Heavy-duty stainless steel hinges with stainless steel pins; through -bolted or welded to cover plate with tamper -proof stainless steel fasteners, flush with top of cover, and securely attached to frame. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-12 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 0 MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Lifting Mechanism: Stainless steel compression lift springs enclosed in telescoping vertical housing or stainless steel torsion lift springs. c. Lifting Mechanism: Stainless steel compression lift springs enclosed in telescoping vertical housing or stainless steel torsion lift springs. d. Hold -Open Arm: 1) Locks automatically in open position. 2) Disengages with slight pull on vinyl grip with one hand. 3) Door can be easily closed with one hand by pulling forward and down on vinyl grip. Snap Lock: 1) Stainless steel snap lock mounted on bottom of door leaf with removable topside key wrench and inside fixed lever handle. 3. 2) Threaded plug for flush outside surface with key wrench removed. f. Aluminum: Mill finished with protective coating applied to surfaces be with d .mrraccTteiscvirt-c�66eac�et�-a$�rpv specified Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. g. Stainless Steel: 1) Material: ASTM A240/A240M Type 304 stainless steel unless otherwise indicated; use Type 316 for coastal, deicing salt, or corrosive environments. 2) Finish: Mill fmish or No. 4 brushed fmish as indicated. 3) Fabrication: Welded construction with continuous welds ground smooth; passivated. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bilco Co., New Haven, CT; J Series. b. Nystrom Products Co., Minneapolis, MN; FG Series. c. U.S.F. Fabrication, Hialeah, FL; T Series. d. Or Approve Equal. 2.11 FLOOR HATCHES (FLOOR DOOR) A. Refer to Section 08 31 23, Floor Doors. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 13 0 0 MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.12 HATCH SAFETY NET A. General: 1. Conforms to ASSE A10.11 and OSHA CFR Part 1926.105. 2. Size to fit hatch opening where indicated. B. Components and Accessories: 1. Rails and Slide Rings: Aluminum 6061-T6 extruded rails and aluminum -alloy 713.0 slide rings. 2. Corner Hooks and Eyebolts: AISI Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Netting: Polyester, 5 -inch by 5 -inch net openings; 5,000 pounds minimum breaking strength. 4. Bolts, Nuts, and Concrete Anchors: AISI Type 316 stainless steel. C. Manufacturer and Product: Safe Approach Inc., Auburn, ME; Hatch Net 121. 2.13 HINGED MANHOLE COVERS A. Slab type rectangular manhole frame and cover with flush, waterproof lift handles, and stainless steel butt hinges. B. ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35, cast iron, unpainted. C. Furnish as shown in table: Hinged Manhole Covers Mark Duty Size (inches) Weight (pounds) HMC-1 Light 24 x 36 275 HMC-2 Light 30 x 30 290 HMC-3 Light 30 x 36 335 HMC-4 Light ht 30x48 450 HMC-5 Heavy 30 x 36 525 HMC-6 Heavy 36 x 36 700 D. Manufacturers: 1. Neenah Foundry Co., Neenah, WI. 2. Flockhart Foundry Co., Newark, NJ. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-14 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.14 STAINLESS STEEL LADDERS A. Fabricate ladders with rails, rungs, landings, and cages to meet applicable requirements of OSHA, CFR Part 1910.27, and ALT A14.3. 6 1. Design ladder for concentrated load of 200 pounds imposed by user concentrated at points that will cause maximum stress in structural member being considered. 2. Include weight of ladder and attached appurtenances together with live load in design of rails and fastenings. B. Flat Bar Ladder: 1. Punch rails, pass rungs through rails, and weld on outside. 2. Weld brackets to ladder for fastening ladder to wall. 3. ASTM A276, AISI Type 304L. C. Ladder Safety Post: 1. Telescoping tubular, spring balanced and automatically locking in raised position, with release lever for unlocking. 2. Post: Stainless steel, AISI Type 304. 3. Hardware: Stainless steel, AISI Type 316. 4. Furnish dissimilar metal protective coatings at connections. 5. Manufacturer and Product: a. Bilco Co., New Haven, CT; "Ladder Up" to fit ladder rungs. b. Or Approved Equal. 2.15 LADDERS (NON -STAINLESS STEEL), PLATFORMS, RAILINGS AND FALL ARREST SYSTEM 6 A. Manufacturers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: O'Keeffe's, Inc.; 100 N Hill Drive, Suite 12, Brisbane, CA 94005. Toll Free Tel: (888) 653-3333. Tel: (415) 824-4900. Fax: (415) 824-5900. Email: info@okeeffes.com. Web: http://www.okeeffes.com. 2. Heavy Duty Tubular rail basis of design; Model 501 Heavy Duty. 3. Materials: a. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 5005-H34 to comply with ASTM B209. b. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy 6063-T6 to comply with ASTM B221. 4. Rungs: Not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in section and 18-3/8 inches (467mm) long, formed from tubular aluminum extrusions. Squared and deeply serrated on all sides. 5. Rungs shall withstand a 1,500 pound (454 kg) load without deformation or failure. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 15 MARY'S CREEK WRF 6. Channel Side Rails: Not less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) wall thickness by 3 inches (76 mm) wide. 7. Heavy Duty Tubular Side Rails: Assembled from two interlocking aluminum extrusions no less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) wall thickness by 3 inches (76 mm) wide. Construction shall be self-locking stainless steel fasteners, full penetration TIG welds and clean, smooth and burr -free surfaces. 8. Landing Platform: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or greater diameter, tubular aluminum guardrails and decks of serrated aluminum treads B. Ladders: 1. Ladders accessing platforms: O'Keeffe's Model 503A; Heavy Duty; 24 -inch (nom) width. 2. Ladders accessing roof hatches: O'Keeffe's Model 501; Heavy Duty; 18 -inch (nom) width. 3. Bottom mounting brackets: Floor Mounting standard. 4. Intermediate wall brackets: Model AIB, 7 -inch backset. C. Landing Platforms and Railing: 1. O'Keeffe's Model LP; aluminum platform planking, framing and bracing. 2. Anchorage to concrete wall or slab structure: Stainless steel, typical. D. Ladder Fall -Arrest: 1. O'Keeffe's Model FA, Fall Arrest System: all 24 -inch wide ladders accessing platforms. E. Ladder Safety Post: 1. O'Keeffe's Model SP. Safety Post: Telescoping tubular, spring balanced and automatically locking in raised position, with release lever for unlocking. 2. Location: at ladders accessing roof hatches, typical. 3. Post: Match ladder materials. 2.16 FALL ARREST ANCHORS A. General: 1. Conforms to OSHA CFR Part 1926.502. 2. Minimum Breaking Strength: 5,000 pounds. 3. Material: Stainless steel, AISI Type 304. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-16 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Components and Accessories: 1. Forged combination eye and base assembly with headed anchor bolt, backer plate lock washer, and nut. 2. Suitable for embedment in concrete wall or slab. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Thaler Metal Industries, Buffalo, NY; FARA Wall Anchor. 2. Rose Manufacturing Company, Pittsburgh, PA; Anchorage Connector. D. Shell Manhole: 1. Flanged and bolted type with confined rubber gasket. 2. Manhole Unit: Capable of withstanding pressure of full tank of water with no leakage. 3. Minimum clear opening of 24 inches. 4. Cover: Hinged to tank. 5. Grind welds and sheared edges smooth. E. Weir and Baffle Plates: Fabricate plates and associated framing of aluminum alloy 6061-T6 using welding filler wire as manufactured by Alcoa, No. 4043, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. F. Stop Gates and Guide Frames: Aluminum plate with aluminum channel or angle sections as stiffeners. 1. Guides, Rests, and Fasteners: AISI Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Identification Plate: a. 16 -gauge aluminum or stainless steel securely mounted on each gate. b. Text: 1 -inch die -stamped word "WATERSIDE" and corresponding gate number as shown in Gate Schedule. c. Mount plate on side opposite gate stiffeners. 3. Extruded Aluminum Guide Manufacturer: Washington Aluminum Co., Baltimore, MD. 2.17 ACCESSORIES A. Antiseizing Lubricant for Stainless Steel Threaded Connections: 1. Suitable for potable water supply. 2. Resists washout. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bostik, Middleton, MA; Neverseez. b. Saf-T-Eze Div., STL Corp., Lombard, IL; Anti -Seize. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 23, 2026 055000-17 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Neoprene Gasket: 1. ASTM D1056, 2C1, soft, closed -cell neoprene gasket material, suitable for exposure to sewage and sewage gases, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Thickness: Minimum 1/4 inch. 3. Furnish without skin coat. 4. Manufacturer and Product: Monmouth Rubber and Plastics Corporation, Long Branch, NJ; Durafoam DK1111LD. 2.18 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, sharp, and to well-defined lines. 2. Furnish necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets so work can be assembled in neat, substantial manner. 3. Conceal fastenings where practical; where exposed, flush countersink. 4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware or other materials. 5. Grind cut edges smooth and straight. Round sharp edges to small uniform radius. Grind burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects smooth. 6. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Site. B. Materials: 1. Use steel shapes, unless otherwise noted. 2. Steel to be hot -dip galvanized: Limit silicon content to less than 0.04 percent or to between 0.15 percent and 0.25 percent. 3. Fabricate aluminum in accordance with AA Specifications for Aluminum Structures —Allowable Stress Design. C. Welding: 1. Weld connections and grind exposed welds smooth. When required to be watertight, make welds continuous. 2. Welded fabrications shall be free from twisting or distortion caused by improper welding techniques. 3. Steel: Meet fabrication requirements of AWS Dl.1/D1.1M, Section 5. 4. Aluminum: Meet requirements of AWS D 1.2/D 1.2M. 5. Stainless Steel: Meet requirements of AWS D 1.6/D 1.6M. 6. Welded Anchor Studs: Prepare surface to be welded and weld with stud welding gun in accordance with AWS DL1/DI.1M, Section 7, and manufacturer's instructions. 7. Complete welding before applying finish. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-18 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Painting: 1. Shop prime with rust -inhibitive primer as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminum fabricated items to be in direct contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Do not apply protective coating to galvanized steel anchor bolts or galvanized steel welded anchor studs, unless indicated otherwise. E. Galvanizing: 1. Fabricate steel to be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A143/A143M, ASTM A384/A384M, and ASTM A385/A385M. Avoid fabrication techniques that could cause distortion or embrittlement of the steel. 2. Provide venting and drain holes for tubular members and fabricated assemblies in accordance with ASTM A385/A385M. 3. Remove welding slag, splatter, burrs, grease, oil, paint, lacquer, and other deleterious material prior to delivery for galvanizing. 4. Remove by blast cleaning or other methods surface contaminants and coatings not removable by normal chemical cleaning process in the galvanizing operation. 5. Hot -dip galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. 6. Hot -dip galvanize bolts, nuts, washers, and hardware components in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Oversize holes to allow for zinc alloy growth. Shop assemble bolts and nuts. 7. Galvanized steel sheets in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M. 8. Galvanize components of bolted assemblies separately before assembly. Galvanizing of tapped holes is not required. F. Electrolytic Protection: Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminum fabricated items to be in direct contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, unless indicated otherwise. G. Watertight Seal: Where required or shown, furnish neoprene gasket of a type that is satisfactory for use in contact with sewage. Cover full bearing surfaces. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 23, 2026 055000-19 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY H. Fitting: Where movement of fabrications is required or shown, cut, fit, and align items for smooth operation. Make corners square and opposite sides parallel. I. Accessories: Furnish as required for a complete installation. Fasten by welding or with stainless steel bolts or screws. 2.19 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Visually inspect all fabrication welds and correct deficiencies. 1. Steel: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria. 2. Aluminum: AWS D1.2/D1.2M. 1.2M. 3. Stainless Steel: AWS D 1.6/D 1.6M. B. Hot -Dip Galvanizing: 1. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to inspect and test hot -dip galvanized fabricated items in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M. 2. Visually inspect and test for thickness and adhesion of zinc coating for minimum of three test samples from each lot in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M. 3. Reject and retest nonconforming articles in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: 1. Install metal fabrications plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 2. Install rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance. 3. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Obtain Engineer approval prior to field cutting steel members or making adjustments not scheduled. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-20 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Aluminum: 1. Do not remove mill markings from concealed surfaces. 2. Remove inked or painted identification marks on exposed surfaces not otherwise coated after installed material has been inspected and approved. 3. Fabrication, mechanical connections, and welded construction shall be in accordance with the AA Aluminum Design Manual. C. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Provide where pipes pass through concrete or masonry. 2. Holes drilled with a rotary drill may be provided in lieu of sleeves in existing walls. 3. Provide center flange for water stoppage on sleeves in exterior or water -bearing walls. 4. Provide rubber caulking sealant or a modular mechanical unit to form watertight seal in annular space between pipes and sleeves. 3.02 CAST -IN -PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Locate and hold anchor bolts in place with templates at time concrete is placed. B. Use anchor bolt sleeves for location adjustment and provide two nuts and one washer per bolt of same material as bolt. C. Minimum Bolt Size: 1/2 -inch diameter by 12 inches long, unless otherwise shown. 3.03 ABRASIVE NOSINGS A. Provide abrasive nosings on concrete steps not being supplied or coated with another type of nosing or nonskid material. 3.04 ACCESS COVERS A. Install access covers, including sidewalk doors, floor hatches, and hinged manhole covers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Accurately position prior to placing concrete, such that covers are flush with floor surface. C. Protect from damage resulting from concrete placement. Thoroughly clean exposed surfaces of concrete spillage to obtain a clean, uniform appearance. D. Route drain pipe to exterior face of concrete or as shown on Drawings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 23, 2026 055000-21 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 3.05 LADDERS AND PLATFORMS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in proper relationship with adjacent construction. 3.06 SAFETY CLIMB DEVICE SYSTEM A. Provide for each ladder where unbroken height between levels exceeds 20 feet, or at lesser height where indicated on Drawings. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Furnish additional accessories required to complete system for each ladder. D. Furnish one harness for each ladder equipped with safety climb device. E. Furnish pivot section at platforms, landings, and roofs. F. When installed to required height, fall prevention system shall be rigid and an integral part of the structure. 3.07 ELECTROLYTIC PROTECTION A. Aluminum and Galvanized Steel: 1. Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminum fabricated items to be in direct contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Do not apply protective coating to galvanized steel anchor bolts or galvanized steel welded anchor studs, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Allow coating to dry before installation of the material. 4. Protect coated surfaces during installation. 5. Should coating become marred, prepare and touch up in accordance with paint manufacturer's written instructions. B. Titanium: Where titanium equipment is in contact with concrete or dissimilar metal, provide full -face neoprene insulation gasket, 3/32 -inch minimum thickness and 70-durometer hardness. C. Stainless Steel: 1. During handling and installation, take necessary precautions to prevent carbon impregnation of stainless steel members. 2. After installation, visually inspect stainless steel surfaces for evidence of iron rust, oil, paint, and other forms of contamination. METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-22 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Remove contamination using cleaning and passivation methods in accordance with requirements of ASTM A380 and ASTM A967. 4. Brushes used to remove foreign substances shall utilize only stainless steel or nonmetallic bristles. 5. After treatment, visually inspect surfaces for compliance. 3.08 PAINTING A. Painted Galvanized Surfaces: Prepare as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. B. Repair of Damaged Hot -Dip Galvanized Coating: 1. Conform to ASTM A780/A780M. 2. For minor repairs at abraded areas, use sprayed zinc conforming to ASTM A780/A780M. 3. For flame cut or welded areas, use zinc -based solder, or zinc sticks, conforming to ASTM A780/A780M. 4. Use magnetic gauge to determine thickness is equal to or greater than base galvanized coating. C. Field Painting of Shop Primed Surfaces: Prepare surfaces and field finish in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner -Furnished Quality Assurance: 1. In accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in the Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. 2. Contractor responsibilities and related information on special inspection, observation, and testing are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. B. Contractor -Furnished Quality Control: 1. Inspection and testing required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance per Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, for test results, or calculations, or drawings that ensure material and equipment design and design criteria meet requirements of Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements and Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 23 MARY'S CREEK WRY C. Stud Shear Connectors: I . At start of each production period, conduct the following test to determine proper generator, control unit, and stud welding gun settings, in accordance with AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, Chapter 7: a. Weld two test studs and visually inspect for full 360 -degree flash. b. Bend test studs 30 degrees from vertical for headed anchor studs (HAS). Torque test threaded anchor studs (TAS) studs per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 7.6.6.2. c. Test studs will be acceptable if there is no failure of welds. d. If weld fails, repeat test until two consecutive test studs test to be satisfactory. 2. During production, if visual inspection reveals weld does not exhibit full 360 -degree flash or that stud has been repaired by welding, conduct the following test in accordance with AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, Chapter 7: a. Bend HAS studs or stud shear connectors approximately 15 degrees from vertical, away from missing portion of flash. For TAS studs, torque test per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 7.6.6.2. b. Studs meeting this test without exhibiting cracks in weld will be considered acceptable and left in bent position. c. Replace studs failing test. 3. Special inspection shall be provided by Owner where indicated in Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. 3.10 FASTENER SCHEDULE A. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, provide fasteners as follows: Service Use and Location Product Remarks 1. Anchor Bolts Cast Into Concrete for Structural Steel, Metal Fabrications and Castings Interior Dry Areas Hot -dip galvanized steel headed anchor bolts, unless indicated otherwise Exterior and Interior Stainless steel headed Wet Areas anchor bolts Submerged and Stainless steel headed See Section 09 90 00, Corrosive Areas anchor bolts with Painting and Coating fusion bonded coating METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-24 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Service Use and Location Product Remarks 2. Anchor Bolts Cast Into Concrete for Equipment Bases Interior Dry Areas Hot -dip galvanized steel headed anchor bolts, unless otherwise specified with equipment Submerged, Exterior, Stainless steel headed See Section 09 90 00, Interior Wet, and anchor bolts with Painting and Coating Corrosive Areas fusion bonded coating, unless otherwise specified with equipment 3. Post -Installed Anchors: See Section 05 05 19, Post -Installed Anchors 4. Anchors Cast in Grout -Filled Concrete Masonry Units Dry Areas Hot -dip galvanized steel headed anchor bolts Exterior and Interior Hot -dip galvanized Wet Areas steel headed anchor bolts 5. Connections for Structural Steel Framing Exterior and Interior High -strength steel Use hot -dipped Wet and Dry Areas bolted connections galvanized high - strength bolted connections for galvanized steel framing members. 6. Connections for Steel Fabrications Exterior and Interior Hot -dip galvanized Wet and Dry Areas carbon steel bolted connections PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 25 MARY'S CREEK WRF Service Use and Location Product Remarks 7. Connections of Aluminum Components Submerged, Exterior Stainless steel bolted and Interior Wet and connections, unless Dry Areas otherwise specified with equipment 8. All Others Exterior and Interior Stainless steel fasteners Wet and Dry Areas Antiseizing Lubricant: Use on stainless steel threads. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 055000-26 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 05 51 19 ALUMINUM STAIRS AND PLATFORMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA): The Aluminum Design Manual. 2. The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA): DAF45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D 1.1/D 1.1 M, Structural Welding Code - Steel. b. Dl .2/D 1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. 4. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 5. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 6. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. b. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. c. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. d. B308/B308M, Standard Specification for Aluminum - Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. e. B429/B429M, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. f. B632/B632M, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate. 7. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code (IBC). 8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): 29 CFR 1910, Code of Federal Regulations. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Anchor Bolt: Cast -in -place anchor; concrete or masonry. B. ICC Evaluation Services Report: ICC report on evaluation of manufactured concrete anchor systems. C. Special Inspection: As defined by the ICC IBC. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM STAIRS AND PLATFORMS MARCH 23, 2026 05 5119 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Aluminum Stair and platform Systems: Design, fabricate, and install stairs and platforms to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stress or allowable deflection. Apply each load to produce maximum stress and deflection in stair and platform system components. 1. Uniform Load: 150 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m), unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair and platform Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing and guard loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data including all components of stairs and platforms. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Project -specific scaled plans and elevations of stairs and platforms, and detail drawings. Include stair and platform members and gratings, sizes, connections, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. b. Include Plan at each level. c. Indicate locations of anchors, weld plates, and blocking for attachments. B. Informational Submittals: a. Calculations using specified design performance loads and including the following: 1) Design of stair and platform. 2) Top and base stair connections. Platform member's connections. 3) Documentation that concrete anchors have been designed in accordance with ACT 318. ALUMINUM STAIRS AND PLATFORMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 0551 19-2 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Qualifications: Calculations and Shop Drawings shall be stamped by a registered civil or structural engineer licensed in state where Project will be constructed. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. B. Keep members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. C. Protect members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. E. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALUMINUM STAIRS AND PLATFORMS A. General: 1. Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2. Fasteners shall be AISI Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. B. Aluminum Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM B221 extruded aluminum, alloys as follows: 1. 6061-T6 or 6063-T6, for bearing bars of gratings and shapes. 2. 6061-T1, for grating crossbars. C. Aluminum Bolts and Nuts: F468, Alloy 2024-T4 D. Aluminum Structural Shapes: B308/B308M, Alloy 6061-T6 E. Aluminum Plates: B209, Alloy y6061 -T6: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM STAIRS AND PLATFORMS MARCH 23, 2026 055119-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Bolts and Nuts for Bolting Stair to Metal Beams: ASTM A193/A193M and ASTM A194/A194M, Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. G. Concrete Anchors: 1. Stainless steel, AISI Type 304 or Type 316. 2. Post -installed anchors in accordance with Section 05 05 19, Post - installed Anchors, unless otherwise specified herein. 3. Bolt Diameter: 1/2 -inch, minimum. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Provide complete stair and platform assemblies, including Aluminum framing, railings, guards, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. B. Shop Assembly: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. C. Shop/Factory Finishing: 1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces of stairs. D. Repair of Defective Work: Remove stains and replace defective Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Verify elevations of floors, bearing surfaces and locations of bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 STAIR INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing Aluminum stairs and platform to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing Aluminum stairs to in -place construction B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing Aluminum stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. ALUMINUM STAIRS AND PLATFORMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 0551 19-4 MARCH 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.03 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. Post -installed anchors supporting stair and platform systems require special inspection. B. Owner -Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with ICC IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in the Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. C. Contractor -Furnished Quality Control: Inspection and testing as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM STAIRS AND PLATFORMS MARCH 23, 2026 055119-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 05 52 16 ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Aluminum Association, Incorporated (AA): DAF45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. Al93/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. b. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. c. E894, Standard Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. d. E935, Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. e. E985, Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. 5. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code (IBC). 6. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): 29 CFR 1910, Code of Federal Regulations. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. ICC Evaluation Services Report: ICC report on evaluation of manufactured concrete anchor systems. B. Railings: This term includes guardrail systems, handrail systems, platform railing systems, ramp -rail systems, and stair -rail systems. Railings may be comprised of a framework of vertical, horizontal, or inclined members, grillwork or panels, accessories, or combination thereof. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) MARCH 12, 2026 05 52 16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Special Inspection: As defined by the ICC IBC. D. Toeboards: Vertical barrier at floor level usually erected on railings along exposed edges of floor or wall openings, platforms, or ramps to prevent miscellaneous items from falling through. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Railing Systems: Design, test, fabricate, and install railings to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stress or allowable deflection. Apply each load to produce maximum stress and deflection in railing system components. 1. Railing System: Capable of withstanding the following load cases applied: a. Concentrated load of 200 pounds applied at any point and in any direction in accordance with ICC IBC and OSHA. b. Uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction in accordance with ICC IBC. c. Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently with uniform loads in accordance with ICC IBC. 2. In -Fill Area of Railing Systems: a. Capable of withstanding a horizontally applied normal load of 50 pounds applied to 1 square foot at any point in system including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, and openings and space between railings. b. Horizontal concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails of railings. 3. Toeboard: Capable of withstanding, without failure, force of at least 50 pounds applied in downward or outward direction at any point along toeboard. 4. Calculated lateral deflection at top of posts shall not exceed 1 inch. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Project -specific scaled plans and elevations of railings and detail drawings. Include railing profiles, sizes, connections, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. b. Manufacturer's literature and catalog data of railing and components. ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 52 16 - 2 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Design Data: Calculations or test data using specified design performance loads and including the following: 1) Bending stress in, and deflection of, posts in accordance with ASTM E985 as modified herein. 2) Design of post base connection. 3) Documentation that concrete anchors have been designed in accordance with one of the following: a) ACT 318, Chapter 17. b) ICC Evaluation Services Report for selected anchor. 2. Samples: Rail sections, 6 inches long showing each type of proposed connection, proposed finish, and workmanship. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's assembly and installation instructions. 2. Special Inspection: Manufacturer's instructions for Special Inspection of post -installed anchors. 3. Test Reports: Test data may supplement load calculations providing data covers complete railing system, including anchorage: a. Test data for railing and components showing load and deflection as a result of load, in enough detail to prove railing is strong enough and satisfies national, state, local standards, regulations, code requirements, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910, using design loads specified. Include test data for the following: 1) Railing and post connections. 2) Railing wall connections. 3) Railing expansion joint connections. 4) Railing system gate assembly, including latch, gate stop, and hinges. Both gate latch and stop to support required loads applied independent of each other. 5) Railing picket panel clamps and connections. b. Testing of anchorages shall be in accordance with ASTM E894 and ASTM E935 using applied loads in accordance with ICC IBC. c. Deflection Criteria: In accordance with ASTM E985 and design loads specified, except as follows: maximum calculated lateral deflection at top of posts shall not exceed 1 inch. d. Aluminum Rail Piping: Test data showing yield strength of pipe as delivered equals or exceeds specified values. 4. Manufacturer's written recommendations describing procedures for maintaining railings including cleaning materials, application methods, and precautions to be taken in use of cleaning materials. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) MARCH 12, 2026 05 52 16 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Calculations required for design data shall be stamped by a registered civil or structural engineer licensed in state where Project will be constructed. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package and wrap railings to prevent scratching and denting during shipment, storage, and installation. Maintain protective wrapping to extent possible until railing is completely installed. B. Delivery: 1. Shop assemble into practical modules of lengths not exceeding 24 feet for shipment. 2. Deliver toeboards loose for field assembly. 3. Deliver clear anodized railing pipe and posts with protective plastic wrap. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum range in ambient temperature in design, fabrication, and installation of railings to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, over stressing of components, connections and other detrimental effects. Base design calculation on actual surface temperature of material as a result of both solar heat gain and night time sky heat loss. Temperature change is difference between high or low temperature and installation temperature. Temperature Change Range: 70 degrees F, ambient; 100 degrees F, material surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALUMINUM RAILINGS A. General: 1. Furnish pre-engineered and prefabricated railing systems as shown on Drawings. 2. Railing systems using pop rivets or glued railing construction are not permitted. 3. Sand cast accessories and components are not permitted. 4. Fasteners shall be AISI Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 52 16 - 4 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Rails, Posts, and Formed Elbows: 1. Extruded Alloy 6105-T5, 6061-T6, or equivalent. 2. Tensile Strength: 38,000 psi, minimum. 3. Yield Strength: 35,000 psi, minimum. 4. Nominal Wall Thickness: 0.145 inch, minimum. 5. Posts and railings shall be nominal 1 -1/2 -inch diameter (1.90 -inch outside diameter). C. Accessories: 1. Fittings and Accessories: a. Extruded, machined bar stock, permanent mold castings, or die castings of sufficient strength to meet load requirements. b. Gauge metal components are not acceptable for load -resisting components. c. Fittings shall match color of pipe in railings. 2. Miscellaneous Extruded Aluminum Parts: Alloy 6063-T6, Alloy 6061-T6, or Alloy 6105 T5 aluminum, or equivalent, and of adequate strength for all loads. 3. Castings for Railings: a. Cast Al-mag with sufficient strength to meet load and test requirements. b. Anodizable grade finish with excellent resistance to corrosion when subjected to exposure of sodium chloride solution intermittent spray and immersion. 4. Post Anchorages: a. Refer to standard details for types of post anchorages and minimum requirements. b. Bolts at anchorages shall be minimum 1/2 -inch diameter. 5. Wall Brackets: Adjustable wall fitting, with provision for minimum three 3/8 -inch diameter AISI Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel bolts or concrete anchors. 6. Rail Terminals (including Wall Returns): Aluminum wall fitting with provision for three 3/8 -inch Type 304 fasteners. 7. Railing System Gate: a. Extruded aluminum rail components. b. Hardware Manufacturers and Products: 1) Julius Blum & Co., Inc., Carlstadt, NJ; No. 782/3 gate hinges with springs, and No. 784 gate latch and stop. 2) CraneVeyor Corp., South El Monte, CA; No. C4370b gate hinges with spring, No. C4369 gate latch, and No. C4368 gate stop. 3) Moultrie Manufacturing Co., Moultrie, GA; Part No. W60006. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) MARCH 12, 2026 05 52 16 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 8. Railing Picket Panels and Clamps: a. 1/2 -inch Schedule 40 aluminum pipe (picket). b. Extruded aluminum 1 -1/2 -inch by 7/8 -inch by 1/8 -inch channel. c. Furnish neoprene plug for each end of picket. d. Fasteners: Type stainless steel. 9. Toeboards: a. Molded or extruded Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6061-T6 aluminum. b. Provide slotted holes for expansion and contraction where required. D. Metal Supports Embedded in Concrete: In accordance with Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. E. Finishes: 1. Pipe and Post: In accordance with AA DAF45, designation AA -M32 -C22 -A41. 2. Cast Fittings and Toeboards: In accordance with AA DAF45, designation AA -M 10 -C22 -A41. 2.02 ANCHOR BOLTS, FASTENERS, AND CONCRETE ANCHORS A. Locknuts, Washers, and Screws: 1. Elastic Locknuts, Steel Flat Washers, Round Head Machine Screws (RHMS): AISI Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Flat Washers: Molded nylon. B. Bolts and Nuts for Bolting Railing to Metal Beams: ASTM Al93/A193M and ASTM A194/A194M, Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. C. Concrete Anchors: 1. Stainless steel, AISI Type 304 or Type 316. 2. Post -installed anchors in accordance with Section 05 05 19, Post -installed Anchors, unless otherwise specified herein. 3. Bolt Diameter: 1/2 -inch, minimum. ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 52 16 - 6 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: 1. Post Spacing: Maximum 6 -foot horizontal spacing. 2. Railing Posts Bolted to Metal or Concrete: a. In lieu of field cutting, provide approved fitting with sufficient post overlap, containing provisions for vertical adjustment. b. Field fit -up is required. 3. Free of burrs, nicks, and sharp edges when fabrication is complete. 4. Welding is not permitted. B. Shop/Factory Finishing: 1. Use same alloy for uniform appearance throughout fabrication for railings. 2. Railing and Post Fittings: Match fittings with color of pipe in railing. C. Shop Assembly: 1. Shop assemble rails, posts, and formed elbows with a close tolerance for tight fit. 2. Fit dowels tightly inside posts. D. Repair of Defective Work: Remove stains and replace defective Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Field fabrication of aluminum railing systems is not permitted. B. Where required, provide railing posts longer than needed and field cut to exact dimensions required in order to satisfy vertical variations on actual structure. C. Install railing with base that provides plus or minus 1/4 -inch vertical adjustment inside base fitting. If adjustment is required in field and exceeds plus or minus 1/4 -inch, reduce post length not to exceed beyond bottom of lowest set -screw or bolt in base fitting. D. Modification to supporting structure is not permitted where railing is to be attached. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) MARCH 12, 2026 05 52 16 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Mount railings only on completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by means not satisfying structural performance requirements. F. Protection from Entrapped Water: 1. Make provisions in exterior and interior installations subject to high humidity to drain water from railing system. 2. For posts mounted in concrete, bends, and elbows occurring at low points, drill weep holes of 1/4 -inch diameter at lowest possible elevations, one hole per post or rail. Drill hole in plane of rail. 3.02 RAILING INSTALLATION A. Assembly and Installation: Perform in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations for installation. B. Expansion Joints: 1. Maximum intervals of 54 feet on center and at structural joints. 2. Slip joint with internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond each side of joint. Provide 1/2 -inch slip joint gap to allow for expansion. 3. Fasten to one side using 3/8 -inch diameter set -screw. Place set -screw at bottom of pipe. 4. Locate joints within 12 inches of posts. Locate expansion joints in rails that span expansion joints in structural walls and floors supporting the posts. C. Posts and Rails: 1. Surface Mounted Posts: a. Bolt post baseplate connectors firmly in place. b. Shims, wedges, grout, and similar devices for railing post alignment not permitted. 2. Grouted Posts: a. Clean dust and foreign matter from sleeves or blockouts. b. Moisten interior of hole and surrounding surface with clean water. Fill hole with nonshrink grout or epoxy grout prior to installing post. c. Brace railing until grout sets. d. Posts installed outside and exposed to freezing temperatures, drill weep hole through post approximately 1/2 inch above level of grout inside post and in plane of rail to prevent entrapment and freezing of water inside post. ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 52 16 - 8 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Set posts plumb and aligned to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 4. Set rails horizontal or parallel to slope of steps to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 5. Install posts and rails in same plane. 6. Remove projections or irregularities and provide a smooth surface for sliding hands continuously along top rail. 7. Use offset rail for use on stairs and platforms if post is attached to web of stringers or structural platform supports. 8. Support 1 -1/2 -inch rails directly above stairway stringers with offset fittings. D. Wall Brackets: 1. Support wall rails on brackets spaced maximum 5 feet on centers as measured on the horizontal projection. 2. Install wall anchor backplates on solid blocking in stud walls. E. Toeboard: 1. Provide at railings, except where 4 -inch or higher concrete curbs are installed, at gates, or at stairways unless shown otherwise. 2. Accurately measure in field for correct length; after railing post installation cut and secure to posts. 3. Dimension between bottom of toeboard and walking surface not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Install plumb and aligned to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 5. Attach toeboards to posts via clamp that complies with design requirements while facilitating expansion and contraction. Do not screw directly to post or base. F. Railing System Gate: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.03 FIELD FINISHING A. Corrosion Protection: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion caused from direct contact with concrete and dissimilar metals by coating metal surfaces as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) MARCH 12, 2026 05 52 16 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 3.04 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. Post -installed anchors supporting railing systems require special inspection. B. Owner -Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with ICC IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in the Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. C. Contractor -Furnished Quality Control: Inspection and testing as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. 3.05 CLEANING A. Wash railing system thoroughly using clean water and soap. Rinse with clean water. B. Do not use acid solution, steel wool, or other harsh abrasive. C. If stain remains after washing, restore in accordance with railing manufacturer's recommendations or replace stained railings. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM GUARDRAILS (RAILINGS) PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 52 16 - 10 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 05 53 00 METAL GRATINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. c. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low - Alloy, High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra -High Strength. d. B210B210M, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes. e. B22 1, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 3. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. MBG 531, Metal Bar Grating Manual. b. MBG 532, Heavy -Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Grating: Show dimensions, weight, size, and location of connections to adjacent grating, supports, and other Work. b. Grating Anchorage: Show details of anchorage to supports to prevent displacement from traffic impact. c. Product data for grating, grating clips, anchors, accessories, and other manufactured products specified herein. d. Manufacturer's specifications, including coatings, surface treatment, and finishes. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Special handling and storage requirements. 2. Installation instructions. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS METAL GRATINGS 055300-1 MARY'S CREEK WRY 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As far is practical, factory assemble items. B. Package and clearly tag parts and assemblies that are, due to necessity, shipped unassembled. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO), Birmingham, AL. 2. IKG, Houston, TX. 3. Ohio Gratings, Inc., Canton, OH. 2.02 GRATING MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper as designated below. 1. Bearing Bars and Banding: ASTM B221 alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6. 2. Swaged Crossbar Rods: ASTM B221 alloy 6061 or 6063, or ASTM B210/B210M alloy 3003. 3. Finish: Mill. B. Carbon Steel: 1. Bearing Bars, Banding, and Rectangular Cross Bars: ASTM A1011/A1011M commercial steel Type II for hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip, or ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cross Bars made from Wire Rods: Not permitted. 3. Finish: Galvanized after fabrication. 2.03 LIGHT -DUTY AND MEDIUM -DUTY METAL BAR GRATING (TYPE A AND TYPE B) A. General Requirements: 1. Maximum Service Load: a. Light Duty (Type A): 100 psf uniformly distributed load. b. Medium Duty (Type B): 500 psf uniformly distributed load. 2. Maximum Deflection: Span/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. 3. Bearing Bar Spacing: a. Light Duty: 1-3/16 inch maximum, center -to -center. b. Medium Duty: 15/16 inch maximum, center -to -center. METAL GRATINGS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 53 00 - 2 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Cross Bar Spacing: 4 inches maximum, center -to -center. For aluminum I -bar grating with depths greater than 2 inches, provide cross bars at 2 inches maximum, center -to -center. 5. Bearing Bars, Cross Bars and Banding: Minimum thickness as specified in NAAMM MBG 531 or as shown on Drawings. B. Grating Materials: 1. Aluminum, pressure -locked I -bar grating fabricated by swaging crossbars between extruded I -shaped bearing bars. 2. Galvanized steel welded, rectangular bar grating fabricated by electro-forging cross bars to bearing bars. C. Surface: Plain Slip resistant, consisting of an applied abrasive fmish of aluminum -oxide aggregate Striated. D. Stair Treads: 1. Material and Type: Same as grating material and grating type as furnished for connecting walkway or work surface. 2. Nosings: Integral ribbing and serrated edge on one long axis of tread, or nonslip abrasive on each tread along one long edge. 3. Carrier Plate or Angle: Furnish at each end for connection to stair stringers. 2.04 HEAVY-DUTY METAL BAR GRATING (TYPE C) A. General Requirements: 1. Maximum Service Load: AASHTO H-20. 2. Maximum Deflection: Span/240. 3. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-7/8 inch maximum center -to -center. 4. Cross Bar Spacing: 4 inches maximum center -to -center. 5. Bearing Bars, Cross Bars and Banding: Minimum thickness as specified in NAAMM MBG 532 or as shown on Drawings. B. Grating Type: Galvanized steel, heavy-duty, rectangular bar grating fabricated by welding crossbars between rectangular bearing bars. C. Surface: 1. Plain: Slip resistant, consisting of an applied abrasive finish of aluminum -oxide aggregate Striated. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL GRATINGS MARCH 12, 2026 05 53 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Embedded Frames: 1. As indicated on Drawings and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 2. Extruded aluminum frames as manufactured by: a. Ohio Gratings, Inc., Canton, OH. b. Thompson Fabricating, LLC, Tarrant, AL. B. Grating Clamps: 1. Use at flanged beam and bolted angle frame supports. 2. Removable from above grating walkway surface. 3. Provide hat bracket, recessed bolt, and bottom clamp of same material as grating. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Direct Metals Company, LLC, Kennesaw, GA; Grating Clamp. b. Grating Fasteners, Inc., Harvey, LA; G -Clip. C. Anchor Stud and Saddle Clip: 1. Use at embedded angle frame supports with stud anchor and nut recessed below top of grating surface. 2. Removable from above grating walkway surface. 3. Provide Type 316 stainless steel welded threaded stud anchor, nut, washer, and saddle clip. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Welded Stud Anchor: 1) Nelson Stud Welding, Inc., Elyria, OH. 2) Stud Welding Associates, Inc. Elyria, OH. b. Saddle Clip: 1) Direct Metals Company, LLC, Kennesaw, GA; Saddle Clip. 2) Grating Fasteners, Inc., Harvey, LA; Saddle Clip. 3) Struct-Fast, Inc., Baltimore, MD; Grate -Fast. 5. At Embedded Extruded Aluminum: a. Provide aluminum clip, bolt, nut, and washer, with clip engaging bottom flange of I -bar. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Direct Metals Company, LLC, Kennesaw, GA; Plank Clip. 2) Thompson Fabricating Company, Inc., Birmingham, AL; TFCO Standard Hold Down Clip. METAL GRATINGS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 53 00 - 4 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.06 FABRICATION A. General: 1. In accordance with NAAMM MBG 531 or NAAMM MBG 532. 2. Do not weld aluminum grating. 3. Conceal fastenings where practical. 4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware or other materials. 5. Cutouts: a. Fabricate in grating sections for penetrations indicated. b. Arrange to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating grating. c. Edge band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars. 6. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. 7. Field measure areas to receive grating. Verify dimensions of new fabricated supports and fabricate to dimension required for specified clearances. 8. Section Length: Sufficient to prevent section from falling through clear opening when oriented in the span direction and one end is touching either the concrete or the vertical leg of grating support. 9. Minimum Bearing: 1 inch for grating depth up to 2-1/4 inches and 2 inches for grating depth greater than 2-1/4 inches. 10. Banding and Toe Plates: Same material as grating and welded to bearing bars in accordance with requirements of NAAMM MBG 531 and NAAMM MBG 532. B. Light -Duty and Medium -Duty Metal Bar Grating: Single grating section shall be not less than 1.5 feet or greater than 3 feet in width or weigh more than 150 pounds. C. Heavy -Duty Metal Bar Grating: Minimum width of grating sections shall be 2 feet regardless of length and weight. D. Supports: 1. Same material as grating, except that supports which are to be embedded in concrete shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless part of an extruded aluminum system. 2. Coordinate dimensions and fabrication with grating to be supported. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS METAL GRATINGS 055300-5 MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Electrolytic Protection: 1. Protect aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals, or embedded or in contact with masonry, grout, or concrete as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 2. Allow paint to dry before installation of material. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Until grating sections are securely fastened in place, area shall be appropriately barricaded or flagged to alert people working in area of potential fall hazard. B. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install supports such that grating sections have a solid bearing on both ends, and that grating sections will not rock or wobble under design loads. D. Install grating supports plumb and level as applicable. E. Install sections of welded frames with anchors to straight plane without offsets. F. Field locate and install fasteners to fit grating layout. G. Anchor grating securely to supports using minimum of four fastener clips and bolts per grating section. H. Each grating or plank section shall be easily removable and replaceable. I. Completed installation shall be rigid and neat in appearance. J. Protect painted and galvanized surfaces during installation. K. Repair damaged coatings as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. END OF SECTION METAL GRATINGS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 05 53 00 - 6 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Wood Council (AWC): 2, National Design Specification for Wood Construction. 2. American Hardboard Association (AHA): A135.4, Basic Hardboard. 3. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC): 112, Standard for Tongue -and -Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking. 4. American Lumber Standards Committee's Board of Review (ALSC). 5. American Wood Preservers' Association (AWPA): a. U1, User Specification for Treated Wood. b. M4, Standard for the Care of Preservative -Treated Wood Products. 6. APA - The Engineered Wood Association (APA): a. PRP-108, Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural -Use Panels (Form E445). b. Form B445, APA Quality Assurance Policies for Structural -Use Panels Qualified to PRP-108. 7. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. c. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. d. C1177/C1177M, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. e. C1396/C1396M, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. f. D226/D226M, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. g. D3498, Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field -Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems. h. D5456, Standard Specification for Evaluation of Structural Composite Lumber Products. i. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. j. F 1667, Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROUGH CARPENTRY FEBRUARY 24, 2026 06 10 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 8. Composite Panel Association (CPA): A208.1, Particleboard. 9. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC), Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship, Version 4-0 (STD 01 001). 10. International Code Council (ICC): a. ESR-1539, Power -Driven Staples and Nails. b. International Building Code (IBC). 11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 12. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB): 1003, Grading Rules. 13. UL: 723, Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 14. U.S. Department of Commerce —Voluntary Product Standard (DOC): a. PS 1, Structural Plywood. b. PS 2, Performance Standard for Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels. c. PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard. 15. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): G5, Western Lumber Grading Rules. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. AHA: American Hardboard Association. B. ALSC: American Lumber Standards Committee's Board of Review. C. AWC: American Wood Council. D. CPA: Composite Panel Association. E. DOC: Department of Commerce. F. SPIB: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Indicate component materials and dimensions, and include construction and application details for the following: a. Underlayment. b. Sheathing. c. Metal framing anchors. d. Construction adhesives. e. Construction panel thickness where not shown. f. APA product reports in accordance with 2012 IBC, Section 104.11 for structural composite lumber. ROUGH CARPENTRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 10 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Informational Submittals: 1. ICC Evaluation Service Reports, including the following as a minimum: a. Connections and Fasteners. b. Wood Treatment. c. Nails. d. Wood Framing. e. Structural Panels. f. Shear Wall Panels. 2. Wood treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation, and finishing of treated material. 3. Material Certificates: Showing species and grade selected for dimension lumber for each use. a. Material certificates for dimensional lumber in compliance with allowable unit stresses. Show species and grade selected for each use as well as design values approved by the ALSC's Board of Review. b. For each type of preservative -treated wood product, include certification by treatment plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. c. For waterborne -treated products include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to Site. 4. Material test reports from testing laboratory showing and interpreting test results in accordance with test methods UL 723, NFPA 255, and ASTM E84, relative to fire -retardant treated wood products. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Upon delivery to Site, immediately place materials in area protected from weather. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp areas. B. Protect sheet materials from breaking corners and damaging surfaces while unloading. C. Store materials a minimum of 6 inches above ground on framework or blocking and cover with waterproof covering, providing for adequate air circulation and ventilation. Store sheet materials flat, not on edge. D. Protect fire -retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROUGH CARPENTRY FEBRUARY 24, 2026 06 10 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. F. Store materials for which maximum moisture content is specified in areas where humidity can be controlled. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: 1. In accordance with DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules and wood species certified by ALSC. 2. Design values for wood members equal to those published in supplement to AWC 2. 3. Stamp or brand each unexposed piece of lumber with grade, species, and moisture content at time of mill surfacing. 4. Furnish exposed lumber pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece. If completely exposed, and permitted by local building jurisdiction, omit grade stamps entirely. B. Lumber sizes shown on Drawings are nominal, unless shown otherwise. Provide actual sizes as required by DOC PS 20 for use. C. Dressed lumber S4S, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. D. Moisture content of lumber not to exceed 19 percent, unless otherwise specified and marked "DRY". E. Each plywood panel identified with designated grade trademark of APA. F. Lumber: FSC certified. 2.02 LUMBER A. Framing Lumber: Douglas Fir -Larch, No. 1 or better unless indicated otherwise below: Usage Minimum Grade Plates, sills, blocking, furring, Douglas Fir -Larch No. 2, Hemlock, braces, and nailers Southern Pine Stud grade, nondense Structural light framing, general Douglas Fir -Larch No. 1, or framing, studs 2 inches to 4 inches Southern Pine No. 1 thick by 2 inches to 4 inches wide ROUGH CARPENTRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 10 00 - 4 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Usage Minimum Grade Structural joists, headers, posts and Douglas Fir -Larch No. 1, or planks, 2 inches to 4 inches thick by Southern Pine No. 1 5 inches and wider Posts and timbers Douglas Fir -Larch Select Structural, Southern Pine Select Structural Beams and stringers Douglas Fir -Larch Select Structural, Southern Pine Select Structural Baffles Douglas Fir -Larch No. 1, Eastern Hemlock -Tamarack No. 1 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Plywood: 1. General: a. Where construction panels are shown on Drawings for the following concealed types of applications, provide APA Performance -Rated Panels complying with requirements designated under each application for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail, and thickness. b. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with DOC PS 1 for plywood construction panels and for products not manufactured under DOC PS 1 provisions, in accordance with APA PRP-108 and APA Form B445. c. Trademark: Each construction panel factory -marked with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. B. Plywood Backing Panel: Mounting electrical, telephone, and like equipment; provide fire -retardant treated plywood panel with grade designation, APA C -D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness shown on Drawings, or, if not shown on Drawings, not less than 15/32 inch. 2.04 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative -treated wood, in accordance with AWPA U1 and AWPA M4, mark and grade each treated item in accordance with SPIB 1003 or WWPA G5. 1. Kiln -dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat wood in contact with roofing or flashing. 3. Treat wood in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Treat wood less than 18 inches above grade. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROUGH CARPENTRY FEBRUARY 24, 2026 06 10 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY B. Aboveground Materials: 1. Pressure treat items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 per cubic foot. 2. Interior Use: After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to maximum moisture content of 19 percent and 15 percent respectively. 3. Treat the following items: a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. c. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. d. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. C. Materials in Contact with Ground or Freshwater: Pressure treat in accordance with applicable AWPA U1. D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.05 FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED WOOD A. Pressure treat lumber and plywood with fire -retardant chemicals in accordance with applicable AWPA U1 and AWPA M4 standard for species, product, preservative and end use to ensure flame -spread rating not higher than 25 with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when tested for 30 minutes duration under UL 723 and ASTM E84. B. Treated lumber and plywood labeled and tested by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. shall show performance rating. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Fasteners and connectors in contact with preservative -treated or fire -retardant -treated wood shall be hot -dipped zinc -coated galvanized steel or stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. ROUGH CARPENTRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 10 00 - 6 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Conform to ASTM F 1667. C. Nails: 1. Conform to ASTM F 1667. 2. Steel common nails or alternatives listed in rough carpentry section of General Structural Notes found on Drawings. 3. Use hot -dipped zinc -coated nails wherever exposed. 4. Use deformed shank nails for fastening underlayment. D. Staples: Conform to ASTM F 1667, galvanized where exposed. E. Power Driven Fasteners: Conform to ICC ESR-1539. F. Bolts and Screws: Conform to ASTM A307, galvanized where exposed. G. Framing Anchors, Joist, and Beam Hangers: 1. Manufacturers: a. USP Structural Connectors, Montgomery, MN. b. KC Metal Products, San Jose, CA. c. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA. d. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co., Bedford Heights, OH. H. Fasteners for Gypsum Sheathing Board: 1. Galvanized roofing nails 3/8 -inch head to 7/16 -inch head, 1-3/4 inches long. 2. Staples No. 11 or No. 16 -gauge, 7/16 inch by 1-1/2 inches with divergent points. 3. Type S or W No. 6, 1-1/4 inches long drywall screws; meeting the requirements of ASTM C1002. I. Metal Cross Bridging: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co., Bedford Heights, OH; zinc -coated steel compression bridging. b. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; galvanized NC/NCA bridging. J. Structural Framing Connectors: 1. Manufacturers: a. Simpson Strong -Tie Co, Inc. Pleasanton, CA; hot -dip galvanized. b. USP Structural Connectors; hot -dip galvanized. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROUGH CARPENTRY FEBRUARY 24, 2026 06 10 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY K. Ply Clips: Extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy. L. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A653/A653M, zinc -coated steel, 18 gauge minimum. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS A. Construction Adhesives: Elastomeric glue conforming to ASTM D3498 for gluing subfloor to joists. B. Roofmg Felt: Asphalt -saturated organic felt conforming to ASTM D226/D226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact grades and dimensions. 3.02 GENERAL A. Lay out, cut, fit, and install rough carpentry items. Anchor sufficiently to ensure rigidity and permanence. B. Install items accurate to dimension, true to line, level, and square unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Provide for installation and support of other Work. C. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. D. Countersink nailheads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. E. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. F. Field treat field cuts and holes in pressure -treated lumber with preservative in accordance with AWPA M4. ROUGH CARPENTRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 10 00 - 8 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF G. Holes: 1/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter, except provide holes for cast -in -place anchor bolts 3/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter. 1. Enlarge tight holes requiring forcible driving of bolts by reaming. H. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Sills and Plates: Set level and flush with outside face of foundation or as shown on Drawings. B. Stud Framing: 1. Plates and Stud Members: a. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates for load -bearing partitions, 2 inches thick by width of stud. Lap top plates at corners. Splice top plate two stud spaces from lower top plate. b. Provide single bottom plate and single top plate for nonload-bearing partitions, 2 inches thick by width of studs. c. Provide studs in continuous lengths without splice. d. End nail studs to bottom plate and end nail to lower top plate. Tilt up and anchor into place. e. Face -nail upper top plate to lower top plate. f. Nail bottom plate to wood construction. g. Anchor bottom plate to concrete structure as shown on Drawings. h. Triple studs at corners and partition intersections. i. Partition parallel with joists, locate two joists directly below studs. j. Frame openings with double studs and headers for openings less than 4 feet; triple studs and headers for openings 4 feet and greater. 2. Headers: a. In bearing and exterior walls, provide headers over openings. Maximum span: 1) Spans to 3 Feet 6 Inches: Two 2 by 4. 2) Spans to 4 Feet 6 Inches: Two 2 by 6. 3) Spans to 6 Feet 0 Inch: Two 2 by 8. 4) Spans to 8 Feet 0 Inch: Two 2 by 10, braced. 3. Blocking: a. Install in continuous, staggered horizontal row where shown on Drawings or required by code. b. Locate blocking to facilitate installation of finishing materials, fixtures, specialty items, hardware, and trim. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-9 MARY'S CREEK WRY C. Miscellaneous Framing: 1. Fire Stops: a. Stud Walls: 2 inches thick by depth of member blocking at each floor level and top story ceiling level, so placed that the maximum dimension of any concealed space is not over 10 feet. b. Floor and Ceiling Framing: 2 inches thick by depth of wood member blocking, fitted to fill openings from one space to another to prevent drafts. c. Chimneys and Fireplaces: Keep wood framing minimum of 2 inches from outside face of masonry and 4 inches from fireplace back wall. 2. Framing for Mechanical Work: a. Frame members for passage of pipes and ducts to avoid cutting structural members. b. Do not cut, notch, or bore framing members for passage of pipes or conduits without concurrence of Engineer. Reinforce framing members where damaged by cutting. 3.04 PRESERVATIVE -TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Provide preservative -treated wood for framing, blocking, furring, nailing strips built into exterior masonry walls, wood in contact with concrete or masonry and in conjunction with gravel stops, and built-up roofing. B. Apply two brush coats of same preservative used in original treatment to sawed or cut surfaces of treated lumber. 3.05 FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED WOOD A. Provide fire -retardant treated lumber and plywood for backing panels at electrical, telephones, and like equipment and where indicated on Drawings. B. Use FR -S rated wood on interior only. C. Use exterior rated wood outside and where relative humidity is above 80 percent. ROUGH CARPENTRY PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 10 00 - 10 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.06 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in Statement of Special Inspections Plan. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. B. Contractor -Furnished Quality Control: Inspect and test as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROUGH CARPENTRY FEBRUARY 24, 2026 06 10 00 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 0616 00 SHEATHING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint -and -penetration treatment materials. 1.02 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing requirements and installation, special details, transitions, air -leakage testing, protection, and work scheduling that covers air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint -and -penetration treatment materials. B. Product Data Submittals: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 2. For air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing, include manufacturer's technical data and tested physical and performance properties of products. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SHEATHING APRIL 17, 2026 06 16 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Shop Drawings: For air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing assemblies. 1. Show locations and extent of sheathing, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions. 2. Include details for sheathing joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: From air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing manufacturer, certifying compatibility of sheathing accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the sheathing. C. Product Test Reports: For each air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing assembly, indicating compliance with specified requirements, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: Air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing. E. Field quality -control reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer of air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. SHEATHING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 16 00 - 2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: As tested in accordance with ASTM El 19; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. B. Air -Barrier and Water -Resistant Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Performance: Air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing assembly, and seals with adjacent construction, are to be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid -water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air - barrier assemblies are to be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. 2.02 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing, Walls: ASTM Cl 177/C1177M. 1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. 2. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation. 3. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 90 days in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by sheathing manufacturer to produce a complete air -barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air -barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SHEATHING APRIL 17, 2026 06 16 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.03 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. For wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M or of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Power -Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. C. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached. 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C954. 2.04 SHEATHING JOINT -AND -PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass - fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. Sheathing Tape: Self -adhering glass -fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass -mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. B. Sheathing Tape for Foam -Plastic Sheathing: Pressure -sensitive plastic tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. SHEATHING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 16 00 - 4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.10.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two -Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. D. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Comply with GA -253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold -formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install panels with a 3/8 -inch gap where non -load -bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install panels with a 1/4 -inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V -grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SHEATHING APRIL 17, 2026 06 16 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of panels. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self -furring metal lath is screw -attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. E. Seal sheathing joints in accordance with sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass -fiber sheathing tape to glass -mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air -barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 2. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 3. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 4. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 5. Compatible materials have been used. 6. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 7. Connections between assemblies (sheathing and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 8. All penetrations have been sealed. SHEATHING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 16 00 - 6 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SHEATHING APRIL 17, 2026 06 16 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI): Z124.3, Plastic Lavatories. 2. American National Standards Institute and Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (ANSI/HPVA): HP -1, American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. 3. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Quality Certification Program. 4. Architectural Woodwork Institute, Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, Woodwork Institute (AWI, AWMAC, WI): Architectural Woodwork Standards. 5. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): a. 156.9, Cabinet Hardware. b. 156.11, Cabinet Locks. 6. Federal Specifications (FS): A -A-1936, Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber. 7. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials/American National Standards Institute, Inc. (IAPMO/ANSI): Z124.6, Plastic Sinks. 8. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 4586, High-pressure decorative laminates (HPL, HPDL) — Sheets based on thermosetting resins (usually called laminates). 9. Woodwork Institute (WI): Certified Compliance Program (CCP). 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Trim: Includes baseboards, chair rails, interior cornices, window stools, door frames, and door and window casings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Show details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and required field measurements. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK MARCH 25, 2026 06 41 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Describe and illustrate features of design showing field measurements, construction details, dimensions, materials, and finish. 1) Use full-size or 1/4 -size scale drawings. 2) Key to Contract Drawings. c. Furnish manufacturer's descriptive literature of specialty items not manufactured by woodwork manufacturer. 2. Samples: a. Each finish to be applied by woodwork manufacturer. b. Manufacturer's full range of standard color samples of each material for selection. c. Casework unit complete with hardware, including locks and accessories, and top. Unit may be incorporated in the Work. B. Informational Submittals: Proof of woodwork manufacturer qualifications. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Successful completion of comparable work on similar size project within 2 years before start of construction on this Project. 2. Quality Standards: AWI, AWMAC, WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. 3. Current member of AWI. 4. Owner reserves right to approve woodwork manufacturer selected to furnish Work. B. Casework and Paneling: 1. Reference to Premium, Custom, or Economy Grade: As defined in AWI, AWMAC, WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. 2. Provide Custom Grade, unless otherwise specified. C. Cabinet Hardware: In accordance with BHMA 156.9 and BHMA 156.11. D. Work in this section shall be accomplished under the Quality Certification Program of AWI. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Defer delivery to Site until installation and storage areas are complete and dry of wet type construction, and excessive moisture has been out of building for at least 10 days. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 064100-2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Protect casework and paneling from damage and dampness. Store in weathertight, well -ventilated areas. Do not subject to extreme changes of temperature or humidity. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. For a minimum of 72 hours prior to installation, allow woodwork to come to equilibrium onsite in space where it is to be installed. B. Humidity: For 24 hours before, during, and after installation, maintain relative humidity between 25 percent and 55 percent. C. Temperature: For 24 hours before, during, and after installation, maintain ambient temperature between 65 degrees F and 75 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CASEWORK FINISH A. Plastic Laminate: 1. Meet requirements of AWI, AWMAC, WI Architectural Woodwork Standards Section 10. 2. Furnish casework exposed surfaces, including top, edges, front face, and backsplashes, with plastic laminate in colors indicated in Interior Finish Schedule. 2.02 CASEWORK HARDWARE A. Hinges: For flush overlay or reveal overlay, use pin, pivot, or European style hinge; 626 satin chrome fmish. 1. Manufacturers: a. Blum, Inc. b. Grass America, Inc. c. Stanley. B. Continuous Hinges: Stanley No. Sc 311-1/4; 625 bright chrome finish. C. Locks: Olympus Lock 100DR/200DW or Schlage CL -Series; 26D or 626 satin chrome finish keyed into building door lock system. D. Catches: Stanley No. SP46; 628 aluminum finish, magnetic. E. Pivot Door Slides: Knape and Vogt No. 8080EZ Series. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK MARCH 25, 2026 06 41 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Wire Pulls: Solid brass or bronze, Stanley No. 4484, Baldwin No. 4676; 626 satin chrome finish. G. Drawer Slides: Knape and Vogt No. 1300 or Grant No. 336SC. H. Heavy -Duty Drawer Slides: Knape and Vogt No. 1429 or Fulterer No. FR 5609. I. Shelf Supports: Knape and Vogt No. 255/256 or Grant No. 120/121, white finish. J. Heavy -Duty Shelf Supports: Knape and Vogt slotted standard No. 82 and bracket No. 182, white finish. K. Shelf and Rod Support: Stanley No. 7046 or Knape and Vogt No. 1194. L. Hanging Rod with Flanges: Knape and Vogt No. 770-1 with 734 and 735. M. Heavy -Duty Folding Bracket: National Hardware No. V772 folding shelf bracket. N. Heavy -Duty Pivot Door Slides: HAWA-Turnaway 35/X3, pivot sliding door fitting. 2.03 PLASTIC LAMINATE A. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: ISO 4586 HPL/HPDL, grades as indicated. If not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Wilsonart; High Wear Laminate. b. Panolam Surface Systems; Nevamar HPL. c. Formica Corp.; Formica Laminate. 2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: a. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. d. Edges: ABS/PVC extruded fabrication. 3. Materials for Semi -exposed Surfaces: a. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, ISO 4586, Grade VGS. b. Edges of Plastic -Laminate Shelves: ABS/PVC extruded fabrication. c. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with ABS/PVC extrusion banding. d. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 064100-4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic -Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, ISO 4586, Grade BKL. B. Color, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: As selected by Architect form laminate manufacturer's full range. 2.04 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS A. Solid Polymer Components: 1. General: Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6. 2. Countertops: a. Thickness: 1) Countertops and Backsplashes: 1/2 inch. 2) Wall Surfaces: 1/4 inch. b. Edge Treatment: 180 -degree full bullnose. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Aristech Surfaces, LLC; Avonite Acrylic Solid Surface. 2) Dupont; Corian. 3) Formica Corp.; Formica Solid Surfacing. 4) US Surface Warehouse; Livingstone. 5) Wilsonart LLC; Solid Surface. 3. Integral Kitchen Sink: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Dupont; Corian Accessible, 28-1/2 inches long by 17-1/2 inches wide by 6-1/4 inches deep. 4. Integral Restroom Lavatory Sink: a. Manufacturer and Products: 1) Dupont; Corian Accessible 8254, rectangular sink 19-1/2 inches long by 14-1/4 inches wide by 6-3/4 inches deep. 2) Dupont; Corian Accessible 820, Oval sink 16-3/4 inches long by 12-1/2 inches wide by 6 1/4 inches deep.) 2.05 PANELING A. Materials: Meet requirements of AWI, AWMAC, WI Architectural Woodwork Standards Section 8. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK MARCH 25, 2026 06 41 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.06 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Adhesives: 1. Woodwork: Phenol -resin or resorcinol -resin. 2. Plastic Laminate: Contact cement; FS A -A-1936. B. Woodwork Putty: Single component, acrylic latex polymer, color to match finish. C. Hardware: Furnish fasteners and miscellaneous hardware required for assembling and anchoring woodwork, including casework. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Moisture Content: Kiln dry lumber to an average moisture content range as follows: 1. Exterior Work: 9 percent to 15 percent. 2. Interior Work: 5 percent to 10 percent. B. Casework Construction: AWI, AWMAC, WI Architectural Woodwork Standards Section 10, Custom Grade, flush overlay. C. Casework Fronts: Plastic laminate. D. Casework Units: Shop assembled for field installation. E. Install concealed hinges on doors. F. Drawer Slides: Use side -mounted, heavy-duty type. G. Paneling and Casework: 1. Book matched on a single panel face. 2. Center balanced on each panel face. 3. Sequenced and numbered between adjacent panels in a room. 4. Sequencing between rooms is not required. H. Install casework hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Provide items where indicated and as required for a complete installation. 2. Provide pulls and catches on casework doors unless indicated otherwise. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 064100-6 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine grounds, stripping, and blocking for cabinet attachment. B. Do not proceed to install until conditions are acceptable to installer. C. Verify surfaces to receive architectural woodwork items are properly prepared. 3.02 CASEWORK INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installation of, and cut openings for mechanical, electrical, and other items that penetrate casework surfaces and tops. B. Install casework in true alignment, level, and plumb. C. Secure units with nails or screws to cleats that have been anchored to building structure or wall framing. D. Install wall -hung cabinets to rigidly support cabinet weight plus normally expected weight of cabinet contents. E. Accurately scribe and closely fit faceplates, filler strips, and trim strips to irregularities of adjacent surfaces. F. Adhere plastic laminate as recommended by laminate manufacturer. 1. Apply with as few cross joints as possible and no longitudinal joints. 2. Scribe neatly to vertical surfaces. G. Toe Space at Front of Cabinets: Provide by installing front face of cabinets 3 inches in front of base face. 3.03 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal members level and vertical members plumb. B. Miter corners and cope interior angles so that no end grain is exposed. C. Running Trim: Install in long lengths and jointed by 45 -degree scarf joints only where solid fastening can be made. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK MARCH 25, 2026 06 41 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Miscellaneous: Furnish fasteners and miscellaneous hardware required for assembling and anchoring woodwork. E. Set finish nails in woodwork sufficiently to fill set hole with putty, not wax. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware and leave in smooth working condition. B. Adjust doors and drawers to operate without restriction. C. Surfaces: Clean and ready for use. D. Staining or Discoloration of Finish: Restore to original finish or replace unit. END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 064100-8 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 06 70 00 FIBERGLASS REINFORMED PLASTIC PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Weir Plates B. Scope of Work: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as required to properly install the entire fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) Products specified herein. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section 05 05 20 "Anchor Bolts and Concrete Inserts" 2. Section 40 05 31.10 "Piping System, PVC and CPVC Pipe". 3. Section 40 05 31.11 "Piping System, Chemical Feed". 4. Section 40 10 01 "Polyethylene Storage Tank". 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM International, Inc. (ASTM): 1. D 635- Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self - Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position 2. D3647 — Practice for Classifying Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Shapes According to Composition 3. D3917 - Specification for Dimensional Tolerance of Thermosetting Glass - Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Shapes 4. D 4385 - Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Thermosetting Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Products 5. E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 70 00 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 6. F 1092 - Specification for Fiberglass (GRP) Pultruded Open -Weather Storm and Guard, Square Railing Systems 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: 1. Environmental conditions: Fiberglass fabrications will be exposed to severe environmental conditions including temperatures to 120°F with 100 percent humidity and hydrogen sulfide gases. All fiberglass components shall have UV inhibitors. 2. Structural Performance: FRP products shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, hydraulic loads, and stresses within limits and under project conditions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with specification Section 01 33 00. 1. Refer to the Equipment Schedule at the end of this Section. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Catalog information and catalog cuts showing materials, design tasks, and showing load, span, and deflection; include manufacturer's specifications. 2. Resin material data, safety sheet, and chemical resistance charts. 3. Color selection chart or samples. 4. Information regarding each type of connection. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Show all FRP materials as required and include all dimensions, connections, fasteners, tolerances, assembly, and installation details as required. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufactures installation instructions. 2. Handling and storage requirements. 3. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer. 4. Certificate of Compliance: For each type of product proposed from manufacturer. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS 06 70 00 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 5. Field quality -control reports. 6. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. All items to be provided under this Section shall be furnished only by manufacturers having a minimum of ten (10) year of experience in the design and manufacture of similar products and systems. 2. Additionally, if requested, a record of at least five (5) previous, separate, similar successful installations in the last five (5) years shall be provided. 3. Manufacturer shall be certified to the ISO 9001-2000 standard. B. The Installing Contractor shall; assure that all field dimensions are taken accurately and communicated properly to the FRP Fabricator, that other trades will not affect a proper installation of the FRP, and that all manufacturer's instruction and recommendations are followed. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with FRP fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.08 COORDINATION 1. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 70 00 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY Package and clearly tag parts and assemblies that are of necessity shipped unassembled in a manner that will protect the materials from damage, and facilitate identification and final assembly in the field. B. Storage of Products: 1. All materials shall be carefully handled to prevent them from abrasion, cracking, chipping, twisting, other deformations, and other types of damage. Store adhesives, resins, and their catalysts and hardeners in dry indoor storage facilities between 70°F and 85°F. 2. If FRP materials are not to be installed immediately, then store to prevent twisting, bending, breaking, or damage of any kind. Keep material covered to prevent unnecessary exposure to UV. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. All FRP items furnished under this Section shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents. 2. FRP items shall be constructed of strand roving, transverse mat, and a synthetic surface veil, including ultraviolet light inhibitors. 3. All fmished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin - rich, and free of voids without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure to corrosives, wear or weathering. 4. All FRP products shall be flame retardant per ASTM E-84 Class 1 Flame Spread of 25 or less. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Description: FRP structural shapes shall be a composite of glass reinforcements and resin mixture of approximately 45 percent resin to glass ratio, or as required achieving desired properties, manufactured by the pultrusion process, unless otherwise noted, and free of visual defects. Dimensional tolerances shall conform to ASTM D 3917. B. Resins: Premium grade, chemical resistant, thermosetting vinyl ester containing a UV inhibitor and a flame retardant. Provide synthetic surface veil and polyurethane coating protection system on all components. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS 06 70 00 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF C. Fiberglass reinforcements shall be Type E glass, unless noted otherwise herein, in continuous glass fiber strand roving, continuous glass strand mats, and surface mats which will produce a resin rich surface for maximum chemical resistance. D. Provide smooth surfaces with no exposed glass fibers and free of cracks, rips, and blisters. Manufacture pultruded sections with a colored resin so that the color is throughout the section. Use one color for all portions of the system. Coat all cut ends with a compatible resin or a polyurethane coating in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. All anchors, fasteners and hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. F. Products Shall have the following minimum structural properties: Property Test Method ASTM Longitudinal Direction Transverse Direction Tensile Stress. psi D-638 30,000 7,000 Tensile Modules, psi D-638 2.5 x 106 0.8 x 106 Compressive Stress, psi D-695 30,000 15,000 Compressive Modulus, psi D-695 2.5 x 106 1.0 x 106 Flexural Stress, psi D-790 30,000 10,000 Flexural Modulus, psi D-790 1.8 x 106 0.8 x 106 Modules of Elasticity, psi Full Section 2.8 x 106 2.03 OVERFLOW THROUGH PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Overflow troughs and launders shall withstand the forces imposed during water/wastewater treatment operations without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Troughs shall be designed to not fail due to upward buoyant forces or due to the weight of process water in the trough. The troughs and launders shall be designed to support, within stress and deflection limitations, the loadings as listed in the design section of AWWA F101. These loading include, but not limited to: 1. Downward vertical loads. 2. Buoyant loadings. 3. Lateral loadings. 4. Thermal stress. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 70 00 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 5. Torsional stability. 6. Trough -to -trough stabilization. C. Troughs shall be designed to meet the deflection and stress limits specified below: 1. Deflection Under Load - Maximum vertical deflection under full buoyant or gravity load shall be less than or equal to L/1000, where L is defined as the unsupported trough length, in inches. Under no circumstances shall the maximum vertical deflection, measured at mid -point between trough supports, exceed 3/16". 2. Maximum trough side wall horizontal deflection under full lateral load shall be less than or equal to D/100, where D is defined as the trough depth, in inches. Under no circumstances shall the maximum side wall deflection exceed 3/16". 3. Trough bottom deflection (oilcanning) under full buoyant or gravity load shall be less than or equal to W/100, where W is defined as the trough width, in inches (mm). Under no circumstances shall the maximum bottom deflection exceed 3/16". 4. Design of stabilizers and appurtenant mounting hardware shall be the responsibility of the trough manufacturer. Trough hardware shall Type 316 stainless steel. Stainless steel cables are not permitted. 5. Fiber Stress Limitations - Supplemental to the deflection criteria, the troughs shall also be designed such that the maximum wall stress under the most severe loading conditions is less than or equal to 1500 psi. This stress criteria is equivalent to 7:1 safety factor (approximate) as applied to the tensile and flexural properties of contact molded troughs and launders. D. Thermal Expansion/Contraction: Design troughs to accommodate a thermally induced expansion or contraction of 1/8 -inch per 20 -foot length over the temperature range specified above E. Fabricate troughs by hand lay-up method such that: 1. Inner surfaces are smooth and resin rich. 2. Outer surfaces are reasonably smooth and no glass fibers exposed. 3. Size and number of air bubbles are held to a minimum. 4. Laminations are dense and without voids, dry spots, cracks or crazes. 5. Inner surfaces are reinforced with a glass surfacing mat, followed by chopped strand glass laminate (maximum 2 oz. per sq. ft.) In a minimum of two layers. Void content of complete laminate shall not exceed 2-1/2 percent of laminate volume. F. Thickness of fmal laminate is not less than 1/4 -inch. Tolerance shall be plus 1/8 -inch, minus 0. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS 06 70 00 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF G. Reinforce troughs with integrally or molded longitudinal stiffener sections. Additional horizontal stiffness and rigidity shall be proved through the use of spreader placed at appropriate points and fastened to the trough with stainless steel hardware. H. Top edges of troughs shall be straight molded within 1/16 -inch. I. End flanges and blind ends shall be a minimum of 1-1/2 times the nominal thickness of the trough and shall conform to the fiber stress limitations set forth in the design section of this specification. Provide a surface mounted end closure on the upstream end of each trough. The back end of each trough shall be integrally formed with the bottoms and walls of the fabrications. Provide Type 316 SS adjustable trough end hangers and supports manufactured with Type 316 SS structural angles and structural members in the back end of each trough to permit a minimum vertical leveling adjustment of 1-1/2 inches. Slotted holes in the back of the trough that are mounted directly to the filter wall are unacceptable. An integrally molded waterstop shall be provided on the trough whenever the trough is grouted into and/or passes through a wall. K. ABS spreaders shall be bolted between the trough walls on approximate 2 ft. centers to enhance the structural rigidity of the trough system. 2.04 STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS A. Provide all necessary beam cross -members, connection angles, fasteners and mounting brackets, designed and sized by manufacturer. Structural shapes shall be fabricated with good workmanship, closely fitted joints, and finished true to line and in accurate position to permit installation and proper joining of parts in the field. 1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 -inch. 2. Field verify dimensions and arrangement prior to fabrication. 3. Use Type 316 stainless steel supports, bolts, and washers. 4. All joint surfaces to be bonded shall be abraded to remove surface gloss and be free of burrs or other foreign materials that would prevent proper adhesion. 5. Use high -strength epoxy adhesives designed for FRP use and mechanical fasteners. 6. All pieces to have easily identified part numbers or piece marks. 7. Shop assemble pieces into the largest practical assembly suitable for shipping. B. Deflection and Safety Factors: FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 70 00 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Deflection Criteria: Not to exceed L/360. 2. Safety Factors: Minimum ratios of the ultimate stress to the allowable static service stress: a. Flexural Members: 2.5. b. Compression Members: 3.0. c. Shear: 3.0. d. Connections: 4.0. 3. Minimum design safety factors for dynamic or impact loads shall be twice the values for static service loads. C. Loads: 1. Static and dynamic loads for system shown. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all fiberglass components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, shop drawing, and Drawings. All items shall be shop fabricated to the required dimensions and tolerances. All cut or machined edges shall be ground smooth and sealed with a compatible bonding resin. B. Components shall be installed accurately to alignments and elevations shown on the Drawings. C. Provide openings and holes as required. End cuts and opening cuts shall be coated with resin per the manufacturer's recommendations. D. All fiberglass shall be cleaned of foreign material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Materials containing defects, such as nicks, gouges, blisters, sharp projections, delaminations or exposed fibers shall not be accepted until repaired or replaced as directed by ENGINEER and OWNER. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS 06 70 00 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 06 7413 FIBERGLASS WEIRS AND BAFFLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install fiberglass weir plates, baffles, mounting brackets, lap plates, cover washers and all hardware required. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Density Current Baffles" for density current deflectors for installation in sedimentation basins. 1.03 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS A. References: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. F 102 — Standard for Matched -Die -Molded, Fiberglass -Reinforced Plastic Weir Plates, Scum Baffles, and Mounting Brackets B. Definitions: 1. Baffle: A plate usually in front of the weir plate that prevents floating particles from flowing over the weir plates. 2. Cosmetic Defect: A blemish that has no effect on the ability of the component to meet the structural design and production test requirements of AWWA F102 Standard. Should the blemish or the activity of plugging, grinding, or repairing of such blemish or the activity of plugging, grinding, or repairing the blemish caused the component to fail these requirements, then the blemish shall be considered a structural defect. 3. Weir Plate: A plate with straight edges, V -notches, or square cutouts along the top edge to allow water to flow over each notch at a predetermined rate. FIBERGLASS WEIRS AND BAFFLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 06 74 13 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Weirs and Baffles shall withstand the forces imposed during water treatment operations without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes without exceeding deflection or strain in Accordance with the requirements of AWWA F102. 1. Temperature Change (Range): -10°F TO 110°F. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and fmishes for Insert product. B. Shop Drawings: For Process Treatment Unit. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications and identification of materials of construction, including resins and glass fiber content and layout for FRP constructions. 2. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Manufacturer's recommended baffle dimensions, deflection angle and location for each application. C. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer. D. Product Certificates: For each type of product, provide Affidavit of Compliance from manufacturer. E. Certified test reports of the physical and mechanical properties of the product. Each panel shall have the following minimum physical properties: Method Test Min.Value ASTM D-638 Tensile Strength 12,000 psi ASTM D-790 Flexural Strength 20,000 psi FIBERGLASS WEIRS AND BAFFLES 0674 13 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF ASTM D-790 Flexural Modulus 1.4 x 106psi ASTM D-256 Notched Izod 12 ASTM D-570 Water Absorption 0.2% 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least ten (10) U.S. installations of the type being proposed, each with a minimum of 5 years of satisfactory service B. Source Limitations: Obtain from single source. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver, handle and store fiberglass components in accordance with AWWA F102, Section 6: Delivery, the manufacturer's written instructions and the requirements of Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant the fiberglass weirs and baffles described herein to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of five years after the date of Substantial Completion. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. NSF Certified: All surfaces and materials in contact with water, or in contact with a chemical being added to water that is being treated for potable water use and conveyance, shall comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and shall conform to NSF -6 1. Product shall bear the mark or seal of an accredited testing laboratory. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with weirs and baffles by field measurements before fabrication. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Manufacturer shall coordinate the fiberglass weirs and baffles design and installation requirements with the required equipment manufacturers and contractor to verify the appropriate configuration FIBERGLASS WEIRS AND BAFFLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 06 74 13 MARYS CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. NEFCO, Incorporated; Palm Beach Gardens, FL. 2. Bedford Reinforced Plastics, Inc.; Bedford, PA. 3. Fiberglass Fabricators, Inc.; Smithfield, RI. 4. MFG Water Treatment Products Company; Union City, PA. 5. Warminster Fiberglass Company; Southampton, PA. 6. Glass — Steel, Inc. 2.02 WEIRS, BAFFLES AND BRACKETS A. Description: 1. Provide die -matched -molded, fiberglass -reinforced plastic weir plates, baffles, lap plates and mounting brackets in accordance with the requirements of AWWA F102. 2. Materials: Comply with the requirements of AWWA F 102, Section 4: Requirements. 3. Resin: a. Type I: Commercial -grade polyester thermosetting resin for general purpose applications. b. Type 2: Commercial -grade, chemical resistance polyester thermosetting resin. c. Provide Ultraviolet Stabilizers. B. Weir Plates: 1. Provided with oversized mounting holes to allow vertical or horizontal adjustment. 2. Weir Plate Openings: a. Flat -Crested Weir Edge: Flat -crested weir plates shall be straight, varying not more than +1/32 -inch in 12 feet. Draft angle across the 1/4 -inch dimension shall not exceed 7°. C. Provision for Attachment: a. Weir -Plate Anchor Bolt Holes. Anchor bolt holes for wall mounting shall be a minimum of 2-1/2 inch, +1/8, and may be round or square. Center to center dimensions between holes shall be not more than 12 -inches for straight walls or a maximum of 24 -inches for curved walls or launders. Bolt FIBERGLASS WEIRS AND BAFFLES 0674 13 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF spacing shall start at the ends of weir plates to prevent flaring out from the surface. b. Thermal Expansion/Contraction: In compliance with the requirements or AWWA F102. c. Slots: Weir plate slots for mounting to troughs or launders shall be 1/16 -inch wider than the bolts, and shall provide for a minimum adjustment of ±1/2 -inch, after allowing for the diameter of the bolt. d. Thickness not less than 3/16 -inch. D. Finish and Appearance: 1. Surface fmish shall be smooth and resin -rich. 2. Surfaces and edges shall be free from porosity, voids, dry glass, or delamination. 3. Allowable cosmetic defects shall be in accordance with AWWA F 102, Table 1 - Allowable Cosmetic Defects of Fiberglass Components. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Each baffle panel shall be molded of fiberglass -reinforced plastic. The resins and fiberglass reinforcing material shall be consistent with the environmental conditions and structural requirements. B. The resin shall be an isophthalic polyester resin with corrosion -resistant properties, 33-402 resin or equivalent, suitable for use in submerged waste treatment applications. The resin shall not contain fillers except as required for viscosity control. For viscosity control, a thixotropic agent up to 5% by weight may be added to the resin. The resin shall be treated to provide ultraviolet suppression. C. Glass reinforcement shall consist of chemically bonded surfacing mat and chopped strand roving. Surfacing mat shall be Type C veil. The glass reinforcement shall be 357-211 PLN CTC chopped strand roving or equivalent. The glass content of the finished laminate shall not be less than 30% by weight. The nominal thickness of each baffle panel shall be 1/4 inch ±1/16 inch thick with resin rich surfaces and edges to prevent migration of moisture and fiber "blooming." The baffle shall be black in color. D. The upper surface of each panel shall be mold smooth and no glass fibers shall be exposed. Laminations shall be dense and free of voids, dry spots, cracks or crazes. The upper surface of the baffle shall be reinforced with one layer of surfacing veil followed by 2 ounces or more of chopped strand roving. In addition, each mounting and stiffening flange shall be reinforced with one layer of 24 oz woven roving. No other glass product is permitted between FIBERGLASS WEIRS AND BAFFLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 06 74 13 MARYS CREEK WRF these layers. All factory -trimmed edges shall be "hot coated" with resin to prevent wicking. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Lap Plates: Provide as required to secure ends of baffle plates. B. Mounting Fasteners: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners. 1. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: 3/8 -inch diameter. 2. Fasteners: 1/4 -inch minimum size. 3. Concrete Expansion Anchors: 3/8" x 3-3/4" 4. Oversized Stainless Steel Washers and Hex Nuts: 1/8" x 2-1/4" 5. Adjacent Baffle Panels: 1/4" Bolts, 2 Flat Washers, Lock Washer, and Hex Nut. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Test: Test and inspect fiberglass components in accordance with AWWA F102. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine fiberglass components before installation. Reject fiberglass components that do not comply or have surface defects exceeding the requirements listed in AWWA F102, Table 1 - Allowable Cosmetic Defects of Fiberglass components. B. Verify that dimensions are correct and project conditions are suitable for installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Install fiberglass components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ensure fiberglass components are installed plumb and true, free of warp or twist, within tolerances specified by the manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings. FIBERGLASS WEIRS AND BAFFLES 0674 13 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF C. Adjust weir plate elevation for the flow indicated or directed by the ENGINEER. D. When necessary to adjust lengths of plates due to field conditions and when approved by the ENGINEER, seal cut or machined edges thus exposed with polyester resin. Excessive cutting will not be acceptable. E. The installation contractor shall field verify existing dimensions and install the baffle in accordance with the contract drawings approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. Mounting holes shall be factory drilled. Field cutting of baffle panels will be allowed to complete the structure and accommodate in -tank obstructions. All field cut or drilled edges shall be coated per the manufacturer's recommendations to prevent fiber blooming or fraying. All of the fasteners required for installation shall be supplied by the baffle manufacturer. The baffle panels shall be attached as specified in section 2.5. All of the installation fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove trash and debris, and leave site in a clean condition. FIBERGLASS WEIRS AND BAFFLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 06 74 13 MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FIBERGLASS WEIRS AND BAFFLES 0674 13 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 06 82 00 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C177, Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot -Plate Apparatus. b. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. c. D635, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning Plastics in a Horizontal Position. d. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. e. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. f. D696, Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 Degrees C and 30 Degrees C. g. D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. h. D792, Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) by Plastics Displacement. i. D2344, Standard Test Method for Apparent Interlaminar Shear Strength of Parallel Fiber Composites by Short -Beam Method. j. D2583, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor. k. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. International Code Council (ICC): The International Building Code (IBC). 3. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): 29 CFR 19.10, Code of Federal Regulations. 4. UL: 94, UL Standard for Safety Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC 06 82 00 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. This section contains components and connectors that require Contractor design. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Product Data: Catalog information and catalog cuts showing materials, design tasks, and showing load, span, and deflection; include manufacturer's specifications. b. Grating: Show dimensions, weight, size, and location of connections to adjacent grating, supports, and other Work. c. Grating Supports: Show dimensions, weight, size, location, and anchorage to supporting structure. d. Stairs, Platforms, Stringers, Handrails, Ladders, and Support Structures: 1) Show dimensions, weight, size, and location of connections to adjacent supports and other Work. 2) Structural calculations for platforms, ladders and cages, handrails, and other fabrications shown. 2. Samples: Each type of grating. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Handling and storage requirements. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance for specified products. 4. Fabricator's qualification experience. 5. Manufacturer's qualification experience. 6. Independent laboratory test report, dated within 2 years of submittal date, of fire retardant testing conducted on exact type of grating proposed (not a resin test report). 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Minimum of 5 years' experience in manufacturing of products meeting these specifications. GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 82 00 - 2 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Shipment: 1. Insofar as is practical, factory assemble items provided hereunder. 2. Package and clearly tag parts and assemblies that are of necessity shipped unassembled in a manner that will protect materials from damage, and facilitate identification and final assembly in field. B. Storage and Handling: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in such a manner as to prevent damage of any kind, including overexposure to sunlight. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Like Items of Materials: Where possible, provide end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. B. Unless otherwise specified, all products shall be manufactured by a pultruded process using vinyl ester resin. C. Products shall be manufactured with ultra -violet (UV) inhibitor additives. D. Exterior surfaces shall have a synthetic surface veil covering. E. Furnish molded products as an option where permitted by specifications. F. Fire Retardance: 1. Flame spread shall be less than 25 as measured by ASTM E84. 2. Include combinations of aluminum trihydrate, halogen, and antimony trioxide, where required to meet fire retardance, in the resin system. 3. Meet self -extinguishing requirements of ASTM D635. G. Color pigment shall be dispersed in resin system. H. Fabricate FRP products exposed to outdoor conditions with an additional 1 -mil thick UV coating to shield product from UV light. I. All cut ends, holes, and abrasions of FRP shapes shall be sealed with resin to prevent intrusion of moisture. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC 068200-3 MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.02 GRATING AND STAIR TREADS A. General: 1. 100psf minimum, unless otherwise shown. 2. Maximum Deflection: 1/4 inch, unless otherwise shown. B. Molded Type: 1. Nonskid grit affixed to top of bar surface or a concave, meniscus top to all bars, providing skid resistance. 2. Load bars in both directions with equal stiffness. 3. Square mesh with 1 -1/2 -inch maximum spacing. C. Pultruded Type: 1. Main bars joined by cross bars secured in holes drilled in main bars. 2. Cross bars with 6 -inch maximum spacing shall mechanically lock main bars in position such that they prevent movement. 3. Intersections: Bond using adhesive as corrosive -resistant as pultrusion resin. 4. Main Bar Ends: Minimum bearing support width of 1-1/2 inches. 5. Skid -Resistant Surface: Grit adhesively bonded, manufacturer's standard. 6. Provide extra stiffness around openings. D. Hold -Down Clamps: Same material as grating or Type 316 stainless steel. E. Bolts and Connectors: 1. Corrosion -resistant FRP or Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Size and strength to meet IBC requirements. F. Fabrications: 1. Field measure areas to receive grating. Verify dimensions of new fabricated supports, and fabricate to dimension required for specified clearances. 2. Section Length: Sufficient to prevent it falling through clear opening when oriented in span direction when one end is touching either concrete or vertical leg of grating support. GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 82 00 - 4 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF G. Manufacturers: 1. Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc., Addison, TX. 2. IKGBorden, Clark, NJ. 3. Strongwell Corp., Bristol Division, Bristol, VA or Chatfield Division, Chatfield, MN. 4. International Grating, Inc., Houston, TX. 2.03 INTERLOCKING FLOOR PLANKS A. General: 1. Design Loads: a. Uniform Live Load: 100 psf minimum, unless otherwise shown. b. Concentrated Live Load: 300 pounds on 12 -inch by 12 -inch area. 2. Maximum Deflection under Live Loads: a. Planks: 1/4 inch, unless otherwise shown. b. Overall Panels: L/240 of span. B. Planks weakened by penetrations, cuts, etc. shall be stiffened or reinforced as necessary to restore their capacity to withstand the specified loading and deflection limits. C. Materials: 1. The FRP planks shall be manufactured by the pultrusion process. 2. The plank panel shall be 6 inches deep and 36 inches wide with interlocking joints on outside legs of plank. 3. The top surface of all planks shall have a nonskid grit. 4. Planks shall be fabrication to the sizes show on the Drawings. D. End closure plate: FRP same as Planks. E. Bolts and Connectors: Corrosion -resistant FRP or Type 316 stainless steel. F. Fabrications: Field measure areas to receive plank. Verify dimensions of new fabricated supports and fabricate to dimension required for specified clearances. G. Manufacturers: Strongwell Corp., SAFPLANK HD, Bristol Division, Bristol, VA or Chatfield Division, Chatfield, MN. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC FEBRUARY 24, 2026 06 82 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install plumb or level, rigid and neat, as applicable. C. Furnish fasteners and anchorages for complete installation. D. Seal field cut holes, edges, and abrasions with catalyzed resin compatible with original resin. 3.02 GRATING A. Anchor grating securely to supports to prevent displacement. B. Install each grating section such that it is easily removable. C. Clearance (Grating to Vertical Surfaces): 1/4 inch (plus or minus 1/8 -inch tolerance). END OF SECTION GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 06 82 00 - 6 FEBRUARY 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 0713 53 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Hardboard Association (AHA): A135.4 Basic Hardboard. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. b. D471, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property -Effect of Liquids. c. D476, Standard Classification for Dry Pigmentary Titanium Dioxide Products. d. D624, Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. e. D 1149, Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration -Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber. f. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints and cracks, expansion joints, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions, layout of sheets, location of field splices, type of splices, and termination details. 2. Samples: a. 12 -inch by 12 -inch membrane and flashing material. b. 12 -inch strip of splicing tape. c. 1 -quart splicing cement. d. 1 -quart bonding adhesive. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING MARCH 25, 2026 071353-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Written approval of installer by membrane manufacturer. c. Evidence certifying applicator's experience on equivalent projects. 2. Manufacturer's printed instructions including procedures for flashing, splicing, and bonding. 3. Test report of field flood test. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator's Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years' experience on equivalent projects. B. Preinstallation Meeting: 1. Notify Engineer before conducting meeting. 2. Prior to installation of waterproofing and associated Work, meet at Site with applicator of each component of associated Work, and applicators of work requiring coordination with waterproofing Work. 3. Review material selections and procedures to be followed in performing Work. 4. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details including pipe and other penetrations through waterproofing and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: 1. Do not cut, tear, or puncture elastomeric sheet. 2. Store materials onsite in enclosures or under waterproof protective coverings. 3. Ensure materials are kept clean and dry. 4. Store materials off the ground. 1.05 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of Work specified in this Specification section found defective during a period of 2 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in the General Conditions. ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 071353-2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. EPDM Elastomeric Sheet: 1. Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomers (EPDM) conforming to the following physical properties: Property Test Method Specifications Hardness, Shore A ASTM D2240 60, ±10 points Tensile Strength ASTM D412 1,400 psi min. Elongation @ Break ASTM D412 300% min. Brittleness Temperature ASTM D476 -75 deg F Tear Resistance ASTM D624 200 lb/linear (Die B) inch mi. Resistance to heat aging change in original properties after 7 days @ 240 deg F, or 28da s 150 de F Hardness, max. increase 15 points Elongation, max. reduction 30% Tensile strength, max. loss 30% Resistance to ozone condition ASTM D1149 No cracks after exposure to 100 pphm ozone in air for 10,000 hours @ 100 deg F (Sample under 20% strain) Resistance to water absorption ASTM D471 0.5% o max. increase in volume after 3 days immersion @ 212 deg F 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Splicing Tape: Use only tape recommended or approved by membrane manufacturer. B. Splicing Cement: Use only cement recommended or approved by membrane manufacturer. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 53 -3 MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Bonding Adhesive: Use only adhesive recommended or approved by membrane manufacturer. D. Protection Board: Tempered hardboard, 1/8 inch thick, conforming to AHA A 135.4, Type II, Surface 2, Finish A, and Design A. E. Concealed Sheet Flashing: Same material, construction, and thickness as sheet waterproofing or 60 -mil -thick, uncured EPDM, as required by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions prior to application: 1. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive elastomeric membrane waterproofing to ensure they are smooth, dry, and free from conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of Work. 2. Do not install elastomeric membrane waterproofing until other Work that penetrates membrane has been completed and the substrate and environmental conditions are in accordance with requirements and satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. Application of waterproofing will be construed as acceptance of the substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Sweep clean surfaces on or against which waterproofing is applied. Remove loose and foreign materials that could prevent proper adhesion. B. Remove fins, sharp edges, oil, and grease. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Positioning Membrane: 1. Place membrane waterproofing sheet in final position without stretching. 2. Allow membrane to relax 30 minutes minimum before making splices or bonding to substrate. 3. Overlap adjacent sheets for splicing. ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 071353-4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Applying Adhesive: 1. Spread adhesive in 6 -inch strips over both mating surfaces. 2. Spread adhesive completely over both mating surfaces. 3. Place membrane in bond position without stretching, taking care to avoid trapped air. 4. Roll with dry roller to remove air pockets. C. Splicing: 1. Clean overlapping areas with heptane, hexane, or white gasoline. 2. Overlap sheets 3 inches minimum. 3. Join overlaps with splicing cement and tape to form splice in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing membrane and protection board to exterior surfaces of cast -in -place concrete structures below finish ground level that enclose spaces that may be occupied, such as stairways, galleries, pump rooms, mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and other areas indicated on Drawings; but not including water -holding basins. Apply membrane from top of footings to 6 inches below finished grade. 3.05 FIELD FINISHING A. Flashings: Flash pipes, conduits, and other penetrations through waterproofing in strict conformance with membrane manufacturer's recommended procedures, and as specified in Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Restrict traffic on membrane and do not backfill until protection board is installed. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 53 -5 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 07 21 01 THERMAL INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C578, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. b. C665, Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. c. D4397, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. B. Wall Sheathing, per Section 06 16 00, Sheathing. C. Section 07 27 26, Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers. 1.02 MATERIAL STORAGE A. Store off ground and keep dry at all times. Protect against weather condensation and damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C665, Type III, Class B, fiberglass batts with aluminum foil vapor retarder; R -value on Drawings. B. Rigid Insulation: ASTM C578, Type IX, expanded polystyrene; R -value as shown. C. Spray -applied Polyurethane Foam (SPF) Insulation: 1. Closed -cell SPF insulation 2. ASTM C1029; 1.5 lbs/cu-ft density; R -Value — 6.2 per 1 -inch thickness minimum. 3. ASTM E84; 25 or less flame spread; 450 or less smoke developed. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 THERMAL INSULATION MARCH 25, 2026 07 21 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Batt Insulation: 1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Fasten flanges to the sides of framing members with the vapor retarder facing the warm side. Fit tightly to ensure a continuous seal. 3. Where electrical outlets, ducts, pipes, vents, or other utility items occur, place insulation on the cold weather side of the obstruction. 4. Provide fasteners, adhesive, tape, and sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. Rigid Insulation: 1. Install with fasteners or adhesive recommended by manufacturer. 2. Butt joints tightly together. 3. Where thicker than 1-1/2 inches, install in two layers, staggering all joints. 3.02 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Remove from Site all containers, wrappings, and scrap insulation material. Leave floors broom clean. B. Protect installed insulation from tears or other damage until covered with finish material. Replace damaged material. END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 21 01 - 2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 07 26 16 BELOWGRADE VAPOR RETARDERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 302, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D412, Standard Test Method for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers — Tension. b. D882, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. c. D903, Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds. d. Dl 709, Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free -Falling Dart Method. e. D3767, Standard Practice for Rubber — Measurement of Dimensions. f. D4833, Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products. g. E96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. h. El 54, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or a Ground Cover. i. El 643, Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. j. E1745, Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. k. F1249, Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's material specifications. 2. Sample: Minimum 3 inches by 3 inches. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 BELOWGRADE VAPOR RETARDERS MARCH 25, 2026 072616-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY B. Informational Submittals: 1. MSDS for proposed materials. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for preparation, installation/application, repair, protection and maintenance. 4. Manufacturer's Certification of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperature and construction operations. Remove and dispose of damaged material in accordance with applicable regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER A. Meet or exceed ASTM E1745, Class A, with the following properties: 1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.03 perm maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F 1249. 2. Tensile Strength: 45 -foot-pounds per inch minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D882. 3. Puncture Resistance: 2,200 grams minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1709. 4. Thickness: 10 mils minimum, in accordance with ACI 302. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 10. 2. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 10 mil Green. 3. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap Class A Vapor Retarder. 2.02 INTEGRALLY BONDED VAPOR RETARDER A. Composite Sheet Membrane: 1. Consisting of 0.016 -inch (0.4 -mm) high -density polyethylene film and layers of specially formulated synthetic adhesive layers. 2. Capable of forming an integral and permanent bond to placed concrete to prevent vapor migration at interface of membrane and structural concrete. BELOWGRADE VAPOR RETARDERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 26 00 - 2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Physical Properties: Composite Sheet Membrane Property Typical Value Test Method Thickness (nominal) 0.021 in. (0.5 mm) ASTM D3767 Method A Water Vapor Permeance 0.03 perms ASTM 6M B Method B Tensile Strength 68 lb/in ASTM E154 Elongation 300% ASTM D412 Puncture Resistance 41 lb ASTM D4833 Peel Adhesion to Concrete >4 lb/in ASTM D903 2.03 PART 3 3.01 3.02 C. Manufacturer and Product: Grace Construction Products; FlorprufeTM 120 Membrane. ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners, Tape, Adhesive, or Sealant: As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. B. Pipe Boots: Manufacturer's recommended prefabricated or field fabricated item. EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until satisfactory conditions are obtained. INSTALLATION A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: 1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. After base for slab has been leveled and tamped, apply vapor retarder with roll width parallel to direction of concrete pour. 3. Lap vapor retarder over footings and seal to foundation walls. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 BELOWGRADE VAPOR RETARDERS MARCH 25, 2026 0726 16-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 4. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with tape. 5. Seal penetrations with pipe boots. 6. Repair damaged areas with patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged area by 6 inches and sealing sides of patch with tape. B. Integrally Bonded Vapor Retarder: 1. Preparation: a. Compact earth and stone substrates to produce an even, solid substrate. b. Remove loose aggregate or sharp protrusions. c. Remove standing water prior to membrane applications. d. Concrete substrates shall be smooth or broom finished and monolithic. 2. Installation: a. In accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643. b. Apply membrane with HDPE film facing prepared substrate. c. Remove release liner during application. d. Apply succeeding sheets by overlapping previous sheet 2 inches (50 mm) along marked lap line. e. Stagger end laps to avoid buildup of layers. f. Taped Lap Method: 1) For additional security use tape to secure and seal overlaps. 2) Overband lap with 4 -inch- (100 -mm-) wide tape using lap line for alignment. 3) Remove plastic release liner to ensure bond to concrete. 3. Mix and apply Grace liquid detailing compound to seal around penetrations. 4. Concrete Placement: a. Place concrete within 30 days. b. Inspect membrane and repair damage with patches of tape. c. Ensure liner is removed from membrane and tape before concrete placement. 3.03 CLEANING A. Upon completion of vapor retarder installation, remove waste materials and debris resulting from this operation and dispose offsite. END OF SECTION BELOWGRADE VAPOR RETARDERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 26 00 - 4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 07 27 26 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Medium -build air barriers, vapor retarding. B. Related Requirements: Section 06 16 00, Sheathing for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint -and -penetration treatments. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Air -Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity. B. Air -Barrier Assembly: The collection of air -barrier materials and accessories applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. C. Air -Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air. 1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1. Review air -barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air -leakage and bond testing, air -barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating each substrate; technical data; dry film thickness; and tested physical and performance properties of products. 1. Medium -build air barriers, vapor retarding. B. Shop Drawings: For air -barrier assemblies. 1. Show locations and extent of air -barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE APRIL 17, 2026 AIR BARRIERS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 07 27 26 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: From air -barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier. C. Product Test Reports: For each air -barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Field quality -control reports. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by air -barrier manufacturer. 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air -barrier performance. 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain primary air -barrier materials and air -barrier accessories from single manufacturer. FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AIR BARRIERS APRIL 17, 2026 072726-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air -Barrier Performance: Air -barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction to be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid -water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air -barrier assemblies to be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. B. Air -Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357. C. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft pressure difference; ASTM E2178. D. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D412, Die C. E. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested in accordance with ASTM D4541. F. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 90 days in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2.03 MEDIUM -BUILD AIR BARRIERS, VAPOR RETARDING A. Medium -Build, Vapor -Retarding Air Barrier: Synthetic polymer material with an installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written instructions, of 16 to 34 mils over smooth, void -free substrates. 1. Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.1 perm (5.8 ng/Pa x s x sq. m; ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure A, Desiccant Method. 2. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 5 perms (290 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure A, Desiccant Method. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air -barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air -barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air -barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air -barrier material manufacturer. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless steel fasteners. D. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low -modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single -component, neutral -curing, Class 100/50 (low -modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 2. Verify that substrates have cured and aged for minimum time recommended in writing by air -barrier manufacturer. 3. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. 4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust -free, and dry substrate for air -barrier application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form -release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film -forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate -patching material. FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AIR BARRIERS APRIL 17, 2026 072726-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier. H. Bridge isolation joints, expansion joints and discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck - to -wall, and deck -to -deck joints with air -barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and details. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Install accessory materials in accordance with air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. 3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. 4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air -barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. B. Connect and seal exterior wall air -barrier material continuously to roofmg- membrane air barrier, concrete below -grade structures, floor -to -floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain -wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. C. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic. D. Apply joint sealants forming part of air -barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply preformed silicone extrusion so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and air -barrier material. F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air -barrier material with foam sealant. G. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic. H. Seal top of through -wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6 -inch - wide, transition strip. I. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic. J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PRIMARY AIR -BARRIER MATERIAL A. Apply air -barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier in accordance with air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details. Apply air -barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. 1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. 2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air -barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 3. Where multiple prime coats are needed to achieve required bond, allow adequate drying time between coats. FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AIR BARRIERS APRIL 17, 2026 072726-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Medium -Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air -barrier material to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply an increased thickness of air -barrier material in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor -Retarding, Medium -Build Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements, applied in two equal coats. Apply additional material as needed to achieve void- and pinhole -free surface. C. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency. D. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air -barrier components. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Inspections: Air -barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air -barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 2. Air -barrier dry film thickness. 3. Continuous structural support of air -barrier system has been provided. 4. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings. 5. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained. 6. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 7. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 8. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 9. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 10. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 11. Compatible materials have been used. 12. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726-7 MARY'S CREEK WRF 13. Connections between assemblies (air -barrier and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 14. All penetrations have been sealed. C. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect air -barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer than recommended, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full -thickness, air -barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed materials in accordance with air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air -barrier manufacturer. B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction. C. Remove masking materials after installation. END OF SECTION FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AIR BARRIERS APRIL 17, 2026 072726-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 07 40 00 ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Insulated Metal Roof Panels, Types RT-01 and RT-02. B. Un-Insulated Metal Roof Panels, Types RT-03 and RT-4. s C. Metal Wall Panels, Types WTI WT -02, WT -04 and WT -08. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute and American Hardboard Association (ANSI/ABA): A135.4, Basic Hardboard. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A240, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. b. A463, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum -Coated, by the Hot -Dip Process. c. A480, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat - Rolled Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. d. A525, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. e. A526, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. f. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. g. A792, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. h. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. i. C578, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. j. C591, Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. k. C612, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS 074000- 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1. C665, Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. m. C991, Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Insulation for Metal Buildings. n. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. o. D523, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. p. D3841, Standard Specification for Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Polyester Plastic Panels. q. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. Society for Protective Coating (SSPC): 12.00, Painting System Guide No. 12.00, Guide to Zinc -Rich Coating Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Layouts of panels on walls and roofs including details of edge conditions, joints, corners, panel profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, and closures. Distinguish between factory and field assembly work. 2. Product data including manufacturer's product specifications, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total panel system. B. Informational Submittals: Certificate of Proper Installation per Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services (or alternately, test results or calculations), that assure item's and its anchorage's design criteria meets requirements of Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. C. Samples: 1. For initial selection purposes, submit manufacturer's color charts or chips showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for roof and wall panels with factory -applied finishes. 2. Panels 12 inches long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, battens, fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories. D. Quality Control Submittals: Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 074000-2 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire Resistance Rating: Panel systems that have been tested and listed by design number in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" for 2 -hour assembly rating. 2. Wind Uplift: Roof panel system, including supports meeting requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for Class 90 wind uplift resistance. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed. Protect panel coating either by application of removable film or by packing plastic film or other suitable material between panels to properly protect the finish. Package wall and roof panels for protection against transportation and handling damage. B. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that they will not accumulate water. Do not store panels in contact with other materials resulting in staining, denting, or other surface damage. C. Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Insulated Metal Roof Panels, Types RT-01 and RT-02: Basis Of Design: Centria (Nucor Co.): System: a. Basis Of Design Product: Versapanel Insulated Core Metal Roof Panel. 1) Panel Thickness: 4 inches. a) Thermal Performance: U -Value, 0.030; R -Value, 33.5. 2) Panel Module: 36 inches. 3) Surface Profile: Planked. 4) Standing Seam Height: 1-3/4 inches. 5) Material Substrate: Aluminum. 6) Gage: 20. 7) Finish: "Flourofinish Coastal Coil Coating System"; Total DFT 1.5-1.8 mils. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS JULY 29, 2026 074000-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Energy Performance: 1) Solar Reflectance Index: Minimum At least 0.70 per ASTM E1980. 2) California Energy Commission Compliance: Minimum initial solar reflectance of 0.70 and emissivity of 0.75 per CRRC-1, www.coolroofs.org. B. Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roof Panels, Type RT-03 and RT-04: Basis Of Design: Butler Manufacturing: a. Basis Of Design Product: "MR -24" Roof System: 1) Design roof paneling system to support design live, snow, and wind loads. 2) Endwall Trim and Roof Transition Flashings: Allow roof panels to move relative to wall panels and/or parapets as roof expands and contracts with temperature changes. 3) UL Wind Uplift Classification Rating, UL 580: Class 90. 4) Structural Performance Under Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference: Test roof system in accordance with ASTM E1592 5) Factory roll -formed, 24 inches wide, with 2 major corrugations, 2 inches high (2-3/4 inches including seam), 24 inches on center. 6) Panel Material and Finish: a) 24 -gauge galvanized steel, G90 coating, ASTM A653, G90. b) Paint with exterior colors of "Butler-CoteTM,, finish system, full-strength, 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" fluoropolymer (PVDF) coating. 2. Substrate Board: a. Glass -Mat Gypsum Roof Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/Cl 177M, water-resistant gypsum board mechanically anchored to steel roof deck. b. 5/8 -inch thick. c. Unprimed finish. C. Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roof Panels, Type RT-04: Basis Of Design: Butler Manufacturing: a. Basis Of Design Product: "MR -24" Roof System: 1) Design roof paneling system to support design live, snow, and wind loads. 2) Endwall Trim and Roof Transition Flashings: Allow roof panels to move relative to wall panels and/or parapets as roof expands and contracts with temperature changes. ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 074000-4 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3) UL Wind Uplift Classification Rating, UL 580: Class 90. 4) Structural Performance Under Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference: Test roof system in accordance with ASTM E1592. 5) Factory roll -formed, 24 inches wide, with 2 major corrugations, 2 inches high (2-3/4 inches including seam), 24 inches on center. 6) Panel Material and Finish: a) 24 -gauge galvanized steel, G90 coating, ASTM A653, G90. b) Paint with exterior colors of "Butler-CoteTM" finish system, full-strength, 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" fluoropolymer (PVDF) coating. D. Metal Wall Panel, Type WT -2 and WT -04: 1. Basis Of Design: Centria (Nucor Co.): a. Basis Of Design Product: Concept Series, CS -660, Concealed Fastener Panel. 1) Anchorage clip: Concept Series. CSC -2 (3/4 -inch stand off) clips at 16 -inches on center, at vertical z-girts. b. Thickness: 7/8 -inch. c. Panel Height: 16 -inch. d. Material Substrate: Aluminum. e. Gage: 20. f. Face Texture: Smooth. g. Finish: "Flourofinish Coastal Coil Coating System"; Total DFT 1.5-1.8 mils. 0 E. Metal Wall Panel, Type WT 3 WT -08: $ Basis Of Design: Butler Manufacturing: a. Basis Of Design Product: "Butlerib II" Wall System. b. Roll -formed panels, 3 feet wide with 4 major corrugations, 1-1/2 inches high, 12 inches on center, with 2 minor corrugations between each of the major corrugations entire length of panel. c. 26 -gauge or 24 -gauge painted Galvalume aluminum -zinc alloy (approximately 55 percent aluminum, 45 percent zinc), ASTM A792. d. Paint with exterior colors of "Butler-CoteTM" finish system, full- strength, 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" fluoropolymer (PVDF) coating. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS 074000-5 MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.02 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing, per Section 06 16 00, Sheathing. 2.03 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS A. Medium build, vapor retarding, per Section 07 27 26, Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Sheet Materials: 1. Structural Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip zinc -coated steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A653 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A525, Grade C. 2. Commercial Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A526 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A525. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 2. Exposed: Factory -applied coating, or plastic caps for fastener heads; color to match panel. 3. Washer: Metal -backed neoprene washers. 4. Exterior Applications: Aluminum, corrosion -resistant steel, or stainless steel. B. Felts: Asphalt -saturated organic felts, ASTM D226, Type II (No. 30). C. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, self -extinguishing, expanded cellular rubber or cross -linked polyolefm foam flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of roof and wall panels. D. Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive 100 percent solids polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing, permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. E. Joint Sealant: One -part elastomeric polyurethane sealant. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC paint 12.00, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 074000-6 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.06 PANEL FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and dimensional and structural requirements. B. Sound Control: Fabricate interior liner panels with approximately 1,000 uniformly spaced 1/8 -inch diameter holes per square foot. Cover insulation with polyethylene film and provide inserts of wire mesh to form acoustical spacer grid. C. Fabricate panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips, which provide a tight seal and prevent metal -to -metal contact in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel system. D. Metal Finishes: Apply coatings either before or after forming and fabricating panels. Furnish air -drying spray fmish in matching color for touchup. 1. Color: As shown on Drawings by reference to the manufacturer's standard color designations. 2. Fluoropolymer Coating: Manufacturer's standard two -coat, thermo-cured, full-strength 70 percent "Kynar 500" coating consisting of a primer and a minimum 0.75 -mil dry film thickness with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 -mil and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested in accordance with ASTM D523. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Panel Supports and Anchorage: Install girts, purlin, and other secondary panel support members and anchorage in accordance with AISC Manual of Steel Construction "Code of Standard Practice." B. Apply bituminous coating on panel surfaces where panels would otherwise be in direct contact with different materials of structure that are noncompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finishes. C. Except as specified in other sections, provide components as needed for a complete preformed roof and wall panel system, including but not limited to trim, copings, fascias, gravel stops, mullions, sills, corner units, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters, gaskets, and fillers. Match materials and finishes of panels. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS 074000-7 MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.02 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for installation. Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Install panels with concealed fasteners. 3. Install roof panels over minimum 3:12 pitch solid substructure with one ply of felt installed from lower edge up with at least 3 -inch sidelaps and 4 -inch endlaps. B. Accessories: Install components required for a complete roof or wall panel system. C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and joint sealants required for weatherproofing of panel systems. Weather seal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather. D. Lap -Seam Roof Panels: Provide sealing tape at lapped joints of ribbed or fluted roof sheets and between roof sheets and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealing tape to clean, dry surface of the weather side of fastenings on endlaps, and on sidelaps of corrugated nesting type, ribbed, or fluted panels and elsewhere as needed to ensure roof panels are weathertight. E. Standing Seam Roof Panel System: Fasten roof panels to supports with concealed clips. 1. Install clips at each support with self -drilling or tapping fasteners. 2. At endlaps of panels, install sealing tape between panels. 3. Install factory -sealed cleats at standing -seam joints. Apply snap -on batten to the panels to achieve a weathertight joint. 4. Seaming: Complete seaming of panel joints by type of operation recommended by panel manufacturer to provide a weathertight joint. F. Wall Panels: Apply joint sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete and elsewhere as necessary to ensure weathertight conditions. Handle and apply sealant and backup in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Align bottom of wall panels and fasten panels with blind rivets, bolts, or self -tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self -tapping screws. ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 074000-8 JULY 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Locate and space exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer. 3. Install screw fasteners to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 4. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. G. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces, and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and removable films as each panel is installed. Upon completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer, and maintain in a clean and undamaged condition during construction. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS JULY 29, 2026 074000-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 07 42 13.23 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal composite material (MCM) panels. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. DBVC: Drained and back -ventilated cavity rainscreen system designed to drain and dry water entering cavity through drainage channels, weeps, and air ventilation. B. MCM: Metal composite material; cladding material formed by joining two thin metal skins to polyethylene or fire -retardant core and bonded under precise temperature, pressure, and tension. C. PER: Pressure -equalized rainscreen system designed for no water intrusion, with equal pressure within air cavity and outside cladding barrier. 1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, MCM system Installer, MCM system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects MCM panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to MCM system installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members. 5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that affect MCM system. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for system assembly during and after installation. 8. Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13.23 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel, system, and accessory. Metal composite material (MCM) panels. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of MCM system; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim, flashings, closures, accessories, and special details. 2. Accessories: Include details of flashing, trim, and anchorage, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10). 3. Provide signed and sealed drawings, by a qualified design professional in Project jurisdiction, of MCM system showing compliance with performance requirements and design criteria identified for this Project. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of MCM panel indicated, with factory -applied color fmishes. 1. Size: Manufacturers' standard size. 2. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of MCM panel required, with factory -applied color finishes. 1. MCM Panel: Two samples, 4 by 6 inches. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test and Evaluation Reports: Product Test Reports: For each MCM panel, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. a. MCM Panel Manufacturer's Material Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specific performance or third - party listing documenting compliance in accordance with the IBC. 1) Dry or Wet Seal System: Tested to AAMA 501.1. 2) DBVC System: Tested to AAMA 509. 3) PER System: Tested to AAMA 508. B. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Field quality -control reports. METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WALL PANELS MARCH 25, 2026 07 42 13.23 -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Qualification Statements: For manufacturer. D. Delegated design engineer qualifications. E. Sample warranties. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For MCM panels. B. Warranty Documentation: 1. Manufacturers' special warranties. 2. Installer's special warranties. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Approved by MCM panel manufacturer. C. Installer Qualifications: Entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by MCM system manufacturer. D. Delegated Design Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in state where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the type indicated. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, MCM panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package MCM panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect MCM panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack MCM panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store MCM panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store MCM panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Retain strippable protective covering on MCM panels during installation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL MARCH 25, 2026 WALL PANELS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 07 42 13.23 -3 MARY'S CREEK WRY 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of MCM panels to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate MCM panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Panel Integrity Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of MCM panels that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Panel Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace MCM panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WALL PANELS MARCH 25, 2026 07 42 13.23 -4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: MCM systems to withstand the effects of the following loads, based on testing in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span. B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested in accordance with ASTM E283/E283M at the following test -pressure difference: 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at the following test -pressure difference: 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. D. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No water penetration when tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1 at the following test pressure: 1. Test Pressure: 6.24 psf. E. Pressure Cycling: Provide PER system with a pass rating in accordance with AAMA 508. 1. Lag between the cavity and the cyclic wind pressure to not exceed 0.08 seconds. 2. Maximum differential between the cavity and the cyclic wind pressure to not exceed 50 percent of the maximum test pressure. F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL MARCH 25, 2026 WALL PANELS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 07 42 13.23 -5 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL (MCM) WALL PANELS A. Metal Composite Material (MCM) Wall Panels: Provide MCM panels fabricated from two metal facings bonded to a solid, extruded thermoplastic core. 1. Core: PE. 2. Panel Thickness: 0.118 inch. 3. Bond Strength: 22.5 in-lb/in, when tested for bond integrity in accordance with ASTM D1781. 4. Fire Performance: Flame -spread index less than 25and smoke -developed index less than 450, in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. B. MCM Panel Materials: Aluminum -Faced Panels: ASTM B209/B209M alloy as standard with manufacturer, temper as required to suit finish and forming operations with 0.020 -inch -thick, aluminum sheet facings. a. Exterior Finish: Two -coat fluoropolymer. 1) Color: Match Architect's indicated custom color. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C955 cold -formed, metallic -coated steel sheet ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) hot -dip galvanized coating designation or ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM 150) aluminum -zinc -alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of MCM system. B. System Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight wall system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of MCM panels unless otherwise indicated. C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as MCM panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent MCM panels. METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WALL PANELS MARCH 25, 2026 07 42 13.23 -6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Panel Fasteners: Self -tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Use gasketed or approved coated fasteners between dissimilar metals. 1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. 2. Copper Panels: Use copper, stainless steel, or hardware -bronze fasteners. 3. Steel, Titanium, or Zinc Panels: Use stainless steel fasteners. 4. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of MCM panels by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners. E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in MCM panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by MCM system manufacturer. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish MCM panels at the factory, by panel manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated panel performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. B. Shop -fabricate MCM systems and accessories by fabricator's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with requirements of MCM panel manufacturer, of indicated system profiles, and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. Fabricate panels to dimensions indicated on Drawings based on an assumed design temperature of 70 deg F. Allow for ambient temperature range at time of fabrication. 2. Formed MCM panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and straight, with surfaces free from warp or buckle. 3. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges and no displacement of face sheet or protrusion of core. 4. Fabricated Panel Tolerances: Shop -fabricate panels to sizes and joint configurations indicated on Drawings. a. Width: Plus or minus 0.079 inch at 70 degrees F. b. Length: Plus or minus 0.079 inch at 70 degrees F. c. Squareness: Plus or minus 0.079 inch at 70 degrees F. 5. Attach routed -and -returned panel flanges to perimeter extrusions with manufacturer's standard fasteners. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL MARCH 25, 2026 WALL PANELS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 07 42 13.23 -7 MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. 4. Sealed Joints: Form non -expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.05 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Coil -Coated Metal Finish: PVDF Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, two -coat fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WALL PANELS MARCH 25, 2026 07 42 13.23 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, MCM system supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by MCM system manufacturer. 2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by MCM system manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water -resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Examine roughing -in for components and assemblies penetrating MCM system to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of MCM panels before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF MCM SYSTEM A. General: Install MCM system in accordance with system manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor MCM system securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving MCM system. 2. Flash and seal MCM system at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self -tapping screws. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as MCM system work proceeds. 6. Align bottoms of MCM panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self -tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self -tapping screws. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL MARCH 25, 2026 WALL PANELS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 07 42 13.23 -9 MARY'S CREEK WRY 7. Provide weathertight escutcheons for all items penetrating system. 8. Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action with gaskets. 9. Attach MCM panels to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to meet listed performance requirements. B. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support MCM panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including tracks, drainage channels, anchor channels, perimeter extrusions, and panel clips. 1. Install subframing, furring, and other panel support members and anchorages in accordance with ASTM C955. 2. Install support system at locations, at spacings, and with fasteners recommended by MCM system manufacturer to meet listed performance requirements. C. Install panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and removed without disturbing adjacent panels. D. Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. Install accessory components required for a complete MCM system assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by MCM system manufacturer. E. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (605 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WALL PANELS MARCH 25, 2026 07 42 13.23 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Shim and align MCM panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non -accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated, and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as MCM panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by MCM panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Replace MCM panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13.23 - 11 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. c. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. d. A924/A924M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. e. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. f. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. g. B370, Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. h. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. i. C1311, Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants. j. D 1187/D 1187M, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. k. D4586/D4586M, Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free. 2. Federal Specifications (FS): QQ-L-201F(2), Lead Sheet. 3. FM Global (FM): Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, Perimeter Flashing. 4. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1013, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Project -specific wind pressures indicated in the component and cladding pressures shown on the structural drawings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MARCH 25, 2026 07 62 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures for preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. 2. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. 3. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials as a result of both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that does not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA 1033. Conform to dimensions and profiles shown, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Show joints, types and location of fasteners, and special shapes. b. Gutters and connections to roofing systems. c. Downspouts; connections, bends, brackets, hangers, spacers. d. All splice conditions of gutters and downspouts. e. Sheet metal splash pans. f. Precast concrete splash blocks. g. Catalog data for stock manufactured items. 2. Samples: Color Samples for items to be factory finished. 1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Inspect for damage, dampness, and wet storage stains upon delivery to Site. B. Remove and replace damaged or permanently stained materials that cannot be restored to like -new condition. C. Carefully handle to avoid damage to surfaces, edges, and ends. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 62 00 - 2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Do not open packages until ready for use. E. Store materials in dry, weathertight, ventilated areas until immediately before installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL A. Prefinished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy and temper as required for application and finish: 0.032 -inch -thick; shop precoated fluoropolymer coating (Kynar polyvinylidene fluoride resin) coating; color as custom, as indicated by Architect's designation. 2.02 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHING A. For Concrete: 1. Stainless steel, 0.015 inch. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Fry Reglet Corp.; Fry Springlok Type CO and Springlok Flashing. b. Cheney Flashing Co.; Type A reglet and Snap Lock Cap Flashing. B. For Masonry: 1. Stainless steel, 0.015 inch. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Fry Reglet Corp.; Fry Springlok Type MA and Springlok Flashing. b. Cheney Flashing Co.; Type B reglet and Snap Lock Cap Flashing. C. Surface Mounted: 1. Stainless steel, 0.015 inch. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Fry Reglet Corp.; Fry Springlok Type SM and Springlok Flashing. b. Cheney Flashing Co.; Type D reglet and Snap Lock Cap Flashing. 2.03 DOWNSPOUTS, GUTTERS, SCUPPERS, AND CONDUCTOR HEADS A. Same metal and thickness as flashing. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MARCH 25, 2026 07 62 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.04 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Isolation Tape: Butyl or polyisobutylene, internally reinforced, or 20 -mil thick minimum polyester. B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. D. Fasteners: 1. Aluminum Sheet Metalwork: Stainless steel. 2. Galvanized Steelwork: Steel, galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M or stainless steel fasteners. 3. Stainless Steelwork: Stainless steel. 2.05 FABRICATION OF FLASHING A. Field measure prior to fabrication. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA 1013 that applies to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Formed Metal Copings: Figure 3-1. 2. Counter Flashing Systems: Figure 4-3. 3. Base and Counter Flashing for Shingles: Figure 4-7. 4. Valley Flashings for Shingles: Figure 4-10. 5. Roof Penetration Flashings: Figures 4-13, 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, and 4-17. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. D. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 62 00 - 4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Seams: 1. Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. F. Reinforcements and Supports: Provide same material as flashing, unless other material is shown. Steel, where shown or required, shall be galvanized or stainless. G. Rigid Joints and Seams: Make mechanically strong. H. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. 1. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 -inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. Fabricate sheet metal in 10 -foot maximum lengths, unless otherwise indicated. K. Provide watertight closures at exposed ends of counterflashing. L. Fabricate corners in one-piece with legs extending 30 inches each way to field joint. Lap, rivet, or solder corner seams watertight. Apply sealant if necessary. M. Neutralize soldering flux. N. Solvent clean sheet metal. Surfaces to be in contact with roofing or otherwise concealed shall be coated with isolation paint. O. Pipe Penetrations through Roof: As shown on the Drawings. P. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed -to -view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. Q. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA 1013 and FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.06 FABRICATION OF DOWNSPOUTS, GUTTERS, SCUPPERS, AND CONDUCTOR HEADS A. Form downspouts and gutters in maximum lengths as practicable to sizes and shapes indicated on the Drawings: 1. Telescope end joints 1-1/2 inches and lock longitudinal joints of downspouts. 2. Provide elbows at bottom where downspouts empty onto splash blocks. 3. Fit downspouts into cast iron boots or drainpipes where indicated on Drawings; neatly caulk or cement joints. B. Form scuppers and conductor heads to shapes and sizes indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set and cant strips and reglets in place. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Flashing: 1. General: a. Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA 1013. b. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. c. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. 2. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. a. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 16 -inch centers. 3. Isolate metal from wood and concrete and from dissimilar metal with isolation tape or two coats of isolation paint. 4. Use only stainless steel fasteners to connect isolated dissimilar metals. 5. Joints: 10 -foot maximum spacing and 2-1/2 feet from corners, butted with 3/16 -inch space centered over matching 8 -inch -long backing plate with sealing tape in laps. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 62 00 - 6 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 6. Set flanges of flashings and roof accessories on continuous sealing tape or in plastic roof cement on top of envelope ply of roofing. Nail flanges through sealing tape and at 3 -inch maximum spacing. Touch up isolation paint on flanges. 7. Joints, Fastenings, Reinforcements, and Supports: Sized and located as required to preclude distortion or displacement as a result of thermal expansion and contraction. 8. Provide continuous hold-down clips at counterflashing and gravel stops. 9. Conceal fastenings wherever possible. 10. Set flashing and sheet metal to straight, true lines with exposed faces aligned in proper plane without bulges or waves. 11. At vents through roof turn down lead flashing minimum 2 inches inside vent pipe. B. Prefabricated Metal Systems: 1. Follow system manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Place color variations in pieces so no extremes are next to each other. C. Downspouts, Gutters, Scuppers, and Conductor Heads: Anchor downspouts to wall with straps of same material as downspouts. Install gutters, scuppers, and conductor heads as indicated on the Drawings. 3.03 FINISH A. Exposed Surfaces of Flashing and Sheet Metalwork: Free of dents, scratches, abrasions, or other visible defects, and clean and ready for painting where applicable. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MARCH 25, 2026 07 62 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 07 70 01 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Air Movement and Control Association International (AMCA). 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D 1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. b. D4586, Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free. 4. FM (Factory Mutual) Global (FM). 5. UL. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing materials, details, flashing, anchorage, and relation to adjacent structure. 2. Catalog cuts of each item specified item. B. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance per Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, (or alternately, test results or calculations) that assure item's and its anchorage's design criteria meets requirements of Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination: Schedule and coordinate work of this section with work of Section 07 40 00, Roofing and Siding Panels and Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND APRIL 17, 2026 ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 07 70 01 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE SEALS A. Prefabricated one-piece aluminum flanged base with stepped, graduated EPDM cap and adjustable stainless steel clamps. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Pate Co.; Pipe Seal. 2. Portals Plus, Inc.; Alumi-Flash. 2.02 FLEXIBLE BASE PIPE SEALS A. Prefabricated one-piece aluminum flanged base with stepped, graduated EPDM cap and adjustable stainless steel clamps. Aluminum base shall be capable of bending to match profile of sheet metal roofing panels. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Pate Co.; Dektite. 2. Portals Plus, Inc.; Deck -Mate. 2.03 VENT PIPE FLASHING A. Prefabricated flashing with elastomeric collar and 0.032 -inch aluminum base, sized to fit vent pipe. B. Manufacturer and Product: Oatey; No -Caulk Roof Flashing. 2.04 ROOF HATCHES: PTU AND SOLIDS BUILDINGS A. Material: Aluminum, 11 -gauge with factory -insulated curb and cover. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Size: 30 -inches by 36 -inches (Nominal): Must meet OSHA 7 -inch ladder clearance and provide 30 -inch clear for climber passage: 37 -inch total front to back clearance. a. Bilco; Type S-50TB; Ladder Access Hatch. b. Cover and Frame Finish: Aluminum, mill. c. Curb with perimeter curb height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surfaces of perimeter curb is level. d. Insulation: 3 -inches, thermally broken. ROOF SPECIALTIES AND PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ACCESSORIES APRIL 17, 2026 07 70 01 -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Locks and Latches: 1. Exterior T -Handle operating the latch from the exterior. 2. Padlock Hasp at exterior. 2.05 ROOF HATCHES: EQ & PFS BUILDINGS A. Material: Aluminum, 11 -gauge with factory -insulated curb and cover. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Size: 7 feet by 7 feet: a. Bilco; Type D; Equipment Access Hatch. b. Cover and Frame Finish: Aluminum, mill. c. Curb with perimeter curb height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surfaces of perimeter curb is level. d. Insulation: 3 inches, thermally broken. C. Locks and Latches: 1. Exterior T -Handle operating the latch from the exterior. 2. Padlock Hasp at exterior. 2.06 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Isolation Paint: ASTM D 1187, asphalt. B. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete or dissimilar metals as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. C. Isolation Tape: Butyl or polyisobutylene, internally reinforced, or 20 -mil -thick minimum polyester. D. Plastic Roof Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II. E. Fasteners: Stainless steel of type required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces and structures to receive the Work of this section. B. Take measurements at Site and fabricate work to suit. No changes shall be made in supporting structure to accommodate this Work. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND APRIL 17, 2026 ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 07 70 01 -3 MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install roof specialties and accessories as detailed in approved shop drawings and in conformance with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and standards. 2. Use appropriate pipe curb assembly, pipe seal, flexible base pipe seal, or vent pipe flashing where pipe, conduit, or cable, etc., penetrate roofing membrane. 3. Factory Finished Units: Place color variations in pieces so no extremes are next to each other. 4. Make Work weathertight and free of expansion and contraction noise. 5. Maintain separation between aluminum surfaces and concrete or dissimilar metals with isolation paint. B. Roof Hatches and Smoke Vents: Install to operate freely and not rattle when closed or open. C. Roof Vents: Install in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's instructions, but in no case less than one per 1,000 square feet of roof area. D. Louvered Penthouse: Install weathertight, matching size of equipment support curb, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Snow Guards: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, including recommended spacing for roof type, slope, and location, and attachment method. END OF SECTION ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 077001-4 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): E814, Test Method for Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. 2. UL: a. 1479, Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. b. 2079, Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide systems of material or combination of materials used to fill openings around penetrating items to prevent the spread of fire and retain integrity of fire rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against spread of flame, smoke, water, and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies. B. Provide Fire Safing: 1. At slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and exterior walls. 2. Gaps between top of walls and structure above. 3. Expansion joints in walls, floors, and ceilings. C. Performance Requirements: Provide firestop systems with materials that have been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Firestop Systems: Meet requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479, or UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. 2. Proposed Firestop Materials and Methods: Conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. 3. Meet F and T ratings of ASTM E814 for a period equal to construction penetrated. 4. Underwriters Laboratories classified as fill, void, or cavity materials under UL 1479. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRESTOPPING MARCH 19, 2026 07 84 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Show layout, profiles, and product components; include UL Systems Number on Shop Drawings and diagram of UL approved assembly. 2. Product Data: Include manufacturer's SPEC -DATA® product sheet for products selected for use. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. 3. Certificates: a. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. b. Certificate indicating installer qualifications. c. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with section. 4. Special Guarantee documents specified below. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in performing Work of this section and specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this Project. B. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct preinstallation meeting to identify where seals are required and verify Project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at Project Site. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification and UL listing mark intact. C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements. D. Follow recommended procedures, precautions, or remedies described in Material Safety Data Sheets as applicable. FIRE STOPPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 078400-2 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Firestopping requirements may be created by mechanical and electrical portions of the Work: 1. Identify locations requiring firestopping. 2. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. 1.07 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of Work specified in this section found defective during a period of 2 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in the General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Furnish firestop system products from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. 3M Corp.; Firestopping Products. B. Hilti Construction Chemicals; High Performance Firestop Systems. C. International Protective Coatings Corp. (IPC); Flamesafe Firestop Products. D. Isolatek International (Cafco); TPS. E. Specified Technologies; Inc. (STI). F. United States Gypsum Co. (USG); Firestop Systems and Thermafiber Safing Insulation. 2.03 MIXES A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, follow firestopping manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRESTOPPING MARCH 19, 2026 07 84 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. With manufacturer's representative, examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping in accordance with firestop manufacturer recommendations and the following requirements: 1. Remove foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping seal with substrates. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation of through -penetration systems selected for use. 1. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations for pipes, conduits and ducts through fire -rated floors, walls, and roofs and to ensure air and water resistant seals. 2. Receive Engineer's approval prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work. FIRE STOPPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 84 00 - 4 MARCH 19, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Fire Safing: Install, following manufacturer's instructions, to completely fill gaps between tops of fire -rated walls and floor or roof deck above, between edge of floors and walls, and other locations indicated on Drawings. C. Meet Underwriters Laboratories and Factory Mutual requirements. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of Work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. C. Perform patching and repairing of damaged firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating existing firestop systems. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's representative at Site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services, for installation assistance, inspection and certification of proper installation, and training of installer's personnel in proper installation procedures. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed product from contact with contaminating substances and from damage during construction. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRESTOPPING MARCH 19, 2026 07 84 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C661, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer. b. C834, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. c. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. d. C 1193, Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Surface preparation instructions. Indicate where each product is proposed to be used. 2. Samples: Material proposed for use showing color range available. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Installation instructions. 2. Documentation showing applicator qualifications. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 4. Special guarantee. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years' experience installing sealants in projects of similar scope. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Ambient Temperature: Between 40 degrees F and 80 degrees F (4 degrees C and 27 degrees C) when sealant is applied. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JOINT SEALANTS MARCH 25, 2026 07 92 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 1.05 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Product: Furnish manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Provide special guarantee for correction or, at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of Work specified in this section found defective during a period of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work is specified in the General Conditions. B. Conditions: No adhesive or cohesive failure of sealant. C. Sealed Joints: Watertight and weathertight with normal usage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Characteristics: 1. Uniform, homogeneous. 2. Free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed. 3. Nonstaining, nonbleeding. 4. Hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum, measured by ASTM C661 method. 5. Immersible may be substituted for nonimmersible provided all other specified requirements are met. B. Color: As selected by Engineer. C. Type 1 —Silicone, Nonsag, Nonimmersible: 1. Silicone base, single -component, moisture curing; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Capable of withstanding movement up to 50 percent of joint width. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Dow Chemical Co.; DOWSIL 790. b. General Electric; SCS2000 Silpruf. c. Sika Corp.; Sikasil N Plus US. D. Type 2 —Multipart Polyurethane, Self -leveling, Immersible: 1. Polyurethane base, multicomponent, chemical curing; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. 2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water. JOINT SEALANTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 92 00 - 2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Master Builders Solutions Construction Systems US; MasterSeal SL -2. b. Pecora Corp.; Dynatrol II -SL. c. Sika Corp.; Sikaflex-2c SL. E. Type 3 —Multipart Polyurethane, Nonsag, Immersible: 1. Polyurethane base, multicomponent, chemical curing; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Pecora; Dynatrol II. b. Master Builders Solutions Construction Systems US; MasterSeal NP -2. c. Sika Corp.; Sikaflex-2c NS EZ Mix. F. Type 4 —Multipart Polyurethane, Nonsag, Nonimmersible: 1. Polyurethane base, multicomponent, chemical curing; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Master Builders Solutions Construction Systems US; MasterSeal NP -2. b. Pecora Corp.; Dynatrol II. c. Sika Corp.; Sikaflex-2c NS EZ Mix. G. Type 5 —One -part Polyurethane, Immersible: 1. Polyurethane base, single -component, moisture curing; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS or P, Class 25. 2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water. 3. Manufacturers and Products for Nonsag: a. Sika Corp.; Sikaflex-la. b. Tremco; Vulkem 116. 4. Manufacturers and Products for Self -leveling: a. Master Builders Solutions Construction Systems US; MasterSeal SL -1. b. Tremco; Vulkem 45SSL. c. Sika Corp.; Sikaflex-Ic SL. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JOINT SEALANTS MARCH 25, 2026 07 92 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY H. Type 6 —One -part Polyurethane, Nonimmersible: 1. Polyurethane base, single -component, moisture curing; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Tremco; Dymonic 100. b. Master Builders Solutions Construction Systems US; MasterSeal NP -1. c. Sika Corp.; Sikaflex-la. I. Type 7 —Multipart Polysulfide, Immersible: 1. Polysulfide base, two -component, chemical curing; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P or Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water. 3. For use above grade and below grade. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. W. R. Meadows; Deck -O -Seal Gun Grade, two-part. b. Pecora Corp.; Synthacalk GC2+. J. Type 8 —One -part Polysulfide, Nonsag, Nonimmersible: 1. Polysulfide base, single -component, moisture curing; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 12 1/2. 2. Capable of withstanding movement up to 20 percent of joint width. 3. Manufacturer and Product: W. R. Meadows; POLY -JET LOX. K. Type 9 —One -part Acrylic Terpolymer, Nonsag, Nonimmersible: 1. Acrylic base, single -component, solvent curing; ASTM C834 nonsag. 2. Capable of withstanding movement up to 7.5 percent of joint width; Shore "A" hardness of 55 maximum. 3. Manufacturer and Product: KARNAK; 44 Klear Seal Caulk. L. Type 10 —Sanitary Sealant: 1. Silicone sealant similar to Type 1, above, formulated to resist mold growth and repeated exposure to high humidity while retaining adhesion, flexibility, and color. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Dow Chemical Co.; DOWSIL 786. b. General Electric; SCS 1700 Sanitary. JOINT SEALANTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 92 00 - 4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF M. Type 1 1 —Fire Penetration Seal: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. 3M Corp.; Fire Barrier Sealant CP 25WB+ and Fire Barrier Moldable Putty Stix MP+. b. Specified Technologies Inc.; SpecSeal LCI Intumescent Sealant. c. Hilti USA; CP 604. N. Type 12 —One -part Polycarbonate, Immersible: 1. Polycarbonate base, single -component, moisture curing; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Pro -Seal Products, Inc.; Pro -Seal 34. O. Type 13 —Tape Sealant: 1. Compressible polyurethane foam impregnated with polybutylene or polymer -modified asphalt. 2. Color: Black. 3. Size: 3/4 inch wide by length required by expanded thickness recommended by manufacturer for particular application. 4. Manufacturer and Product: Sika Corp., Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd.; AST Hi -Acrylic. 2.02 BACKUP MATERIAL A. Nongassing, extruded, closed -cell round polyurethane foam or polyethylene foam rod, compatible with sealant used, and as recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Size: As shown or as recommended by sealant material manufacturer. Provide for joints greater than 3/16 inch wide. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Tremco; Closed -cell Backing Rod. 2. W.R. Meadows; Cera-Rod and Kool-Rod. 2.03 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JOINT SEALANTS MARCH 25, 2026 07 92 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Primer: Nonstaining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2.04 PREFORMED SEALS A. Preformed Compressible Joint Seals: 1. Widths Up to 5 Inches: a. BASF, Watson Bowman Acme Div.; Wabo Weatherseal II. b. Sika Corp., Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd.; Seismic Colorseal. c. LymTal International; Iso-flex Compression Seal Expansion Joint System. 2. Other Widths: Series or model recommended by seal manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Use of more than one material for the same joint is not allowed unless approved by sealant manufacturer. B. Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Horizontal and Sloping Joints up to 1 Percent Maximum Slope: Use self - leveling (Grade P) joint sealant. D. Steeper Sloped Joints, Vertical Joints, and Overhead Joints: Use nonsag (Grade NS) joint sealant. E. Use joint sealant as required for the applicable application and as follows: Joint Size Sealant Type Lessthanl" 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or 12 Less than 2" 1, 2, 3, 4, or 7 Over 2" Follow manufacturer's recommendation JOINT SEALANTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 92 00 - 6 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that joint dimensions, and physical and environmental conditions, are acceptable to receive sealant. B. Sealed surfaces to be clean, dry, sound, and free of dust, loose mortar, oil, and other foreign materials. 1. Mask adjacent surfaces where necessary to maintain neat edge. 2. Starting of work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 3. Apply primer to dry surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Verify joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. E. Follow manufacturer's instructions for mixing multi -component products. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform intended function. 1. Install backup material as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2. Where possible, provide full length sections without splices; minimize number of splices. 3. Tape sealant may be used as joint filler if approved by sealant manufacturer. B. Use bond breaker where recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Seal joints around window, door and louver frames, expansion joints, control joints, and elsewhere as indicated. D. Joint Sealant Materials: Follow manufacturer's recommendation and instructions, filling joint completely from back to top, without voids. E. Joints: Tool slightly concave after sealant is installed. 1. When tooling white or light color sealant, use a water wet tool. 2. Finish joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Tape Sealant: Compress to 50 percent of expanded thickness and install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JOINT SEALANTS MARCH 25, 2026 07 92 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 3.04 PREFORMED SEALS A. Prepare joint surfaces clean and dry, free from oil, rust, laitance, and other foreign material. B. Construct joints straight and parallel to each other and at proper width and depth. C. Apply joint sealant manufacturer's approved primer and adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install seal in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces next to the sealed joints of smears or other soiling resultant of sealing application. B. Replace damaged surfaces resulting from joint sealing or cleaning activities. 3.06 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE A. This schedule lists the sealant types acceptable for each joint location. Use as few different sealant types as possible to meet the requirements of Project. Joint Locations Sealant Type(s) Expansion/Contraction and Control Joints At: Concrete Walls (except water -holding and belowgrade portions of structures) 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12 Concrete Floor Slabs (except for water -holding Structures) 2, 5 Concrete Walls and Slabs immersed in water and/or below grade 7 Slabs Subject to Vehicle and Pedestrian Traffic 2, 5 Masonry Walls 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13 Exterior Insulation and Finish System Ceramic Tile Floors 1, 2, 5, 10 Ceramic Tile Walls 1, 3, 5, 10 Precast Concrete Wall Panels 3, 4, 5, 12, 13 JOINT SEALANTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 07 92 00 - 8 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Joint Locations I Sealant Material Joints At: Metal Door, Window, and Louver Frames (Exterior) 1, 5, 6, 8, 12 Metal Door, Window, and Louver Frames (Interior) 1, 5, 6, 8, 9 Wall Penetrations (Exterior) 1, 5, 6, 8, 12 Wall Penetrations (Interior) 1, 5, 6, 8 Floor Penetrations 5, 6, 7 Ceiling Penetrations 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 Roof Penetrations 5 Sheet Metal Flashings 5, 13 Sheet Metal Roofing and Siding 5, 13 Precast Concrete Wall Panels 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13 Glazed Concrete Masonry Unit Joints 1 Precast/Prestressed Floor Panels (Interior) 2, 7 Precast/Prestressed Floor and Roof Panels (Exterior) 3, 7 Other Joints: Threshold Sealant Bed 5 Between Counter Tops and Backs lashes 10 Around Plumbing Fixtures 10 Openings Around Pipes, Conduits, and Ducts Through Fire -Rated Construction As specified in Section 07 84 00, Firestopping B. Use sealant Type 10 for joints between counter tops and backsplashes and around plumbing fixtures where they fit against walls and floors. C. Use sealant Type 11 to seal voids and holes around penetrations through fire -rated elements. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS JOINT SEALANTS 079200-9 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 07 95 13 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): E1399, Standard Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths of Architectural Joint Systems. 2. UL. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Product data including Engineer's identification mark, size, and description of components. b. UV performance of exterior covers. c. Movement performance of each cover. d. Fire rating tests. e. Details of blockout and anchorage required. 2. Samples: a. Manufacturer's flexible material in standard colors as applicable for color selection. b. Base material with surface finish. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain expansion joint cover assemblies from a single manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ship metal pieces with protective film covering. B. Deliver and store products in original containers at not less than 70 degrees F ambient temperature for not less than 24 hours immediately before installation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES MARCH 25, 2026 079513-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Fire Resistance Rated Joint Cover Assemblies: Fire resistance rating of joint cover fire barrier shall not be less than fire rating of the construction in which the cover is installed and shall carry a UL label. B. Expansion Joint Fire Barrier (EJFB) within enclosed spaces shall consist of 0.032 -inch galvanized steel formed cover. C. Design joint covers for dynamic structural movement without material degradation or fatigue in nonfire-rated construction as tested in accordance with ASTM E1399. 2.02 2.03 FLOOR JOINT COVERS (FEJ-1) A. Material: Heavy-duty, extruded aluminum construction, mill finish, with replaceable elastomeric gasket, water stop, and complete with anchors. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Exposed Concrete Floors: a. MM Systems Corporation; Series FSS-200. b. Construction Specialties; Model GFS. c. Pawling; Styles EFTE. d. Watson Bowman Acme; Model LPP-200. 2. Tiled Floors: a. Pawling; Style OFE-T. b. Construction Specialties; Model GFST-200. WALL AND CEILING JOINT COVERS A. Material: Extruded aluminum construction, clear anodized finish, with replaceable elastomeric gasket, and complete with anchors. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. MM Systems Corporation; Series FSAL-200. 2. Construction Specialties; Model GFSW-200. 3. Pawling; Styles OWE -L. 4. Watson Bowman Acme; Model LPF-200C. EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 0795 13-2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 EXTERIOR JOINT COVERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Watson Bowman Acme; Jeane Structural Sealing Joint System. 2. Construction Specialties; Model SF -200. 3. Pawling; Series SWR. 4. MM Systems Corporation; Series VSS. 2.05 ROOF JOINT COVERS A. As indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces and structures to receive work of this section. B. Field measure and fabricate work to suit. C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of expansion joint cover assemblies to be embedded in or anchored to concrete or to have recesses formed into edges of concrete slab for later placement and grouting -in of frames. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install floor, wall, and ceiling expansion joint covers as detailed and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with a minimum number of end joints and align metal members mechanically using splice joints. C. Cut and fit ends to produce joints that accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames. D. Securely anchor covers in their proper locations, plumb and level and without distortion. Adhere and seal, watertight, cross joints in covers. E. Make fire -rated assemblies continuous between floor, wall, and ceiling joints. Install seals with Vulcanized or heat -welded field spliced joints at interior seals. Material to provide watertight joints using manufacturer's recommended procedures. Install exterior seals in maximum lengths possible with hairline end joints. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES MARCH 25, 2026 0795 13-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.03 CLEANING A. When protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. END OF SECTION EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 0795 13-4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 08 11 16 ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum Flush Doors. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. C. ASTM B308 - Aluminum -Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. D. ASTM E283 - Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. E. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. F. ASTM E331 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. G. ASTM E1886 — Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. H. ASTM E1996 — Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Performance Requirements: 1. Air infiltration: When tested in accordance with ASTM E283, the air infiltration should not exceed .04 cfin per square foot of fixed area. 2. Water Penetration: No water will pass through the entry system when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at a pressure of 6.24. 3. Uniform Load Deflection: Entry system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E330: 3840 Pa or 80.0 psf positive and negative. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS APRIL 17, 2026 081116-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Uniform Load Structural: Entry system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E330: 5760 Pa or 120.0 psf positive and negative. 5. Missile Impact: Entry system will pass double impact from large missile; ASTM E1886. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Refer to Submittal Procedures — Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's product information, including material, elemental construction, fabrication, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Include shop drawings relating to dimensions, fabrication, finish and installation. I. Drawings should include the following: a. Dimensions. b. Elevations with necessary detail keys. c. Entry system reinforcements (if applicable). d. Fabrication and Finish. D. Samples: 1. Color: Provide manufacturer's samples of standard and non-standard finishes. 2. Door: Supply manufacturer's door sample presenting finish, interior insulation, and standard reinforcement components. E. Test Results: Offer any required test results for particular jobs. Accredited test reports will be available upon request. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide all necessary instructions for installation including glazing, anchoring, reinforcement (if applicable), and optimum performance installation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Manufacturing process with contemporary inspection using neoteric checklist for optimum field performance. 2. Manufacturing same product specified for over 25 years. B. Pre -Installation Meetings: Plan initial pre -installation meetings for job details and regional regulations. ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 11 16-2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING A. Packing: Finished products shall be packaged securely with appropriate labeling for protection and product identification visible on packaging. B. Shipping and Handling: Deliver materials to site in original condition and packaging without any damage to packaging or materials. C. Unloading: Individually packaged products to be unloaded by hand truck or 2 -person team lift (or more if needed) to avoid unnecessary damage. D. Storage and Protection: 1. Store items indoors away from excessive amounts of moisture. 2. Protect entry doors against damage from outdoor hazards and during the entire installation E. Waste Management: Refer to contact information apparent on packaging for appropriate recycling opportunities. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warrant doors and frames to be free from defects and premature degradation of finish and door structure. B. Warranty period will be ten years from the date of manufacture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Cross Aluminum Products Inc., Address: 1770 Mayflower Rd., Niles, Michigan 49120. Phone: (800) 806-3667 or (269) 697-8340 Fax: (269) 697-8348 Web: www.crossaluminum.com Email: door@crossaluminum.com 2.02 ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS A. Product: FL -400 Series with required aluminum frames: Non -Thermally - broken assembly; at interior partition door openings. B. Product: FLT -400 Series with required aluminum frames: Thermally -broken assembly; at exterior wall door openings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS APRIL 17, 2026 081116-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Door Assembly: 1. Door Stile: To be aluminum alloy 6063; temper to be T5 with a minimum 1/8 -inch wall thickness. 2. Stile Thickness: To be 1-3/4 inches thick tubular extrusion. 3. Door Joinery: Joinery shall be 3/8 -inch diameter zinc plated tie rods bolted through interlocking stiles. Minimum of 3 tie rods per door (where applicable). 4. Top of Door: To receive added 1/8" reinforcement closer plate adhered to interior wall for door closer hardware. 5. Top/Bottom of Door: To receive 1/8" thick cap for further seal and to trim the top and bottom of door. D. Pattern: Fluted. E. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate Rigid Foam. 2.03 MATERIALS & ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper to be 6063 T-5 or similar alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for optimum finish results and consistency. B. Internal Reinforcement: ASTM B308, for structural aluminum. C. Fasteners 1. Material: Aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel, or other non -corrosive materials compatible with items being screw applied. 2. Exposed: a. Type: Fasteners exposed will be Philips flathead fasteners unless provided by other supplier. b. Finish: Fasteners to match appropriate finish on standard doors and frames. 3. Concealed: To be standard according to manufacturer's standards. D. Weather stripping: 1. Wool pile: a. Material: Solid Propylene Base with resilient fibers. b. Color: Manufacturer's standard black color. ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 11 16-4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00, Glazing. 1. Door Glazing: Interlocking door glazing to be screw fastened and removable from interior with NORSEALOO V7 10 and/or V740 moisture seal foam tape applied to both interior and exterior sides of door. Exterior glazing to be non -removable. a. Material: To be 1/8 inch thick extruded channels -6063-T5. b. Color: To match finish of door. 2. Frame Glazing: Exterior side Snap -in glazing. Frame gasket to be flush glaze extruded rubber compound; EPDM. a. Material: To be aluminum extruded channels -6063-T5. b. Color: To match finish of frame. 2.04 HARDWARE A. Hardware Preparation: To be fabricated at factory according to hardware templates provided. B. Hardware Installation: To factory install all applicable and supplied hardware to doors and frames. C. Hardware Reinforcement: To provide necessary reinforcement for proper longevity and hardware function; ASTM B209 and/or ASTM 308. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Processes: 1. Job Preparation: a. Preliminary Analysis: Job drawings to indicate door types, sizes, vision lite configuration(s), and finishes. b. Fulfill Custom Requirements: Follow through on any specific deviations from standard requirements. 2. Assembly: a. Product Operation: Measure, cut, and fabricate required materials for designated job. b. Product Refinement: Smooth rough cut edges. c. Arrangement: Place prepared structural fasteners inside door to conceal from view. d. Reinforcement Preparation: To apply necessary structural and hardware reinforcement in beneficial areas of doors and frames where needed. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS 081116-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Fitting: a. Placement: Product materials to fit accurately in appropriate locations. b. Alignment: Doors to be in proper alignment with intended elevations. B. Tolerances: Doors and/or frame elevations will not deviate from last revised and approved drawings. 2.06 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard aluminum extruded profiles with required thickness for load support. 1. Vertical Jamb Sizes: 2 inches by 4-1/2 inches. 2. Header Sizes: 2 inches by 4-1/2 inches. B. Clips and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high strength aluminum: ASTM B221 and/or ASTM B308. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard non -bleeding and non- corrosive material congruent to adjacent material. 1. Exposed Fasteners: To be stainless steel Philips flathead screws with appropriate finish: ASME B 18.6.4. 2. Concealed Fasteners: To be manufacturer's standard. D. Assembly: 1. Framing members are separate aluminum pieces cut to length and mechanically fastened from either spline or clip systems. 2. Joinery to be hairline. 3. Sommer and Maca Dymonic or Dow Corning® 795 Sealants applied on applicable areas. 4. Framing elevations to be identified according to final approved drawings. E. Anchoring: 1. Appropriate anchoring fasteners to be secured no more than 18 inches apart on entire frame opening. 2. Frame headers to receive no less than 2 anchoring fasteners. 3. Add extra fasteners where hardware and hinge may require more. ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 11 16-6 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Doorstop: 1. To be #CDM-32. a. Wall Thickness: To be 3/16 inch thick for receiving applicable hardware. b. Profile Height: To be no less than 5/8 inch high. 2. Snap -in: Fits standard manufacturer's doorjamb profiles. 3. To receive weather strip around acting door leafs. a. Wool pile: Solid Propylene Base with resilient fibers in a standard black color. G. Hardware Preparation: 1. Intramural Work: Hardware preparation according to hardware suppliers' templates. 2. Field Work: Refer to manufacturers' installation instructions. 2.07 FINISHES A. Paint Finishes: 1. 70% Fluoropolymer (PVDF): AAMA 2605, ASCA 96, Kynar 500® or Hylar 5000®. a. Fluropon®: 2 or more coat systems. b. Trinar® Exotic Clear, Trinar® Metallic Clear: 3 coat system. c. Duranar®: 2, 3, or 4 -coat systems. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting proper installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Install doors plumb, level, and square, with no warp or rack in frame. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS APRIL 17, 2026 081116-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Hang doors with the following required clearances: 1. Lock Stiles: 0.125 inch. 2. Between Meeting Stiles: 0.187 inch- 0.250 inch. 3. At Top Rails: 0.125 inch. 4. Between Bottom Rail and Threshold: 0.125 inch - 0.187 inch. E. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. F. Rigidly secure non movement joints. G. Install recommended anchors with separators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. H. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. I. Glazers to provide necessary glazing shims for proper glass installation on vision lites and side lites. J. Place thresholds in proper weather sealant. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Fine-tune doors and hinges to operate properly without bind or sag. B. Adjust pressure settings on closers. 1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3 -second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70 degree open position to 3 inches from the latch measured to the leading door edge. 3.04 CLEANING A. Immediately clean doors after installation. B. Avoid any harsh cleaners not specified on manufacturer's cleaning and care guide. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Follow Manufacturer's guide to cleaning and care for proper treatment on entrances for optimum longevity, function, and performance. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 11 16-8 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 08 12 16 INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES AND DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements Specifications, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes Interior Aluminum Frames for doors, frames and glazing installed in gypsum board partitions. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For interior aluminum frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long in size. D. Schedule: For interior aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing. schedule and glazing. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES MARCH 25, 2026 AND DOORS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 08 12 16 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Smoke- and Draft -Control Assemblies: Where indicated, provide assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3 -inch wg of water. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Avalon International Aluminum, Inc. a. https://www.avalonint.com/products 2. Frameworks Manufacturing. a. https://frameworks.comltype-i-frame-systeml 3. RACO Interior Products, Inc. a. https://racointeriors.com/products/ 4. Western Integrated Materials, Inc. a. https://www.aluminumdoorframes.com/products 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch thick. B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers. 1. 90 -Minute Fire -Protection Rating: Fabricate aluminum frame assemblies with a cold -formed, primed, interior steel liner. C. Glazing Frames: 2 inch depth, extruded aluminum, for glazing thickness indicated. D. Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum. E. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, with removable snap -in casing trim, glazing stops, and door stops without exposed fasteners. INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND DOORS MARCH 25, 2026 08 12 16-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless -steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. B. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous vinyl seals. C. Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire -rated gaskets. D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate glazing thickness indicated. E. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00, Glazing. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted or mitered connections. B. Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. 1. Locate hardware as required by fire -rated label for assembly. C. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame. 1. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors. D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. 2.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES MARCH 25, 2026 AND DOORS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 08 12 16-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates. At fire -protection -rated openings, install interior aluminum frames according to NFPA 80. C. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 96 inches long must be one piece. D. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610. E. Touch up marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches. Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. END OF SECTION INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES AND DOORS 081216-4 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 08 16 13 FIBERGLASS DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D635, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. b. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. Steel Door Institute (SDI): a. SDI 100/ANSI A250.8, Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. SDI 105, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Windows. 4. UL: Building Materials Directory. 5. Warnock Hersey Certification Listings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's literature, and drawings prepared for this Project showing types, sizes, fire ratings, complete details of door and frame construction, including resin used, glass/resin ration, cutouts and anchorage for units. 2. Samples: Two Samples to verify custom color match, if any. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Manufacturer's instructions for handling and care of products. 3. Executed guarantee. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIBERGLASS DOORS MARCH 25, 2026 08 16 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver doors to Job Site after moisture -producing construction operations are complete and building has reached average prevailing relative humidity of locality. 2. Deliver doors and frames in unopened packages, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, size, thickness, and identifying symbol or mark related to door numbers used in Contract Documents. B. Storage and Handling: 1. In strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2. Minimize onsite storage time. 3. Handle with clean gloves. 4. Do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces. 5. Store in dry area and protect from damage. 1.04 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. As special guarantee, provide manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named in writing as beneficiary. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at option of Owner, removal and replacement of Work specified in this Specification section found defective during a period of 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in General Conditions. B. Defects include warp, separation or delamination from core, expansion of core, and failures due to corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Special Lite. B. Fib-R-Dor, Division of Advance Fiberglass, Inc. C. Tiger Door, Division of Composite Structures, Inc. FIBERGLASS DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 081613-2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.02 DOORS A. General: 1. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (Fiber Reinforced Polyer). 2. Flush construction, minimum 1-3/4 inches thick, with no seams, cracks, or joints. 3. Full length integral edge reinforcement. 4. Face shall not deviate more than 1/4 inch from a true plane at any point. 5. Reinforced to receive hardware specified. 6. Doors may be prehung at factory or hung in field. 7. Resins: a. Formulate for extremely corrosive and humid environments above 50 percent relative humidity that may contain Hydrogen Sulfide. b. Fire retardant formulation plus antimony trioxide to achieve an ASTM E84 flame spread of 25 or less and be self -extinguishing in accordance with ASTM D635. c. Contain Ultraviolet light inhibitor additives. 8. Prepare doors and frames for hardware only after receipt of hardware templates. 9. Make cutouts for openings at factory and furnish with FRP frames and stops that prevent moisture from entering or passing through door. 10. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, Glazing. 11. Glazing may be done in factory or field. B. Doors: 1. Molded in one continuous piece. 2. Core of end -grain balsa wood or closed cell, non -absorptive, 2 pounds per square foot density, isocyanurate or urethane rigid foam. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard in colors selected. 4. Furnish astragals at joints between pairs and with transom panels. C. Transom Panels: Match door construction and finish. 2.03 FRAMES A. Manufacturer's standard one-piece-pultruded, three-piece built-up, or one-piece molded FRP with double rabbeted profile, reinforced for specified hardware, assembled with stainless steel fasteners, and furnished with wall anchors for installation after wall opening is complete. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIBERGLASS DOORS MARCH 25, 2026 08 16 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Furnished by door manufacturer with finish to match doors and prepared for hardware specified. C. Fire Rated Frames: Manufacturer's standard with UL listed in Warnock Hersey Certification Listings and labeled with rating as scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify doors and frames comply with approved Shop Drawings and meet indicated requirements for type, size, hardware, location, and swing. B. Examine openings for conditions that would prevent proper installation. C. Do not proceed with installation until defects are corrected. D. Do not install doors in frames that would hinder operation of doors. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install, following manufacturer's written instructions, using only noncorrosive materials and methods. B. Tolerances: 1. From Door Bottom to Floor Covering: 1/2 inch. 2. From Bottom to Top of Threshold: 1/4 inch. 3. Maximum From Top: 1/8 inch. 4. Bevel Lock and Hinge Edges: 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 5. Clearance of Meeting Stiles of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch. C. Install frames square, plumb, rigid, and in true alignment. Brace securely during construction to retain proper position and clearances. Anchor firmly in place. D. Do not cut or otherwise alter integrity of door to allow door to fit frame. E. Frames Set in Concrete or Masonry: Secure each jamb with four stainless steel expansion anchors following manufacturer's instructions. FIBERGLASS DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 081613-4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Replace or rehang doors that are hinge -bound and do not swing, latch or operate smoothly and freely. B. Remove and install new prefinished doors in place of those damaged during installation. C. Refinish, or replace with new, job -finished doors damaged during installation. D. Modify doors and frames only at manufacturer's factory. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. For tabulation of door and frame characteristics, such as size, type, detail, and finish hardware requirements see Door and Hardware Schedule. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIBERGLASS DOORS MARCH 25, 2026 08 16 13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 08 3123 FLOOR DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Aluminum floor doors. 2. Steel floor doors, 3. Stainless steel floor doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 70 01, Roof Specialties and Accessories for roof hatches. 2. Section 08 31 13, Access Doors and Frames for wall- and ceiling -mounted access doors and frames. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Product Schedule: For floor doors. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALUMINUM FLOOR DOORS A. Gutter Channel Frame Aluminum Floor Door: 1. Product: Bilco Floor/Vault/Sidewalk Door — Model JD -AL. 2. Size: As indicated. 3. Frame: Mill finish aluminum, gutter profile, with integral drainage coupling and perimeter gasket. 4. Door: Double leaf; 1/4 -inch -thick (6.4 -mm -thick), smooth mill -finish aluminum plate. 5. Loading Capacity: 300 lbf/sq. ft. (14.4 kN/sq. m) pedestrian live load. 6. Hardware: a. Material and Finish: Type 316 stainless steel, including latch and lifting mechanism assemblies, hold -open arms, and brackets, hinges, pins, and fasteners. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FLOOR DOORS APRIL 17, 2026 08 31 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Hinges: Heavy-duty butt hinges with stainless steel pins. c. Operating Mechanism: Adjustable counterbalancing springs, heavy-duty hold -open arm that automatically locks door open at 90 degrees, release handle with vinyl grip that allows for one - handed closure, and recessed lift handle. d. Latch: Stainless steel slam latch. 7. Other manufactures, meeting design requirements, acceptable: a. Nystrom Products Co., Minneapolis, MN; FH Series. b. U.S.F. Fabrication, Hialeah, FL; A Series. c. ITT Flygt Corporation, Trumbull, CT; FLE Series. d. Thompson Fabricating Co., Birmingham, AL; TI Series. e. Halliday Products, Orlando, FL; SS Series. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D. C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A879/A879M, with cold -rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. D. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. E. Rolled -Stainless Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A793, manufacturer's standard fmish. F. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A666. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063-T6. H. Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B632/B632M, Alloy 6061-T6. I. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. J. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face. K. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329. FLOOR DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 083123-2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Provide floor doors manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure floor doors to types of supports indicated. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. E. Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum that comes in contact with concrete. 2.04 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products. E. Prime Painted Steel: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate -free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. F. Stainless Steel Finish: Bright, cold -rolled, unpolished ASTM A480/A480M No. 2B fmish. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FLOOR DOORS APRIL 17, 2026 08 31 23 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor doors. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection Agency: A qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish reports to Architect. B. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. END OF SECTION FLOOR DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 31 23 - 4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. b. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. c. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. d. B221M, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric). e. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed) (WH): Certification Listings. 3. National Association of Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts. c. MG 1, Motors and Generators. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. b. 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 6. UL: a. Building Materials Directory. b. l 0B, Standard Safety for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. c. 325, Standard Safety for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS APRIL 17, 2026 083323-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. 2. Product Data: General construction, component connections and details, wiring diagram and electrical equipment. 3. Samples: Submit two door slats, 12 -inch by 12 -inch in size illustrating shape, color and finish texture. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificate of Compliance per Section 01 43 33, Manufacturer's Field Services (or alternately, test results or calculations) that assure item's and its anchorage's design criteria meets requirements of Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing for loads provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 2. Third party testing documentation or manufacturer's literature qualifying door model as meeting required developed wind pressures and impact testing for small or large missile. Miami -Dade Notice of Approval (NOA) documentation is acceptable as third party evidence of certification. 3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, and adjustment and alignment procedures. 4. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data; include lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required. 5. Seismic Anchorage and Bracing: a. Drawings and product data as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. b. Calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. c. Installer's factory authorization. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum 10 years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 083323-2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be: 1. Basis Of Design Product: a. Thermiser Max® Insulated Rolling Door. b. Model Number: ESD30. c. Insulated Doors meet ASHRAE® 90.12, 2021 IECC® and California's Title 24 air infiltration requirements with an independently tested value of less than 0.3 CFM/FT2. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer -Suppliers providing the Basis of Design or similarly performing Product a. Cornell. b. Clopay. c. Cookson. d. Overhead Door Co. 2.02 GENERAL A. Wind Loads: Design door assembly to withstand wind/suction load of 20 psf (958 Pa), with maximum deflection of 1/120, and without damage to door or assembly components. B. Operation: Design door assembly including operator, to operate for not less than 50,000 cycles and 20 cycles per day. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or another testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. D. Surface Burning Characteristics, Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Curtain: Conform to the following: 1. Aluminum Slats: Interlocking, minimum 0.040 inch (1 mm) thick of ASTM B221 aluminum alloy Type 6063. 2. Type: Single thickness flat slat. Sandwich slat construction with manufacturer's standard insulated core with maximum U -value of 0.16 and backing to match face slat, thermally separated from face slat. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS APRIL 17, 2026 08 33 23 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Nominal Slat Size: 7/8 -inches thick, 3 inches wide by required length. 4. Slat Ends: Each slat fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 5. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with aluminum angles, channels, or hollow extrusion to provide reinforcement and positive contact with floor in closed position. B. Guides: Guides: Minimum 0.1875 inch thick; stainless steel angles, continuous, vertical mounted; stainless steel mounting brackets. C. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid -travel; with adjustable spring tension. D. Hood Enclosure: Square shape, minimum 24 -gauge (0.75 mm) thick stainless steel; internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. E. Hardware: 1. Locks: Furnish locks to allow doors to be secured. a. Manual Doors: Manufacturer's standard cylinder dead lock on inside at door jamb, key operated from exterior and interior. b. Electric Doors: Manufacturer's standard cylinder locking system to secure door; interlock with motor to prevent motor from operating when lock is activated. 2. Cylinders: Furnished under Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware installed as part of Work of this section; doors keyed alike. 3. Handle: Inside side mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to keep in locked or retracted position; interior and exterior handle. 4. Weatherstripping (Exterior Assemblies): Moisture and rot proof, resilient type for complete weathertight installation. a. Rubber, neoprene, or vinyl water seal at hood to prevent airflow around coil on exterior doors. b. Weather seal sealing strip on guide to close space between guide and curtain on exterior doors. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 33 23 - 4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Manual Operation: Manual hand chain lift unit with overhead counter balance device, requiring 25 lb (10 kg) nominal force to operate. G. Electric Operation: 1. Electric motor operated unit with manual override in case of power failure. 2. UL 325, side mounted, open drip -proof motor. 3. Motor HP — as required based on door size. TENV for operations building and solids building, EXPL for PTU Screening Room (Listed for use in Class 1, Div 2 space). 4. Motor Enclosure: NEMA MG1 Type 4 enclosure. 5. Motor Voltage: 460V, 3 Phase. 6. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 7. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 4X for operations building and solids building, NEMA 7 for PTU Screening Room. 8. Door Speed: 12 inches per second (300 mm/s). 9. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller. 10. Control Station: Standard three button (Open -Stop -Close) keyed control for each operator, 24 -volt circuit, surface mounted. 11. Safety Edge: Manufacturer's standard safety edge and weatherseal located at door bottom, full width, sensitized type, wired to stop and reverse upon striking object. 2.04 FINISHES A. Curtain Slats: Aluminum, clear anodized. B. Steel Curtain Guides: Stainless steel, NAAMM No. 4 satin directional finish. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rated door. 1. Oversize Door Certification: Provide UL Certificate of Inspection or comparable certification acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in lieu of label for oversize door assemblies exceeding 120 square feet (11.15 square m) or 24 feet (7.3 m) in any dimension. B. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each foam plastic insulation board. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS APRIL 17, 2026 08 33 23 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. B. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. C. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. D. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated on Drawings. E. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. F. Install perimeter trim and closures. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent Work. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft (3 mm per 3 m) straight edge. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. B. Test smoke activated assemblies for proper activation. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 33 23 - 6 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.05 CLEANING A. Leave door and components clean. B. Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS APRIL 17,2026 083323-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. The Aluminum Association, Incorporated (AA): Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 800, Voluntary Specification and Test Method for Sealants. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C509, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material. b. D1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. c. E283, Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. d. E330, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. e. E33 1, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Provide a thermally isolated aluminum framing system that uses straight -in glazing without projecting stops. Position glass near exterior of frame and provide in -swinging operable vents where shown. 2. System shall have interior flashing to provide continuous flashing to exterior through pressure relieved horizontal weep holes. 3. Face Clip Design: a. Engaged by pushing straight into the clip. b. Easily removed for deglazing. c. Reusable for reglazing. 4. Entrances and glass framing shall be compatible in appearance. B. Performance Requirements: Meet requirements of Article Performance Tests. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES APRIL 17, 2026 AND STOREFRONTS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 08 41 13 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Details of doors, framing, and anchorage to structure. b. Manufacturer's brochures or catalogs, specifications, recommendations, and standard details illustrating and specifying products proposed for use on this Project and other aluminum door and window products available. c. Show field measurements. d. Anchorage and bracing drawings and/or catalog information, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 2. Samples: At least 3 -inch -long Samples of anodized extruded aluminum, showing probable range of variation in color. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. Submit with Action Submittal for the same item. 2. Evidence of installer's qualifications. 3. Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance tests. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: In accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Entity specializing in the installation of aluminum glazing systems, with a minimum of 3 years' experience and approved by the system manufacturer. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct to discuss and verify project requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113-2 MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Store materials as recommended by manufacturer, in inside designated areas, free of dust and corrosive fumes, as close as possible to point of installation. C. Prevent contaminants from contacting aluminum. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Aluminum -Framed Entrance and Storefront systems, entrance doors, and ventilators shall be the products of a single manufacturer. B. Materials and products specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Kawneer Co.l Basis -Of -Design: Kawneer 451T system. 2. United States Aluminum Corp. 3. Tublite, Inc. 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS A. Basic Aluminum Extrusions: 6063-T5 aluminum not less than 0.094 inch thick; door extrusions not less than 0.125 inch thick. B. Framing Members: 4-1/2 inches in depth with thermal break and face width of 2 inches or less. Sizes and profiles as shown. C. Swing Entrance Doors: 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Stile and Rail Construction: a. Wide (over 4 -inch) stiles and top rails, and 12 -inch bottom rail. b. Mechanically fastened and welded. c. Hook -in type glazing stops. d. Configuration indicated. 3. Flush Construction: a. Face sheets of plain unpatterned architectural quality 5005 alloy aluminum, 0.050 inch thick, interlocked with stiles and rails. b. Aluminum stiles and rails, mechanically fastened and welded. c. Core of froth -in -place urethane foam, free of chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) blowing agents. d. Aluminum framed vision lights. e. Configuration indicated. D. Glazing Gaskets: Framing manufacturer's standard elastomeric extrusion, conforming to ASTM C509. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES APRIL 17, 2026 AND STOREFRONTS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 0841 13-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Glass and Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, Glazing. F. Concealed Fastening Devices, Reinforcements, and Other Internal Components: Of aluminum alloy, stainless steel, or corrosion -resistant plated. G. Screws: Stainless steel, factory finished color to match aluminum finish. H. Hardware: Door manufacturer's standard items as scheduled, and coordinated with Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. 1. Hinges. 2. Locks. 3. Exit devices. 4. Concealed closers. 5. Pull handles. 6. Stops and holders. 7. Thresholds. 8. Weatherstripping: Head and jambs, and sweepstrip at bottom of doors. I. Sealants: 1. AAMA 800, to seal metal to metal, nonworking joints. 2. Color to be compatible with adjacent materials. J. Isolation Tape: Manufacturers and Products: a. Tremco; 440. b. 3M; EC 1202. c. Presstite; 579.6. K. Isolation Paint: Bituminous coating conforming to ASTM D1187. 2.03 FINISH A. Exposed Framing Members: Free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes. Superior -Performance Organic Finish, Three -Coat PVDF: a. Fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. 1) Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions for seacoast and severe environments. 2) Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113-4 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 FABRICATION A. Methods of Fabrication and Assembly: Manufacturer's discretion, unless otherwise specified. B. Reinforcement for Surface Hardware: Manufacturer's standard. C. Wind Load: Reinforce mullions as necessary to limit deflection to 1/175 of span when wind load on wall is 20 psf in addition to dead loads. D. Assembly: As far as practicable, do fitting and assembly work in shop. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Substrate Conditions: Verify acceptability for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual opening sizes prior to fabrication. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Set items straight, level, square, plumb, and at proper elevations and in alignment with other work. C. Securely anchor units to surrounding structure to resist wind loads and to withstand the normal loads imposed by the operation of the doors. D. Fasten framing members in place using screws and backing, anchor plugs, or straps. 1. Accurately cut and fit framing and moldings to result in tightly closed flush, hairline weathertight joints. 2. No visible unfinished aluminum. 3. Provide concealed attachments and fasteners. E. Door Operation: 1. Swing freely, and without rattle when closed. 2. Swing Type Doors: Head and jamb clearance of 3/32 inch, plus or minus 1/32 inch. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES APRIL 17, 2026 AND STOREFRONTS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 0841 13-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, cement plaster, or stucco with isolation paint, sealant, or isolation tape cut to neat line. G. Seal all joints. H. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, Glazing. 3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Air Leakage Through Assembly: Maximum 0.06 cfm per minute per square foot of wall area at 6.24 psf, as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. B. Resistance to Water Infiltration: No leaks in the complete system when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at test pressure of 8 psf. C. Performance Under Uniform Loading: 1. Test in accordance with ASTM E330 for a wind load of 30 psf. 2. Maximum Deflection: Not to exceed 1/175 of member span. 3. When Load is Removed: No permanent deformation or damage. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's representative at Site for preinstallation meeting, installation assistance, inspection and certification of proper installation, and performance testing of specified equipment. 3.05 CLEANING A. After erection, protect exposed portions from damage by machines, plaster, lime, paint, acid, cement, or other harmful compounds. B. Remove protective materials and clean with plain water, water with soap, or household detergent. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. For tabulation of door and frame characteristics, such as size, type, detail, and finish hardware requirements, see Section 08 06 01, Door and Hardware Schedules. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES APRIL 17, 2026 AND STOREFRONTS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 08 41 13 -6 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 08 4413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glazed aluminum curtain wall systems: Conventionally glazed. 1.02 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical -to -horizontal intersection of glazed aluminum curtain walls, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed fmish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS APRIL 17, 2026 08 44 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical -to -horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12 -inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. F. Delegated -Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: 1. For Installer and laboratory mockup testing agency. 2. For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated -design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the jurisdiction in which Project is located. B. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and components from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed aluminum curtain wall. C. Product Test Reports: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. D. Source quality -control reports. E. Field quality -control reports. F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 44 13 - 2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer and that employs a qualified glazing contractor for this Project who is certified under the North American Contractor Certification Program (NACC) for Architectural Glass & Metal (AGM) contractors. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct to discuss and verify project requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. d. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty, Factory -Applied Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of baked enamel, powder coat, or organic finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS APRIL 17, 2026 08 44 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00, Quality Requirements, to design glazed aluminum curtain walls. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members Supporting Glass: At design wind load, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans of up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans of greater than 13 feet 6 inches. E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test in accordance with ASTM E331 as follows: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested in accordance with a minimum static -air -pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 44 13 - 4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Seismic Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7. G. Energy Performance: Certified and labelled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U -factor): a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: U -factor for the system of not more than 0.36 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.04 W/sq. m x K as determined in accordance with NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: SHGC for the system of not more than 0.22 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200. 3. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: CRF for the system of not less than 65 as determined in accordance with AAMA 1503. H. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass ASTM E1886 missile -impact and cyclic -pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 4 for basic protection. 1. Large -Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small -Missile Test: For glazing located between 30 feet (9.1 m) and 60 feet above grade. I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. 2.02 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain all components of curtain -wall system and storefront system, including framing spandrel panels, entrances, sun control, and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.03 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL SYSTEMS A. Manufactures: 1. Basis -Of -Design: Kawneer 1600 system. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS APRIL 17, 2026 08 44 13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed -aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front. 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. System: Either stick or unitized system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. C. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing. 1. Include snap -on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high -strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. E. Insulated Spandrel Panels: 1. Laminated, metal -faced flat panels with no deviations in plane exceeding 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width or length. a. Overall Panel Thickness: 1 inch. b. Exterior Skin: Aluminum. 1) Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicated. 2) Finish: Match framing system. 3) Texture: Smooth. 4) Backing Sheet: 1/8 -inch- (3.2 -mm-) thick, tempered hardboard . c. Interior Skin: Aluminum. 1) Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicated. 2) Finish: Matching curtain -wall framing. 3) Texture: Smooth. 4) Backing Sheet: 1/8 -inch- (3.2 -mm-) thick, tempered hardboard. d. Thermal Insulation Core: Manufacturer's standard rigid, closed -cell, polyisocyanurate board. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 44 13 - 6 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1) Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.04 SUN CONTROL A. Sunshades: Assemblies consisting of manufacturer's standard outrigger brackets, louvers, and fascia, designed for attachment to curtain wall with mechanical fasteners. I. Orientation: Horizontal. 2. Projection from Wall: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Finish: Match adjacent glazed aluminum curtain wall. 4. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 5. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. B. Light Shelves: Light -reflecting assemblies consisting of manufacturer's standard support brackets or channels, and aluminum tray, designed for attachment to interior of curtain wall with mechanical fasteners. 1. Projection from Wall: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Finish: Match adjacent glazed aluminum curtain wall. 3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 4. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. 2.05 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00, Glazing. 2.06 MATERIALS A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). C. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M. D. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS APRIL 17, 2026 08 44 13 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion - resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods in accordance with recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces in accordance with applicable SSPC standard. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt -mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 -mil thickness per coat. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or defonnations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 084413-8 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows: 1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior. E. Curtain -Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturer's standard assembly method. 2.09 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. F. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. G. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS APRIL 17, 2026 08 44 13 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF H. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. I. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior. J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch. c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. END OF SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 44 13 - 10 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association (BHMA): a. A156.1, Butts and Hinges. b. A156.2, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. c. A156.3, Exit Devices. d. A156.4, Door Controls - Closers. e. A156.13, Mortise Locks & Latches. f. A156.16, Auxiliary Hardware. g. A156.18, Materials and Finishes. 2. International Code Council (ICC): A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 3. UL: Fire Protection Equipment List. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature for each item of finish hardware required herein, clearly marked. b. Finish Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. Furnish complete and detailed schedule, show product items, numbers, and finishes for hardware for each separate opening. c. Special Tools: Provide listing and description of usage. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Manufacturer's Field Service Report. 3. Certification of Hardware Consultant. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DOOR HARDWARE MARCH 25, 2026 087100-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Supplier: Recognized supplier of architectural finish hardware, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in vicinity of Project for not less than 5 years, and who is, or who employs, architectural hardware consultant. B. Qualifications of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC): Certified by Door and Hardware Institute. C. Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Before delivery, clearly identify and tag each item of hardware with respect to specified description and location of installation. B. Provide secure storage for finish hardware until installation is made. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Special Tools: Two sets for installation and maintenance of hardware. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide end products of one manufacturer for each product in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. B. Finishes: BHMA A156.18. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Stainless steel. 2.03 CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES A. Continuous, Gear -Type Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120 -inch thick, extruded -aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded -aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings. Minimum overall width of 4 inches (102 mm); fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete. DOOR HARDWARE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 087100-2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 LOCKS AND LATCH SETS A. Cylindrical or Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2, highest grade. 1. Trim: Wrought or cold -forged metal knobs and roses. 2. Core Cylinders: Interchangeable, removable; minimum of six pins. 3. Strikes: Lip dimensions to fit configuration of trim. 4. Bolt Throw: 3/4 inch minimum, on latchbolts for pair of doors. 5. Knob Backset: 3-3/4 inches. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Sargent; AC. b. Schlage; Plymouth. c. Best; 4C Washington. B. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1. 1. Materials: Brass or stainless steel. 2. Trim: Wrought or forged lever handles and roses. 3. Core Cylinders: Interchangeable, removable; minimum of six pins. 4. Bolt Throw: 5/8 inch minimum. 5. Lever Backset: 2-3/4 inches. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Sargent; LNJ. b. Schlage; 03. c. Best; 3H Fairbanks. C. Tactile Warning: Knurl knob backs and lever handles for touch identification; ICC A117.1, Section 4.29.3. D. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630. E. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type Description Best Sargent Schlage BHMA L1 Mortise entrance 45H7TA3H 8245-LNJ L9456P-03 F12, F13 lock with lever handle L2 Bored, entrance lock 84K7AB4C 9G05 C53PD F81, F82 L3 Mortise latch with 45HON3H 8215-LNJ L9010-03 FO1 lever handle L4 Bored latch 84KON4C 9U 15 C1OS F75 L5 Mortise utility room 45H7D3H 8204-LNJ L9080-03 F07 lock with lever handle PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DOOR HARDWARE MARCH25,2026 087100-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF No. Type Description Best Sargent Schla e BHMA L6 Bored, utility room 84K7D4C 9G04 C80PD F86 lock L7 Deadlock 83T7K 15-475 B560 E2151 L8 Mortise privacy lock 45H7L3H 8265-LNJ L9040-03 F19, F22 with lever handle L9 Bored, privacy lock 84K0L4C 9U65 C40S F76 L10 Cabinet lock, drawer 3L7RD 1654 46-002 E07121 and door Li l Lock by door manufacturer; furnish cylinders for keying to other locks as required L12 Bored, exit only, 84K0Y4C 9G13 C12D F89 lock L13 Padlock 61BRT 756HS 45-101 L14 Fixed knob pull and 84K1DT4C 9U93 D170 roller; Latch: Ives 336, Stanley C44S L15 Push-pull latch 115 Corbin 1860 L16 Lock by exit device manufacturer; furnish cylinders for keying to other locks as required F. Keying: 1. Lock Cylinders: Operate by grand master key system that allows for future expansion. 2. Keylocks: As directed by Owner. 3. Keys: Two per lock; tag with schedule information. 4. Master Keys: Four; send by registered mail to Owner. 5. Key cabinet and casework locks into building system. 6. Furnish lock manufacturer's removable core maximum security keying system. 2.05 CONSTRUCTION KEY SYSTEM A. Removable construction core system for locks. B. See Article Manufacturer's Services under Part 3, Execution. DOOR HARDWARE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 087100-4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.06 CONSTRUCTION KEY SYSTEM A. Assemble permanent cylinders with construction inserts and ship with all lock sets. 2.07 B. Change Keys: Pack in separately identified envelopes and ship. C. Construction Keys: Pack in cartons marked "packing list" and ship. D. Construction Insert Extractor Keys, Master Keys, and Grand Master Keys: Ship by registered mail to Owner. E. On completion of job, deliver construction keys to Owner. EXIT DEVICES A. BHMA A156.3. B. Furnish fire exit devices and mullions at fire -rated doors. C. Key Lockable, Removable Mullion: Aluminum construction, by exit device manufacturer. D. Trim: 1. Knobs: Sargent PRK; Von Duprin K. 2. Levers: Sargent ETJ; Von Duprin 03. E. Finish: 1. Exit Device: Satin chromium -plated No. 626. 2. Removable Mullion: Mill aluminum. F. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type Description Sargent VonDuprin BHMA X1 Rim type, active 8813PRK 99K Type 1 leaf; with 08 removable mullion for pairs X2 Rim type, exit only 8810 99EO Type 1 01 X3 Vertical rod type 8713PRK 9927K Type 2 08 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DOOR HARDWARE MARCH 25, 2026 087100-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF No. Type Description Sargent VonDuprin BHMA X4 Vertical rod type for 8713PRK and 9927K and Type 2 pairs 8710 9927EO 08 and 01 X5 Vertical rod type, 8710 9927EO Type 2 exit only, for singles 01 or pairs X6 Concealed vertical 8613PRK 9947K Type 8 rodtype 08 X7 Concealed vertical 8613PRK and 9947K and Type 8 rodtypeforpairs 8610 9947EO 08 and 01 X8 Concealed vertical 8610 9947EO Type 8 rod type, exit only, 01 for singles and pairs X9 Exit device by door manufacturers X10 Rim type, active 8815PRK 99K -BE Type I leaf, latch function; with removable mullion for pairs X11 Vertical rod type, 8715PRK 9927K -BE Type 2 latch function X12 Vertical rod type for 8715PRK and 9927K -BE and Type 2 pairs, latch function 8710 9927EO X13 Concealed vertical 8615PRK 9947K -BE Type 8 rod type, latch function X14 Concealed vertical 8615PRK and 9947K -BE and Type 8 rod type for pairs, 8610 9947EO latch function 2.08 CLOSERS A. BHMA A156.4. B. Size closers in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Mount regular arm closers on pull side of doors. Mount parallel arm closers on push side of doors. On pair of doors provide closer on active leaf only, unless noted otherwise. C. Finish: Satin chromium -plated No. 626. DOOR HARDWARE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 087100-6 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type/Description LCN Sargent BHMA Cl Regular arm 4010 Series 351 Series C02011 C2 Parallel arm 4110 Series 351-P Series C02021 C3 Regular arm with 4010H Series 351-H Series C02051 hold -open C4 Parallel arm with 4110 Cush -N- 351 -PS Series C02021 integral stop Stop Series C5 Parallel arm with 4110H Series 351 -PH Series C02061 hold -open C6 Parallel arm with 4110H Cush -N- 351-PSH C02061 integral stop and Stop Series Series hold -open C7 Closer furnished by door and frame manufacturer 2.09 PUSH -PULLS A. Solid metal, not plated. B. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630 unless indicated otherwise. C. Plates: Beveled four edges, square corners. D. Pulls: Bolted through door. E. Push Plates: Countersink pull -through bolts and cover with push plate. F. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type Description BBW Baldwin P1 8" x 3/4" Pull handle on plate: 1017-3B and 2367 and 0.050" x 4" x 16", and push plate: 47-G 2125 0.050" x 8" x 16" P2 Push bar and pull handle: Furnished by door manufacturer P3 8" x 3/4" Pull handles: Both sides 2903 2552 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00-7 MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.10 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. BHMA A156.16. B. Machine Screws: In threaded anchors at concrete or masonry. C. Self -Tapping Screws: At stud partitions, wood, or metal mountings. D. Metal Risers: For mounting at carpet floors. E. Finish: Satin chromium -plated No. 626. F. Types and Manufacturers for Each Leaf: No. Type Description BBW or GJ Baldwin BHMA Si Floor stop F 121X 4086 L02131 S2 Wall bumper WC9X 4031 L02241 S3 Wall stop -holder W140 4090 L02251 S4 Floor stop -holder F823X 4096 L01371 S5 Door -attached holder 872 4105 L01381 $6 Overhead stop GJ90S Series Sargent 590S Series C02511 S7 Overhead stop with hold- open GJ90H Series Sargent 590H Series C05541 S8 Heavy-duty overhead stop GJ79HDS S9 Spring and chain stop Ives 115 4485 S 10 Stop or holder furnished by door manufacturer 2.11 BOLTS A. BHMA A156.16. B. Finish: Bright nickel No. 645. C. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type/Description Stanley Lawrence BHMA B1 Top and bottom flush bolts 393-1/2 280 L04201 DOOR HARDWARE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 087100-8 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF No. Type/Description Stanley Lawrence BHMA B2 Top and bottom CD4060 283 (L0415 1) surface bolts B3 Top: 1055 T146 8" bolt w/48" chain Bottom: 1056 T145 8" foot -bolt or surface 4060 283 bolt B4 Surface bolt, 4" 4060 283 B5 Cane bolt, 18" 1010 T250 B6 Automatic flush bolts 2.12 2.13 KICKPLATES A. Solid metal, not plated. Bevel four edges. B. Width of door leaf less than 1-1/2 inches at single leaf and less than 1 inch at pairs. C. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630. THRESHOLDS A. B. C. D. Thresholds: One-piece full width of opening; extend beyond jamb where indicated. Provide with stainless steel machine screws in threaded expansion anchors at concrete. Finish: Mill finish aluminum, unless indicated otherwise. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type Description Pemko Reese Ti Saddle (smooth, 4" x 1/2") 175A S104A T2 Saddle (serrated, 4" x 1/4") 270A S404A T3 Threshold furnished by door manufacturer T4 Thermal break saddle (6-1/8") 253XAFG S473A PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DOOR HARDWARE MARCH25,2026 087100-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF No. Type Description Pemko Reese T5 Carpet edge -- -- T6 Panic exit saddle 2005AV S483AV 2.14 WEATHERSTRIP A. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum, unless indicated otherwise. B. Seal Types and Manufacturers: No. Type Description Pemko Reese W 1 Rubber or vinyl bulb at jambs S88D 797B and head, and at meeting stiles of pairs Door shoe 222AV DB596AF] Rain drip 346C R201C W2 Rubber or vinyl bulb at jambs S88D 797B and head, and at meeting stiles of pairs Door shoe 222AV DB596AF W3 Rubber vinyl bulb at jambs and S88D 797B head, and at meeting stiles of pairs Door bottom with drip 345AV 353A Interlocking watershed 68 AR & 347A 202C & 203C W4 Flexible plastic at jambs, head, PF114PS 794B and at meeting stiles of pairs W5 Weatherstripping furnished by door manufacturer W6 Rubber or vinyl bulb at jambs S88D 797B and head, and at meeting stiles of pairs Automatic door bottom 412CRL 320C DOOR HARDWARE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 71 00 - 10 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.15 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Provide as indicated in Door and Hardware Schedule: M1 Nameplate as specified in Section 10 14 00, Signage, in text noted in Door and Hardware Schedule M2 Nameplate and barrier -free pictorial symbol as specified in Section 10 14 00, Signage, in text noted in Door and Hardware Schedule M3 Barrier -free pictorial symbol, 6 inch by 6 inch, as specified in Section 10 14 00, Signage, in text noted in Door and Hardware Schedule 2.16 SILENCERS A. Ives, Glynn -Johnson. B. At metal frame of each hinged door that does not have seals scheduled. C. Three at single leaves and two at pairs. 2.17 NAMEPLATES A. Material: Plastic plate; 1/8 inch thick with beveled edges. B. Types and Manufacturers: Builders Brass Works, Trimco, and as follows: N 1 2" -high black plate with 1 "-high white Helvetica medium letters in text noted in Door and Hardware Schedule N2 Same as Ni with addition of barrier -free pictorial symbol 2.18 TEMPLATES A. Fabricate to template hardware applied to metal doors and frames. B. Ensure that required templates are furnished to various manufacturers for fabrication purposes. C. Templates: Make available not more than 10 days after receipt of approved Hardware Schedule. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DOOR HARDWARE MARCH 25, 2026 08 71 00 - 1 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.19 EXIT AND FIRE DOORS A. Exit Doors: Always openable from inside by simple turn of lever handle or push on panic bar without use of key or any special knowledge or effort, to include each leaf of door pairs. B. Hardware for Fire Doors: Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Fire Protection Equipment List. 2.20 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. System: Key Control Systems Co., Telkee, Inc., expandable system with 150 (E8351 -key capacity expandable to 425. B. Cabinet: 1. Manufacturer's standard surface mounted cabinet, single -door with continuous hinge, and pin tumbler lock, color as selected from standard colors to match Engineer's color schedule. Use Telkee AWC 150-S. 2. Complete system with standard components such as envelopes, transient key tags, reserve key tags, receipts and holders, and card index. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Make Work neat and secure, develop full strength of components, and provide proper function. C. Prevent marring, scratching, or otherwise damaging adjacent finishes during hardware installation. D. Latchbolts: 1. Install to engage in strikes automatically, whether activated by closers or manually. 2. In no case shall additional manual pressure be required to engage latchbolt in strike. E. Stops and Holders: Set to allow doors to open as far as possible. F. Wall Mounted Hardware: Install over solid structural backing or solid blocking in hollow walls. DOOR HARDWARE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 71 00 - 12 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF G. Thresholds: 1. Cope ends neatly to profile of jamb. 2. Set in sealant and seal ends to jambs. H. Key Control System Cabinet: Install where shown. I. Hardware: Adjust for easy, noise -free operation. J. Replace damaged hardware items. 3.02 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS A. Standard Door Hardware Locations: As recommended and published by Door and Hardware Institute, except as noted or detailed otherwise. B. Door Silencers: Install 3 inches from top and bottom of jamb and 1 inch above strike at single doors, and 3 inches from edges of doors in head for pairs of doors. C. Nameplates: Attach to doors or walls adjacent to doors 5 feet 6 inches above floor using Phillips head screws. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Deliver permanent lock cores to Site. B. Remove temporary construction cores and insert permanent cores. C. Inspect each lock set to ensure permanent cores are operating satisfactorily. D. Deliver to Owner change and control keys for permanent system. E. Return temporary construction cores to manufacturer. F. Furnish manufacturer's representative for the following services at Site or classroom as designated by Owner for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 3 person -days for installation assistance, inspection, and Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 2. 3 person -days for functional and performance testing. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 DOOR HARDWARE MARCH 25, 2026 087100-13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.04 PROTECTION A. Cover and protect exposed surfaces of hardware during installation and until Substantial Completion. B. Fit, dismantle, and reinstall finish hardware as required for finish painting work. C. Protect and prevent staining of hardware during construction in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Remove protective measures and permanent lock cylinders installed prior to final cleaning. 3.05 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Door and Hardware Schedule on Drawings is guide to functional requirements of each opening. B. Provide fmish hardware as scheduled. Sizes omitted shall be as recommended by manufacturer. 3.06 HARDWARE SETS Set No.: 1 Item Type Exterior; Overhead Coiling Doors By Door Manufacturer Set No.: 2 Item Type Exterior; Aluminum Storefront Entry Frame (AL UM2) and Aluminum Flush (AL UM3) panel Door: ENTRYFunction Lock Continuous Geared Hinge Weatherstripping Closer Threshold DOOR HARDWARE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 71 00 - 14 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Set No.: 3 1 Item Exterior; Aluminum Storefront Entry Frame (ALUM2) and Aluminum Flush (ALUM3) panel Door, with Card Reader Access /Elect Strike; ENTRYFunction Access Card Reader Electronic Strike Lock Continuous Geared Hin e Weatherstripping Closer Threshold Kick late Set No.: 4 Item Type Exterior; Aluminum Storefront Entry Frame (ALUM2) and Glazed Double Aluminum Storefront Entry Frame (ALUM2) Doors: Main entry doors: ENTRYFunction Lock Continuous Geared Hinge e Weatherstripping Closer Threshold Removable Mullion PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00- 15 MARY'S CREEK WRF Set No.: 5 1 Item Exterior; Aluminum Storefront Entry Frame (ALUM2) and Double Aluminum Flush (ALUM3) panel Door .• with Card Reader Access /Elect Strike: ENTRYFunction Access Card Reader Electronic Strike Lock Continuous Geared] Weatherstripping Closer Threshold Removable Mullion Set No.: 6 Item Interior; FRP Door and FRP Frame — PASSAGE Function Lock Continuous Geared Hin e Kickplate Set No.: 7 Item Interior; FRP Door and FRP Frame; with Card Reader Access /Elect Strike; ENTRY - OFFICE Function Access Card Reader Electronic Strike Lock Continuous Geared Hinge Kickplate Closer DOOR HARDWARE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 087100-16 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Set No.: 8 Item Type Interior; Double FRP Door and FRP Frame; ENTR Y -OFFICE Function Lock Continuous Geared Hinge Removable Mullion Kick .late Set No.: 9 Item Type Interior Aluminum Door and Frame ALUMI ; ENTRY -OFFICE Function Lock Continuous Geared Hin e Set No.: 10 Item Type Interior Aluminum Door and Frame ALUMI ; OFFICE Function Lock Continuous Geared Hing e Set No.: 11 Item Type Interior Aluminum Door and Frame (ALUM]); PASSAGE Function Lock Continuous Geared Hinge Closer PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00- 17 MARY'S CREEK WRF Set No.: 12 Item Type Interior Aluminum Pull Function Door and Frame (ALUM]); TOILETAND LOCKER ROOM Push - Lock Continuous Geared Hinge Closer Set No.: 13 Item Type Interior Aluminum Door and Frame (ALUM]); STOREROOM Function Lock Continuous Geared Hinge Set No.: 14 Item Type Interior; FRP Door and FRP Frame — Toilets, PRIVACYFunction Lock Continuous Geared Hin e Set No.: 15 Item Type Interior; Aluminum Door and Frame (ALUM]); with Card Reader Access / Elect Strike; ENTRY -OFFICE Function Access Card Reader Electronic Strike Lock Continuous Geared Hinge Closer DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00- 18 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Set No.: xxx Item Type END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 19 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z97. 1, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings —Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. 2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C509, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material. b. C864, Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. c. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. d. C 1036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass. e. C 1048, Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass —Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. f. C 1115, Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories. g. C 1172, Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. h. Cl 193, Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. i. C1376, Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass. j. D635, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. k. D2843, Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics. 1. D4802, Standard Specification for Poly(Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet. m. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. n. E90, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. o. E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZING APRIL 17, 2026 08 80 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY p. E1300, Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings. q. E1425, Standard Practice for Determining the Acoustical Performance of Windows, Doors, Skylight, and Glazed Wall Systems. r. E1886, Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. s. E1996, Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. t. E2190, Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. 4. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 16 CFR 1201, Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 5. Glass Association of North America (GANA): a. Glazing Manual. b. Sealant Manual. 6. National Fenestration Rating Council Incorporated (NFRC): a. 100, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U -Factors. b. 200, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence. c. 300, Standard Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and Systems. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 80, Safety Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. b. 252, Safety Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. c. 257, Safety Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies. 8. South Coast Air Quality Management District: SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. 9. UL: a. Building Materials Directory. b. l 0C, Standard for Safety for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. GLAZING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 80 00 - 2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Complete schedule of glass and glazing material to be used for each purpose. b. Indicate sizes, layout, thicknesses, and loading conditions for glass. 2. Product Data: a. Catalog cuts of glazing materials with inclusion of glass edge cutting procedures. b. Glass: Provide structural, physical, and thermal and solar optical performance characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. c. Glazing Sealants, Compounds, and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors where exposed. 3. Samples: a. Glass: Two samples 12 inch by 12 inch in size, illustrating each glass, coloration and design. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Design calculations for glass thicknesses. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for each type of glazing, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 3. Details and methods of glazing for each type of glazing condition; include manufacturer's recommendations for setting, sealing materials, and installing each type of glazing. 4. Documentation declaring compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and other glazing materials. 5. Documentation of glazer's previous experience and manufacturer's approval. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years' documented experience approved by manufacturer. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene minimum 1 week prior to commencing work of this section. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZING APRIL 17, 2026 08 80 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage: 1. Support cases on both sides when stored vertically. 2. After unpacking, place interleaving protection between lites. 3. Keep glass and interleaving dry by storing inside where temperatures are above dewpoint, or if outside storage is necessary, cover glass interleaving with opaque tarpaulins or plastic and inspect periodically. Wet interleaving can stain glass. 4. Avoid exposing stored glass to direct sunlight. B. Handling: 1. Stack individual lites on edge and lean them against sturdy uprights at a slope of 5 degrees to 7 degrees from vertical. 2. Cushion bottom edges with soft, firm pads free of dirt, grit, glass chips, or other foreign material. 3. Do not rotate or cartwheel insulating glass units over their corners. Use turning device such as a rolling block if units must be rotated. 1.05 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee shall provide for correction, or at option of Owner, removal and replacement of Work specified in this specification section found defective during a period of 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. Guarantee to cover deterioration because of normal conditions of use and not because of handling installing and cleaning practices performed contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Single Source Fabrication Responsibility: Fabrication processes including Low -E and reflective coatings, insulating, laminating, silkscreen, and tempering, shall be fabricated by a single fabricator. B. Performance/Design Criteria: Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: a. In conjunction with air barrier materials. GLAZING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 80 00 - 4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF b. To utilize inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for continuity of air barrier and vapor retarder seal. c. To maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. 2. Glass Thickness: Select minimum thickness in accordance with ASTM E1300 to resist specified design loads with the following maximum probability of breakage: a. Vertical Glass: Eight lites per 1000 for wind loads with 60 seconds maximum load duration. b. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm) for exterior glass. C. Structural Design: Design in accordance with applicable code for most critical combination of wind, snow, seismic, and dead loads. D. Wind Loads: Design and size glass to withstand positive and negative wind loads acting normal to plane of wall, including increased loads at building corners. 1. Design Wind Load: As calculated in accordance with applicable code with 116 mph basic wind speed, exposure C. 2. Wind -Borne Debris Loads: Design and size glass located less than 60 feet (18.288 m) abovegrade to withstand the following loads: a. Glass Within 30 Feet (9.144 m) of Grade: ASTM E1886 and ASTM E1996; large missile impact test. b. Glass Greater than 30 Feet (9.144 m) Abovegrade: ASTM E1886 and ASTM E1996; small missile impact test. 3. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with applicable code. 4. Handrail and Guardrail Loads: Design and size glass to withstand loads as specified in Section 05 52 16, Aluminum Guardrails (Railings) with safety factor of four. 5. Exterior Glass Deflection: Maximum of 1/175 of glass edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less with full recovery of glazing materials. 6. Interior Glass Deflection: Maximum differential deflection for two adjacent unsupported edges when 50 plf (730 N/m) force is applied to one panel at any point up to 42 inches (1067 mm) above finished floor less than thickness of glass. 7. Thermal and Solar Optical Performance: Measured or calculated in accordance with the following: a. U -Values: NFRC 100. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficients: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZING APRIL 17, 2026 08 80 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Light Transmitting Plastics: 1. Class CC 1 defined by applicable code when tested in accordance with ASTM D635 in thickness for intended use. 2. Smoke Developed Index: Maximum 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or maximum 75 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2843 in thickness for intended use. F. Perform Work in accordance with State of Texas. 2.02 FLOAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Annealed Glass: 1. ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Quality Q3, float glass. 2. Furnish annealed glass except where heat strengthened or tempered glass is required to meet specified performance requirements. B. Heat Strengthened Glass: 1. ASTM C 1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Quality Q3, Kind HS heat strengthened, Condition A uncoated, float glass. 2. Furnish heat strengthened glass where annealed glass cannot meet specified performance requirements. C. Tempered Glass: 1. ASTM C 1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Quality Q3, Kind FT fully tempered, Condition A uncoated, float glass with horizontal tempering. 2. Furnish tempered glass where heat strengthened glass cannot meet specified performance requirements. 3. Conforming to CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Category II at locations where indicated on Drawings. 2.03 FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Glass: 1. Tempered (FC-CT) float glass as specified; Class 1 clear. 2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. B. Tinted Glass: 1. Tempered (FC-TT) float glass as specified; Class 2 tinted. 2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. GLAZING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 80 00 - 6 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Low E Glass: 1. Tempered, clear (FG-ECT float glass as specified; Class 1 clear. Class 2 tinted. 2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS A. Insulating Glass: 1. ASTM E2190 certified by Insulating Glass Certification Council and Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; with glass elastomer edge seal; place reflective film within unit; purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 2. Total Unit Thickness: 1 inch unless otherwise indicated. 3. Insulating Glass Unit Edge Seal Construction: Aluminum thermally broken, bent and soldered corners. 4. Insulating Glass Unit Edge Seal Material: color. B. Clear Glass: 1. Manufacture: Viracon. 2. Product: VNE1-63, 1 -inch thick. 3. Transmittance: a. Visible light: 62 percent. b. Solar Energy: 24 percent. c. UV: 5 percent. 4. Reflectance: a. Visible Light — Exterior: 10 percent. b. Visible Light — Interior: 10 percent. 5. U -Value: a. Winter: 0.25 Btu/(hr x sqft). b. Summer: 0.21 Btu/(hr x sqft). C. Light Blue Glass: 1. Manufacture: Viracon. 2. Product: VNG 1-4022, 1 -inch thick. 3. Transmittance: a. Visible light: 40 percent. b. Solar Energy: 17 percent. c. UV: 6 percent. 4. Reflectance: a. Visible Light — Exterior: 19 percent. b. Visible Light — Interior: 16 percent. c. Solar Energy: 32 percent. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZING APRIL 17,2026 088000-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 5. U -Value: a. Winter: 0.24 Btu/(hr x sqft). b. Summer: 0.20 Btu/(hr x sqft). D. Spandrel Panel — glazed, opaque: 1. Manufacturer: Viracon. 2. Product. 3. Opaque Material, Color. 4. Insulation panel backing. 5. Transmittance: a. Visible light: NA. 6. Reflectance: a. Visible Light — Exterior: NA. 7. U -Value: a. Winter: 0.25 Btu/(hr x sqft). b. Summer: 0.21 Btu/(hr x sqft). 2.05 GLAZING SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Materials compatible with adjacent materials including glass, insulating glass seals, and glazing channels. 1. Silicone Glazing Sealant: a. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for glazing application indicated; single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; nonbleeding, nonstaining, cured Shore A Hardness Range 15 to 25. b. Structural Silicone: Furnish high -modulus structural silicone glazing materials where sealant bonds glass to substrate. c. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material recommended by glass manufacturer, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) by width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) by height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Elastomeric material recommended by glass manufacturer, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 -inch (75 -mm) long by one half the height of glazing stop by thickness to suit application. C. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. GLAZING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 80 00 - 8 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings for glazing are correctly sized and within acceptable tolerance. B. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions impeding moisture movement, weeps are clear and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Do not perform glazing work in damp, foggy, or rainy weather, or when temperatures are not within range recommended by GANA "Glazing Manual". B. Surfaces: 1. Smooth, even, sound, dry, and clean. 2. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. C. Priming: 1. Complete and cured. 2. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Measure size of frames to receive glass and compute actual glass size allowing for edge clearances. E. Verify functioning weep system is present. F. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.03 GLAZING INSTALLATION A. General: Follow recommendations of glass manufacturer GANA "Sealant Manual, GANA "Glazing Manual" and the following: 1. Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 1193. 2. Fire Rated Openings: Comply with NFPA 80. B. Exterior Dry Method (Gasket Glazing): 1. Cut glazing gasket to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with compatible butyl sealant. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZING APRIL 17, 2026 08 80 00 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 2. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners. 3. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. 4. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. C. Exterior Wet/Dry Method (Preformed Tape and Sealant) Installation: 1. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch (5 mm) below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with compatible butyl sealant. 2. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete continuity of air and vapor seal. 3. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners. 4. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit. 5. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with 1/4 inch below sight line. 6. Fill gap between glazing and stop with elastomeric glazing sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch (9 mm) below sight line. 7. Apply cap bead of elastomeric glazing sealant along void between stop and glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. D. Exterior Wet Method (Sealant and Sealant) Installation: 1. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit. 2. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 24 inches (600 mm) intervals, 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sight line. 3. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with elastomeric glazing sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch (9 mm) below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and vapor seal. 4. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. GLAZING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 08 80 00 - 10 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hose Test: 1. Use 3/4 -inch minimum hose without nozzle. With full stream, flood glazing from bottom to top. 2. Correct leaks disclosed by hose test by reglazing and retesting until eliminated. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's representative at Site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services, for installation assistance and inspection. 3.06 CLEANING A. Leave glass and glazing in undamaged condition and ready for final cleaning. B. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass. C. Remove labels from glass surface at time of final cleaning. D. Wash and polish both faces of glass. E. Clean adjacent surfaces of glass. 3.07 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK A. Protection: 1. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining glass. 2. Install tape across lights secured to frames or structure. 3. No tape or marking allowed on glass. B. Replacements and Repairs: Prior to Substantial Completion, replace broken, defective, or scratched glass and repair damaged compounds. 3.08 SCHEDULE A. Indicated in Drawings. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GLAZING APRIL 17, 2026 088000-11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 08 90 00 LOUVERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): a. 500-L, Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating. b. 540, Test Method for Louvers Impacted by Wind Borne Debris. c. 550, Test Method for High Velocity Wind Driven Rain Resistant Louvers. 2. The Aluminum Association, Incorporated (AA): Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 3. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 2605, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A480/A480M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat -Rolled Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. D822/D822M, Standard Practice for Filtered Open -Flame Carbon - Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings. c. Dl 187/D 1 187M, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. d. D2244, Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. e. D4214, Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. f. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 6. UL: a. Building Materials Directory. b. l 0B, Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Installed Louvers: Capable of resisting wind pressures shown on Components and Cladding Table on Structural Drawings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 LOUVERS MARCH 25, 2026 089000-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Large scale details of louvers, anchorage to structure including proposed fasteners and spacing, and relationship to adjoining construction for each louver condition. Demonstrate compliance with specified performance requirements including scheduled minimum louver free area. a. Manufacturer's Literature: Descriptive and performance data of louvers, including standard drawings. 2. Samples: a. Manufacturer's standard finishes and colors for initial selection. b. Physical color chips using specified metal and paint finish for approval. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Factory test data. 2. Certificates of AMCA ratings. 3. Installation instructions. 4. Parts list, if applicable. 5. Maintenance procedures. 6. Special Guarantee. 1.04 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee shall provide for correction, or at option of Owner, removal and replacement of special fluoropolymer-based finish found defective during a period of 20 years after date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in General Conditions. Conditions: a. No peeling, blistering, chipping, cracking, or checking of finish coating. b. No chalking, fading, or erosion of finish: 1) No chalking in excess of 8 numerical ratings in accordance with ASTM D4214. 2) No change in color or color fade in excess of 5 NBS units in accordance with ASTM D2244 and ASTM D822/D822M. LOUVERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 089000-2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Nonacoustical louver sizes are based on percent free area as indicated in the Louver Schedule. B. Air Performance and Water Penetration: Louvers shall be licensed to bear the AMCA seal under the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. C. Louvers: Rated and tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L. D. Furnish louver frame with continuous duct mounting surface where shown on the Drawings. 2.02 FIXED DRAINABLE LOUVER (TYPE DB) A. Frame: Extruded aluminum channel, 0.081 inch thick, 6 inches deep, interior duct collar, concealed mullions. B. Blades: Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.081 inch thick, 35 -degree to 45 -degree pitch angles, with integral front drain gutter, spaced 3 inches to 4 inches on center. C. Air Performance and Water Penetration: Louvers shall be licensed to bear the AMCA seal under the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. D. Sizes: As scheduled on the Drawings. E. Insect Screen: Inside mounted, painted aluminum, 1/2 -inch mesh. F. Finish: Two coats minimum, factory spray applied, baked -on 70 percent Kynar 500 PVDF Fluoropolymer resin -based paint coating; AAMA 2605 in color as scheduled or selected. G. Manufacturers and Products: Ruskin; Model ELF6375DX. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel. B. Flashings: Match louver frame. C. Extended Sills: Formed aluminum, minimum thickness 0.081 inch. D. Isolation Tape: Tremco 440, 3M EC 1202, or Presstite 579.6. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 LOUVERS MARCH 25, 2026 089000-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Isolation Paint: ASTM D 1187/D 1187, bituminous coating. F. Insulated Blank -Off Panels: 1. Panels: Manufacturer's standard insulation core faced on both sides with minimum 0.040 -inch stucco embossed 5005-11134 aluminum sheet in finish and color to match louvers. 2. Frames: 6063-T52 extruded aluminum sections 0.040 inch thick, with mitered corners. 3. Perimeter Gaskets: Closed -cell PVC, to ensure tight fit of panel to louver. 4. Thickness: 2 inches. 5. R -Value: 8. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Performance Tests: 1. Airflow versus pressure loss. 2. Rain penetration data. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Check openings to ensure dimensions conform to the Drawings. B. Ensure openings are free of irregularities that would interfere with installation. C. Do not install louvers until defects have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install louvers as shown on reviewed Shop Drawings. Coordinate with heating or ventilation ductwork to be connected. B. Follow procedures in manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. 1. Install hurricane louvers in accordance with manufacturer's approved installation instructions. C. Install insulated blank -off panels where indicated, completely closing space between ducts and louver frames. D. Separate aluminum from other metals with isolation tape or paint. LOUVERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 089000-4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.03 CLEANING A. After erection, protect exposed portions from damage by machines, paint, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful compounds. B. Remove protective materials and clean with plain water, water with soap, or household detergents. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 LOUVERS MARCH 25, 2026 089000-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 09 22 16 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C645, Standard Specification for Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. b. C754, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Anchorage and bracing drawings and/or catalog information, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads shown on General Structural Notes on Drawings. B. Informational Submittals: Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads shown on General Structural Notes on Drawings. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers, with labels intact clearly indicating manufacturer and material. B. Storage: 1. Store materials inside, under cover, stacked flat, off floor. 2. Avoid overloading floor system of storage area. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond. B. Dale/Incor. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING MARCH 12, 2026 09 22 16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY C. G -P Gypsum Corporation. D. United States Gypsum Company. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Furnish materials from a single manufacturer. B. Studs, Tracks, Furring Channels, and Accessories: 1. ASTM C645. 2. 25 -gauge and 20 -gauge galvanized steel C -studs with 1 -5/8 -inch flanges and ancillary items. 3. Sizes as shown on Drawings. 4. Furnished curved tracks where required for curved wall surfaces. C. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled steel, 16 -gauge, free of rust, coated with factory -applied rust -inhibitive paint, 1-1/2 inches deep, weighing not less than 475 pounds per 1,000 linear feet. D. Furring Channels: Roll -formed hat shaped section of 25 -gauge galvanized steel with a face width of 1-3/8 inches and a depth of 7/8 inch. E. Resilient Furring Channels: 1. Roll -formed section of 25 -gauge galvanized steel with face width of 1-1/2 inches designed for resilient attachment of gypsum board to framing. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. United States Gypsum; RC- 1 channel. b. Gold Bond; resilient channels. F. Z Furring Channels: U.S. Gypsum or Gold Bond. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Preparation: Provide, install, and maintain necessary scaffold, staging, trestles, planking, and temporary heating, lighting, and ventilation as necessary for duration of gypsum board work. B. Field Measurements: Take and record measurements before fabrication of assemblies. C. Layout: Align partitions as shown on Drawings. NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 22 16 - 2 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Tracks: 1. Attach metal runner tracks to floor slabs with suitable fasteners located 2 inches from each end and spaced not more than 24 inches OC. 2. Attach tracks to suspended ceiling with toggle or molly bolts spaced 24 inches OC. E. Studs and Other Framing: 1. ASTM C754. 2. Following manufacturer's printed instructions, position studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling tracks and spaced as noted on Drawings. 3. Splices: Not allowed. 4. Place in direct contact with doorframe jambs, abutting partitions, and partition corners. Provide for anchorage of doorframes to studs. 5. Anchor all studs for shelf -walls and those adjacent to window and doorframes, partition intersections, and corners to ceiling and floor runner flanges. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door or borrowed -light frames by bolt or screw attachment. 6. Over metal door and borrowed -light frames, place horizontally a cut -to - length section of runner, with a web -flanged bend at each end, and secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a cut -to -length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over doorframe header. 7. Locate studs at abutting construction, partition intersections, and partition corners. 8. Spacing: 16 inches OC, unless otherwise required by manufacturer. 9. Doorframes and Cased Openings: a. Full height double studs, No. 20 -gauge minimum, secured to jamb anchors by bolts, screws, or welds. b. Header Track: Secure to frame head anchors and double studs. c. Provide double channel stiffeners through studs above frame and extend at least one stud space beyond each jamb. 10. Windows: Similar framing to door openings with stiffeners both above and below. 11. Wall Mounting Accessories: Provide channels, horizontal studding, No. 16 -gauge sheet 8 inches by 2 inches greater than stud spacing, or other members within walls as required to provide secure and adequate support. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Furring: 1. Space furring channels the same as studs or as shown. 2. Around columns and beams construct furring as shown using metal studs and furring channels securely tied together and anchored in -place. 3. Attach resilient furring channels to wood framing with screws. G. Leave framing, plumb, aligned, securely anchored, braced, and ready to receive gypsum board. END OF SECTION NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 22 16 - 4 MARCH 12, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Al 18.9, Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A641/A641M, Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. b. C208, Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. c. C475/C475M, Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. d. C514, Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. e. C645, Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. f. C665, Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. g. C754, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products. h. C840, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. i. C1002, Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. j. C 1047, Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. k. C1177/C1177M, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 1. C1178/CI178M, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. m. C1396/C1396M, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. n. D4977, Standard Test Method for Granule Adhesion to Mineral Surfaced Roofing by Abrasion. o. D5420, Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact). PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS GYPSUM BOARD 092900- 1 MARY'S CREEK WRY p. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. q. E90, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. r. E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. s. E413, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. t. E695, Standard Test Method of Measuring Relative Resistance of Wall, Floor, and Roof Construction to Impact Loading. 3. Gypsum Association (GA): a. 214, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. b. 216, Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products. 4. UL: UL Fire Resistance Directory. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals: 1. Control joint pattern proposed for gypsum board. 2. Control joint pattern proposed for gypsum soffit. 3. Manufacturer's list of items and materials proposed for use, with descriptive literature for each system used. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Regardless of the minimum specifications herein, utilize materials and applications recommended by manufacturer. B. Applicator's Qualifications: Use only workers regularly employed in this type of work who can show experience in application of similar materials and specific systems specified. C. Single Source Responsibility: Use gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer for each type used. D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in the assembly indicated or scheduled on Drawings, according to UL Fire Resistance Directory or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable under local building code. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver fire -rated materials bearing testing agency label and required fire classification numbers. GYPSUM BOARD PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 29 00 - 2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Storage: 1. Store materials inside, under cover, stacked flat, off floor. 2. Stack gypsum board so that long lengths are not over short lengths. 3. Avoid overloading floor system of storage area. 4. Store adhesives and finishing compounds in dry areas; protect against freezing at all times. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Temperature: In areas receiving gypsum board installation, maintain minimum temperature of 40 degrees F for 48 hours before, during, and after gypsum board application. Maintain minimum temperature of 50 degrees F for 48 hours before, during, and after application of adhesive methods of attachment and finishing compounds until drying is complete. B. Ventilation: 1. Provide ventilation during and following adhesives and joint treatment applications. 2. Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas lacking natural ventilation. 3. Under slow drying conditions, allow additional drying time between coats of joint treatment. 4. Protect installed materials from drafts of ambient air during hot, dry weather. 5. Protect materials from drying too rapidly during hot and dry weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD A. Regular Board (GWB): ASTM C1396/C1396M, 5/8 -inch thick with tapered edges. B. Fire -Rated Board (GWBX): ASTM C1396/C1396M, Type X,5/8 -inch thick with tapered edges. C. Water -Resistant Board (WRB): ASTM C1396/C1396M, 5/8 -inch thick with tapered edges. D. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board (GMSB): 1. ASTM C 1177/Cl 177M, Type X, 5/8 -inch thick. 2. Manufacturer and Product: G -P Gypsum Corp., Dens -Glass Gold. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GYPSUM BOARD MARCH 25, 2026 09 29 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.02 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass Mesh Mortar Unit (GMMU): 1. Water-resistant treated core with glass mat moisture protectant coating and embedded glass mats, both sides, and face side surfaced with heat - cured copolymer water -retardant and vapor -retardant coating meeting ASTM C1178/C1178M. 2. Thickness: Type X, 5/8 -inch. 3. Manufacturer and Product: G -P Gypsum Corp.; Dens -Shield Tile Backer. B. Cementitious Backer Board (CBB): 1. Aggregated portland cement panel reinforced with vinyl -coated, woven fiberglass mesh embedded in both surfaces meeting ANSI Al 18.9. 2. Thickness: Type X, 5/8 -inch. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. United States Gypsum; Durock. 2.03 FASTENERS A. Gypsum Board: 1. Annular Ring Nail: ASTM C514, GWB-54, 1-1/4 inches long for 1/2 -inch gypsum board, and 1-3/8 inches long for 5/8 -inch gypsum board. 2. Smooth Shank Nail: ASTM C514, 1-3/8 inches long for 1/2 -inch gypsum board, and 1-1/2 inches long for 5/8 -inch gypsum board. 3. Screws: ASTM C 1002, self -drilling, self -tapping, bugle head, for use with power -driven tool. a. Type S, 1 inch long for gypsum board to sheet metal. b. Type W, 1-1/4 inches long for gypsum board to wood. B. Glass Mesh Mortar Units/Cementitious Backer Board: 1. Screws: ASTM C1002, self -drilling, self -tapping, bugle head, for use with power -driven tool. a. Type S, 1-1/4 inch, Hi -Lo for wood or 22 -gauge to 25 -gauge steel framing. b. Type S-12, 1-1/4 inch, for 14 -gauge to 20 -gauge steel framing; 1-15/16 inch. c. Type S-12, Pilot Point for steel joists. 2. Nails: 1 -1/4 -inch galvanized roofing nail with 7/16 -inch diameter head for wood framing. GYPSUM BOARD PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 29 00 - 4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Tape: 1. General Interior Applications: ASTM C475/C475M, perforated paper tape. 2. Soffit Board, Glass Mesh Mortar Units, and Cementitious Backer Board: 2 -inch wide 10 by 10 open weave glass mesh tape as recommended by manufacturer. B. Compound: 1. General Interior Applications: ASTM C475/C475M, all-purpose, ready - mixed compound. 2. Water -Resistant GWB and Soffit Boards: Chemically curing, polyindurate type material as recommended by manufacturer. 2.05 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Adhesives: As recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for intended use. Use adhesives that have VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (no facing), 3 inches thick. 2.06 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. ASTM C1047, Zinc -Coated Metal. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Corner Bead: a. 1-1/4 inches by 1-1/4 inches: 1) United States Gypsum; Dur-A-Bead. 2) Gold Bond; standard corner beads. 2. Edge Trim: a. United States Gypsum; 200B metal trim. b. Gold Bond; No. 200 casing bead. 3. Metal Control Joint: a. United States Gypsum; No. 093. b. Gold Bond; E -Z strip control joint. 2.07 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING MEMBERS A. ASTM C645, galvanized C -studs with 1 -5/8 -inch flanges. B. Sizes and Gauge: As noted on Drawings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GYPSUM BOARD MARCH 25, 2026 09 29 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Manufacturers: 1. United States Gypsum. 2. Dale/Incor. 3. Gold Bond. 4. Unimast, Inc. 2.08 LIGHT -GAUGE METAL FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Cold -Rolled Carrying Channel: Cold -rolled steel, 16 -gauge metal with minimum 1/2 -inch wide flange, free of rust and coated with factory -applied rust -inhibitive paint 1-1/2 inches deep. B. Cold -Rolled Bridging Channel: Cold -rolled steel, 16 -gauge metal with minimum 1/2 inch wide flange free of rust and coated with factory -applied rust -inhibitive paint, 1-1/2 inches deep. C. Cold -Rolled Furring Channel: Cold -rolled steel, 25 -gauge metal with minimum 1/2 -inch wide flange, free of rust and coated with factory -applied rust -inhibitive paint 3/4 inches deep. D. Z -Furring: Galvanized 20 -gauge, 3 inches deep. E. Hat -Shaped Furring Channels: Roll -formed hat shaped section of 20 -gauge galvanized steel with a face width of 1-1/4 inches and a depth of 1-1/2 inches. F. Resilient Furring Channels: Roll -formed section of 25 -gauge galvanized steel with face width of 1-1/2 inches designed for resilient attachment of gypsum board to framing. G. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch diameter. H. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.625 -inch diameter or double strand of 0.0475 -inch diameter wire. 2.09 DRY WALL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Use system of main runners, cross tees, and furring channels. B. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System. GYPSUM BOARD PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 29 00 - 6 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect surfaces to receive gypsum board and related materials before beginning work and report to Engineer any defects in such work which will adversely affect the quality of work specified herein. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Provide, install, and maintain necessary scaffold, staging, trestles, planking, and temporary heating, lighting, and ventilation as necessary for duration of gypsum board work. B. Protection: Protect work of other trades. C. Coordination: 1. Coordinate work with that of other trades. Check specifications and drawings of other trades to determine parts of work requiring coordination. 2. Cut and repair gypsum board systems for installation of omitted work. D. Surface Preparation: Repair defective surfaces prior to starting work. Prepare as specified for application of specific materials. 3.03 ERECTION OF SUSPENDED CEILING A. General: 1. Securely brace all ceiling areas against sway as required by code for seismic control. 2. Prevent runner and furring channels from contacting masonry walls. 3. Provide 1 -1/2 -inch channels around recessed lighting fixture openings to support fixtures. B. Hangers: 1. Space not over 4 feet on center (OC) in direction of runners and within 6 inches of ends of runners. 2. Securely attach to structure above and provide for full saddle tie to main runner at indicated height. 3. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member and at light fixtures, 6 inches from vertical surfaces. 4. Do not splay wires more than 5 inches in a 4 -foot vertical drop. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GYPSUM BOARD MARCH 25, 2026 09 29 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 5. Provide four-way wire splays at 45 degrees from main runner to support structure for every 144 square feet of ceiling area to prevent sway. 6. Wrap wire minimum three times horizontally, turning ends upward. 7. Where hanger wires cannot be hung vertically from structure above because of ducts, pipes, cable trays, or other interferences, provide trapezes of steel channels (minimum 2 -inch deep, 16 -gauge cold -rolled carrying channels) hung on steel rods or 8 -gauge wire from structural members above. Hang ceiling wires from trapezes or similar members supporting ducts or pipes. Do not hang directly from ducts or pipes. C. Main Runner Channels: 1. Run main runner channels spaced not more than 4 feet OC, and 6 inches from parallel walls, at right angles to the length of joists. 2. Overlap splices in main runners 12 inches minimum, interlock flanges, and securely tie near each end of splice with double loops of tie wire. D. Furring Channels: 1. Attach furring channels to main runners at right angles, space at 16 inches OC. 2. Securely saddle tie furring to the main runners at each crossing or equivalent clips or attachments. 3. Splices in Cross -Furring: Lap 8 inches minimum, interlock flanges, and securely tie near each end of splice with two loops of tie wire. 3.04 ERECTION OF DRY WALL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Hangers: 1. Space not over 4 feet OC in direction of runners and within 6 inches of ends of runners. 2. Securely attach to structure above and provide for full saddle tie to main runner at indicated height. 3. Connections shall develop full strength of hanger wire. C. Bracing: 1. Securely brace ceiling areas against sway. 2. Where required by code, install for seismic control. 3. Prevent runner and furring channels from contacting masonry walls. D. Where ducts interfere with normal spacing of hangers and carrying channels, install additional hangers and channels to properly suspend ceiling. GYPSUM BOARD PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 29 00 - 8 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.05 ERECTION OF LIGHT -GAUGE NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING A. Layout: Align partitions as shown on Drawings. B. Tracks: 1. Attach metal runner tracks to floor slabs with suitable fasteners located 2 inches from each end and spaced not more than 24 inches OC. 2. Where partitions terminate at suspended or framed ceilings attach top tracks to suspended ceiling with toggle or molly bolts spaced 24 inches OC. 3. Where partitions terminate above suspended ceilings provide diagonal bracing from top of partitions to structure above. Bracing shall be 3 -5/8 -inch metal studs staggered at 48 inches OC. 4. Where partitions terminate at underside of concrete or metal decking attach deflection channels to substrate with suitable fasteners located 2 inches from each end and spaced not more than 24 inches OC. Locate partition top tracks within deflection channels with a minimum top clearance of 1 inch. Do not attach track to channel. C. Studs: 1. ASTM C754. 2. Following manufacturer's printed instructions, position studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling tracks and spaced as noted on Drawings. 3. Splice: When necessary, use 8 -inch nested lap and one positive attachment per stud flange. 4. Place in direct contact with doorframe jambs, abutting partitions, and partition corners. Provide for anchorage of doorframes to studs. 5. Anchor studs for shelf -walls and those adjacent to window and doorframes, partition intersections, and corners to ceiling and floor runner flanges. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door or borrowed -light frames by bolt or screw attachment. 6. Over metal door and borrowed -light frames, place horizontally a cut -to - length section of runner, with a web -flanged bend at each end, and secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a cut -to -length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over doorframe header. 7. Locate studs at abutting construction, partition intersections, and partition corners. 8. Spacing: At 16 inches OC, unless otherwise required by manufacturer. 9. At Doorframes and Cased Openings: a. Full height double studs, No. 20 gauge minimum, secured to jamb anchors by bolts, screws, or welds. b. Header Track: Secure to frame head anchors and double studs. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS GYPSUM BOARD 092900-9 MARY'S CREEK WRY c. Provide double channel stiffeners through studs above frame and extend at least one stud space beyond each jamb. 10. Windows: Similar framing to door openings with stiffeners both above and below. 11. Wall Mounting Accessories: Provide channels, horizontal studding, No. 16 gauge sheet 8 inches by 2 inches greater than stud spacing, or other members within walls as required to provide secure and adequate support. D. Furring: 1. Space furring channels the same as studs or as shown. 2. Around columns and beams construct furring as shown using metal studs and furring channels securely tied together and anchored in -place. 3. Attach resilient furring channels to wood framing with screws. 3.06 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. Inspection and Preparation: 1. Check framing for accurate spacing and alignment. 2. Verify spacing of installed framing does not exceed maximum allowable for thickness of gypsum board to be used. 3. Verify frames are set for thickness of gypsum board to be used. 4. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board until deficiencies are corrected and surfaces to receive gypsum board are acceptable. 5. Repair protrusions of framing, twisted framing members, or unaligned members before installation of gypsum board is started. B. General: 1. Meet requirements of ASTM C840 and GA 216. 2. Joints: Use gypsum board of maximum lengths to minimize end joints. Stagger end joints when they occur. Locate end joints as far as possible from center of wall or ceiling. Abut gypsum board without forcing. Neatly fit ends and edges of gypsum board. Do not place butt ends against tapered edges. 3. Support ends and edges of gypsum board panels on framing or furring members except for face layer of double layer and where ends are back blocked and floated. 4. Use metal edge trim where gypsum board abuts another material, at corners, and where shown or noted on Drawings. 5. Use cementitious backer board in toilet, shower, and janitor room walls behind ceramic tile and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. 6. Follow manufacturer's recommendation of good practice. GYPSUM BOARD PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 29 00 - 10 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Over Framing: 1. Apply gypsum board first to ceiling and then to walls for single layer horizontal application. 2. Use vertical application for fire -rated walls. 3. Fasten gypsum board securely to framing using double nailing, screw, or adhesive method. D. Sound -Rated Partitions: 1. Fabricate and erect in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions for required rating. 2. Install sound -deadening board and attenuation blankets as detailed. 3. Seal with acoustical sealant perimeter edges of gypsum board, joints around penetrations, and other joints as noted. E. Fireproofing: 1. Install fireproofing of columns, beams, and shaft walls as shown. 2. Close tops of duct and pipe shafts, and elevator hoistways with horizontal metal framing and gypsum board to provide 1 -hour rated assembly. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD (CBB) A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for erection, cutting, attachments, and joint treatment. B. Verify framing is installed at maximum 16 inches OC, and necessary blocking to support fixtures and accessories has been installed. Where backing plates or straps are used, space out from framing to ensure a smooth finish application. Do not proceed until defects are corrected and are acceptable. C. Precut boards to required sizes and make necessary cutouts. Fasten with appropriate fasteners. Space fasteners 6 inches OC maximum or as directed by manufacturer. Fit ends closely but not forced together. Maintain 1/4 -inch spacing between edge of board and fixture. Caulk all joints and corners that are to receive tiles. Apply 2 -inch glass fiber tape over joints and corners embedded with tile setting mortar. 3.08 JOINT SYSTEM FOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Interior Gypsum Board: Conform to ASTM C840. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GYPSUM BOARD MARCH 25, 2026 09 29 00 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Required: On exposed gypsum board, under ceramic tile and wall covering, and behind casework. C. Prefill: Fill V -grooves formed by abutting rounded edges of gypsum board with prefill joint compound. Fill V -joint flush and remove excess compound beyond groove. Leave clear depression to receive tape. Permit prefill joint compound to harden prior to application of tape. D. Taping and Finishing Joints: 1. Taping or Embedding Coat: Apply compound in thin, uniform layer to joints and angles to be reinforced. Apply reinforcing tape immediately. Center tape over joint and seat tape into compound. Leave approximately 1/64 -inch to 1/32 -inch compound under tape to provide bond. Apply skim coat immediately following tape embedment but not to function as fill or second coat. Fold tape and embed in angles to provide true angle. Dry embedding coat prior to application of fill coat. 2. Filling Coat: Apply joint compound over embedding coat. Fill taper flush with surface. Apply fill coat to cover tape. Feather out fill coat beyond tape and previous joint compound line. For joints with no taper, feather out at least 4 inches on either side of tape. Do not apply fill coat on interior angles. Allow fill coat to dry prior to application of fmish coat. 3. Finishing Coat: Spread joint compound evenly over and beyond fill coat on joints. Feather to smooth uniform finish. Apply finish coat to taped angles to cover tape and taping compound. Sand final application of compound to provide surface ready for decoration. 4. Filling and Finishing Depressions: Apply joint compound as first coat to fastener depressions. Apply at least two additional coats of compound after first coat is dry. Leave filled and finished depressions level with plane of surface. E. Finishing Beads and Trim: 1. First Fill Coat: Apply joint compound to bead and trim. Feather out from ground to plane of the surface. Dry compound prior to application of second fill coat. 2. Second Fill Coat: Apply joint compound in same manner as first fill coat. Extend beyond first coat onto face of gypsum board. Dry compound prior to application of fmish coat. 3. Finish Coat: Apply joint compound to bead and trim. Extend beyond second fill coat. Feather finish coat from ground to plane of surface. Sand finish coat to provide flat surface ready for decoration. GYPSUM BOARD PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 29 00 - 12 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.09 FINAL FINISHES FOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Levels of Finish: Conform to GA 214. B. Level 1: 1. Taping or embedding coat only. 2. Use in concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level is required for fire -resistive or sound -rated assemblies. C. Level 2: 1. Taping, filling, and finishing coats. 2. Use on water-resistant gypsum backing board. D. Level 3: 1. Taping, filling, and finishing coats. 2. Use on surfaces indicated to have spray texture or ceramic tile. E. Level 4: 1. Taping, filling, and finishing coats plus two separate coats applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and trim accessories. 2. Sand between coats and after last coat. 3. Use on surfaces indicated to receive wall coverings. F. Level 5: 1. Same as Level 4, plus a thin, smooth, uniform skim coat of joint compound, or product specially formulated for this purpose, over entire surface. 2. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges, ready for decoration. 3. Use on surfaces not indicated otherwise, those indicated to receive gloss, semi -gloss, and nontextured flat paints, and where indicated. 3.10 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean: Remove droppings or texture overspray from walls, windows, and floor, leaving room clean for following trades. B. Nail Pop: Repair nail pop by driving new nail approximately 1-1/2 inches from nail pop and reseat nail. When face paper is punctured, drive new nail or screw approximately 1-1/2 inches from defective fastening and remove defective fastening. Fill damaged surface with compound. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GYPSUM BOARD MARCH 25, 2026 09 29 00 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Ridging: 1. Do not repair ridging until condition has fully developed, approximately 6 months after installation or one heating season. a. Sand ridges to reinforcing tape without cutting through tape. b. Fill concave areas on both sides of ridge with topping compound. c. After fill is dry, blend in topping compound over repaired area. 2. Fill cracks with compound and finish smooth and flush. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 29 00 - 14 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A108.1A, Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar. b. A108.1B, Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry -Set or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. c. A108.IC, Contractor's Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry -Set or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. d. A108.4, Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive. e. A108.5, Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. f. A108.6, Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and Grouting Epoxy. g. A108.8, Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout. h. A108.9, Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. i. A108.10, Installation of Grout in Tilework. j. A108.11, Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. k. A118.1, Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. 1. Al 18.3, Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water -Cleanable Tile -Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive. m. Al 18.4, Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. n. Al 18.5, Chemical Resistant Furan Mortars and Grouts for Tile Installation. o. Al 18.6, Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation. p. Al 18.10, Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin -set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TILING APRIL 17, 2026 09 30 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF q. A136.1, Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. r. A137.1, Ceramic Tile. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A497/497M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete. b. C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. c. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. d. C206, Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime. e. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. f. C267, Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. g. C395, Standard Specification for Chemical -Resistant Resin Mortars. h. C847, Standard Specification for Metal Lath. i. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. j. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 3. South Coast Air Quality Management District: SCAQMD Rule 1168 — Adhesive and Sealant Applications. 4. Tile Council of North America (TCA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Two for each color, pattern, and type of tile specified. b. Size: Approximately 12 inches square. c. Mark Samples clearly to indicate color or shade, location in which to be used, and manufacturer's name. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certification of Compliance: For tile, mortar, grouts, and adhesives. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: For storage, mixing, application, cleanup, and use of proposed mortars, grouts, and adhesives. 3. Tile Manufacturer's Maintenance Guidelines: For Owner's use in maintaining ceramic tilework specified herein. TILING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 30 00 - 2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series. B. Perform Work in accordance with State of Texas standard. C. Maintain one copy of each document on Site. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Set and grout tile in portland cement mortar when ambient temperature is at least 50 degrees F and rising. Follow ANSI A108.1A or ANSI A108. 1B, as recommended by ANSI A108. 1C. B. Comply with minimum temperature recommendations of manufacturers for bonding and grouting materials other than portland cement mortar. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Tile: Furnish extra 2 percent of each tile used in clean, marked cartons for Owner's future use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials and products specified in this section shall be products o£ 1. Dal -Tile Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Tile: Standard grade, ANSI A137.A326.3. B. Glazed Wall Tile: 1. Daltile — Anapolis Remix; 6x18 -inches; 5/16 -inches thick. 2. Color: Bevel — Matte; Sail Matte AP10. C. Metal Lath and Accessories for Scratch Coat: 1. ASTM C847, diamond mesh, flat expanded, galvanized metal weighing not less than 2.5 pounds per square yard. 2. 18 -gauge galvanized steel wire for lacing laps and securing metal lath to metal studs. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TILING APRIL 17, 2026 09 30 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Portland Cement Mortar: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. 2. Sand: ASTM C144. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206 or ASTM C207, Type S. 4. Water: Clean and potable. 5. Mortar Bed Reinforcement: a. Either of the following: 1) Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A497/497M, size 2 -inch by 2 -inch mesh, 16/16 wire. 2) Expanded Metal Reinforcement: ASTM C847, galvanized with minimum weight of 1.8 pounds per square yard. E. Dry -Set Mortar: ANSI Al 18.1, TCA Formula 759, gray. F. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.4. G. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I, prolonged water resistance. H. Epoxy Mortar: ANSI A118.3, TCA Formula AAR-II. I. Furan Mortar: ASTM C395, consisting of furan resin, containing not more than 3 percent by weight nonpolymerizable solids, and powder hardener. J. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI Al 18.3, two-part adhesive system consisting of epoxy resin and hardener. K. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: White, L & M Acid -R or Upco Hydroment. L. Sand -Portland Cement Grout: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150. 2. Fine -Graded Sand: ASTM C 144. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206 or ASTM C207, Type S. 4. Water: Clean and potable. 5. Mix: a. For Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1 part portland cement to 1 part fine -graded sand. b. For Quarry Tile and Pavers: 1 part portland cement to 2 parts fine -graded sand, and up to 1/5 part hydrated lime by volume. M. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: Portland cement grout with latex additive, commercial quality, ANSI A118.6. TILING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 30 00 - 4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF N. Dry -Set Grout: 1. For Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile: White commercial dry -set portland cement grout; L & M Surco, Upco Tile -Mate 719, Kaiser Acra-Fil. 2. For Ceramic Mosaic Tile: In accordance with tile manufacturer's recommendations. O. Epoxy Grout: 1. For Quarry Tile and Pavers: ANSI A118.3, as manufactured by Upco U-Poxy/AAR-II or Atlas Rezklad. 2. For Glazed Wall Tile and Ceramic Mosaic Tile: TCA Formula UG-II. P. Furan Resin Grout: ASTM C395, two-part grout system consisting of furan resin and hardener. Q. Silicone Rubber Grout/Sealant: White, fungicidal one -part silicone rubber meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 2.03 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Expansion Joints: 1. Sealant: Silicone rubber type, meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, color to match grout, with Shore A hardness of minimum 25 for joints in horizontal surfaces and minimum 35 in traffic areas. 2. Backup Material: Flexible and compressible type, nonstaining and compatible with sealants used. B. Edge Strips: Stainless steel, Alloy 316 flat bar, 1/8 inch by depth of tile and mortar. C. Sealer: Hillyard Chemical Co., Cemseal II or Thompson's Water Seal 101. D. Shower Pan: Meet requirements of local authority having jurisdiction or governing building code. E. Shower Wall Membrane: Meet requirements of local authority having jurisdiction or governing building code. F. Waterproof Membrane: ANSI A118.10. G. Cleavage Membrane: Either asphalt -saturated organic felt meeting ASTM D226, Type I, plain, or polyethylene sheeting with a minimum thickness of 4 mil. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TILING APRIL 17, 2026 09 30 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF H. Cementitious Backer Board: As specified in Section 09 29 00, Gypsum Board. I. Glass Mesh Mortar Unit: As specified in Section 09 29 00, Gypsum Board. J. Tile Cleaner: Neutral tile cleaner solution acceptable to tile manufacturer. K. Construction Paper: Heavy-duty, nonstaining kraft paper. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces to receive ceramic tile, setting beds, or accessories prior to tile installation. B. Correct defects or adverse conditions affecting quality and execution of tile installation. C. Surfaces to receive tile shall be plumb, level, and true with square corners. D. Tolerances for Surfaces to Receive Tile: 1. Portland Cement, Dry -Set, Epoxy, and Furan Mortar Methods: a. Maximum Variation in Subfloor Surface: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. b. Maximum Variation in Vertical and Ceiling Surfaces: 1/4 inch in 8 feet. 2. Organic Adhesive Method: a. Maximum Variation in Subfloor Surface: 1/16 inch in 3 feet. b. Maximum Height of Abrupt Irregularities: 1/32 inch. c. Maximum Variation in Vertical and Ceiling Surfaces: 1/8 inch in 8 feet. E. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work, in or behind tile, to be installed prior to proceeding with tilework. F. Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before tilework begins. G. Make substrate firm, dry, clean, and free of oily or waxy films. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Prepare surfaces, fit, set, or bond tile, grout and clean tile in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI Standards for setting method specified, except as otherwise noted. TILING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 30 00 - 6 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Workmanship, Cutting, Fitting, and Grout Joint Size: 1. Center and balance areas of tile. 2. Generally start full size tiles at outside corners and leave cut tiles for inside corners. 3. Tile Cutting: a. Minimize number of cuts. b. No cuts smaller than half size without approval of Engineer. c. Make all cuts on the outer edges of the field. d. Smooth cut edges. Install tile without jagged or flaked edges. e. Do not split tile unless no other alternative is possible. 4. Fit tile closely where edges will be covered by trim, escutcheons, or other similar devices. 5. Maintain heights of tile work in full courses to nearest obtainable dimension where heights are given in feet and inches and are not required to fill vertical spaces exactly. 6. Allowable Lippage: 1/32 inch. 7. Grout Joint Size: 1/8 inch. 8. Install accessories in tile work to be evenly spaced, properly centered with tile joints, and level, plumb, and true to the correct projection. Install accessories at locations and heights shown or designated. C. Trim: Provide bases, caps, stops, returns, trimmers, and other shapes to fmish installation. D. Setting Wall Tile, Scratch and Leveling Coat: 1. On Concrete or Masonry: Meet TCA Method W211. 2. On Solid Backing at Shower Compartment Walls: Meet TCA Method W22 1. 3. On Steel Studs at Shower Compartment Walls: Meet TCA Method W24 1. 4. Use latex-portland cement grout. E. Setting Wall Tile (Thin -Set Application): 1. On Concrete or Masonry: Meet TCA Method W202. 2. On Gypsum Board Over Solid Backing: Meet TCA Method W223. 3. On Gypsum Board Over Metal Studs: Meet TCA Method W242. 4. On Gypsum Board Over Wood or Metal Studs: Meet TCA Method W243. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TILING APRIL 17,2026 093000-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 5. On Cementitious Backer Board Over Wood or Metal Studs at Shower Compartment Walls: Meet TCA Method W244C. 6. On Glass Mesh Mortar Unit over Wood or Metal Studs at Shower Compartment Walls: Meet TCA Method W245. F. Setting Floor Tile (Thin -Set Application): 1. On Concrete: Meet TCA Method F 113 with latex-portland cement grout. G. Edge Strips: 1. At openings without thresholds and similar discontinuous edges of thin -set tile floors. 2. Where ceramic tile floors are adjacent to other flooring material at same level. 3. Where ceramic tile cove base is combined with other types of flooring. 3.03 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Clean tile surfaces thoroughly on completion of grouting. B. Remove grout haze, observing tile manufacturer's recommendations as to use of acid and chemical cleaners. C. Rinse tilework thoroughly with clean water before and after using chemical cleaners. D. Polish surface of glazed tilework with soft cloth. E. After grout has cured for 10 days, clean and seal nonglazed tiles following sealer manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.04 PROTECTION A. From Construction Dirt: 1. Apply protective coat of neutral cleaner solution, one part cleaner to one part water, to clean completed tile walls and floors. 2. Cover tile floors with heavy-duty, nonstaining construction paper, masked in -place. 3. Just before substantial completion, remove paper and rinse protective coat of neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. TILING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 30 00 - 8 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. From Traffic: 1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for at least 7 days. 2. Place large, flat boards in walkways and wheelways for 7 days where use of newly tiled floor with cement type grout is unavoidable. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TILING APRIL 17, 2026 09 30 00 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS IW_tolailk I121011to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A641/A641M, Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. b. C635/C635M, Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings. c. C636/C636M, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels. d. E1264, Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. 2. UL: Fire Resistance. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Detailed layout of grid indicating hanger spacing, fastening and splicing details, change in level details, and access location. 2. Samples: a. One 12 -inch square of each acoustical unit material to illustrate range of appearance. b. One full-size Sample of each suspension system member and molding. c. Mark with manufacturer's name and specific design and technical data. B. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer's recommendation for installation of system. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials with manufacturer's labels indicating brand name, pattern, size, and thickness. B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage, or wetting. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS MARCH 25, 2026 09 5113 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Where acoustical materials are to be installed, maintain humidity of 65 percent to 75 percent in area for 25 hours before, during, and 25 hours after installation. B. Maintain uniform temperature of 55 degrees F to 70 degrees F prior to and during installation of materials. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Provide acoustical units from same production run as installed equal to 1 percent of area. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Components, Materials, and Accessories: Product of a single manufacturer. B. ASTM C635/C635M, Heavy Duty: 1. Exposed Aluminum Tee Grid: a. Nonrated, light -duty, spaced to fit lay -in panels. b. Color: White. c. Exposed Flange Width: 15/16 inch. d. Edges: Single molding to match grid. e. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Chicago Metallic Corp.; All Aluminum 830 System. 2) Armstrong; AL Prelude Plus system. 2. Edge Molding: a. Minimum 0.020 -inch steel, channel- or angle -shaped. b. Flange Width: 15/16 inch minimum. c. Finish to match main members. 3. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, minimum 12 -gauge, galvanized, soft -annealed, mild steel wire. 4. Wire Ties: ASTM A641/A641M, 18 -gauge, galvanized, annealed steel wire. 5. Furnish manufacturer's hold down clips and accessories required for a complete system incorporating Seismic Design Category indicated in General Structural Notes on Drawings. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 0951 13-2 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Flat Lay -In Panels: 1. Material: Fire -resistive mineral fiber, Class A. 2. In accordance with ASTM E1264, Type III, Form 2. 3. Pattern: Random fissured. 4. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.55 to 0.65. 5. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35 minimum. 6. Light Reflectance: LR 0.75 or over. 7. Nominal Size: 24 inches by 48 inches by 5/8 inch thick. 8. Edges: Square. 9. Finish and Color: Painted white, unless scheduled otherwise. 10. Manufacturers and Products: a. Armstrong; Item 895, Minaboard, Cortega. b. Celotex; Item PBT-197, Hytone, Baroque. c. U.S.G.; Item 56705, Auratone, Natural Fissured II. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SEQUENCING A. Lay out grid. B. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical equipment in framing and cutting material around ceiling penetrations. C. Install suspension systems after mechanical work above is complete. D. Install acoustical units. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED GRID SYSTEM A. Hang level and in straight alignment directly from structure in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M and manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Hanger Wires: 1. Space maximum 4 feet on center each direction and securely attach to structure above. 2. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member and at light fixtures, 6 inches from vertical surfaces. 3. Do not splay wires more than 5 inches in a 4 -foot vertical drop. 4. Provide four-way wire splays at 45 degrees from main runner to support structure for every 144 square feet of ceiling area. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS MARCH 25, 2026 0951 13-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 5. Wrap wire minimum three times horizontally, turning ends upward. 6. Where hanger wires cannot be hung vertically from structure above because of ducts, pipes, cable trays, or other interferences, provide steel channel trapezes (minimum 2 -inch deep, 16 -gauge cold -rolled carrying channels) hung on steel rods or 8 -gauge wire from structural members above. Hang ceiling wires from these trapezes or similar members supporting ducts or pipes. Do not hang directly from ducts or pipes. 7. Follow suspension system manufacturer's instructions for modified installation required for Seismic Design Category indicated in General Structural Notes on Drawings. C. Edge Molding: 1. Install at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. 2. Miter corners where moldings intersect or install corner caps. 3. Attach to vertical surface with mechanical fasteners. D. Provide additional channels, hangers, and trapezes as required to support edges of ceiling around and under mechanical and electrical work. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Upon completion of suspended grid system and other concealed work, install with pattern running in one direction. B. Place material to bear all around on suspension members. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation. B. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids, and other defects in painted surfaces. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 0951 13-4 MARCH 25, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. b. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. c. D2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish -Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. d. E595, Standard Test Method for Total Mass Loss and Collected Volatile Condensable Materials from Outgassing in a Vacuum Environment. e. E648, Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. f. E662, Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. g. F970, Test Method for Static Load Limit. h. F 1066, Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. i. F 1303, Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. j. F1344, Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile. k. F1515, Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Flooring by Color Change. 1. F1700, Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile. M. F1859, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering without Backing. n. F1861, Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. o. F2034, Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering. p. F2195, Standard Specification for Linoleum Floor Tile. q. G2 1, Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 253, Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. b. 258, Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Two full-size tiles or two 12 -inch squares of sheet material for each type and color or pattern of resilient flooring. b. Two 2 -1/2 -inch -wide strips of base material and stair coverings proposed for use. c. Two 6 -inch -long strips of trim materials. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. b. List of recommended maintenance products, methods, and procedures. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in original containers at not less than 70 degrees F ambient temperature for not less than 24 hours immediately before installation. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperature in space to receive flooring between 70 degrees F and 90 degrees F for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation. B. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F after flooring is installed, except as specified above. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not install floor coverings until concrete slab has cured for 60 days or until primer material in test patches cannot be scraped or peeled from the slab after drying 24 hours. RESILIENT FLOORING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 65 00 - 2 MARCH 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT BASE A. General: ASTM F1861, uniform in 0.125 -inch thickness and in as long lengths as practicable to suit conditions of installation. 1. Factory premolded internal and external corners to match base when available. Where resilient base is indicated, use either rubber or vinyl base. 2. Style: B, cove. 3. 4 inches high. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Armstrong; Color -Integrated Wall Base. 2. Johnsonite; Traditional Wall Base. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Trim: Furnish in lengths as long as practical to suit conditions of installation. B. Cove Filler: 1. Standard filler strip for supporting coved sheet vinyl (integral base). 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Johnsonite; CFS-00-A. b. Mercer; 070 or 075. C. Adhesive: Type and brands of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of floor covering material for conditions of installation. D. Primer and Crack Filler: Type and brand recommended by floor covering manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness preventing execution and quality of resilient flooring as specified. B. Correct defects before installation of resilient flooring. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 RESILIENT FLOORING MARCH 29, 2026 09 65 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove dirt, oil, grease, or other foreign matter from surfaces to receive floor covering materials. B. Fill cracks less than 1/16 -inch wide and depression less than 1/8 -inch deep with floor filler. C. Prime sanded wood surfaces with one brush coat of primer. D. Prime surfaces, other than wood, if recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 3.03 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES A. Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide safety precautions during mixing and applications as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. C. Apply uniformly over surfaces: 1. Cover only amount of area that can be covered by flooring material within recommended working time of adhesive. 2. Remove any adhesive that dries or films over. 3. Do not soil walls, bases, or adjacent areas with adhesives. 4. Promptly remove any spillage. D. Apply adhesives with notched trowel or other suitable tool. E. Clean trowel and rework notches as necessary to ensure proper application of adhesive. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF BASE A. General: Remove defects in wall and floor that would prevent level and true installation of base material. 1. Install base around perimeter of room or space, where shown, and at toe spaces of casework and cabinets. 2. Unroll base material and cut into accurate lengths as desired or as required for minimum number of joints. 3. Match edges at seams or double cut adjoining lengths to give continuous appearance. 4. Install with tight butt joints with no joint widths greater than 1/64 inch. RESILIENT FLOORING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 65 00 - 4 MARCH 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Top -Set Base: 1. Apply adhesive and firmly adhere to wall surfaces. 2. Press down so bottom cove edge follows floor profile. 3. Ensure top and bottom edges of base are in firm contact with walls and floors. 4. Form internal and external corners by using premolded corners. Other methods, acceptable to Engineer, may be used if premolded corners are not available. 5. Scribe base accurately to abutting materials. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM MATERIALS A. Provide reducers where floor covering terminates exposing edge of covering. B. Center reducer under door, where floor covering terminates at a door opening. Fit end edges to door frames and abutting surfaces and other edges to adjoining materials. C. Apply adhesives and bond securely to substrates in straight true lines. Meet visible and related features of building construction with a maximum deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 RESILIENT FLOORING MARCH 29, 2026 09 65 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK RESILIENT FLOORING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 65 00 - 6 MARCH 29, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 09 67 00 FLUID -APPLIED EPDXY FLOORING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's product specifications. 2. Samples: Two 6 -inch square Samples of color and fmish selected. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Evidence of installer's approval by manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installer: 1. Minimum of 5 years' experience in installing seamless flooring of similar size and materials. 2. Approved by manufacturer of the flooring products. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in their original, unopened containers, clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand name, and such identifying numbers as are appropriate. B. Store materials at temperatures between 60 degrees F and 80 degrees F. Should they be exposed to lower temperatures, restore to 60 degrees F prior to use. C. Protect materials against wetting, moisture absorption, and construction traffic. 1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide minimum 2 gallons of unopened top coating material for future use by Owner. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FLUID -APPLIED EPDXY FLOORING APRIL 17, 2026 09 67 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Crossfields Products Corp.; Dex-O-Tex DecorFlor. 2. Dur-A-Flex, Inc.; Dur-A-Quartz. 3. Florock; Floroquartz IV. 4. Stonhard; Stonshield SLT. 5. Selby, Battersby & Co.; Selbatwede 71. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Floor Covering and Cove Base Epoxy: 100 percent solids, thermosetting epoxy resins reacted with suitable hardeners to produce a seamless, monolithic, plastic coating. B. Aggregate: Quartz (silicon dioxide) base rock granules fired with a colored ceramic coating as manufactured by: 1. 3M; Colorquartz Brand. 2. Stonhard, Inc. C. Wainscoting Epoxy: 90 percent solids, thermosetting epoxy resins reacted with suitable hardeners to produce a dense, flexible plastic film. D. Edge or Divider Strips: Standard products manufactured or approved by floor covering manufacturer for use with seamless covering material used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine surfaces scheduled to receive seamless covering for all defects, dampness, paint, or foreign material that would affect the quality and execution of the Work. B. Perform moisture or adhesion tests as recommended by manufacturer. C. Make corrections necessary to provide surfaces acceptable to manufacturer. FLUID -APPLIED EPDXY FLOORING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 67 00 - 2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign material, sealers, hardeners, waxes and other curing compounds, laitance, and grease. B. Prepare concrete by mechanical means, including use of a scabbler, scarifier, or shot blast machine, for removal of bond inhibiting materials, such as curing compounds and laitance. Acid etching is not an acceptable method of preparation. C. Apply primer to surfaces as required by flooring material manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install seamless floor covering following manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Apply to floor and base in minimum thickness permitted by aggregate, approximately 3/32 inch. C. Finish glossy and slip resistant. D. Install at locations indicated in Interior Finish Schedule on Drawings. 3.04 PROTECTION A. During installation, protect adjacent surfaces against damage. B. After installation, allow no traffic on seamless finish for 48 hours or until completely cured. C. Keep water off floor for at least 5 days. D. Do not cover with paper until it will not stick. Use only nonstaining paper. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FLUID -APPLIED EPDXY FLOORING APRIL 17, 2026 09 67 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 09 77 01 FIBERGLASS -REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANEL WALLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 13, Seismic Evaluation of Existing Buildings. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C636/C636M, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels. b. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. c. E488/E488M, Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements. d. E580/E580M, Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions. e. El 190, Standard Test Methods for Strength of Power -Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. CISCA: Ceiling and Interior Systems Contractor's Association. B. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Reflected ceiling plans showing: 1) Ceiling suspension members. 2) Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3) Ceiling -mounted items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets, speakers, and moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures with adjoining construction. 4) Seismic bracing and expansion provisions. 5) Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot. b. Product data for ceiling suspension system including methods of installation for each type of substrate. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIBERGLASS -REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) MARCH 25, 2026 PANEL WALLS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 09 77 01 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Samples: a. Samples for initial selection in form of manufacturer's standard color charts showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit. b. Samples for verification each type of exposed finish, prepared on samples of size below and of same thickness and material for final Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 1) Two 12 -inch -square samples of wall panel. 2) Two 12 -inch -long samples of each exposed molding. 3) Two 12 -inch -long samples of suspension system members. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. Submit with Action Submittal for the same item. 2. Product test reports from an independent testing laboratory showing compliance with specified requirements for grid unit surface burning characteristics. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver suspended FRP wall panels, and components to Project Site in manufacturer's original unopened packages, fully identified with type, finish, performance data, and compliance labels. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials and products specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Crane Composites, Inc.; Sequentia wall panels. 2. Nudo Products, Inc.; Allure panels. 2.02 FRP WALL PANELS A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Furnish FRP wall panels with surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E84. Fire -Rated: Class A. 2. Flame Spread: 25 or less. a. Smoke Developed: 200 or less. FIBERGLASS -REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PANEL WALLS MARCH 25, 2026 09 77 01 -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. FRP Wall Panels: 48 -inch by 120 -inch by 0.090 -inch thick, with textured surface; color white. C. Moldings: Manufacturer's standard vinyl moldings for all panel joints, edges, and corners, in color to match panels. D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended adhesive or corrosion -resistant fasteners to suit installation shown on Drawings. E. Sealant: Manufacturer's recommended sealant for panel joints and edges, around fasteners, and at moldings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of FRP ceiling units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less -than -half -width units at borders. B. Measure each wall area and establish layout of FRP wall panels to minimize joints. Lay out panels with all horizontal and vertical joints aligned. 3.02 FRP WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install over substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using adhesive or fasteners, or combination of both. B. Apply moldings and seal all panel joints, fasteners, and edges for a watertight installation. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIBERGLASS -REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) MARCH 25, 2026 PANEL WALLS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 09 77 01 -3 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 09 80 00 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes ALPRO® Metal Wall Panels as shown on the Architectural Drawings. B. Related sections include the following: (List applicable sections). 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS/SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Division 1, General Requirement specifications apply to Work of this section. C. Finish Schedule or Finish Legend applies to Work of this section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. General: Comply with applicable requirements of the following, except where more stringent requirements are indicated by building codes. B. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials): 1. ASTM C634: Definition of Terms Relative to Environmental Acoustics. 1.04 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT A. All components of the ALPRO® Wall Panel System shall be provided by one (1) Manufacturer to ensure single source responsibility and quality control. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submission must be made within ten (10) working days of the General Contract Award to avoid project delay. B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's technical data and brochures for specified system. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM APRIL 17, 2026 09 80 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication and installation of ALPRO® Wall Panel System including the following: 1. Location of ALPRO® Wall Panel System. 2. Panel metal type and thickness. 3. Panel corrugation pattern. 4. Perforated or non -perforated. 5. Dimensions. 6. Sizes. 7. Finishes. D. Samples: Submit three (3) samples consisting of 12 inch long Z Furring and J Trim along with 12 -inch by 12 -inch corrugated Panel. E. Product Test Reports: 1. All products furnished shall have a flame spread classification of 0-25 for a Class A or Class 1 rating in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. All products furnished shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C423 for Sound Absorption. Test results for a Type A mounting method shall yield an NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient) of no less than 0.9. Test results for a Type D-100 mounting method shall yield an NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient) of no less than 0.9. F. Closeout Submittals: 1. Provide Manufacturer's Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions. 2. Warranty Documents. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers' Qualifications: Firm with manufacturing and delivery capacity required for the project, shall have successfully completed at least ten (10) projects within the past five (5) years, utilizing systems, materials, and techniques as herein specified. B. Fabricator must own and operate its own manufacturing facilities for all metal components. Systems consisting of components from a variety of Manufacturers will not be considered or accepted. C. Manufacturer/Fabricator must own and operate its own painting and finishing facility to assure single source responsibility and quality control. ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 80 00 - 2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with not less than three (3) years of successful experience in the installation of systems similar to those required by this project and acceptable to the Manufacturer of the System. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver Panels and all system hardware to the job site in Manufacturer's original packaging, unopened and undamaged, just prior to installation. B. Avoid warpage and damage by storing Panels and all system hardware above floor, flat and in a dry, humidity and temperature controlled interior location. C. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and exercise care during off loading, handling and installation to avoid damage and marring of finishes. 1.08 SEQUENCING A. Substitute Products: Alternate proposals for substitute products will not be accepted unless approval is issued in addenda. B. Contract Execution: Submittals shall be completed and approved prior to award of subcontract for system components. C. Manufacturer's Production Schedule: Subcontract for the work of this section shall be planned to allow sufficient time for Manufacturer's production and delivery scheduling. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Furnish Manufacturer's: Warranty that materials furnished will perform as specified for a period of not less than one (1) year from material shipment when installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable System: ALPRO® Wall Panel System shall be manufactured by Gordon, Inc. For all inquiries contact, Gordon, Inc., 5023 Hazel Jones Road, Bossier City, LA 71111, (888) 733-3836 or (800) 747-8954. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM 098000-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF B. The listed Manufacturer shall not be construed as closing specifications to other prospective Manufacturers, but rather as establishing a level of quality in a metal system. Other systems may be submitted for approval, as provided for in the specifications at least ten (10) working days prior to submission of bids. Companies desiring to submit a proposal shall submit all descriptive information of the system proposed including photographs and Shop Drawings of at least three (3) projects similar in detail and scope. 2.02 PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION A. ALPRO® Wall Panel System shall be manufactured of aluminum or steel components. All Panels, J Trim Perimeter, Corner Angles, and Z Furring, including Acoustical Components shall be provided as a complete package of this work. B. Materials: Mounting Accessories: a. Brake formed aluminum or brake formed steel as manufactured by ALPRO®, Division of Gordon, Inc. Accessories shall include Z Furring, J Trim, and inside/outside Corner Angles in a size and length to completely support and finish/trim the Wall Panels as shown in elevations. All mounting accessories shall be finished to match corrugated ALPRO® Wall Panels. b. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in finished unit. Surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. All metal shall be of the highest -grade commercial type. 2. Metal Panels: a. For aluminum Panels, aluminum sheet shall be 3003-H14 alloy, minimum 0.032 inch (ASTM B209). Panels may be stucco - embossed or smooth aluminum. b. For steel Panels, steel sheet shall be 22, 24, or 26 -gauge galvanneal. c. The metal acoustical Ceiling Panels shall be corrugated using ALPRO® pattern type C. d. For perforated Panels, patterns to be 1/8 inch diameter holes on 21/64 inch staggered centers, approximately 13 percent open area. 3. Sound Absorption Material: Provide fiberglass 2 inches thickness X 1.5 # density. The fiberglass Panel shall be wrapped in Class A, per ASTM E84, Black PVC. ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 80 00 - 4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.03 FINISHES A. All ALPRO® Panels and accessories shall receive a multi -stage pretreatment prior to receiving an electrostatically applied, AAMA 2604 powder coating finish. B. All cut edges, including perforated holes, must be coated. Finish shall be oven baked to ensure paint adhesion and uniform surface hardness. C. Paint color to be selected from ALPRO® Standard Colors. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Provide all necessary mounting accessories for Wall Panel System. B. Provide stock -sized Panel to be field cut. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examination of Surfaces: Examine building structure scheduled to receive Wall Panel System for unevenness or irregularities that would affect quality and execution of Work. B. Tolerances: Install Wall Panel System with a maximum surface deviation of 1/8 inch 4 fee -0 inches (No load applied). 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the Manufacturer to achieve the best result for the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with Manufacturer's printed instructions, governing regulations for Seismic Codes, and the Ceiling & Interior Systems Construction Association Standards applicable to work. B. Space Enclosure: Do not install any work until space is enclosed and weatherproofed, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temperature and humidity shall be continuously maintained at values near those of fmal occupancy. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM 098000-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.04 CLEANING A. Follow Manufacturer's cleaning instructions for specified finish. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Procedures: Care should be taken during the remainder of construction to protect ALPRO® Wall Panel System from damage. B. Damage to Finished Work: Finished units shall be without damage. Damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at the expense of the party damaging the material, as in accordance with the contract requirements. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 80 00 - 6 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C203, Coal -Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines —Enamel and Tape —Hot -Applied. b. C209, Cold -Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines. c. C213, Fusion -Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. d. C214, Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. 2. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 3. NACE International (NACE): SPO188, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. 4. NSF International (NSF): 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 6. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): Specification for Structural Joints using High -Strength Bolts. 7. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA 2, Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness Requirements. b. PA 10, Guide to Safety and Health Requirements for Industrial Painting Projects. c. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. d. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. e. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. f. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning. g. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. h. SP 7, Joint Surface Preparation Standard Brush -Off Blast Cleaning. i. SP 10, Near -White Blast Cleaning. j. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. k. SP 16, Brush -Off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non -Ferrous Metals. 1. SP 13, Surface Preparation of Concrete. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAINTING AND COATING 099000- 1 MARYS CREEK WRF m. Guide 15, Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other Nonporous Substrates. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Terms used in this section: 1. Coverage: Total minimum dry film thickness in mils or square feet per gallon. 2. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 3. HCI: Hydrochloric Acid. 4. MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness, mils. 5. MDFTPC: Minimum Dry Film Thickness per Coat, mils. 6. Mil: Thousandth of an inch. 7. PDS: Product Data Sheet. 8. PSDS: Paint System Data Sheet. 9. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride. 10. SFPG: Square Feet per Gallon. 11. SFPGPC: Square Feet per Gallon per Coat. 12. SP: Surface Preparation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Data Sheets: 1) For each product, furnish a Product Data Sheet (PDS), the manufacturer's technical data sheets, and paint colors available (where applicable). The PDS form is appended to the end of this section. 2) For each paint system, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS). The PSDS form is appended to the end of this section. 3) Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with specification. 4) Furnish copies of paint system submittals to the coating applicator. 5) Indiscriminate submittal of only manufacturer's literature is not acceptable. b. Detailed chemical and gradation analysis for each proposed abrasive material. 2. Samples: a. Proposed Abrasive Materials: Minimum 5 -pound sample for each type. PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 2 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY b. Reference Panel: 1) Surface Preparation: a) Prior to start of surface preparation, furnish a 4 -inch by 4 -inch steel panel for each grade of sandblast specified herein, prepared to specified requirements. b) Provide panel representative of the steel used; prevent deterioration of surface quality. c) Panel to be reference source for inspection upon approval by Engineer. 2) Paint: a) Unless otherwise specified, before painting work is started, prepare minimum 8 -inch by 10 -inch sample with type of paint and application specified on similar substrate to which paint is to be applied. b) Furnish additional samples as required until colors, finishes, and textures are approved. c) Approved samples to be the quality standard for final finishes. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Applicator's Qualification: List of references substantiating experience. 2. Coating manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 3. Factory Applied Coatings: Manufacturer's certification stating factory applied coating system meets or exceeds requirements specified. 4. Manufacturer's written verification that submitted material is suitable for the intended use. 5. Coating for Faying Surfaces: Manufacturer's test results that show the proposed coating meets the slip resistance requirements of the AISC Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts. 6. If the manufacturer of finish coating differs from that of shop primer, provide finish coating manufacturer's written confirmation that materials are compatible. 7. Manufacturer's written instructions and special details for applying each type of paint. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience in application of specified products. B. Regulatory Requirements: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds. 2. Perform surface preparation and painting in accordance with recommendations of the following: a. Paint manufacturer's instructions. b. SSPC PA 10. c. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction. C. Mockup: 1. Before proceeding with Work under this section, finish one complete space or item of each color scheme required showing selected colors, finish texture, materials, quality of work, and special details. 2. After Engineer approval, sample spaces or items shall serve as a standard for similar work throughout the Project. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Shipping: 1. Where precoated items are to be shipped to the Site, protect coating from damage. Batten coated items to prevent abrasion. 2. Protect shop painted surfaces during shipment and handling by suitable provisions including padding, blocking, and use of canvas or nylon slings. B. Storage: 1. Store products in a protected area that is heated or cooled to maintain temperatures within the range recommended by paint manufacturer. 2. Primed surfaces shall not be exposed to weather for more than 2 months before being topcoated, or less time if recommended by coating manufacturer. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not apply paint in temperatures or moisture conditions outside of manufacturer's recommended maximum or minimum allowable. 2. Do not perform final abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point of ambient air. PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 4 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Nationally recognized manufacturers of paints and protective coatings who are regularly engaged in the production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. B. Minimum of 5 years' verifiable experience in manufacture of specified product. C. Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying most of the products specified herein: 1. Carboline Protective Coatings and Linings 2. PPG Protective and Marine Coatings (formerly Ameron). 3. Tnemec Company, Inc. 2.02 2.03 ABRASIVE MATERIALS A. Select abrasive type and size to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer's recommendations for specific primer and coating system to be applied. PAINT MATERIALS A. General: 1. Manufacturer's highest quality products suitable for intended service. 2. Compatibility: Only compatible materials from a single manufacturer shall be used in the Work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats. 3. Thinners, Cleaners, Driers, and Other Additives: As recommended by coating manufacturer. B. Products: Product Definition Acrylic Latex Single -component, finish as required Acrylic Latex (Flat) Flat latex Acrylic Sealer Clear acrylic Alkyd (Semigloss) Semigloss alkyd PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Product Definition Alkyd Enamel Optimum quality, gloss or semigloss fmish as required, medium long oil Alkyd Wood Primer Flat alkyd Bituminous Paint Single -component, coal -tar pitch based Block Filler Primer -sealer designed for rough masonry surfaces, 100% acrylic emulsion Coal -Tar Epoxy Amine, polyamide, or phenolic epoxy type 70% volume solids minimum, suitable for immersion service DTM Acrylic Primer Surface tolerant, direct -to -metal water borne acrylic primer DTM Acrylic Finish Surface tolerant, direct -to -metal water borne acrylic finish coat Elastomeric 100% solids, plural component, spray applied, high Polyurethane build, elastomeric polyurethane coating, suitable for the intended service Epoxy Filler/Surfacer 100% solids epoxy trowel grade filler and surfacer, nonshrinking, suitable for application to concrete and masonry. Approved for potable water contact and conforming to NSF 61, where required Epoxy Nonskid Polyamidoamine or amine converted epoxies (Aggregated) re g ated aggregated; aggregate may be packaged separately Epoxy Primer— Anticorrosive, converted epoxy primer containing Ferrous Metal rust -inhibitive pigments Epoxy Primer— Epoxy primer, high -build, as recommended by Other coating manufacturer for specific galvanized metal, copper, or nonferrous metal alloy to be coated Fusion Bonded 100% solids, thermosetting, fusion bonded, dry Coating owder epoxy, suitable for the intended service TFE Lube or Grease Tetrafluoroethylene, liquid coating, or open gear Lube grease as supplied by McMaster -Carr Supply Corporation, Elmhurst, IL High Build Epoxy Polyamidoamine epoxy, minimum 69% volume solids, capability of 4 to 8 MDFT per coat PAINTING AND COATING 099000-6 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY Product Definition Inorganic Zinc Solvent or water based, having 85% metallic zinc Primer content in the dry film; follow manufacturer's recommendation for topcoating Latex Primer Sealer Waterborne vinyl acrylic primer/sealer for interior gypsum board and plaster. Capable of providing uniform seal and suitable for use with specified finish coats NSF Epoxy Polyamidoamine epoxy, approved for potable water contact and conforming to NSF 61 Epoxy, High Solids Polyamidoamine epoxy, 80% volume solids, minimum, suitable for immersion service Polyurethane Enamel Two -component, aliphatic or acrylic based polyurethane; high gloss finish Organic Zinc Rich Epoxy or moisture cured urethane with 85 -percent Primer zinc content in the dry film, meeting the requirements of RCSC Specification for Structural Joints using High Strength Bolts, Class A or Class B, as required. Rust -Inhibitive Single -package steel primers with anticorrosive Primer pigment loading Sanding Sealer Co -polymer oil, clear, dull luster Silicone/Silicone Elevated temperature silicone or silicone/acrylic Acrylic based Stain, Concrete Acrylic, water repellant, penetrating stain Stain, Wood Satin luster, linseed oil, solid or transparent as required Varnish Nonpigmented vehicle based on a variety of resins (alkyd, phenolic, urethane) in gloss, semigloss, or flat finishes, as required Water Base Epoxy Two -component, polyamide epoxy emulsion, finish as required 2.04 MIXING A. Multiple -Component Coatings: 1. Prepare using each component as packaged by paint manufacturer. 2. No partial batches will be permitted. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 3. Do not use multiple -component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. 4. Furnish small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other small areas. 5. Mix only components specified and furnished by paint manufacturer. 6. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating. B. Colors: Formulate paints with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials that might be affected by presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at Site. 2.05 SHOP FINISHES A. Shop Blast Cleaning: Reference Paragraph, Shop Coating Requirements. B. Surface Preparation: Provide Engineer minimum 7 days' advance notice to start of shop surface preparation work and coating application work. C. Shop Coating Requirements: 1. When required by equipment specifications, such equipment shall be primed and finish coated in shop by manufacturer and touched up in field with identical material after installation. 2. Where manufacturer's standard coating is not suitable for intended service condition, Engineer may approve use of a tie -coat to be used between manufacturer's standard coating and specified field finish. In such cases, tie -coat shall be surface tolerant epoxy as recommended by manufacturer of specified field finish coat. Coordinate details of equipment manufacturer's standard coating with field coating manufacturer. D. Pipe: 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: a. Use SSPC standards as a guide for desired prepared surface. Follow recommendations of pipe and coating manufacturers for means and methods to achieve SSPC-equivalent surface. b. The surface preparation and application of the primer shall be performed by pipe manufacturer. c. For high performance (epoxy) coatings, follow additional recommendations of pipe and coating manufacturers. d. Prior to blast cleaning, grind smooth surface imperfections, including, but not limited to delaminating metal or oxide layers. PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 8 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF e. For conventional (alkyd) coatings, clean asphalt varnish supplied on pipe and apply one full coat of a tar stop before two full coats of the color coats specified. 2. Steel Pipe: a. Surface preparation and application of primer shall be performed by pipe manufacturer. b. For pipe with epoxy lining, do not place end cap seals until pipe lining material has sufficiently dried. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide Engineer minimum 7 days' advance notice to start of field surface preparation work and coating application work. B. Perform the Work only in presence of Engineer, unless Engineer grants prior approval to perform the Work in Engineer's absence. C. Schedule inspection of cleaned surfaces and all coats prior to succeeding coat in advance with Engineer. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Factory Finished Items: 1. Schedule inspection with Engineer before repairing damaged factory - finished items delivered to Site. 2. Repair abraded or otherwise damaged areas on factory -finished items as recommended by coating manufacturer. Carefully blend repaired areas into original finish. If required to match colors, provide full finish coat in field. B. Surface Preparation Verification: Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these Specifications and printed directions and recommendations of paint manufacturer whose product is to be applied. The more stringent requirements shall apply. 3.03 PROTECTION OF ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not specified elsewhere to be painted. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. D. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering. E. Protect surfaces adjacent to or downwind of Work area from overspray. 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Field Abrasive Blasting: 1. Perform blasting for items and equipment where specified and as required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed or coated. 2. Refer to coating systems for degree of abrasive blasting required. 3. Where the specified degree of surface preparation differs from manufacturer's recommendations, the more stringent shall apply. B. Surface Contamination Testing: 1. A surface contamination analysis test shall be performed every 500 square feet by means of a Chlor Test CSN Salts or approved equivalent. 2. Surface with chloride levels exceeding 3µg/square centimeter for submerged surfaces and 5µg/square centimeter for exposed surfaces shall be treated with a liquid soluble salt remover equivalent to CHLOR*RID (CHLOR*RID International, Chandler, AZ). 3. Follow manufacturer's recommendations and procedures for the use of this product to remove the surface contamination. C. Metal Surface Preparation: Where indicated, meet requirements of SSPC Specifications summarized below: a. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants by cleaning with solvent. b. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, using nonpower hand tools. c. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, using power -assisted hand tools. PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 10 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY d. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by blast cleaning. e. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no more than 33 percent of each unit area of surface which may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coatings. f. SP 7, Brush -Off Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible rust, oil, grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coatings. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and coating may remain on surface. g. SP 10, Near -White Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no more than 5 percent of each unit area of surface which may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coatings. h. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: Removal of visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide, corrosion products, and other foreign matter using power -assisted hand tools capable of producing suitable surface profile. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in lower portion of pits if original surface is pitted. i. SP -16, Brush Blasting of Non -Ferrous Metals: A brush-off blast cleaned non-ferrous metal surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, metal oxides (corrosion products), and other foreign matter. Intact, tightly adherent coating is permitted to remain. A coating is considered tightly adherent if it cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife. Bare metal substrates shall have a minimum profile of 19 micrometers (0.75 mil). 2. The words "solvent cleaning", "hand tool cleaning", "wire brushing", and "blast cleaning", or similar words of equal intent in these Specifications or in paint manufacturer's specification refer to the applicable SSPC Specification. 3. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast cleaning, wet or vacu-blast methods may be required. Coating manufacturers' recommendations for wet blast additives and first coat application shall apply. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 4. Ductile Iron Pipe Supplied with Asphaltic Varnish Finish: Remove asphaltic varnish finish prior to performing specified surface preparation. 5. Hand tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power tool cleaning. 6. Round or chamfer sharp edges and grind smooth burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects. 7. Welds and Adjacent Areas: a. Prepare such that there is: 1) No undercutting or reverse ridges on weld bead. 2) No weld spatter on or adjacent to weld or any area to be painted. 3) No sharp peaks or ridges along weld bead. b. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with adjacent surface of weld bead. 8. Preblast Cleaning Requirements: a. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to blast cleaning. b. Cleaning Methods: Steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water with appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing. c. Clean small isolated areas as above or solvent clean with suitable solvent and clean cloth. 9. Blast Cleaning Requirements: a. Type of Equipment and Speed of Travel: Design to obtain specified degree of cleanliness. Minimum surface preparation is as specified herein and takes precedence over coating manufacturer's recommendations. b. Select type and size of abrasive to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer's recommendations for particular primer to be used. c. Use only dry blast cleaning methods. d. Do not reuse abrasive, except for designed recyclable systems. e. Meet applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and environmental control regulations for blast cleaning, confined space entry (if required), and disposition of spent aggregate and debris. 10. Post -Blast Cleaning and Other Cleaning Requirements: a. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles from cleaning operations by dry (no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning or other method prior to painting. Vacuum clean enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem and wipe with a tack cloth. b. Paint surfaces the same day they are blasted. Reblast surfaces that have started to rust before they are painted. PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 12 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY D. Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Surface Preparation: 1. Remove soil, cement spatter, and other surface dirt with appropriate hand or power tools. 2. Brush blast in accordance with SSPC SP 16. 3. Obtain and follow coating manufacturer's recommendations for additional preparation that may be required. E. Concrete Surface Preparation: 1. Do not begin until 30 days after concrete has been placed. 2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP 13. 3. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods. 4. Brush-off blast clean to remove loose concrete and laitance, and provide a tooth for binding. Upon approval by Engineer, surface may be cleaned by acid etching method. Approval is subject to producing desired profile equivalent to No. 80 grit flint sandpaper. Acid etching of vertical or overhead surfaces shall not be allowed. 5. Secure coating manufacturer's recommendations for additional preparation, if required, for excessive bug holes exposed after blasting. 6. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior to painting. F. Plastic and FRP Surface Preparation: 1. Hand sand plastic surfaces to be coated with medium grit sandpaper to provide tooth for coating system. 2. Large areas may be power sanded or brush-off blasted, provided sufficient controls are employed so surface is roughened without removing excess material. G. Masonry Surface Preparation: 1. Complete and cure masonry construction for 14 days or more before starting surface preparation work. 2. Remove oil, grease, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent washing, or other suitable cleaning methods. 3. Clean masonry surfaces of mortar and grout spillage and other surface deposits using one of the following: a. Nonmetallic fiber brushes and commercial muriatic acid followed by rinsing with clean water. b. Brush-off blasting. c. Water blasting. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 4. Do not damage masonry mortar joints or adjacent surfaces. 5. Leave surfaces clean and, unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, dry prior to painting. 6. Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Uniform texture and free of surface imperfections that would impair intended finished appearance. 7. Masonry Surfaces to be Clear Coated: Free of discolorations and uniform in texture after cleaning. H. Wood Surface Preparation: 1. Replace damaged wood surfaces or repair in a manner acceptable to Engineer prior to start of surface preparation. 2. Solvent clean (mineral spirits) knots and other resinous areas and coat with shellac or other knot sealer, prior to painting. Remove pitch by scraping and wipe clean with mineral spirits or turpentine prior to applying knot sealer. 3. Round sharp edges by light sanding prior to priming. 4. Filler: a. Synthetic -based wood putty approved by paint manufacturer for paint system. b. For natural finishes, color of wood putty shall match color of finished wood. c. Fill holes, cracks, and other surface irregularities flush with surrounding surface and sand smooth. d. Apply putty before or after prime coat, depending on compatibility and putty manufacturer's recommendations. e. Use cellulose type putty for stained wood surfaces. 5. Ensure surfaces are clean and dry prior to painting. I. Gypsum Board Surface Preparation: Typically, new gypsum board surfaces need no special preparation before painting. Surface Finish: Dry, free of dust, dirt, powdery residue, grease, oil, or any other contaminants. J. Existing Painted Surfaces to be Repainted Surface Preparation: 1. Detergent wash and freshwater rinse. 2. Clean loose, abraded, or damaged coatings to substrate by hand or power tool, SP 2 or SP 3. 3. Feather surrounding intact coating. 4. Apply one spot coat of specified primer to bare areas, overlapping prepared existing coating. 5. Apply one full finish coat of specified primer to entire surface. PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 14 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 6. If an aged, plural -component material is to be topcoated, contact coating manufacturer for additional surface preparation requirements. 7. Application of Cosmetic Coat: a. It is assumed that existing coatings have oxidized sufficiently to prevent lifting or peeling when overcoated with paints specified. b. Check compatibility by application to a small area prior to starting painting. c. If lifting or other problems occur, request disposition from Engineer. 8. Perform blasting as required to restore damaged surfaces. Materials, equipment, procedures shall meet requirements of SSPC. 3.05 SURFACE CLEANING A. Brush-off Blast Cleaning: 1. Equipment, procedure, and degree of cleaning shall meet requirements of SSPC SP 7. 2. Abrasive: Either wet or dry blasting sand, grit, or nutshell. 3. Select various surface preparation parameters, such as size and hardness of abrasive, nozzle size, air pressure, and nozzle distance from surface such that surface is cleaned without pitting, chipping, or other damage. 4. Verify parameter selection by blast cleaning a trial area that will not be exposed to view. 5. Engineer will review acceptable trial blast cleaned area and use area as a representative sample of surface preparation. 6. Repair or replace surface damaged by blast cleaning. B. Acid Etching: 1. After precleaning, spread the following solution by brush or plastic sprinkling can: One part commercial muriatic acid reduced by two parts water by volume. Adding acid to water in these proportions gives an approximate 10 percent solution of HCl. 2. Application: a. Rate: Approximately 2 gallons per 100 square feet. b. Work acid solution into surface by hard -bristled brushes or brooms until complete wetting and coverage is obtained. c. Acid will react vigorously for a few minutes, during which time brushing shall be continued. d. After bubbling subsides (10 minutes), hose down remaining slurry with high pressure clean water. e. Rinse immediately to avoid formation on the surface of salts that are difficult to remove. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF f. Thoroughly rinse to remove any residual acid surface condition that may impair adhesion. 3. Ensure surface is completely dry before application of coating. 4. Apply acid etching to obtain a "grit sandpaper" surface profile. If not, repeat treatment. C. Solvent Cleaning: 1. Consists of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and any other surface contaminants by using solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and methods that involve a solvent or cleaning action. 2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP 1. 3.06 APPLICATION A. General: 1. The intention of these Specifications is for new, interior and exterior wood, masonry, concrete, and metal, and submerged metal surfaces to be painted, whether specifically mentioned or not, except as specified otherwise. 2. Extent of Coating (Immersion): Coatings shall be applied to internal vessel and pipe surfaces, nozzle bores, flange gasket sealing surfaces, carbon steel internals, and stainless steel internals, unless otherwise specified. 3. For coatings subject to immersion, obtain full cure for completed system. Consult coatings manufacturer's written instructions for these requirements. Do not immerse coating until completion of curing cycle. 4. Apply coatings in accordance with these Specifications and paint manufacturers' printed recommendations and special details. The more stringent requirements shall apply. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure thorough drying of previously applied paint. 5. Sand wood lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 6. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. 7. Fusion Bonded Coatings Method Application: Electrostatic, fluidized bed, or flocking. 8. Coat units or surfaces to be bolted together or joined closely to structures or to one another prior to assembly or installation. 9. Water -Resistant Gypsum Board: Use only solvent type paints and coatings. 10. On pipelines, terminate coatings along pipe runs to 1 inch inside pipe penetrations. 11. Keep paint materials sealed when not in use. PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 16 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 12. Where more than one coat is applied within a given system, alternate colors to provide a visual reference showing required number of coats have been applied. B. Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloys: 1. Concealed galvanized, copper, and nonferrous metal alloy surfaces (behind building panels or walls) do not require painting, unless specifically indicated herein. 2. Prepare surface and apply primer in accordance with System No. 10 specification. 3. Apply intermediate and finish coats of the coating system appropriate for the exposure. C. Porous Surfaces, Such As Concrete and Masonry: 1. Filler/Surfacer: Use coating manufacturer's recommended product to fill air holes, bug holes, and other surface voids or defects. 2. Prime Coat: May be thinned to provide maximum penetration and adhesion. a. Type and Amount of Thinning: Determined by paint manufacturer and dependent on surface density and type of coating. 3. Surface Specified to Receive Water Base Coating: Damp, but free of running water, just prior to application of coating. D. Film Thickness and Coverage: 1. Number of Coats: a. Minimum required without regard to coating thickness. b. Additional coats may be required to obtain minimum required paint thickness, depending on method of application, differences in manufacturers' products, and atmospheric conditions. 2. Application Thickness: a. Do not exceed coating manufacturer's recommendations. b. Measure using a wet film thickness gauge to ensure proper coating thickness during application. 3. Film Thickness Measurements and Electrical Inspection of Coated Surfaces: a. Perform with properly calibrated instruments. b. Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with specification. c. Coats are subject to inspection by Engineer and coating manufacturer's representative. 4. Visually inspect concrete, masonry, nonferrous metal, plastic, and wood surfaces to ensure proper and complete coverage has been attained. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 17 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 5. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other similar areas, where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present, and ensure proper millage in these areas. 6. Apply additional coats as required to achieve complete hiding of underlying coats. Hiding shall be so complete that additional coats would not increase the hiding. 3.07 PROTECTIVE COATINGS SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, paint surfaces in accordance with the following application schedule. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from Engineer before starting work in question. B. System No. 1 Submerged Metal —Potable Water: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning NSF Epoxy 3 coats, 3 MDFTPC 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Metal surfaces new and below a plane 1 foot above the maximum liquid surface; metal surfaces above the maximum liquid surface that are a part of the immersed equipment; surfaces of metallic items, such as wall pipes, pipes, pipe sleeves, access manholes, gate guides and thimbles, and structural steel that are embedded in concrete; and the following specific surfaces: 1) Interior surfaces of steel piping noted in the Piping Schedule. C. System No. 2 Submerged Metal —Domestic Sewage: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 5, White Metal Prime in accordance Blast Cleaning with manufacturer's recommendations Coal -Tar Epoxy 2 coats, 16 MDFT -OR- High Build Epoxy 2 coats, 16 MDFT 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Metal surfaces new and below a plane 1 foot above maximum liquid surface, metal surfaces above maximum liquid surface that are a part of immersed equipment, concrete embedded surfaces of metallic items, such as wall pipes, pipes, pipe sleeves, access PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 18 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY manholes, gate guides and thimbles, and structural steel, and the following specific surfaces: 1) Interior surfaces of steel piping noted in the Piping Schedule. D. System No. 3 Submerged Metal —Other: Use on the following items or areas: a. Metal surfaces new and below a plane 1 foot above maximum liquid surface, metal surfaces above maximum liquid surface which are a part of immersed equipment, and the following specific surfaces: 1) Interior surfaces of steel piping noted in the Piping Schedule. E. System No. 4 Exposed Metal —Highly Corrosive: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 10, Near -White Blast Cleaning Epoxy Primer— Ferrous Metal 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT High Build Epoxy 1 coat, 4 MDFT Polyurethane Enamel 1 coat, 3 MDFT 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Exposed metal surfaces, new and located inside or outside of structures and exposed to weather. F. System No. 5 Exposed Metal —Mildly Corrosive: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 10, Near -White Blast Cleaning Epoxy Primer— Ferrous Metal 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT Polyurethane Enamel 1 coat, 3 MDFT 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Exposed metal surfaces, new and located inside or outside of structures and exposed to weather or in a highly humid atmosphere, such as pipe galleries and similar areas. G. System No. 6 Exposed Metal —Atmospheric: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 19 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning Rust -Inhibitive Primer 1 coat, 2 MDFT Alkyd Enamel 2 coats, 4 MDFT Use on the following items or areas: a. Exposed metal surfaces, new and located inside or outside of structures or exposed to weather, including metal doors and frames, vents, louvers, exterior metal ductwork, flashing, sheet metalwork and miscellaneous architectural metal trim. b. Apply surface preparation and primer to surfaces prior to installation. Finish coats need only be applied to surfaces exposed after completion of construction. H. System No. 7 Concrete Encased Metal: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning Coal -Tar Epoxy 2 coats, 16 MDFT Use on the following items or areas: a. Use on concrete encased ferrous metals including wall pipes, pipe sleeves, access manholes, gate guides, and thimbles. I. System No. 8 Buried Metal —General: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 10, Near -White Standard Hot Coal -Tar AWWA C203 Blast Cleaning Enamel -OR- Coal-Tar Epoxy 2 coats, 16 MDFT For Highly Abrasive AWWA C214 with Soil, Brackish Water: Double Outer Wrap Tape Coat System 1. For steel pipe and fittings, follow AWWA C209 and AWWA C214 with double outer wrap. 2. Use on the following items or areas: a. Buried, belowgrade portions of steel items, except buried stainless steel or ductile iron. PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 20 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY J. System No. 10 Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Conditioning: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Epoxy Primer —Other As recommended by Paragraph Galvanized coating manufacturer Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Remaining coats as Alloy Surface required for exposure Preparation 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Galvanized surfaces requiring painting. b. After application of System No. 10, apply finish coats as required for exposure. K. System No. 11 Faying Surfaces of Slip Critical Bolted Connections: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 10, Near -White Blast Cleaning Organic Zinc Rich Primer 1 coat, 3 MDFT 1. Use on faying surfaces of slip critical joints as specified and as shown on Drawings. 2. Provide primer in accordance with RCSC Specification for Structural Joints using High -Strength Bolts. L. System No. 14 High Heat -Resistant -700 Degrees F Maximum: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning Inorganic Zinc Primer 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT Silicone 1 coat, 2 MDFT 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Exterior of ferrous steel air pipe, except stainless steel or where galvanized coating is used. M. System No. 17 Special Coating —Concrete: 1. Use on the following areas: a. Not used. N. System No. 19a Concrete Exposed Metal Repair Coating —Wastewater: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 21 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Brush blast concrete in Amine -cured epoxy, 2 coats, 8 MDFTPC, see accordance with suitable for exposure Note 2. Paragraph Concrete to primary Surface Preparation; wastewater, finish blast exposed color gray. reinforcing steel to Near White Metal, SSPC SP10. See Note 1. Note 1. Surface Preparation Alternative: Mechanical abrade concrete surfaces to meet International Concrete Restoration Association standard 37/32, Concrete Surface Profile No. 3. Mechanically abrade exposed ends of reinforcing steel in accordance with SSPC SP- 11. Note 2. Brush out surface voids and irregularities to provide a monolithic film. On saw -cut concrete surfaces that will not receive new concrete to cover exposed ends of rebar and metal embeds. Or alternately, where approved, over ends of and minimum two inches around ends of exposed metal and rebar in lieu of entire surface. O. System No. 25 Exposed FRP, PVC: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Acrylic Latex 2 coats, 320 SFPGPC Paragraph Plastic and Semigloss FRP Surface Preparation Use on the following items or areas: a. All exposed -to -view PVC and CPVC surfaces, and FRP surfaces without integral UV -resistant gel coat. P. System No. 27 Aluminum and Dissimilar Metal Insulation: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Solvent Clean (SP 1) Prime in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations Bituminous Paint 1 coat, 10 MDFT 1. Use on aluminum surfaces embedded or in contact with concrete. PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 22 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY Q. System No. 29 Fusion Bonded Coating: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 10, Near -White Fusion Bonded 1 or 2 coats, 7 MDFT Blast Cleaning Coating 100% Solids Epoxy 1. For steel pipe and fittings, meet all requirements of AWWA C213. R. System No. 29A Fusion Bonded, Steel Dowel Coating: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 10, Near -White Fusion Bonded 1 or 2 coats, 7 MDFT Blast Cleaning Coating 100% Solids Epoxy TFE Lube, Shop TFE Lube or Grease 1 coat, as required Applied; Grease Lube Lube Alternative, Field Applied Just Prior to Installation 1. Use on steel expansion joint dowels as specified in Section 03 15 00, Concrete Joints and Accessories. 3.08 ARCHITECTURAL PAINT SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, paint surfaces in accordance with the following application schedule. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from Engineer before starting work in question. B. System No. 101 Wood, Stained (Interior or Exterior): Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Wood Stain 2 coats, 250 SFPGPC Paragraph Wood [A: Solid] Surface Preparation [B: Transparent] 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: I C. System No. 102 Wood, Semigloss (Interior or Exterior): PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 23 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Alkyd Wood Primer 1 coat, 400 SFPG Paragraph Wood Surface Preparation Alkyd (Semigloss) 1 coat, 400 SFPG 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. IA:] D. E. F. System No. 103 Wood, Flat (Interior or Exterior): Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Alkyd Wood Primer 1 coat, 400 SFPG Paragraph Wood Surface Preparation Acrylic Latex (Flat) 2 coats, 350 SFPGPC 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: I System No. 104 Wood, Natural (Interior or Exterior): Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Sanding Sealer 1 coat, 450 SFPG Paragraph Wood Surface Preparation Varnish Satin or 2 coats, 450 SFPG Gloss; Gloss Only on Exterior 1 Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: I System No. 105 Wood, Stained and Varnished (Interior or Exterior): Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Stain, Wood Match Sample Paragraph Wood Surface Preparation Sanding Sealer 1 coat, 450 SFPG PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 24 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Varnish (Gloss or 2 coats, 450 SFPGPC Satin), Exterior Gloss Only 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: I G H. I. System No. 106 Galvanized Metal: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Manufacturer's 1 coat, as recommended Paragraph Galvanized Recommended Primer by manufacturer Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Surface Preparation Alkyd Enamel 2 coats, 4 MDFT (Semigloss) 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: Hollow metal frames and doors.] b. [B: ] System No. 107 Metal Trim and Structural Steel: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 6, Commercial Rust -Inhibitive Primer 1 coat, 2 MDFT Blast Cleaning Alkyd Enamel 2 coats, 4 MDFT (Semigloss) 1 Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: I System No. 108 Masonry, Flat: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Block Filler 1 coat, 75 SFPG Paragraph Masonry Surface Preparation Acrylic Latex (Flat) 2 coats, 240 SFPGPC PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 25 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: I J. System No. 109 Masonry, Semigloss [A: Egg Shell]: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Block Filler 1 coat, 75 SFPG Paragraph Masonry Surface Preparation Acrylic Latex 2 coats, 240 SFPGPC (Semigloss [B: , Egg Shell]) 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. [C: I K. System No. 110 Masonry Sealer: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Acrylic Sealer 2 coats, 100 SFPGPC Paragraph Masonry Surface Preparation L. 1 1 Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: ] System No. 111 Concrete and Masonry, Stain and Seal: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Concrete: In Stain, Concrete 2 coats, 250 SFPGPC accordance with Acrylic Sealer 2 coats, 100 SFPGPC Paragraph Concrete Surface Preparation -OR- Masonry: In accordance with Paragraph Masonry Surface Preparation 1 Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: I System No. 112 Concrete, Flat: PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 26 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Acrylic Latex (Flat) 2 coats, 240 SFPGPC Paragraph Concrete Surface Preparation 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: I N O. P System No. 113 Concrete, Semigloss [A: Egg Shell]: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Acrylic Latex 2 coats, 240 SFPGPC Paragraph Concrete (Semigloss [B: , Egg Surface Preparation Shell]) 1 Use on the following items or areas: a. [C: I System No. 114 Gypsum Board and Plaster, Flat: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Latex Primer Sealer 1 coat, 350 SFPG Paragraph Gypsum Board Surface preparation Acrylic Latex (Flat) 2 coats, 240 SFPGPC 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: ] System No. 115 Gypsum Board and Plaster, Semigloss [A: Egg Shell]: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Latex Primer/Sealer 1 coat, 350 SFPG Paragraph Gypsum Board Surface Preparation Acrylic Latex 2 coats, 400 SFPGPC (Semigloss) or Alkyd (Semigloss [B: Egg Shell]) 1 Use on the following items or areas: a. [C: I PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 27 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Q. System No. 116 Gypsum Board and Plaster, Gloss Epoxy: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Manufacturer's l coat, 350 SFPG Paragraph Gypsum Recommended Board Surface Primer Preparation Water Base Epoxy 1 coat, 250 SFPG (Gloss) I19 S. 1 Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: System No. 117 Concrete Masonry, Gloss Epoxy: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Block Filler 1 coat, 75 SFPG Paragraph Masonry Surface Preparation Water Base Epoxy 2 coats, 300 SFPGPC (Gloss) 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: I System No. 121 Concrete, Skid -Resistant: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Epoxy Nonskid 1 coat, 160 SFPG Paragraph Concrete (Aggregated) Surface Preparation 1 3.09 COLORS Use on the following items or areas: a. [A: ] A. Provide as designated hereinand as selected by Owner. B. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Selected manufacturer may supply matches. C. Equipment Colors: PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 28 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 1. Equipment includes the machinery or vessel itself plus the structural supports and fasteners and attached electrical conduits. 2. Paint nonsubmerged portions of equipment the same color as the piping it serves, except as itemized below: a. Dangerous Parts of Equipment and Machinery: OSHA Orange. b. Fire Protection Equipment and Apparatus: OSHA Red. c. Radiation Hazards: OSHA Purple. d. Physical hazards in normal operating area and energy lockout devices, including, but not limited to, electrical disconnects for equipment and equipment isolation valves in air and liquid lines under pressure: OSHA Yellow. D. Pipe Identification Painting: 1. Color code nonsubmerged metal piping, except electrical conduit. Paint fittings and valves the same color as pipe, except equipment isolation valves. 2. Pipe Color Coding: As shown in table below. 3. On exposed stainless steel piping, apply color 24 inches in length along pipe axis at connections to equipment, valves, or branch fittings, at wall boundaries, and at intervals along piping not greater than 9 feet on center. 4. Pipe Supports: Painted light gray, as approved by Owner. 5. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe, polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe located inside of buildings and enclosed structures will not require painting, except as noted or scheduled. E. Pipe System Color Code: Pipe System stem Color Air, Process Federal Safety Green Air, Instrument Green Diamond with Safety Green Bands Ammonia, Liquid Federal Safety Orange Ammonia, Solution Federal Safety Orange Alum Dark Green Chlorine, Gas Federal Safety Yellow Chlorine, Liquid Federal Safety Yellow Chlorine, Residual Sampling Silver/Gray PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 29 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Pipe System Color Chlorine Solution Federal Safety Yellow Chlorine Ejector Water Silver/Gray Chlorine Vent Federal Safety Yellow Citric Acid Federal Safety Orange Compressed Air Diamond Green Carbon Black Drains and Sludge Brown Decant Light Gray Dewatering Black Drains Dark Gray Effluent, Final Gray Effluent, Primary Gray Effluent, Flushing Water, High Pressure Green Effluent, Flushing Green Fuel Oil Supply Federal Safety Red Fuel Oil Return Federal Safety Red Flocculation Basin Influent Buff Filter Backwash Supply Green Filter Surface Wash Supply Green Hot Flushing Loop Federal Safety Blue with 6 - inch Red Bands every 30 - inches Headworks Buff Lime White Mixed Liquor Brown Overflow Brown Plant Service Water Green Potable Water Safety Blue Polymer/Cationic Buff Polymer mer Nonionic or Anionic Buff PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00-30 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY Pipe System Color Raw Sewage Light Gray Rapid Mix Influent Light Gray Scum Black Sample Green Seal Water Green Sludge, Digested Brown Sludge, Primary Brown Sludge, Return Activated Brown Sludge, Thickened Brown Sludge, Waste Activated Brown Sludge, Stored Brown Sludge, Recirculated Brown Sludge, Mixed Brown Supplemental Carbon Brown Thickener Dilution Water Green 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Equipment: 1. Provide calibrated electronic type dry film thickness gauge to test coating thickness specified in mils. 2. Provide low -voltage wet sponge electrical holiday detector to test completed coating systems, 20 mils dry film thickness or less, except zinc primer, high -build elastomeric coatings, and galvanizing, for pinholes, holidays, and discontinuities, as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor, San Gabriel, CA, Model M-1. 3. Provide high -voltage spark tester to test completed coating systems in excess of 20 mils dry film thickness. Unit as recommended by coating manufacturer. B. Testing: 1. Thickness and Continuity Testing: a. Measure coating thickness specified in mils with a magnetic type, dry film thickness gauge, in accordance with SSPC PA 2. Check PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 099000-31 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF each coat for correct millage. Do not make measurement before a minimum of 8 hours after application of coating. b. Holiday detect coatings 20 mils thick or less, except zinc primer and galvanizing, with low voltage wet sponge electrical holiday detector in accordance with NACE SP0188. c. Holiday detect coatings in excess of 20 mils dry with high voltage spark tester as recommended by coating manufacturer and in accordance with NACE SP0188. d. After repaired and recoated areas have dried sufficiently, retest each repaired area. Final tests may also be conducted by Engineer. C. Inspection: Leave staging and lighting in place until Engineer has inspected surface or coating. Replace staging removed prior to approval by Engineer. Provide additional staging and lighting as requested by Engineer. D. Unsatisfactory Application: 1. If item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean surface and topcoat with specified paint material to obtain specified color and coverage. Obtain specific surface preparation information from coating manufacturer. 2. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections is cause for rejection. 3. Repair defects in accordance with written recommendations of coating manufacturer. E. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays: 1. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, and feather edges. Follow with primer and finish coat. Depending on extent of repair and appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be required. 2. Remove rust and contaminants from metal surface. Provide surface cleanliness and profile in accordance with surface preparation requirements for specified paint system. 3. Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of paint manufacturer. 4. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage -repair coats in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color -matched appearance. 3.11 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. In accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services, coating manufacturer's representative shall be present at Site as follows: PAINTING AND COATING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 90 00 - 32 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY 1. On first day of application of any coating system. 2. A minimum of two additional Site inspection visits, each for a minimum of 4 hours, in order to provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. As required to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer's product. 4. To verify full cure of coating prior to coated surfaces being placed into immersion service. 3.12 CLEANUP A. Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers or destroy at end of each day. B. Upon completion of the Work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers from Site or destroy in a legal manner. C. Remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and leave entire job clean. 3.13 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this specification: 1. Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) 2. Product Data Sheet (PDS). END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 - 33 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET Complete this PSDS for each coating system, include all components of the system (surface preparation, primer, intermediate coats, and finish coats). Include all components of a given coating system on a single PSDS. Paint System Number (from Paint System Title (from Spec.): Coating Supplier: Representative: Surface Preparation: Paint Material Product Name/Number (Generic) (Proprietary) Min. Coats, Coverage PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY PAINT PRODUCT DATA SHEET Complete and attach manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet to this PDS for each product submitted. Provide manufacturer's recommendations for the following parameters at temperature (F)/relative humidity: Temperature/RH 50/50 70/30 90/25 Induction Time Pot Life Shelf Life Drying Time Curing Time Min. Recoat Time Max. Recoat Time Provide manufacturer's recommendations for the following: Mixing Ratio: Maximum Permissible Thinning: Ambient Temperature Limitations: min.:. max.: Surface Temperature Limitations: min.:. max.: Surface Profile Requirements: min.:_ max.: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINTING AND COATING APRIL 6, 2026 09 90 00 SUPPLEMENT -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PAINTING AND COATING 099000-2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET Complete this PSDS for each coating system, include all components of the system (surface preparation, primer, intermediate coats, and finish coats). Include all components of a given coating system on a single PSDS. Paint Material Product Name/Number (Generic) (Proprietary) Min. Coats, Coverage END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET APRIL 6, 20264/6/2026 09 90 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 20264/6/2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET APRIL 6, 20264/6/2026 09 90 01 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 20264/6/2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF PAINT PRODUCT DATA SHEET Complete and attach manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet to this PDS for each product submitted. Provide manufacturer's recommendations for the following parameters at temperature (F)/relative humidity: 7Temperature/RH 50/50 70/30 90/25 Induction Time Pot Life Shelf Life Drying Time Curing Time Min. Recoat Time Max. Recoat Time Provide manufacturer's recommendations for the following: Mixing Ratio: Maximum Permissible Thinning: Ambient Temperature Limitations Surface Temperature Limitations: Surface Profile Requirements: mm.: max.: min.: max.: min.: max.: [A: Attach additional sheets detailing manufacturer's recommended storage requirements and holiday testing procedures.] END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 20264/6/2026 ©COPYRIGHT 20264/6/2026 JACOBS PAINT PRODUCT DATA SHEET 09 90 02 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PAINT PRODUCT DATA SHEET 099002-2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 6, 20264/6/2026 ©COPYRIGHT 20264/6/2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 09 96 35 CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D522, Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. b. D4263, Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. c. F 1869, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. d. F2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using In Situ Probes. 2. International Concrete Restoration Institute (ICRI): Guideline 03732, Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymers. 3. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA 10, Guide to Safety and Health Requirements for Industrial Painting Projects. b. P 13/NACE 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete. 1.02 ABBREVIATIONS A. CRC: Chemical Resistant Coating. B. CSP: Concrete Surface Profile. C. MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness. D. Mil: One thousandth of an inch. E. SDS: Safety Data Sheet. F. SSPC SP: The Society for Protective Coatings. 1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. Prior to beginning painting Work, schedule meeting and be prepared to discuss the following subjects, as a minimum: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS APRIL 24, 2026 099635-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Required schedule. 2. Sequence of critical path work items. 3. Use of Site, access, office and storage areas, security, and temporary facilities. 4. Major product delivery and priorities. 5. Safety plan. B. Attendees shall include: 1. Owner's representatives. 2. Contractor's office representative. 3. Contractor's resident superintendent. 4. Contractor's quality control representative. 5. Subcontractors' representatives whom Contractor may desire or Owner may request to attend. 6. Paint manufacturer's technical representative. 7. Others as appropriate. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Furnish CRC Data Sheet (CRCDS) for each CRC system. a. Attach CRC Product Data Sheets (CRCPDS) to the CRCDS form for each product used in CRC system. 2. Indiscriminate submittal of manufacturer's literature only is not acceptable. 3. Manufacturer's product specification. 4. Chemical resistance test results for exposure to service conditions. a. Provide chemical resistance test results for exposure to service conditions. b. Provide specific chemical resistance data for chemicals not listed in manufacturer's standard data sheets. 5. Letter from manufacturer indicating they have reviewed systems and service conditions and agree with proposed application. 6. Shop Drawings: a. Configuration details for the following: 1) Expansion joints and structural isolation joints. 2) Construction joints. 3) Cracks. 4) Wall base details. 5) Gate frames. 6) Equipment bolts (when installed before or after CRC application). 7) Metal angle frames at trenches, gratings, or hatches. 8) Floor drains. CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 96 35 - 2 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 9) Transition and termination detail at edge of CRC system. 10) Pipe penetrations (vertical and horizontal). 11) Other details specific to the structure being coated. 7. Samples: 4 -inch square complete system proposed for use showing thickness and finish. B. Informational Submittals: Letter from CRC manufacturer stating the following: a. Applicator has notified manufacturer of proposed installation. b. Manufacturer agrees with intended application. c. Applicator is qualified to do the Work and meets quality assurance minimum experience requirements. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Field inspection and test reports. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 5. SDS for each product. Provide SDS sheets as a separate, independent attachment. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Experience: Minimum 5 years manufacturing proposed products. B. Applicator's Experience: Minimum 3 years applying proposed products. C. Applicator Quality Control Plan: Applicator shall maintain in-house quality assurance program that monitors surface preparation, coating application, and quality control testing for coating and lining operations. Level of experience, quality assurance program, and quality control testing by applicator shall meet minimum requirements specified herein, coating manufacturer's instructions, and related government regulations. D. Subcontractor is solely responsible for quality control inspection and testing. Subcontractor shall monitor and be responsible for all environmental, surface preparation, application and quality control testing compliance at locations where coating work is undertaken. E. Mockups: 1. Required for coating systems over 1,000 square feet in area or exposed to view in service. 2. Before proceeding with Work under this section, finish one complete space or item of each color scheme required showing selected colors, finish texture, materials, quality of work, and special details. 3. Provide one mockup for each CRC system. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS 099635-3 MARYS CREEK WRF 4. Mockup components will vary, depending on CRC system. All components of CRC system, including surface preparation, must be exposed in mockup. 5. Example Mockup Procedure: a. Prepare, prime, and coat one section of concrete, 10 feet by 10 feet, al a location mutually agreed upon by the Contractor and Engineer. Use a "step" down mockup as follows: 1) Leave one -quarter of the surface exposed to allow observation of surface preparation. 2) Apply resurfacing mortar three-quarters of remaining surface. 3) Apply filler/surfacer and primer to one-half of the surface, over resurfacing mortar, leaving one -quarter of the surface exposed with resurfacing mortar. 4) Apply finish coat to filler/surfacer with primer, leaving one - quarter of surface exposed with surfacer/filler/primer. b. Mockup shall include concrete cuts for coating terminations and one example of a penetration. 6. After Engineer review and approval, sample spaces or items shall serve as a standard for similar work throughout Project. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet applicable federal, state, and local requirements for coating product selection, surface preparation, and painting activities. 1.07 SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING APPLICATION A. Perform surface preparation and painting in accordance with recommendations of the following: 1. These Specifications. 2. Coating manufacturer's instructions. 3. SSPC SP13. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers. B. Storage: Maintain materials in clean and dry condition. Follow manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not use any coating materials that have exceeded shelf -life limitations printed on the package. CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 96 35 - 4 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Temperature: Apply coating only when substrate, ambient air, and coating material are within the manufacturer's recommended range. It is the Contractor's responsibility to furnish temporary facilities that may be required for proper installation of coating, such as covers, air heating and cooling, and dehumidification. B. Substrate: Moisture content shall be within the manufacturer's recommended range for product application. C. Ventilation: Provide during and after application to meet all applicable safety and health regulations. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish minimum 2 gallons of unopened topcoating material for future use by Owner. 1.11 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Furnish extended guarantee or warranty. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at option of the City, removal and replacement of Work specified in this specification section found defective during a period of 2 years after date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in the General Conditions. 1. 24 -Month Warranty Period Inspection: City will conduct inspection of interior and exterior coated surfaces prior to the end of warranty period. City will notify Contractor in advance of inspection and Contractor may attend at its option. City will prepare list of coating defects and failures identified during inspection and transmit to Contractor. List shall serve as notice of repairs required under warranty. 2. Repairs: a. If repairs are required, requirements of Contract shall apply including, but not limited to, requirements to remove standing water and perform repair work. b. Repair defective coatings using coating materials, equipment, and methods similar to those used in original work. Materials shall be of fresh manufacture and within manufacturer's stated shelf life at time of application. 1) Provide extended warranty of 1 year for repairs. 2) Complete repairs within 30 calendar days of Warranty Period Inspection. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS 099635-5 MARYS CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Tnemec Company, Inc. B. Carboline Protective Coatings and Linings C. PPG Protective and Marine Coatings (formerly Ameron) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds. B. Materials shall not contain lead or lead compounds. C. Concrete Floors, Trenches, Containment Walls, and Curbs for Secondary Containment. Surface Preparation a. Interior Surfaces 1) SSPC-SP13, Surface Preparation of Concrete. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13 Joint Surface Preparation Standards and ICRI Technical Guidelines. Abrasive blast, shot blast, water jet, or mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to remove laitance, curing compounds, hardeners, sealers, and other contaminants and to provide ICRI- CRP5 surface profile. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide chemical containment coatings below; a. Interior Surface 1) Tnemec CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 09 96 35 - 6 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF a) Primer: Tnemec Series 120-5002 Beige at 17 mils dft, 1 coat. b) Finish: Tnemec Series 120-5001 Gray at 17 mils dft, 1 coat. c) Patching compound: Tnemec Series N218 Mortarclad to fill voids. 2) Or Approved Equivalent 2.04 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Location: Covered, exposed to ambient temperature conditions. B. Surface: Concrete floors, walls, and vault for chemical storage and handling. C. Traffic: Foot. D. Chemicals Stored in Containment Areas: 1. Micro C 2000 neat 2. Sodium hypochlorite 10-12.5% 3. Anionic and cationic polymers, various concentrations. 4. Ferric Sulfate 50 percent 5. Citric Acid 50 percent 2.05 MIXING A. Thoroughly mix until homogeneous following manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix only components furnished by coating manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these Specifications and the printed directions and recommendations of the system manufacturer whose product is to be applied. 2. Provide Engineer minimum 3 days' advance notice of start of surface preparation and system application Work. 3. Perform Work only in presence of Engineer unless Engineer grants prior approval to perform Work in Engineer's absence. B. Schedule inspection with Engineer in advance for cleaned surfaces and system application Work. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS APRIL 24, 2026 099635-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF C. Perform inspections and tests as required to verify applicability of information provided in Part 1, Article Examination. 3.02 PREPARATION A. In accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and the manufacturer's printed directions and recommendations. B. Fill holes and cracks with manufacturer's recommended materials to produce even surface for application of systems. C. Concrete Surfaces: 1. Do not begin until 30 days after concrete has been placed. 2. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods. 3. Brushoff blast clean to remove loose concrete and provide a tooth for binding. Upon approval by Engineer, surface may be acid etched with muriatic acid solution. Approval, subject to producing desired profile. 4. Secure coating manufacturer's recommendations for additional preparation if required for excessive bug holes exposed after blasting. 5. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior to painting. D. Masonry Surfaces: 1. Complete and cure masonry construction for 14 days or more before starting surface preparation Work. 2. Remove oil, grease, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent washing, or other suitable cleaning methods. 3. Clean masonry surfaces of mortar and grout spillage and other surface deposits using one of the following: a. Nonmetallic fiber brushes and commercial muriatic acid followed by rinsing with clean water. b. Brushoff blasting. c. Water blasting. 4. Do not damage masonry mortar joints or adjacent surfaces. 5. Leave surfaces clean and, unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, dry prior to painting. 6. Masonry Surfaces to be Coated: Uniform texture and free of surface imperfections which would impair the intended finished appearance. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install coating systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 099635-8 APRIL 24,2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF B. Install coating systems on vertical and horizontal surfaces, including caps, within containment wall for storage tanks, pumps, and piping. C. Extend surfacing completely under structures and equipment located within the containment area. Install at construction joints in substrate and floor drains, trenches, and other components within the containment area. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Inspect finished system for complete, uniform coverage of specified area. Evidence of defects include improper thickness, hardness, and appearance. 2. Engineer may require electrical spark test or other tests to be performed by Contractor when evidence of incomplete coverage exists. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's representative at Site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services, for installation assistance, inspection, and Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3.06 APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. As shown in the Drawings. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS 099635-9 MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CHEMICAL -RESISTANT COATINGS 09 96 35 - 10 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded and Seamless. b. D709, Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials. 3. The Chlorine Institute, Inc.: WC -1, Wall Chart: Handling Chlorine Cylinders and Ton Containers. 4. International Code Council (ICC): a. A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. b. International Fire Code (IFC): Chapter 27, Hazardous Materials -General Provisions. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 704, Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response. b. HAZ-01, Fire Protection Guide to Hazardous Materials. 6. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 7. U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration: Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings showing layouts, actual letter sizes and styles, and Project -specific mounting details. b. Manufacturer's literature showing letter sizes and styles, sign materials, and standard mounting details. c. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for illuminated designs. B. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer's installation instructions. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SIGNAGE APRIL 24, 2026 10 14 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FACILITY ENTRANCE MARKER A. Molds for Message: 1. Furnish plastic letter, numeral, and symbol molds for insertion into formwork. 2. Form with tapered sides for release without spalling concrete. 2.02 BUILDING IDENTIFICATION A. Identification: Provide identification of buildings and structures as indicated in the Identifying Device Schedule at the end of this Section and as shown on the Drawings. Location to be coordinated with OWNER. B. Dimensional Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. C. Text Material: Aluminum. D. Size: 12". E. Color: Clear Anodized Satin Finish. F. Mounting: Concealed studs, non -corroding for substrates encountered. 2.03 BUILDING NAME PLAQUE A. Text Material: Aluminum. B. Size: 18 inches by 27 inches and minimum 1/4 inch thick. C. Lettering and Trim: Raised 1/8 inch, minimum. D. Finish: 1. Border Face and Edge, and Lettering Face: Fine satin hand finish. 2. Background: Dark statuary bronze, finely pebbled surface. E. Lettering and Border Outlines: Hand -tool, clean, and sharp. F. Lettering Style: Condensed block. SIGNAGE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 10 14 00 - 2 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF G. Tablet Inscription Text: As shown. H. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws with rosettes. I. Manufacturer's name is allowed on backside. 2.04 DOOR NAMEPLATES A. Material: Plastic with square corners. B. Thickness: 1/8 inch. C. Height: 2 inches. D. Finish: Nondirectional matte. E. Background: Black. F. Letters: Raised. 1. Size: 1 inch high. 2. Color: White. 3. Style: Helvetica Regular upper and lower case. 4. Message Text: As shown on Door and Hardware Schedule. 5. Braille Text: Domed or rounded as required by ADA regulations, with 3/8 -inch minimum clearance on all sides. G. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Best Sign Systems, Montrose, CO; Graphic Blast. 2. Andco Industries Corp., Greensboro, NC; 1400 series. 2.05 PICTORIAL SYMBOLS A. Material: Plastic with square corners, match door nameplates. B. Conform to ICC A117.1, Section 703.5. Provide Braille text as required by ADA regulation. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Best Sign Systems, Montrose, CO; Graphic Blast. 2. Andco Industries Corp., Greensboro, NC; 1400 series. 2.06 SIGN TYPES A. Plastic Sign (Type A): PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SIGNAGE APRIL 24, 2026 10 14 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1. Exterior: Laminated plastic subsurface image type, 3/16 inch thick with high -gloss finish. 2. Interior: Plastic, 1/8 inch thick with nondirectional matte finish and raised letters. 3. Rounded corners. B. Metal Sign (Type B): 1. Material: Baked enamel finished 20 -gauge (minimum) steel or 18 -gauge (minimum) aluminum signs. 2. Manufacturers: a. Seton Identification Products. b. Nutheme Illustrated Safety Co. C. Fiberglass Sign (Type C): 1. Material: Three-ply laminated fiberglass, minimum 1/8 inch thick, with contrasting color core message layer between two clear weather - resistant surface layers. 2. Manufacturers: a. Best Sign Systems. b. Brady Signmark. D. Individual Letter and Number Signs (Type E): Cast aluminum for concealed projected mounting. 1. Manufacturers: a. Eder Metal Letter Co., Milwaukee, WI. b. Spanjer Brothers, Inc., Chicago, IL. c. Andco Industries Corp., Greensboro, NC. E. Exit Sign (Type G): 1. Material: Plastic, 1/8 inch minimum thickness. 2. Letters: a. 6 inches high, with 3/4 -inch stroke. b. 2 inches wide, except for letter "I", with spacing of 3/8 inch. 3. Colors: Red letters and direction arrows on white background. F. Hazardous Material Sign (Type H): 1. Conform to NFPA 704 and NFPA HAZ-01. 2. Material: Fiberglass 1/8 inch thick. 3. Background, Letters, and Numbers: Die -cut vinyl with pressure sensitive adhesive. 4. Manufacturers: SIGNAGE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 10 14 00 - 4 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF a. Brady Signmark. b. Emed Co., Inc. 2.07 IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Pipe Labels: 1. Snap -on, reversible type with lettering and directional arrows, sized for outside diameter of pipe and insulation. 2. Provided with ties or straps for pipes of 6 inches and over diameter. 3. Designed to firmly grip pipe so labels remain fixed in vertical pipe runs. 4. Material: Heavy-duty vinyl or polyester, suitable for exterior use, long lasting, and resistance to moisture, grease, and oils. 5. Letters and Arrows: Black on OSHA safety yellow background. 6. Color Field and Letter Height: Meet ASME A13.1. 7. Message: Piping system name as indicated on Piping Schedule. 8. Manufacturers and Products: a. Brady Signmark; B-915 BradySnap-On and Strap -On Pipe Markers. b. Seton Identification Products; Ultra -mark Pipe Markers. B. Pipe Labels: 1. Labels: Self-adhesive tape, with separate directional flow arrows. 2. Material: Pressure sensitive vinyl. 3. Letters and Arrows: Black on OSHA safety yellow background. 4. Color Field and Letter Height: ASME A13.1. 5. Message: Piping system name as indicated on Piping Schedule. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Brady Signmark; B-946 Self -Sticking Vinyl Pipe Markers and Directional Flow Arrow Tape. b. Seton Identification Products; Opti-Code Markers and Directional Arrows. C. Equipment Labels: 1. Applies to equipment with assigned tag numbers, where specified. 2. Letters: Black bold face, 3/4 inch minimum high. 3. Background: OSHA safety yellow. 4. Materials: a. Aluminum or stainless steel with a baked -on finish suitable for use on wet, oily, exposed, abrasive, and corrosive areas. b. Fiberglass with encased lettering. c. Rigid laminate. d. Multi -layered acrylic. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SIGNAGE APRIL 24, 2026 10 14 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 5. Furnish 1 -inch margin with holes at each end of label, for mounting. On fiberglass labels, furnish grommets at each hole. 6. Size: a. 2 inches minimum and 3 inches maximum high, by 14 inches minimum and 18 inches maximum long. b. Furnish same size base dimensions for all labels. 7. Message: Equipment names and tag numbers as used in sections where equipment is specified. 8. Manufacturers: a. Brady Signmark. b. Seton Identification Products. D. Chlorinator Room Wall Chart: 1. As specified above for equipment labels, except: a. Do not use aluminum labels. b. May use engraved exterior grade plastic laminate. 2. Lettering: 1/4 inch high, minimum. 3. Conform to Chlorine Institute WC -1. 2.08 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws or bolts of appropriate sizes. B. Wood Posts: Preservative treated 4 by 4 wood as specified in Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. C. Pipe Posts: 2 -1/2 -inch galvanized steel pipe meeting ASTM A53/A53M, Type S, Grade B. D. Chain: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 16 single jack chain or No. 2 double loop coil chain. E. Manufacturer's standard brackets for wall mounting of two-sided exit signs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION —GENERAL A. In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Mount securely, plumb, and level. 3.02 BUILDING NAME PLAQUE A. Mount as shown with concealed fasteners. SIGNAGE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 10 14 00 - 6 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.03 DIRECTORY A. Space 1/2 inch from wall with concealed mechanical fasteners. 3.04 DOOR NAMEPLATES AND PICTORIAL SYMBOLS A. Attach to doors or walls adjacent to doors with Phillips head screws. See Door and Hardware Schedule for locations and messages. B. Mount with bottom of nameplate at 5 feet 6 inches above floor. 3.05 SIGNS A. General: 1. Fasten to walls or posts, or hang as scheduled. 2. Anchor in place for easy removal and reinstallation with ordinary hand tools. B. Information, Exit, and Safety Signs: 1. Install facing traffic. Locate for high visibility with minimum restriction of working area around walkways and equipment. C. Traffic Signs: Mount each sign on scheduled support using two 1/4 -inch stainless steel bolts through sign and post. Install facing traffic at locations and in manner shown in U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways. D. Hazardous Material Sign: 1. Install where required by NFPA No. 704 and IFC, Chapter 27. 2. Install at entrances to spaces where hazardous materials are stored, dispensed, used, or handled, and on sides of stationary tanks. 3. Specific Materials: Sin Schedule —Hazardous Material Signs Health Flammability Instability Special Hazard Hazard Hazard Hazard Mounting Height Mark Material (Blue) (Red) (Yellow) (White) Location Method to Top H-1 Aluminum Sulfate 2 0 0 Wall Bolts 5'-6" (48.5% solution) H-2 Aqueous Ammonia 3 0 0 Tank Adhesive 5'-6" (28-50% solution) H-3 Calcium Hydroxide 3 0 0 COR Wall Bolts 5'-6" (95% + solid) PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SIGNAGE APRIL 24, 2026 10 14 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Sin Schedule —Hazardous Material Signs Health Flammability Instability Special Hazard Hazard Hazard Hazard Mounting Height Mark Material (Blue) (Red) (Yellow) (White) Location Method to Top H-4 Chlorine (100% gas) 3 0 0 COR, Wall Bolts 5'-6" OXY H-5 Diesel Fuel, No. 2 2 2 0 Wall Bolts 5'-6" H-6 Ferric Chloride 3 0 0 Wall Bolts 5'-6" (35-40% solution) H-7 Hydrofluosilicic Acid 3 0 0 COR Wall Bolts 5'-6" (30% solution) H-8 Hydrogen Peroxide 3 0 0 COR, Wall Bolts 5'-6" (30-35% solution) OXY H-9 Liquid Oxygen 3 0 0 OXY Wall Bolts 5'-6" 99+%o as H-10 Ozone 4 0 0 COR, Wall Bolts 5'-6" (100% gas) OXY H-11 Potassium 3 0 0 COR, Wall Bolts 5'-6" Permanganate OXY (100% solid) H-12 Soda Ash 2 0 0 Wall Bolts 5'-6" (100% solid) H-13 Sodium Bisulfite 2 0 0 Wall Bolts 5'-6" (25-38% solution) H-14 Sodium Hydroxide 3 0 0 COR Wall Bolts 5'-6" 10-30% solution) H-15 Sodium Hypochlorite 2 0 0 Wall Bolts 5'-6" (3-5% solution) H-16 Sodium Hypochlorite 3 0 0 COR Wall Bolts 5'-6" (12-15% solution) H-17 Sulfuric Acid 3 0 0 COR Wall Bolts 5'-6" (4-12.6% solution H-18 Sulfuric Acid 3 0 1 COR, W Wall Bolts 5'-6" (12.7-50% solution) H-19 Sulfuric Acid 3 0 2 COR, W Wall Bolts 5'-6" (92-98% solution) H-20 Zinc Orthophosphate 2 0 0 Wall Bolts 5'-6" 31% solution) 3.06 IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Pipe Labels: 1. Locate at connections to equipment, valves, or branching fittings at wall boundaries. 2. At intervals along piping not greater than 18 feet on center with at least one label applied to each exposed horizontal and vertical run of pipe. 3. At exposed piping not normally in view, such as above suspended ceilings and in closets and cabinets. SIGNAGE PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 10 14 00 - 8 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Supplementary Labels: Provide to Owner those listed on Piping Schedule that do not receive arrows. 5. Apply to pipe after painting in vicinity is complete, or as approved by Engineer. 6. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Equipment Labels: 1. Locate and install on equipment or concrete equipment base. 2. Anchor to equipment or base for easy removal and replacement with ordinary hand tools. C. Chlorinator Room Wall Chart: Unless otherwise shown, install next to room entrance. 3.07 SPECIFIC SIGN MESSAGES A. Polymer Fill Station Format and Message: 1. Polymer Fill Station: This station allows for unloading concentrated polymer from trucks. When operating, wear safety goggles and face shield, rubber gloves, rubber boots, rubber apron, cotton or polyester long-sleeved shirt or rubber jacket, and plastic hard hat. 2. Operating Procedure: a. Notify plant personnel prior to unloading. Ask for assistance if needed. b. Place corrosion -resistant bucket under bleed valve in fill station. c. Remove cap from polymer fill line adapter and make connection between truck hose adapter and polymer fill line adapter. 1) Open valve on fill line. 2) Open valve on truck hose. d. Unload polymer from truck. Observe level in polymer storage tank at all times by using local level indicator. e. When level in storage tank indicates TANK FULL, discontinue unloading of polymer. 1) Close valve on fill line. 2) Close valve on truck hose. f. Open bleed valve to drain polymer between fill line valve and truck hose valve into bucket. g. Close bleed valve. h. Use caution to break connection between truck hose adapter and polymer fill line adapter. i. Replace cap on polymer fill line adapter. j. Remove bucket and pour waste polymer either back into delivery truck or into a water -holding basin at a location selected by plant PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 SIGNAGE APRIL 24, 2026 10 14 00 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF operating personnel. Thoroughly rinse bucket by submerging bucket in water basin. 3. In Case of Emergency: Immediately flush contaminated skin or eyes with water at safety shower and eyewash. Notify plant personnel. Follow procedures outlined in polymer Material Safety Data Sheet. 3.08 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is a part of this specification. 1. Building Identification: Tabulation of characteristics for building identification devices. 2. Sign Schedule: Tabulation of characteristics and mounting information for warning, informational and unlighted exit signs numbered on Drawings. Provide items as scheduled. Meet requirements of Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 3. Hazardous Material Sign Schedule: Tabulation and mounting information for signs conforming to NFPA 704 and NFPA HAZ-0 1. END OF SECTION SIGNAGE 10 14 00 - 10 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF BUILDING IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE Si Mounting Lettering Qty. Location Type Height to Top Height Message Faces Remarks 1 Equalization Basin Wall Coordinate with 12" EQUALIZATION BASIN 1 Mount on structure as OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Peak Flow Storage Wall Coordinate with 12" PEAK FLOW STORAGE BASIN 1 Mount on structure as Basin OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Equalization Basin Wall Coordinate with 12" EQUALIZATION BASIN MIXING 1 Mount on structure as Mixing Vault OWNER VAULT directed by OWNER. 1 Peak Flow Storage Wall Coordinate with 12" PEAK FLOW STORAGE BASIN 1 Mount on structure as Basin Mixing Vault OWNER MIXING VAULT directed by OWNER. 1 Equalization and Peak Wall Coordinate with 12" EQ AND PFS ELECTRICAL 1 Mount on structure as Flow Storage Basin OWNER BUILDING directed by OWNER. Electrical Building 2 Preliminary Treatment Wall Coordinate with 12" PRELIMINARY TREATMENT 1 Mount on structure as Unit OWNER UNIT directed by OWNER. 1 Bioreactors Wall Coordinate with 12" BIOREACTORS 1 Mount on structure as OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Membranes and Return Wall Coordinate with 12" MEMBRANE BIOREACTORS 1 Mount on structure as and Waste Activated OWNER AND RS AND WS PUMP STATION directed by OWNER. Sludge Pump Station 2 Operations Building Wall Coordinate with 12" OPERATIONS BUILDING 1 Mount on structure as OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 UV Disinfection Wall Coordinate with 12" UV DISINFECTION 1 Mount on structure as System OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 UV Disinfection Wall Coordinate with 12" UV ELECTRICAL AND SODIUM 1 Mount on structure as System Electrical OWNER HYPOCHLORITE FEED directed by OWNER. Building BUILDING 1 Cascade Aeration Wall Coordinate with 12" CASCADE AERATION SYSTEM 1 Mount on structure as System OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Ferric Sulfate Storage Wall Coordinate with 12" METAL SALT STORAGE 1 Mount on structure as OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Supplemental Carbon Wall Coordinate with 12" SUPPLEMENTAL CARBON 1 Mount on structure as Storage OWNER STORAGE directed by OWNER. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SIGNAGE 10 14 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF BUILDING IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE Si Mounting Lettering Qty. Location Type Height to Top Height Message Faces Remarks 1 Chemical Feed Wall Coordinate with 12" CHEMICAL FEED BUILDING 1 Mount on structure as Building OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Reuse and Service Wall Coordinate with 12" REUSE AND SERVICE WATER PS 1 Mount on structure as Water PS OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Sodium Hypochlorite Wall Coordinate with 12" SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE 1 Mount on structure as Storage OWNER STORAGE directed by OWNER. 1 Sludge Holding Tank 1 Wall Coordinate with 12" SLUDGE HOLDING TANK 1 1 Mount on structure as OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Sludge Holding Tank 2 Wall Coordinate with 12" SLUDGE HOLDING TANK 2 1 Mount on structure as OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Solids Building Wall Coordinate with 12" SOLIDS BUILDING 1 Mount on structure as OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Return Flow PS Wall Coordinate with 12" RETURN FLOW PS 1 Mount on structure as OWNER directed by OWNER. 1 Communications Wall Coordinate with 12" COMMUNICATIONS HOUSE 1 Mount on structure as House OWNER directed by OWNER. SIGNAGE 10 14 00 SUPPLEMENT -2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Sign Schedule Sign Lettering Size Mounting Height Sign Detail Other Number' Type2 Reference3 Width Height Color Location Method to Top Height Style Color Message Faces Requirements S-1 C 1014-002 20" 14" Yellow Hanging Chain 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black CAUTION 1 Equipment Starts Automatically S-2 C 1014-002 20" 14" Yellow Wall Bolts 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black CAUTION I Ear Protection Required S-1 C 1014-001 20" 14" White Door Screws or 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 Bolts High Voltage S-2 C 1014-001 20" 14" White Door Screws 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 Hazardous Area NO SMOKING Possible Toxic Fumes and Lack of Oxygen S-3 B 1014-001 20" 14" White Pipe Post Bolts 3'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 Hazardous Area Possible Toxic Fumes and Lack of Oxygen S-4 C 1014-001 20" 14" White Wall Bolts 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 No Smoking S-5 B 1014-001 20" 14" White Pipe Post Bolts 3'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 No Smoking S-6 C 1014-001 20" 14" White Wall Bolts 3'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 Provide at Nonpotable Water interior [A: W2] Not for Drinking [B: ] hose valves PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SIGNAGE 10 14 00 SUPPLEMENT -3 MARY'S CREEK WRF Sign Schedule Sign Lettering Size Mounting Height Sign Detail Other Number' Type2 Reference3 Width Height Color Location Method to Top Height Style Color Message Faces Requirements S-7 B 1014-001 20" 14" White Pipe Post Bolts 3'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 Provide at Nonpotable Water exterior Not for Drinking [A: W2] [B: I hose valves S-8 C 1014-001 20" 14" White Door Screws 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 CHLORINE S-9 F N/A As required White Tank Side Painted 5'-0" 3" min. Block Red *DANGER 1 *Put message on COMBUSTIBLE one line LIQUIDS S-10 B 1014-001 14" 10" White Fence Bolts 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 HIGH VOLTAGE S-114 C 1014-001 10" 7" White Door Screws 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 CONFINED SPACE AUTHORIZED EMPLOYEES ONLY S-12 A N/A As required White Wall Bolts 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black Sodium Bisulfite 1 Fill Station S-13 A N/A As required White Wall Bolts 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black *Polymer 1 *See format and Fill Station message in Article Specific Sign Messages S-14 A 1014-008 20" 14" White Wall Screws 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black NOTICE 1 Authorized Personnel Only S-15 A 1014-008 20" 14" White Wall Screws 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black NOTICE 1 This elevator is for freight only. Not for Passengers SIGNAGE 10 14 00 SUPPLEMENT -4 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Sign Schedule Sign Lettering Size Mounting Height Sign Detail Other Number' Type2 Reference3 Width Height Color Location Method to Top Height Style Color Message Faces Requirements S-16 B 1014-009 10" 7" White Door Screws 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Red FIRE DOOR 1 DO NOT OBSTRUCT S-17 A 1014-007 6" 7" White Wall Screws 5'-0" 3/8" min. Helvetica Black In case of fire 1 use stairway Do not use elevator S-18 B 1014-011 7" 10" White Door/Wall Screws/ 5-6" 2-1/2" Block Black NOT AN EXIT 1 Bolts S-19 D STD 30" 30" Red Wood Bolts 7'-6" 7" min. Block White STOP 1 min. S-20 D STD 24" 30" White Wood Post Bolts 3'-6" 7" min. Helvetica Black SPEED 1 LIMIT 25 S-22 D 1014-004 12" 18" Blue Pipe Bolts 5'-6" 1" min. Block White *HANDICAPPED 1 *With symbol PARKING above Post STATE PERMIT REQUIRED S-23 C 1014-003 20" 14" Orange Wall Bolts 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black WARNING 1 Corrosive Materials Wear Required Protection S-24 C 1014-003 20" 14" Orange Wall Bolts 5'-6" 1" min. Helvetica Black WARNING 1 Eye Protection Required in this Area S-25 G 1014-005 10" 14" White Wall Bolts 6'-0" 6" Block Red EXIT 1 S-26 G 1014-010 10" 14" White Wall Flag 6'-0" 6" Block Red - EXIT I Direction arrow points to left S-27 G 1014-010 10" 14" White Wall Bolts 6'-0" 6" Block Red EXIT - 1 Direction arrow points to right PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS SIGNAGE 10 14 00 SUPPLEMENT -5 MARY'S CREEK WRF Schedule Size Sign Detail Height Other Number' Type2 Reference3 Width Height Color Location Method to Top Height Style Color Message Faces Requirements S-28 G 1014-010 10" 14" White Wall Bracket 7'-6" 6" Block Red +— EXIT 2 Direction arrow min. points to left on EXIT one face and to right on other face 'Numbers refer to a particular sign type with a particular message. 2Letters refer to Sign Types specified in this section. 3Numbers refer to Design Details that show sign layout. 4Verify requirements for this sign with Regulations in state where SIGNAGE 10 14 00 SUPPLEMENT -6 is located. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 10 21 00 TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes stainless steel Toilet Compartment units as follows: 1. Urinal Screens: a. Wall hung. b. Floor anchored. c. Post supported. d. Overhead braced. 2. Toilet Enclosures: Floor and ceiling anchored. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Hardboard Association (AHA): A208. 1, Standard for Particleboard. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. b. Z 124.2, Plastic Shower Receptors and Shower Stalls. 3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. b. A591/A591M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated, for Light Coating Weight Applications. c. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. d. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. e. B221/B221M, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. f. C503, Specification for Marble Dimension Stone (Exterior). g. C615, Specification for Granite Dimension Stone. h. F593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. i. F594, Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 5. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 40 CFR 59, National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1021 00- 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF 6. Federal Specifications, Standards and Commercial Item Descriptions, (FS): A -A-60003, Partitions, Toilet, Complete. 7. Marble Institute of America (MIA). 8. National Building Granite Quarries Association (NBGQA). 9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): LD 3, High -Pressure Decorative Laminates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, elevations, material descriptions, dimensions, and attachments to other work. a. Show locations of cutouts for compartment -mounted grab bars. b. Show locations of reinforcements and attachments for compartment -mounted toilet accessories. c. Product Data: Manufacturer's detailed technical data for toilet compartments, urinal screens specified. Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. 3. Samples for Verification: a. Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on a 6 -inch by 6 -inch square sample of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. b. Stone: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required; not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square. Include two or more samples in each set showing full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in the completed Work. c. Doors: Corner sections, approximately 12 inches (300 mm) square, with door faces and edges finished with materials proposed for the Work. d. Hardware and Fittings: Full-size samples of each hardware and fitting item required. e. Stile Reinforcement: 12 -inch (300 -mm) long samples of aluminum splines. f. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard -size sample for each type and color of joint sealant required. B. Informational Submittals: Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. TOILET COMPARTMENTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 10 21 00 - 2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who has 10 years' experience with projects completed in compartment installations similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to this Project with a minimum of 10 years' experience in similar sized projects. C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearances and physical properties. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle metal and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage as a result of moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breakage, chipping, or warping. C. Stack or brace metal on edge on leveled and adequate A -frames in a manner that prevents undue stresses causing chipping, cracking, and breaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL UNITS A. Stainless Steel Units: Facing sheets and closures fabricated from ASTM A666, Type 302 stainless steel or Type 304, stainless steel sheet, leveled to stretcher -leveled flatness. 1. Stainless Steel Facing Sheet Thicknesses: Specified thicknesses as follows: a. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.0375 inch (0.95 mm). b. Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.050 inch (1.3 mm). c. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.0375 inch. d. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm). PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TOILET COMPARTMENTS APRIL 17, 2026 10 21 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF e. Integral -Flange, Wall -Hung Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm). f. Wedge -Shaped, Wall -Hung Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.0375 inch (0.95 mm). 2. Finish: No. 4 bright, directional polish on exposed faces. Protect exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material. Units to have continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edge closures. Exposed surfaces free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. Corners sealed by welding. Exposed welds are ground smooth. 1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb of resin -impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for pilasters. 2. Grab -Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. 4. Urinal -Screen Construction: Similar to panels, with integral full -height flanges for wall attachment, and maximum 1-1/4 inches thick. C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 302 or Type 304, not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) specified thickness and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware. D. Brackets (Fittings): Full -Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. E. Manufacturers: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Ampco. 3. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 4. Flush Metal Partition Corp. 5. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 6. Global Steel Products Corp. TOILET COMPARTMENTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 10 21 00 - 4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 7. Hadrian Inc. 8. Knickerbocker Partitions Corp. 9. Metpar Corp. 10. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Dowels: Provide 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) diameter dowels fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel, ASTM A276. B. Fittings: Cast stainless steel, angle type fittings, with 1 -3/4 -inch by 1 -3/4 -inch (44.5 -mm by 44.5 -mm) legs, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) long, and capable of supporting compartment components in configuration indicated. C. Stile Reinforcement: Continuous 1/4 -inch by 3/4 -inch (6.4 by 19 mm) extruded -aluminum spline complying with ASTM B221B221M in alloy and temper recommended by fabricator for use indicated and with bright clear anodized finish. D. Exposed Anchors and Fasteners: stainless steel fasteners with theft -resistant - type heads. Provide sex -type through bolts with theft -resistant spanner heads and threaded brass rods for attachments to stone. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Provide Type 304 stainless steel bolts complying with ASTM F593, nuts complying with ASTM F594, and washers and lock washers for connection to overhead support as indicated. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. 2. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment - mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. 3. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment -mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Metal -Faced Toilet Compartments and Screens: 1. Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material and provide continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edges. 2. Seal corners by welding or clips. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TOILET COMPARTMENTS APRIL 17, 2026 10 21 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Wall -Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated. D. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 -inch (610 -mm) wide in - swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36 -inch (914 -mm) wide out -swinging doors with a minimum 32 -inch (813 -mm) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self -closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. At compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible, provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber - tipped bumper; sized to prevent door from hitting compartment - mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumpers at out - swinging doors or entrance screen doors. 5. Door Pull: At out -swinging doors, manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Coordinate layout and installation of supports, inserts, and anchors built into other units of work for toilet compartment anchorage. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 2. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. TOILET COMPARTMENTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 102100-6 APRIL 17,2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 4. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holds for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Floor -Anchored Units: 1. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches (50 mm) into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. 3. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. C. Floor -and -Ceiling -Anchored Units: 1. Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level, plumb, and tighten. 2. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when doors are in closed position. D. Wall -Hung and Post -Supported Urinal Screens: 1. Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. 2. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102100-7 MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.04 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Separate packing boxes, pallets, steel strapping, and plastic wrapping into separate designated receptacles for recycling. B. Dispose of sealants, adhesives, and caulking in hazardous disposal containers and dispose in accordance with local regulatory requirements. END OF SECTION TOILET COMPARTMENTS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 10 21 00 - 8 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 701, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design grab bars, shower seats and attachments to resist forces as required by code designated in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Manufacturer's literature clearly indicating: 1) Engineer's identification mark, size, and description of components. 2) Base material with surface fmish inside and out. 3) Hardware and locks and attachment devices. 4) Description of rough -in framing. 5) Details of blocking and anchorage required. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Distributor's List: List of local distributors for supplies required for accessories installed. 2. Cleaning instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Flame Resistant Fabric: Passes when tested in accordance with NFPA 701, Test 1 or Test 2. B. Perform Work in accordance with State of Texas standard. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES JULY 23, 2026 102800-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials and products specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Bradley Corp. 3. Accessory Specialties, Inc. 4. Watrous, Inc. 2.02 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Furnish accessory items listed below, where indicated by mark or note on Drawings. Item Mark Bobrick Bradley Surf. Mounted Shelf, Dual Roll Paper Dispenser TPD-S No. B-2840 No. 5263 Surf. Mounted Dual Roll Toilet Paper Dispenser TPD-1 No. B-2740 No. 5241-50 Surf. Mounted Jumbo Roll Toilet Paper Dispenser TPD-2 No. B-2890 No. 5424 Surf. Mounted Dual Jumbo Roll Toilet Paper Dispenser TPD-3 No. B-2892 No. 5425 Deck Mounted Liquid Soap Dispenser SD -1 No. B-822 No. 6324-68 Wall Mounted Liquid Soap Dispenser SD -2 No. B-4112 No. 6542 Mirror, Size on Dwgs MIR No. B-290 No. 780 Tilt Mirror -Adjustable, Size on Dwgs MIR-T No. B-293 No.782 Mirror and Shelf, Size on Dwgs MIR-S No. B-292 No. 7805 Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser and Receptacle PTD-1 No. B-3944 No. 234 Surf. Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser PTD-2 No. B-262 No. 250-15 Semi -recessed Roll Paper Towel Dispenser, Lever Operation PTD-3 No. B-38616 No. 2484-10 Surf. Mounted Roll Paper Towel Dispenser, Push Bar Operation eration PTD-4 No. B-52860 No. 2482-11 Surf. Mounted Waste Receptacle WR- 1 No. B-275 No. 355 Surf. Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser and Receptacle PTD/R-1 No. B-3949 No. 235-11 Surf Mounted Roll Paper Towel Dispenser and Receptacle PTD/R-2 No. B-39619 No. 236-11 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 102800-2 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF Item Mark Bobrick Bradley Recessed Napkin Dispenser Free NV -1 B -3500C 401-40 Surf. Mounted Napkin Disposal ND No. B-270 No. 4781-15 Recessed Seat Cover Dispenser SCD-1 No. B-301 No. 584 Surf. Mounted Seat Cover dispenser SCD-2 No. B-221 No. 5831 Mop and Broom Holder (24") M&BH No. B-223 x 24 No. 9953 Robe Hook RH No. B-6727 No. 9124 Grab Bars (straight) (36") GB -1 No. B-6806-36 No. 812- 001-36 Grab Bars (straight) (42") GB -2 No. B-6806-42 No. 812- 001-42 Grab Bars (straight), 18" for Vertical GB -3 No. B-6806-18 No. 812 - Mounting 001-18 Grab Bars (straight), Length on Dwgs GB -4 No. B-6806 No. 812-001 Grab Bars (toilet, corner type) GB -5 No. B-68137 No. 812-059 Grab Bars (shower, corner type) GB -6 No. B-6861 No. 812-036 /037 Modified (1S"x30") Fold -Up Dressing Room Bench, BCH Model D-101; Access -Able Phenolic Top (48" W x 24" D) Designs, Inc. www.accessabledesigns.com Top Color: White Towel Bar (24") TB No. B -6737x24 No. 9054 Recessed Soap Dish and Bar SD/GB No. B-439/4390 No. 940/9402 Shower Curtain Rod SCR No. B-207 No. 9538 Flame Resistant and Antibacterial SC No. B-204-2/204-1 No. Shower Curtain 9537/9536 with Hooks Fold -Up Shower Seat (L-shaped) SHS No. B-518/517 No. 956/9561 Fold -Up Dressing Area Seat DRS No. B-5191 No. 9558 (rectangular shaped) Surf. Mounted Electric Hand Dryer, END No. B -Y 09 No. 2895-28 Sensor Activated (115v) Towel Pin TP No. B-6777 No. 9314 Recessed Medicine Cabinet MC No. B-397 No. 9662 Recessed Combination Unit SCD, CU -1 No. B-3474 No. 5922 TPD PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES JULY 23, 2026 102800-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 0 MARY'S CREEK WRF Item Mark Bobrick Bradley Recessed Combination Unit SCD, CU -2 No. B-3574 No. 5912 TPD, ND Surf. Mounted Combination Unit CU -3 No. B-3479 No. 5922-11 SCD, TPD Surf. Mounted Combination Unit CU -4 No. B-3579 No. 5912-11 SCD, TPD, ND Combination Unit SCD, TPD, CU -5 No. B-347 No. 592 Partition Mounted, Two Compartment Combination Unit SCD, TPD, ND, CU -6 No. B-357 No. 591 Partition Mounted, Two Compartment Combination Unit SCD, TPD, CU -7 No. B-3471 No. 5921 Partition Mounted, Two Compartment (Flush One Side for Grab Bar Installation) Combination Unit SCD, TPD, ND, CU -8 No. B-3571 No. 5911 Partition Mounted, Two Compartment (Flush One Side for Grab Bar Installation) B. C. D. PART 3 Finish: 1. Satin stainless steel. 2. Manufacturer's or brand name on face of units is not acceptable. Anchors: Furnish anchors, fasteners, or other devices necessary for a complete, secure installation. 1. Fasteners: Tamper -proof screws or bolts. Supplies: Furnish fill supplies, such as paper goods, soap, and napkins, as recommended by accessory manufacturer. EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate support framing and backing as necessary for proper installation of accessories. B. Coordinate the Work with placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 102800-4 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights and Locations: Locate where mark is shown on Drawings at height required by accessibility regulations. B. Follow manufacturer's instruction and recommendations. C. Install and securely anchor accessories in their proper locations, plumb and level, and without distortion. D. Remove protective masking and clean surfaces, leaving them free of soil and imperfections. E. Fill units with necessary supplies within 10 days before Substantial Completion. F. Deliver to Owner keys and devices required to fill and service units. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean and repair existing toilet accessories which remain or are to be reinstalled. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES JULY 23, 2026 102800-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Factory Mutual (FM). 2. Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. b. 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 4. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 6. UL: Fire Protection Equipment Directory. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 10. B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for purpose specified and indicated. C. Provide fire rated fire extinguisher cabinets classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for purpose specified and indicated. D. Provide key boxes as required by the applicable code or by the fire marshal or code official having jurisdiction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Fire Extinguishers: Manufacturer's product data for each item, including sizes, ratings, UL listings, or other certifications, and mounting information. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES MARCH 24, 2026 AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 10 44 00 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRY L C. Extinguisher Cabinets and Key Boxes: Indicate type of cabinet, cabinet physical dimensions, rough -in measurements for recessed and semi -recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, location, mounting methods and anchorage details, relationship of cabinet box and trim to surrounding construction, door type and hardware, trim style, panel style. Product Data: Extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: a. Special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. b. Cabinet location plan. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit test, refill or recharge schedules and recertification requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Texas. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products onsite. B. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures are capable of freezing extinguisher ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Manufacturers: 1. JL Industries. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 3. Nystrom Products Co. 4. Potter Roemer. B. General: I . Conform to NFPA 10 for fire extinguishers. 2. Furnish fire extinguishers and cabinets from one manufacturer. 3. UL listed, charged and ready for service. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT MARCH 24, 2026 104400-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Multipurpose Hand Extinguisher (F. Ext-1): 1. Tri-class dry chemical extinguishing agent. 2. Pressurized, red enameled steel shell cylinder. 3. Activated by top squeeze handle. 4. Agent propelled through hose or opening at top of unit. 5. For use on A, B, and C class fires. 6. Minimum UL Rating: 4A-60B:C, 10 -pound capacity. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Manufacturers: 1. J. L Industries. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 3. Modern Metal Products. B. Extinguisher Cabinet Type: 1. Semi -recessed. 2. Surface mounted. 3. Sized to accommodate accessories. C. Metal: Formed stainless steel; 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick base metal. D. Configuration: Semi -recessed or Surface type, sized to accommodate accessories. E. Trim Type: Returned to wall surface, with projection face. F. Door: 0.016 -inch (0.9 -mm) thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch with full glass access. G. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 -inch 3 -mm) thick tempered. H. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet and wall type. I. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles. J. Predrill for anchors. K. Hinge doors for 180 -degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Furnish nylon catch. L. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES MARCH 24, 2026 AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 104400-3 MARY'S CREEK WRY M. Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing. N. Finishing Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: No. 4 finish. O. Key Boxes: Select size and options according to authority having jurisdiction requirements. Other companies do make similar products. However, any system adopted by a Fire Department must be compatible from one installation to another. Only one master key will be carried on fire apparatus. This key must operate all lock boxes in the City. To maintain master key security, all companies in this business carefully guard master key codes. They will not release this information to any other manufacturer or supplier. These security concerns require that one supplier be selected for all installations in the City. Mounting height is also important and 6 feet 0 inch is recommended by Knox. However, AHJ should be consulted. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Graphic Identification: Provide graphic identification marking for each fire extinguisher type. OSHA approved pictorial markings to indicate the extinguisher uses and nonuses on a single label. B. Fasteners: Furnish necessary screws, bolts, brackets, and other fastenings of suitable type and size to secure items of fire and safety equipment in position. 1. Metal expansion shields for machine screws at concrete and masonry. 2. Interior: Rust -resistant. 3. Exterior: Stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify cabinets are correctly sized for fire extinguisher type. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated or directed and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, maximum 48 inches from finished floor to top of extinguisher handle. C. Secure cabinets and brackets rigidly to structure. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT MARCH 24, 2026 104400-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Provide adequate backing for mounting surfaces. E. Place extinguishers in cabinets. F. Position cabinet signage as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.03 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS A. Provide at locations shown or as directed by Engineer. B. Mount hangers securely in position, following manufacturer's recommendations. C. Top of Extinguisher: No more than 54 inches above floor. D. Install wall brackets, maximum 48 inches from finished floor to top of extinguisher handle. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES MARCH 24, 2026 AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 104400-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 10 51 00 LOCKERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Anchorage and bracing drawings and/or catalog information, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 2. Manufacturer's literature describing products proposed for use. 3. Color charts or samples illustrating colors available. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. Submit with Action Submittal for the same item. 2. Installation instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LOCKERS A. Type: Standard, single -tier single -door type made of cold -rolled sheet metal. 1. Locker sides, backs, tops, bottoms, and shelves; minimum 24 -gauge steel. 2. Doors and frames; minimum 16 -gauge steel. B. Size: 15 inches by 18 inches. C. Top: 20 -gauge sloping top. D. Bottom: 4 -inch high steel base. E. Doors: Standard, with louvers top and bottom. F. Recess Trim: Manufacturer's standard 18 -gauge recess trim. G. Filler Panels: Manufacturer's standard, 24 -gauge, to suit locker arrangement shown on Drawings. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 LOCKERS JULY 23, 2026 10 51 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY H. Hinges and Door Strikes: Manufacturer's standard continuous type. I. Locks: Built-in keylock furnish key for each locker. J. Shelves: One hat shelf with rolled front. K. Coat Hooks: Three single -prong wall hooks and one double -prong ceiling hook in each compartment. L. Hanging Rod: 5/8 -inch diameter galvanized steel rod in each compartment. M. Number Plates: Noncorrosive with black numerals, numbered consecutively beginning with one in each room. N. Finish: Baked -on enamel over bonding and rust -resisting phosphate undercoat. O. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's standard colors. P. Anchor Bolts: Minimum 1/2 -inch diameter (unless a larger minimum size is shown on Drawings) Type 316 stainless steel; total number and final size as required by equipment manufacturer and by Contractor's anchorage and bracing design per Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. Anchor bolts shall be as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Q. Manufacturers: 1. ASI Storage Solutions, Inc. Basis -of -Design Model: Traditional Collection. b. Configurations, as indicated. 1) Single -Tier. 2) Double -Tier. 3) Two Person -Z. 2. Lyon Workspace Products. 3. Penco Products, Inc. 4. Republic Storage Systems Company. 5. DeBourgh Mfg. Co. 2.02 LOCKER AND SHOWER BENCHES A. Tops: 0 1. Clear hardwood. 2. 9-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/4 inches thick by lengths shown on Drawings. 3. Manufacturer's standard plastic sealer finish. LOCKERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 105100-2 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Pedestals: 1. Steel. 2. Heavy duty tubes welded to top and bottom flanges. 3. 16-1/4 inches high, minimum. 4. Floor anchored. Anchor bolts minimum 1/2 -inch diameter (unless a larger minimum size is shown on Drawings) Type 316 stainless steel; total number and final size as required by equipment manufacturer and by Contractor's anchorage and bracing design per Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. Anchor bolts shall be as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 5. Spacing as recommended by manufacturer, but not to exceed 6 feet on center. 6. Finish and Color: Factory painted in color to match lockers. C. Manufacturers: 1. ASI Storage Solutions, Inc. 2. Lyon Workspace Products. 3. Penco Products, Inc. 4. Republic Storage Systems Company. 5. DeBourgh Mfg. Co. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCKER INSTALLATION A. Securely attach to wall, base, and to each other as recommended by manufacturer. Accurately place anchor bolts using templates furnished by equipment manufacturer and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. B. Align and level lockers with shims where necessary to compensate for irregularities in the base. C. Install trim, adjust doors and latches for proper operation, and leave lockers level, plumb, neat, rigid, and free from soil and imperfections. 3.02 LOCKER AND SHOWER BENCH INSTALLATION A. Attach pedestals to top with fasteners supplied by manufacturer and secure to floor with anchors recommended by manufacturer. Accurately place anchor bolts using templates furnished by equipment manufacturer and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 LOCKERS JULY 23, 2026 10 51 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 3.03 MOVABLE BENCH INSTALLATION A. Attach pedestals to top with fasteners supplied by manufacturer. B. Provide movable benches; locate as directed by Owner. END OF SECTION LOCKERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 105100-4 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 10 73 00 METAL AWNINGS AND CANOPIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal Awnings and Canopies of the following types: 1. Standard Canopy (LFS-FLA). 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel Framing. B. Section 05 41 00, Structural Metal Stud Framing. C. Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Typical installation methods. B. Verification Samples: Two representative units of each type, size, pattern and color. C. Shop Drawings: Include details of materials, construction and finish. Include relationship with adjacent construction. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with a minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience with projects of similar scope and complexity, and approved by manufacturer. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL AWNINGS AND CANOPIES MARCH 29, 2026 10 73 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Source Limitations: Provide each type of product from a single manufacturing source to ensure uniformity. D. Mock -Up: Construct a mock-up with actual materials in sufficient time for Architect's review and to not delay construction progress. Locate mock-up as acceptable to Architect and provide temporary foundations and support. 1. Intent of mock-up is to demonstrate quality of workmanship and visual appearance. 2. If mock-up is not acceptable, rebuild mock-up until satisfactory results are achieved. 3. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for comparison with completed work. 4. Do not alter or remove mock-up until work is completed or removal is authorized. 1.05 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a conference approximately two weeks before scheduled commencement of the Work. Attendees shall include Architect, Contractor and trades involved. Agenda shall include schedule, responsibilities, critical path items and approvals. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Aluminum frames are warranted against defects in workmanship for five (5) years from date of installation. METAL AWNINGS AND CANOPIES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 107300-2 MARCH29,2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Lawrence Fabric and Metal Structures Inc., which is located at 3509 Tree Court Industrial Blvd.; St. Louis, MO 63122; Phone: 636-861-0100; Email: salesklawrencefabric.com; Web: lawrencefabric.com Click Here for more information. B. Substitutions: 1. Not permitted. 2. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 2.02 METAL AWNINGS AND CANOPIES A. Performance and Design Requirements: 1. Standards Compliance: Comply with local building codes. B. Standard Canopy, Basis of Design: LFS-FLA Canopy; as manufactured by Lawrence Fabric and Metal Structures Inc. 1. Material: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T6. 2. Fabrication Method: Welded and mechanical fastened. 3. Fascia: G -style gutter fascia. a. Welded as one piece or in sections as required for width of canopy. b. Profile: 8 inches. c. Flat Face channel in. 4. Decking: Aluminum Interlocking Pan. a. Profile: 3x6 Inch. 5. Water Dispersal: Include Front scupper(s). 6. Support: 1.0 Inch Aluminum Rod. 7. Finishes: a. AAMA 2603 Compliant Two -Part Polyurethane Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: 1 -Year Warranty. 8. Integral Light Fixture included. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL AWNINGS AND CANOPIES MARCH 29,2026 107300-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed and prepared. B. Confirm dimensions and elevations. C. Verify that wall structure can support canopy loads. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, approved submittals, and in proper relationship with adjacent construction. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Coordinate field inspection in accordance with appropriate sections in Division 1, General Requirements. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION METAL AWNINGS AND CANOPIES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 107300-4 MARCH29,2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 10 81 13 ARCHITECTURAL BIRD CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes requirements for bird deterrent systems to deter birds from landing at locations indicated on Contract Drawings and identified as (BCD -1) (BCD -2) and (BCD -3). System types include: 1. Bird netting system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Indicate typical layout in plan and elevation including dimensions and anchoring provisions, type design and spacing for each substrate and condition for track. Show position of track to building edge conditions for viewing angle. b. Provide detail drawings of special accessory components not included in manufacturer's product data (net rings and net zippers). 2. Verification Samples: a. Bird Netting System: 1) 12 inch square sample of the netting. 3. Manufacturer's descriptive product data. 4. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. 5. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 6. Qualification statements for installers. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company completely familiar with installation of products similar to those required for this Contract. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ARCHITECTURAL BIRD CONTROL APRIL 17, 2026 10 8113 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and handle materials to avoid damage to products and injury to Installers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Humane post -and -wire bird deterrent system to deter birds from roosting at edges of facility and creating nuisance and potential health hazard. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Bird Netting (BCD -3): Basis of design Manufacturer: a. Nixalite K -Net HT Bird Netting System www.Nixalite.com. 2.03 BIRD NETTING A. Netting Material: Black, high density polyethylene (HDPE) that is abrasion, UV, flame and rot resistant. Netting to be water proof. Meets ISO 9001 2000 Quality Management Standards. 1. Construction: Knotted 3/4 inch (19 mm) square mesh netting. Netting comprised of 380 denier, 12 ply (4x3) strands with 75 pound (33.9kg) knotted breaking strength (KBS). Seamless full size mesh runs. a. Colors: Black. 2. Mesh size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) square, steam set knots. 3. Netting Sizes: a. Widths: 25 feet (7.6 m) and 50 feet (15.2 m). b. Lengths: 25 feet (7.6 m) and 50 feet (15.2 m) and 100 feet (30.4 m). 4. Thermal and Physical Properties: a. Softening point: 250 degrees F (122 degrees C). b. Melting point: 293 degrees F (145 degrees C). c. Flash point: 660 degrees F (349 degrees C). d. Remains flexible at very low temperatures. e. Specific gravity: 0.96 (it floats) - will not absorb water. f. Chemically inert. Resistant to acids and alkalis at room temperature. ARCHITECTURAL BIRD CONTROL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 10 8113 - 2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 5. Accessories: a. Net Zippers — for access to lighting fixtures, electrical panels, etc. behind netting installation: 1) Color: Black. 2) 3) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Standard Lengths: 2, 4, 6 or 8 feet. Heavy duty marine grade UV resistant zippers. Fasten to netting with net rings and ring tool. A. Verify that installation surfaces are ready to receive architectural bird control. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install architectural bird control in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Post and Wire System: 1. Attach bird wire posts to metal roof surfaces or to roof membrane with adhesive product approved by roofing manufacturer. 2. Install bird wire posts at spacing specified in manufacturer's installation instructions, for uniform appearance and without end -to -end gaps. 3. Install wire and tension springs as specified in manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Stainless Steel Spikes: 1. Attach base with spikes to surfaces with adhesive product approved by roofing manufacturer. 2. Follow the contours and angles closely; cut or break away to fit properly. 3. Space materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Bird Netting: 1. Install the bird netting hardware as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install perimeter and support hardware; attach bird netting to installed hardware; install access or additional support hardware as specified. 3. If necessary cut the netting to fit the area. If multiple pieces are needed, join the pieces together with the recommended seam fastening hardware. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ARCHITECTURAL BIRD CONTROL 10 8113 - 3 MARY'S CREEK WRY 4. Avoid contact with machinery, vehicles, extreme heat, tree branches, etc. Make necessary adjustments to keep netting a sufficient distance from these objects or conditions. 5. Finished installation to be taught, free of wrinkles, gaps and openings. E. Inspect fmished installations and make adjustments as necessary. END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL BIRD CONTROL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 10 8113 - 4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 10 90 00 IDENTIFICATION, STENCILING, AND TAGGING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and perform all work and services for all identifications, stenciling and tagging as shown on the drawings and as specified. B. Items include but are not necessarily limited to the following areas of work: 1. Paint and provide identification signs for all exposed piping, ductwork, and conduits in accordance with Schedule A at the end of this section. 2. Provide identification tags and stenciling for all equipment, valves, instrumentation, and electrical components, including existing equipment and valves. Specific valve and equipment tag information shall be furnished by the OWNER. C. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, all supplementary or miscellaneous items, including connections and mounting hardware, necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation shall be furnished and installed as part of this work. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit identification register acknowledging all designated or scheduled equipment, instruments, gauges, valves, HVAC equipment, mechanical and electrical equipment. All items on register shall be tagged. Numbering system will be as shown on P&ID drawings. B. Develop and submit full identification register acknowledging equipment, valves, instruments, mechanical equipment and electrical equipment which is not designated or scheduled in drawings and specifications. Provide identifications compatible but not conflicting with designated or scheduled equipment and related items. All items on register shall be tagged. C. Submit assurances that subcontractors and manufacturers have been advised of register requirements. D. Update identification register immediately prior to final acceptance of work. E. Pipe Markers and Safety Signs: 1. Submit for approval samples of each type of marker and sign specified. 2. Submit copies of manufacturer's technical brochure including color chart and list of standard signs. APRIL 6, 2026 IDENTIFICATION, STENCILING, AND TAGGING ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 10 90 00 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRF 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and valves including mechanical, process, electrical, and instrumentation are required to be identified. B. Unless otherwise specified, openings, accesses and related locations are required to be identified. C. Coordination, development, and initiation of identification, marking, and tagging systems and determination of separation of subcontractor's and manufacturer's corresponding responsibilities is the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. D. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. ANSI A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board of State Sanitary Engineers (Ten States Standards). Recommended Standards of Waste Treatment Works latest edition, Recommended Color Scheme for Piping. Three Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board of State Sanitary, 1968 Edition, Addendum No. 6, Painting of Water Works Piping for Public Water Supplies. 3. OSHA 1910.144, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. 4. SSPC Volume 2, System and Specifications, Surface Preparation Guide and Paint Application Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Seton Identification Products. 3. Or approved equal. B. General: I. Pipe marker and safety sign materials shall withstand normal washing as required to remove grease, oil, chemicals, etc., without showing discoloration, loss of gloss, staining or other damage. 2. Piping markers shall be formed from laminated plastic. All printing shall be sealed with a formed butyrate plastic film. Markers for piping up to 6 inch diameter shall be pre formed to completely wrap around the pipe requiring no adhesive. Markers for pipes over 6 inch diameter shall be performed to the contour of the pipe and attached with stainless steel spring fastener. 3. Each marker shall consist of at least one legend descriptive of the function of the pipe, as listed in Schedule A, and a directional arrow. IDENTIFICATION, STENCILING, AND TAGGING APRIL 6, 2026 109000-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF 4. The size of lettering and marker shall conform to ANSI A13.1. 5. Location of markers: a. Adjacent to each valve and "T" connection. b. At each branch and riser takeoff. c. At each pipe passage through a wall, floor and ceiling. d. On all horizontal and vertical pipe runs at 20 foot intervals. 6. Safety signs shall be 18 inches by 24 inches formed from semi -rigid butyrate or polyethylene. They shall be attached with 4 stainless steel screws or similar fastener for substrate. 2.02 COLORS AND FINISHES A. Color Schedule: Paint colors will be selected by the ENGINEER from the approved manufacturer's color chips. B. Color Coding: In general, all color coding of piping, ducts and equipment shall comply with applicable standards of ANSI A13.1 and OSHA 1910.144 and shall meet the TCEQ requirements of 30 TAC 217. C. Piping and Sign Color Code: Refer to Schedule A at end of section. 2.03 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS A. Tagging system and stenciling system shall be selected by the CONTRACTOR. Valve tags shall include identification number, process, valve type, direction to open and number of turns to open. B. Tagging of Equipment: 1. Yard Valves: Identify with brass marking plate (minimum 1/8 inch thick) with embedment for placement in concrete. 2. Yard Slide Gates: Provide stainless steel plates with black enamel filled embossed lettering. Provide minimum plate of 2 1/2 inches with minimum letter height of 2 inches. Attach to gate frames at visible location by stainless steel fasteners. 3. Process valves, mechanical valves, instrumentation, and mechanical and process equipment (interior/exterior): a. Provide minimum 2 1/2 inch stainless steel plate with black enamel filled lettering. b. Attach to valves by nylon strap or stainless steel nonremovable beaded chains or to equipment by stainless steel fasteners. c. Provide general color scheme of tagging for listed items with black letter and numbers on background round as follows: Instrumentation tags White Process valves and equipment tags Red Water valve tags Blue Mechanical valve and equipment tags s Green Electrical Equipment uipment Yellow APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER IDENTIFICATION, STENCILING, AND TAGGING 109000-3 MARYS CREEK WRF 4. Electrical Equipment: Observe requirements and provisions stated in Division 26 of these specifications. C. Identification of piping, process tanks, galleries, pits, chemical liquid or solid storage tanks and silos, storage vessels, air ducts and similar items. 1. Use Tagging Systems by W. H. Brady Company, as follows: a. Vinyl film cloth for interior non insulated piping systems (Category B 500). b. Thin film for insulated piping systems (Category B 350). c. All weather film for outdoor exposed piping (Category B 350). Provide flow arrows, banding tape, and numbering and lettering of same materials for corresponding applications. 2. Use stenciling systems in accordance with accepted practices. 3. Tagging and stenciling letter and number heights shall be: a. Minimum 1/2 inch for piping less than 1 inch diameter. b. Minimum 1 1/8 inches for piping 1 inch to 3 -inch diameter. c. Minimum 2 1/4 inches for piping greater than 3 inch diameter to 24 inch. d. Minimum 3 1/2 inches for piping greater than 24 inch diameter and all process tanks, galleries, pits, chemical, liquid, or solid storage tanks and silos, storage vessels, mechanical heat exchangers, ducts, blowers, and similar related items. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Protected printed surfaces and adjacent work and materials by suitable covering during progress of work. B. Insure hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, finished work and similar items are removed or protected. C. Paint or apply not less than one band on any length of pipe. Follow a clean- cut line around entire pipe. D. Install piping markers and safety signs only after all painting and finish work has been completed. This does not include temporary "wet paint" or construction safety signs. E. Provide arrows and identification stickers: 1. At 20' 0" maximum centers along continuous lines. 2. At changes in direction (route), valves, risers, joints, machinery, or equipment. 3. Where pipes, ducts pass through floor, wall, ceiling, cladding assemblies and the like obstruction on both sides of assembly. 4. Apply markers on both sides of pipe and where view is not obstructed. 5. Arrow markers must point away from pipe markers and in flow direction, if flow in both directions use double -headed arrow markers. IDENTIFICATION, STENCILING, AND TAGGING APRIL 6, 2026 109000-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF F. Identify piping and ductwork including interior or exterior, exposed or covered, insulated or not, including pipes and ducts in open or covered floor or ceiling ducts or spaces. G. Apply tapes in uniform manner and parallel to piping and ducts. 3.02 ATTACHMENTS A. Schedule A — Piping and Sign Color Code END OF SECTION APRIL 6, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER IDENTIFICATION, STENCILING, AND TAGGING 109000-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 1 ' "1 1 "1 i� IUh1I 1 11' I /' I I' WATER Raw Water Tan Black Yellow Air Conditioning Water Blue White Green Domestic Hot Water Blue w/ Black Yellow 6" Red Bands Plant Purple Black Green Water/Reclaimed/SW Potable Water Light Blue Black Green Effluent after Dark Green Black Green clarification AIR AND GAS Blower Air Green White Blue Chlorine Gas Yellow Yellow Black Compressed Air Light Green Yellow Black Light Green w/ Instrument Air Dark Green Bands Mixed Gas Red Black Yellow Natural Gas Red Black Yellow Propane Gas Red Black Yellow Sulfur Dioxide Lime Green w/ Black Yellow Yellow Bands Sludge Gas, HP Red Black Yellow Sludge Gas, LP Red Black Yellow Waste Gas Red Black Yellow Blower Lube White White Blue Grease White Black Green Foul (odorous) Air Beige Yellow Black Oxygen Gas N/A Green White Stainless steel Ozone w/ White Bands CHEMICALS Aluminum Sulfate Yellow w/ Black Yellow (Solution) Green Bands Aluminum Sulfate Yellow w/ Black Yellow (Liquid) Orange Bands Chlorine Li uified Yellow Black Yellow Chlorine Solution Yellow Black Yellow Ferric Chloride Light Brown Black Yellow w/ Red Bands IDENTIFICATION, STENCILING, AND TAGGING APRIL 6, 2026 109000-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARYS CREEK WRF Ferric Sulfate Brown w/ Yellow Bands Ferric Sulfide Yellow Black Yellow Ferrous Chloride Yellow Black Yellow Sodium Hypochiorite Yellow Black Yellow Sulphur Dioxide Lime Green w/ Yellow Bands Black Yellow Polymer White w/ Green Bands PROCESS Grit Brown Black Green Groundwater Drain Tan White Black Drain Green Black Green Scum Brown Brown Green Sewage Gray Black Green Sludge Brown Black Green Digester Tank Vent Brown Black Green Oxygenated Wastewater Grey White Green VENTS High and Low Temperature Yellow Black Yellow Colors listed above shall be similar to the following standard colors by Tnemec Company: Light Blue: 17BL "Horizon Blue" Blue: 59HT "Safety Blue" Red: 06SF "Safety Red" Gray: 33GR " Gray" Green: BS28 "Safety Green" Lime Green: 46GN "Limeade" Light Green 09SF "Spearmint/Safety Green" Tan: TRA Twine (Tan) (Tnemec has on file) Yellow: 02SF "Safety Yellow" White: OOWH "White" Purple: 13SF "Purple Mountain's Majesty" Brown: TRA Outside Equipment Brown (Tnemec has on file) Light Brown: 06BR "Amber Canyon" APRIL 6, 2026 IDENTIFICATION, STENCILING, AND TAGGING ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER 109000-7 MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK IDENTIFICATION, STENCILING, AND TAGGING APRIL 6, 2026 109000-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 1131 00 APPLIANCES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer's literature including specifications, operating and cleaning instructions, and color chart. Identify each unit with Engineer's item number. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Refrigerator, A 1: Refrigerator with top freezer, no frost, 14 cubic foot .ity, with ti, i�ke�li�-and e saving feature. ��i�-a�.}ternu� � , 1. Manufacturers anandProducts: a. Frigidaire; FPI-14TJ. b. General TBF 15DB I'1@Et�CzTr-z�zz� c. Whirlpool; EET 14 1PTI , B. Undercounter Refrigerator, A-2: Undercounter refrigerator (5.6 -cubic -foot minimum) with freezing compartment. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Subzero; 249R ubzero, Designer 24 -inch Undercounter 2450BG). b. Sears; 96802. C. Microwave Oven, A-5: Countertop model. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Whirlpool; REM -7000. b. General Electric; Jet 86Y. Z. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Time Co Clock; Monitor Style. b. Seth Thomas Manger; 12 Clock. 7 c. Cincinnati Electric Clocks; Stand Round. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 APPLIANCES JULY 23, 2026 11 31 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard white baked enamel finish unless A otherwise indicated. / 7 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Following manufacturers' instructions and recommendations, install and connect appliances in the proper location and leave them ready for use. B. Locate clock at every clock outlet shown on Electrical Drawings. C. Remove all protective maskings and clean surfaces, leaving them free of soil and imperfections. END OF SECTION APPLIANCES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 113100-2 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 12 35 53.13 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A208.1, Particleboard, Mat -Formed Wood. b. Z358.1, Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment. 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 110, Method of Testing Performance of Laboratory Fume Hoods. 3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. A507, Standard Specification for Drawing Alloy Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot -Rolled and Cold -Rolled. c. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. d. C 1048, Standard Specification for Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass. e. D522, Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. f. D1193, Standard Test for Reagent Water. 5. Federal Specification (FS): QQ-S-698, Steel, Sheet and Strip, Low Carbon. 6. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): a. LD 3, High -Pressure Decorative Laminates (HPDL). b. WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids. b. 45, Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals. c. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 8. Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (SEFA): a. SEFA 1, Recommended Practices For Laboratory Fume Hoods. b. SEFA 2, Recommended Practices For Installations. c. SEFA 8, Recommended Practices For Laboratory Grade Casework. 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): General Industry Standards, Section 1910.106. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK MARCH 24, 2026 12 35 53.13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Completely describe and illustrate design features, materials, fabrication, and casework layout including rough -in details for plumbing, electrical, and ventilation connections. a. Key units to Contract Documentation designations. b. Provide details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions. c. Show required field measurements beyond manufacturer's control. d. Establish and maintain applicable rough -in and field dimensions. e. Descriptive literature and manufacturer's specifications of casework, hardware, service fixtures, and specialty items. f. Brochures, catalogs, installation instructions, and operation and maintenance manuals. g. Clearly mark each proposed item in manufacturer's literature with Contract Document designation. h. Coordinate Shop Drawings with other trades. i. Drawings that show layout of units, sinks, and service fixtures, features of the design, rough -in details for plumbing, electrical and ventilation connections, and installation details. j. Listing of acids, solvents, bases and salts tested, and an independent testing laboratory report certifying that the exterior fmish of laboratory casework is capable of withstanding the following specified tests, with no change, or slight change of gloss, slight discoloration or slight temporary softening of film with no loss of adhesion and no loss of film protection. 2. Samples: a. Countertops. b. Service Fittings: If requested by Engineer. c. Color samples of finishes on metal to match manufacturer's standard colors. d. Sample unit, complete with hardware including locks, accessories, and top for Owner's inspection and 1 month's use. Unit, except top, may be used on Project. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads provided in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. Submit with Action Submittal for the same item. METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 35 53.13 - 2 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Fume hood performance test results. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance that applied finish complies with the specified chemical and physical resistance requirements. 4. Qualification of manufacturer and installation lead person. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Successful completion of comparable work. 2. Specialization in the design and manufacture of metal scientific laboratory casework. 3. Operation of adequate size factory devoted to manufacture of metal scientific laboratory casework. 4. Exclusion of broker and unauthorized representatives. 5. Minimum 5 years of experience in manufacture of quality and type of laboratory casework and furnishing specified. B. Standards: 1. Conform to the method of testing and resulting performance requirements as set forth in the Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association Recommended Practice 8, Recommended Practices For Laboratory Grade Casework. 2. Fume Hoods: Conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 110. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Deliver fume hoods only after wet operations in building are completed. C. Store casework inside in dry and well -ventilated area protected from weather. D. Coordinate delivery and installation with Engineer. Owner may wish to inspect items in Contractor's presence to verify condition. E. Protect fmished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK MARCH 24, 2026 12 35 53.13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Duralab Equipment Corp., Parlin, NJ. 2. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation, Statesville, NC. 3. Lab Fabricators Co., Cleveland, OH. 4. VWR International, LLC, Wyane, PA. 5. Institutional Casework, Inc., Paris, TN. 6. Mott Manufacturing, Brantford, ON, Canada. 7. Laboratory Design and Supply, Buford, GA. B. No "or -equal" or substitute products will be considered. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: 1. Low carbon, cold -rolled, quality grade, No. 1 finish sheet steel conforming to FS QQ-S-698. Minimum thickness as follows: U.S. Standard Inch Hinge reinforcement, tapping strips, 14 0.0747 gussets, drawer runners, sink supports Leveling and corner gussets 11 0.1196 Cabinet top rail, hanging brackets, 16 0.0598 frame, and base Outer door pan and slide support, cross 18 0.0478 rails, cabinet fronts, scribe strips, and fillers Shelves under 36 inches, drawers, 20 0.0359 inner door panels, other steel items Shelves over 36 inches 18 0.0478 B. Glass: Clear tempered float glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, glazing quality, 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum thickness. METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 35 53.13 -4 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Hardware and Accessories: 1. Cabinet Locks (CLK): a. Pin tumbler type with dull chrome finish (626). b. Key locks alike. c. Manufactures and Products: 1) Sargent & Co.; Model No 16554 MKD. 2) Schlage; Model No. CL100PB. 3) Olympus Lock, Inc., Model No. 700. 2. Hinges: Concealed type, minimum 120 -degree opening with spring closer. 3. Pulls: Manufacturer's standard external in material selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standards finishes. 4. Drawer Slides: a. Metal designed to mate with drawer slides in cabinets. b. Provide smooth sliding action. c. Load Support on Extended Drawer: 200 pounds in file drawers, 75 pounds in drawers 6 inches and less in depth, and 100 pounds in other drawers. D. Accessories: Furnish manufacturer's standard label holder, catches, shelf grips, grommets, waste chutes, and all other exposed hardware in satin chrome finish. E. Furnish, and all other accessories and trim required to complete the installation in a secure and rigid manner. F. Fasteners: 1. Screws used to attach exterior structural members shall be sheet metal type, zinc -plated. 2. Interior fastening devices shall be truss head stainless steel screws. G. Countertops: 1. Epoxy Resin: a. Molded, modified, solid epoxy resin. b. Formulated to produce smooth, nonabsorbent, chemical-, heat-, and shock -resistant surface. c. Homogeneous in color and texture. d. Thickness: Minimum 1 inch. e. Drip groove under front edge. f. Integral two-piece glued backsplash for full length of adjoining walls. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK MARCH 24, 2026 12 35 53.13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY g. h. Color: Black or dark gray. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Durcon; Durcon Resin. 2) Prime Industries, Inc.; Prime -Resin. H. Backsplashes, Backsplash Returns, Splash Curbs (SCB), Reagent Shelves, and Reagent Shelf Supports: Same material as adjacent countertop. I. Drain Racks (DRK): Polypropylene pegs on epoxy resin countertop material in sizes shown on Drawings and Drain Rack Detail. 2.03 FUME HOOD A. Description: 1. 8 -foot automatic bypass air type fume hood. 2. Size: 96 inches long by 37.7 inches deep by 59 inches high exterior dimensions. 3. No part of foil or superstructure to extend more than 3-1/4 inches beyond edge of countertop into aisle space. 4. Fire- and chemical -resistant finish inside and out. 5. Construction: Flame -resistant molded fiberglass reinforced polyester resin interior and steel exterior. 6. Two remote service fixtures indexed and located where shown on Drawings. 7. Two ground fault circuit interrupt (GFCI) electrical duplex receptacle(s) located where shown on Drawings. 8. Two postless, pulldown, safety glass sashes. 9. Matching U.S. Standard 18 -gauge, ASTM A507, mild steel filler panels (FPL) to close openings between fume hood and wall. 10. Epoxy resin dish molded countertop surface to contain spills. 11. Cup Sinks: Locate where shown on Drawings with panel vacuum breaker cold water fixture with serrated nozzle end discharging into cup sink. 12. Acid storage Base cabinets provided by same manufacturer as fume hood and designed to be integrated with fume hood model. Capable of supporting minimum of 800 pounds. 13. Operation Mode: Conventional automatic bypass with bypass air varying with sash height. 14. Fixed, nonadjustable baffle. 15. Removable front and side panels, and front access panels, for access to plumbing and electrical connections. METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 35 53.13 - 6 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 16. Face Velocity: Design for 100 fpm with sash opening at 18 inches high (1,200 cfm at 0.20 -inch water column external static pressure) from remotely located motor/blower. 17. Exhaust Duct Connection: 12.8 -inch inside diameter. 18. Electronic sensor, digital face velocity monitor (FVM) with audible and visible alarm for low flow conditions, and external alarm functions, flush mounted on face rail as shown on Drawings. 19. High efficiency, instant start T8 fluorescent lighting located outside hood interior and sealed behind 1/4 -inch -thick safety glass vapor proof assembly with external access. 20. 120 Volt, 20 Amp: Connect light, light switch, receptacles, and FVM in accordance with local codes. 21. Color: Selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Manufacturer and Product: Labconco; Model No. 110810002 or Kewaunee (design airflow cfm is based on Kewaunee Model) Add model numbers for base cabinet, work surface, and cup sinks as needed. 2.04 CANOPY HOODS A. Construction: 1. U.S. Standard 18 -gauge ASTM A666, Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Fabricate in length and width shown on Drawings, according to Canopy Hood Detail. 3. Continuous drip gutters with condensate drain to nipple for 1/4 -inch inside diameter plastic tubing to cup sink. 4. Interior baffle with single slot around bottom periphery for 100 fpm minimum slot face velocity from remotely located motor/blower. 5. Fluorescent Light Fixtures (FLT): a. Solid metal front with prismatic lay -in diffuser. b. Exterior Dimensions: 42-1/2 inches long by 5 inches wide by 1-1/8 inches deep. c. Mount two end -to -end on baffle bottom. d. Lamps: Two 13 -watt T5 tubes each FLT. e. 120 -volt, wall -mounted FLT switch. f. Manufacturer and Product: Phillips; Model No. Solid Front Little Inch SFHP-213. g. Finish and Color: White enamel. 6. Chemical -resistant (epoxy coat) finish inside and outside. 7. Color: As shown in Interior Finish Schedule. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK MARCH 24, 2026 12 35 53.13 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 2.05 LABORATORY EPDXY RESIN SINK LSK-1 A. Description: 1. Single Compartment: One-piece, molded epoxy resin with coved corners and corner outlet. 2. Size: 21-1/2 inches long by 15-1/2 inches wide by 11 inches deep interior dimensions. 3. Epoxy resin sink drain outlet complete with removable strainer, stopper, and 1 -1/2 -inch tailpiece. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Durcon; Model No. D45. 2. Prime Industries; Model No. P-45. 2.06 LABORATORY CUP SINK LSK-2 A. Description: 1. Molded Epoxy or Modified Resin: Oval shape. 2. Size: 6 inches long by 3 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep inside dimensions. 3. 1 -1/2 -inch tailpiece with removable strainer. 4. Flush mounted in epoxy resin countertop. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Durcon; Model No. CS4R. 2. Prime Industries; Model No. PCS4R. 2.07 EYE/BODY WASH EWH-1 A. Description: 1. Handheld, countertop -mounted unit. 2. Capable of flushing both eyes simultaneously. 3. 6 -foot hose and 1/2 -inch connectors. 4. White enamel epoxy coating applied by manufacturer's electrostatic powder coating process, except hose. 5. Deck mounting bracket and hose guide bracket. 6. Squeeze type, stay -open, lever handle valve. 7. Angle -mounted stainless steel head (not flat) for continuous use without hands. 8. Magnetically operated proximity switch. 9. Universal emergency sign. METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 35 53.13 - 8 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Peakman; Model No. SE -927. 2. Haws; Model No. 8904. 3. Guardian; Model No. G5022. 4. WaterSaver; Model No. EW 1041. 2.08 SAFETY SHOWER SSR-1 A. Description: 1. Ceiling -mounted unit with 10 -inch diameter deluge showerhead. 2. Corrosion -resisting stainless steel, including exposed -to -view piping. 3. Stay -open ball valve with rigid pull down to open, push up to close, triangular handle pull rod. 4. Nipple and fitting. 5. Line size service valve upstream of unit's valve. 6. Supply: 1 inch. 7. Configure and mount in accordance with ANSI Z358.1 with showerhead bottom installed 82 inches to 96 inches above floor. 8. Alarm: Magnetically operated proximity switch. 9. Universal emergency sign. 10. Manufacturers and Products: a. Haws; Model No. 8169. b. Speakman; Model No. SE -220 -SS. c. WaterSaver; Model No. E5658. d. Guardian; Model No. G1658. B. Safety Shower Tester Description: 1. Portable stainless steel support ring to encircle safety showerhead. 2. Funnel shaped, heavy-duty, waterproof fabric to drain water column to drain or test drum. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Haws; Model No. 9010 and 9009. b. Guardian; Model No. AP250-005. 2.09 LABORATORY SERVICE FIXTURES A. General: Protect chrome plumbing service fixtures with manufacturer's standard epoxy enamel coating applied by manufacturer's electrostatic powder coating process. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK MARCH 24, 2026 12 35 53.13 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY B. Deck -Mounted Mixing Faucet LP -1: 1. Swing gooseneck with 6 -inch spread, vacuum breaker, and removable aerator. 2. Index for hot and cold water. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Chicago Faucets; Model No. 930-CP. b. WaterSaver Faucet Co.; Model No. L412VB. C. Deck -Mounted Gooseneck Faucet LP -2: 1. Rigid gooseneck, vacuum breaker, and removable serrated nozzle. 2. Faucet handle position(s) as shown on Drawings. 3. Index for cold water. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Chicago Faucets; Model No. 928-CP. b. WaterSaver Faucet Co.; Model No. L61 1VB. D. Single Pedestal Vacuum Valve LP -3: 1. Stainless steel needle point valve rated 125 psi maximum. 2. Supply nipple and locknut. 3. Index for vacuum. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Chicago Faucets; Model No. 980-937CH. b. WaterSaver Faucet Co.; Model No. L2880-131WSA. E. Multioutlet Assembly, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Protected LE -1: 1. Two -circuit with adjacent outlets on alternated circuits. 2. Three -wire grounding receptacles configured NEMA WD 1 Type 5-20R on 12 -inch centers. 3. Five -Wire: Two-phase conductors, two neutrals, and one common ground. 4. Size: 1-9/32 inches wide by 3/4 inch deep by lengths shown on Drawings. 5. Finish and Color of Raceway and Alternate Receptacles: Selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Manufacturer and Product: Legrand; Plugmold 2000. 2.10 FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT A. First Aid Kit, FAK. B. Lab Fire Extinguisher, LFE. METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 35 53.13 - 10 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Paper Towel Dispenser, PTD. D. Safety Eyewear Cabinet, SEC. E. Spill Kit, SKT. 2.11 CASEWORK FABRICATION A. General: 1. Complete assembly and finish work at point of manufacture. Perform unit assembly on precision jigs, to provide units which are square, fully reinforced with angles, gussets, and channels, integrally framed and welded to form a dirt and vermin retardant enclosure. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for heavy sink support. 2. Fabricate units on precision dies to provide field interchangeability of drawers, hinged doors, and similar pieces. 3. Casework shall have uniform clearance around doors and drawers. 4. Each unit shall have a completely welded shell assembly and not require additional parts such as applied panels at ends, backs, or bottoms. All cases shall be rigid and self-supporting for use interchangeably in a group of cases or for freestanding single unit use. 5. All units shall be of flush front construction, including doors and drawers, with intersection of vertical and horizontal case members, such as end panels, top rails, bottoms, and vertical posts in same plane or with integral overlapping tabs across front of top and bottom. End panels and back shall be formed of one-piece, in a wraparound design. Exterior corners shall be spot and arc welded with heavy backup reinforcement at exterior corners. All face joints shall be arc welded and ground smooth to provide a continuous flat plane. B. Furnish manufacturer's standard modular units conforming as closely as possible to dimensions and configurations shown on Drawings, or specially made casework units where standard sized units do not conform to dimensions and configurations shown on Drawings. C. Flush Doors: Outer pan and inner pan formed and telescoped into box formation, with channel reinforcements full height on center of each pan. Fill doors solid with fire-resistant, sound -deadening material. Front surfaces of all doors, drawers, and panels shall be flush with cabinet front, and shall not overlap case ends or top and bottom rails. D. Glazed Doors: Hollow metal stiles and rails of similar construction as flush doors, with glass held in resilient channel or gasket material. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK MARCH 24, 2026 12 35 53.13 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY E. Hinged Doors: Case openings shall be rabbeted on all four sides for hinged doors and on two sides for sliding doors, to provide a dust -resistant case. Hinges shall be removable and shall be fastened to door and case with screws mounting through door and case to 14 -gauge inner reinforcements. Hinges welded to door or to case are not acceptable. Door closing action to be against rubber bumpers. Doors up to 36 inches high to have two hinges, and doors over 36 inches to have three hinges. All corners of outer door panel to welded and ground smooth. F. Drawers: Drawer bodies shall be of one-piece construction including the bottom, two sides, back and inner front. Interior bottom shall be coved on all four sides for easy cleaning. G. Adjustable Shelves: All removable shelves shall be full depth adjustable on 1/2 -inch centers. Shelves shall have four sides formed down 3/4 inch and front and back return formed 1/2 inch. Shelves over 36 inches long shall have welded full width hat channel reinforcement. H. Drawer Guides: 1. Drawer suspension shall be heavy-duty with radiused raceways for self - centering of drawer. Drawer run with radiused raceways to be welded to drawer body. Case channel with radiused raceways to be fastened to case with screws. 2. Drawers shall have rounded nylon tired, ball bearing rollers which fit raceways of drawer suspension. Drawers shall lock open when in full open position and shall have self -closing feature such that they will roll into case when opened a nominal 5 inches. Drawers shall be removable without the use of tools. Drawers shall be furnished with rubber bumpers for cushioned closing. Friction centering devices not acceptable. I. Filler Panels: Furnish where required for closing space between cabinets and walls and ceilings, of same material and finish as cabinets. J. Utility Space: Furnish space, cutouts, and holes for pipes, conduits, and fittings in cabinet bodies to accommodate services and their support strut assemblies. K. Toe Space: Integral toe space on base cabinets shall be 4 inches high by 3 inches deep. Base corners shall have die -formed gussets of 11 -gauge steel. Leveling screw for each corner shall be 3/8 -inch diameter and have integral bottom flange having an area not less than 0.56 square inch to provide adequate support and minimize damage to floor. Adjustment of height to be made through openings in front of the toe space. METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 35 53.13 - 12 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF L. Table Legs: Not less than 2 inches square electrically welded tubing. Furnish leg stretchers where required for strength and rigidity, welded or bolted to legs and cross -stretchers. Securely bolt legs to table aprons. Furnish leveling device recessed in bottom of each leg. M. Bottom: All base unit and case bottoms shall be one-piece construction, fixed, and shall have front edge formed into rabbet design for swinging doors or drawers, and front flange shall be formed into lower front rail. Sliding door case bottom shall be of same construction but shall be flush design. Wall, upper, and tall case bottom shall be pan type with ends and back formed up for easy cleaning. Holes or capped punchouts for leveling screw access are not acceptable. N. Top Rail: Top rails on base units shall interlock with and overlap end panels for strength but shall be flush at top of unit. Top rail to have full width rabbet for swinging doors and drawers. O. Base Cabinet With Double Doors: Three-foot and 4 -foot base cabinets with double swinging doors shall provide full access to cupboard interior. Vertical center support posts are not acceptable. P. Hinges: Shall be institutional type, 2-1/2 inches chrome -plated steel, 0.083 -inch thick, wraparound, attached with sheet metal screws. Q. Pulls: Shall be extruded aluminum with clear anodized finish, mounted on 4 -1/4 -inch centers for swinging doors and drawers. Semi -recessed stainless steel flush design pull on solid and framed sliding doors. R. Door Catches: 1. Shall be adjustable, spring actuated, nylon roller type. Magnetic catches or catches permitting rebound opening, not acceptable. 2. Elbow catch shall be spring type with strike. S. Drawer Stops: Designed to permit easy removal and yet prevent inadvertent drawer removal. Furnish on all drawers, located on the inside. T. Label Holders: Shall be 1 -inch by 2 -inch steel, satin nickel finish, pinned in -place. Stick -on holders not acceptable. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK MARCH 24, 2026 12 35 53.13 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY U. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Shall be 13 -gauge angle, 1/2 -inch wide, with 1/4 -inch diameter by 3/8 -inch -long pin, bright zinc -plated, and all edges rounded. V. Countertops: 1. Tops, Box Curbs, Splash Rim: Furnish smooth, clean, exposed tops and edges, in uniform plane free of defects. Make exposed edges and corners uniformly rounded. Furnish tops in maximum practicable lengths. 2.12 FINISH A. After the units have been completely welded together and before finishing, they shall be given a prepaint treatment to provide excellent adhesion of the finish system to the metal and to aid in the prevention of corrosion. Physical and chemical cleaning of the metal shall be accomplished by washing with a hot alkaline cleaner followed by a spray treatment with a complex metallic phosphate solution to provide a uniform fine-grained crystalline phosphate surface that shall provide both an excellent bond for the finish and increased protection against humidity and corrosion. B. Immediately following the phosphate treatment, the surfaces shall be dried and then all surfaces shall be given a durable corrosion -resistant synthetic resin which shall be baked at the required high temperature to give optimum coating properties. The complete fmish system shall resist staining by showing no visible effect on the finish film other than a slight change of gloss when subjected to reagents as listed below. Reagent Test: Apply five drops of each reagent to a 12 -inch by 38 -inch vertical test panel which has 50 rectangular sections for the reagents listed. Do not cover. After a 2 -hour time period has elapsed, clean panel with detergent and water, then rinse and wipe dry. Evaluate. a. Acids: 1) 37 percent Hydrochloric Acid. 2) 20 percent Hydrochloric Acid. 3) 10 percent Hydrochloric Acid. 4) 77 percent Sulfuric Acid. 5) 33 percent Sulfuric Acid. 6) 30 percent Nitric Acid. 7) 10 percent Nitric Acid. 8) 85 percent Phosphoric Acid. METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 35 53.13 - 14 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 9) 25 percent Phosphoric Acid. 10) 98 percent Acetic Acid. 11) 50 percent Acetic Acid. 12) 90 percent Formic Acid. 13) 48 percent Hydrofluoric Acid. 14) 60 percent Chromic Acid. b. Solvents: 1) Ethyl Alcohol. 2) Butyl Alcohol. 3) Methyl Alcohol. 4) Ethyl Acetate. 5) Amyl Acetate. 6) Ethyl Ether. 7) Methyl Ethyl Ketone. 8) Toluene. 9) Acetone. 10) Benzene. 11) Carbon Tetrachloride. 12) Chloroform. 13) Di Methyl Formamide. 14) Formaldehyde. 15) Gasoline. 16) Naphthalene. 17) Trichloroethylene. 18) Xylene. c. Bases and Salts: 1) 40 percent Sodium Hydroxide. 2) 10 percent Sodium Hydroxide. 3) 28 percent Ammonium Hydroxide. 4) Saturated Zinc Chloride. 5) Saturated Sodium Sulfide. 2. Moisture Resistance: No visible effect when finish surface exposed to the following: a. Hot water at a temperature of 190 degrees F (91 degrees C) to 205 degrees F (96 degrees C), trickled down surface at 45 -degree angle for 5 minutes. b. Constant moisture using a 2 -inch by 3 -inch by 1 -inch cellulose sponge, soaked with water, in contact with surface for 100 hours. 3. Cold Crack: No effect when subjected to 10 cycles of temperature change from 20 degrees F (14 degrees C) for 60 minutes to 125 degrees F (52 degrees C) for 60 minutes. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK MARCH 24, 2026 12 35 53.13 - 15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 4. Adhesion: Finish shall withstand chipping in accordance with the following procedure. Using a razor blade on a finish test panel, score 11 parallel lines 1/16 -inch apart in two sets 90 degrees apart, to provide 100 segments 1/16 inch by 1/16 inch in size. Cuts shall be deep enough to go completely through the fmish, but with minimum penetration of the substrate. Brush away particles with a soft brush. 95 squares shall maintain their finish. 5. Bend: Finish shall withstand a 180 -degree bend over a 3/8 -inch diameter mandrel without chipping or flaking using a Gardner Conical Mandrel No. 1620 or equivalent, conforming to ASTM D522 procedure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Make field measurements of items or conditions affecting casework, equipment, and furnishings. B. Examine all grounds and supports of casework for adequate anchorage, free of foreign material, moisture, and unevenness that would prevent quality installation of casework. C. Verify that ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in proper location. D. Identify and correct defects before proceeding with installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association Recommended Practice (SEFA 2). The Contractor shall be responsible for measurements and accurate fitting of all work. Coordinate installation of, and cut all openings for, mechanical, electrical, and other items that penetrate casework surfaces and tops. 2. Provide backing plates and mounting channels for all work. Backing and reinforcement in walls, floors, and ceilings where required for support or attachment of laboratory equipment shall be coordinated. Nonspecial backing and reinforcing shall be provided and installed where necessary. Special backing and reinforcing and installation direction shall be provided with metal casework when required. METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 35 53.13 - 16 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required, using concealed shims. 4. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, scribe and apply filler panels for accurate fit with fasteners concealed where practicable. Filler panels shall not exceed 6 -inch width, except where shown on Drawings. 5. Install all laboratory fume hoods at locations indicated on Drawings, in accordance with approved shop drawings and schedules and according to manufacturer's recommendation. Doors, drawers, shelves, and all other operating devices shall work properly and smoothly. 6. Provide all openings and do all drilling of laboratory furniture necessary for the installation of sinks, cup sinks, service fixtures, electrical service fixtures, conduit fittings, and ducts. 7. Fasten into integral assemblies by bolting through end uprights so that assemblies can be relocated at any subsequent time. 8. Except where noted, install in new and ready -to -use condition. B. Base Cabinets: 1. Set cabinets straight, plumb, and level. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten each individual cabinet to floor at toe space, with fasteners spaced 24 inches O.C. Bolt continuous cabinets together. Secure individual cabinets with not less than two fasteners into floor, where they do not adjoin other cabinets. 2. Install matching knee space panels, filler, and scribe panels where shown or required for a complete and finished installation. 3. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. C. Wall Cabinets: 1. Securely fasten to solid supporting material, not plaster, lath, or wallboard. Anchor, adjust, and align wall cabinets as specified for base cabinets. 2. Reinforcement of stud walls to support wall -mounted cabinets will be done during wall erection by trade involved, but responsibility for accurate location and sizing of reinforcement is part of this work. 3. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK MARCH 24, 2026 12 35 53.13 - 17 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Countertops: 1. Countertops shall be installed level to within 1/16 inch in 10 feet and in the largest possible increments. 2. Joints in work tops shall be made with cement containing the same color and chemical -resistant characteristics as the top material. 3. Install service fittings where indicated, following manufacturer's directions. 4. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent any deflection. Provide flush hairline joints in top units using clamping devices. 5. After installation, carefully dress joints smooth, remove any surface scratches, clean and polish entire surface. 6. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical service fixtures. 7. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of top, curb, and splash with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Use chemical -resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer. E. Laboratory Sinks and Service Fixtures: 1. Install sinks and service fixtures in countertops and cases where shown on Drawings and as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Take care to avoid scratched and other damage to cases and countertops. 3. Install ready for connection of services. F. Accessories: Install in a precise manner in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Turn screws to a flat seat; do not drive. 3.03 FUME HOOD TESTING A. Test installed fume hoods for flow visualization, both local and large -volume challenges, and face velocity in conformance with test methods of current ASHRAE 110 and resulting instantaneous and average performance rating of 4 AI 0.1 (controls or limits loss of containment to less than 0.1 part per million "as installed" at release rate of 4 liters of sulfur hexafluoride per minute over the testing period) with face velocity of 100 fpm. B. Conduct testing after HVAC balancing as required by Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC, has been completed. C. Replace fume hood for failure to meet flow visualization challenges, to maintain average face velocity within 100 plus or minus 20 fpm, or to attain individual face velocity readings within plus or minus 10 fpm of the average. METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 35 53.13 - 18 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. General: 1. On completion of installation, touch up all marred or abraded finished surfaces. 2. Wipe down surfaces to remove fingerprints and markings and leave in clean condition. B. Moving Parts: Carefully check and adjust moving parts to ensure smooth, near -silent, and accurate operation with one hand and with uniform contact of rubber bumpers; ensure counterbalances on fume hoods operate without interference. Adjust moving parts to operate freely without excessive bind. C. Remove protective maskings. D. Clean Surfaces: Clean soiled surfaces and leave Work in clean and finished condition. E. Inspect, adjust, clean, and test service fixtures to assure intended operation. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK MARCH 24, 2026 12 35 53.13 - 19 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 12 4816 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirement Specifications, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Recessed floor grilles and frames. B. Related Requirements: Section 12 48 13, Entrance Floor Mats and Frames for flexible floor mats and frames. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive floor grilles and frames. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for entrance floor grilles and frames. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Items penetrating floor grilles and frames, including door control devices. 2. Divisions between grille sections. 3. Perimeter floor moldings. C. Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Floor Grille: Assembled section of floor grille. 2. Frame Members: Sample of each type and color. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES APRIL 17, 2026 12 48 16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For floor grilles and frames to include in maintenance manuals. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES, GENERAL A. Structural Performance: Provide floor grilles and frames capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft. (14.36 kN/sq. m). 2. Wheel load of 350 lb (159 kg) per wheel. B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1. 2.02 FLOOR GRILLES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard floor -grille assemblies consisting of treads of type and profile indicated, interlocked or joined together by cross members, and with support legs (if any) and other components needed to produce a complete installation. B. Aluminum Floor Grilles: Provide manufacturer's standard floor grilles with extruded members, top -surfaced tread rails, and as follows: 1. Tread Rails: Extruded -aluminum tread rails. a. Aluminum Color: Mill finish. 2. Tread Rail Spacing: 1-1/2 inches o.c. with 1/8- to 3/16 -inch -wide openings between treads. 3. Top Surface: Serrated aluminum. a. Top Surface Color: Match tread rail. 4. Grille Size: As indicated. 2.03 FRAMES A. Provide manufacturer's standard frames of size and style for grille type, for permanent recessed installation in subfloor, complete with installation anchorages and accessories. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate frame of same material and finish as grilles. ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 48 16 - 2 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 SUPPORT SYSTEM A. Level Bed Applications: Provide manufacturer's standard, vinyl cushion support system. B. Drainage Pit Applications: Provide manufacturer's special deep -pit frame and support extrusion system with intermediate support beams, sized and spaced as recommended by manufacturer for indicated spans and equipped with vinyl support cushions. 2.05 MATERIALS A. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with A60 (ZF 180) zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating or with G60 (Z 180) mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to ASTM A924/A924M. B. Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304. C. Stainless Steel Flat Bars: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Angles: ASTM A276 or ASTM A479/A479M, Type 304. E. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H15. F. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52 as standard with manufacturer. G. Extruded Architectural Bronze: ASTM B455, Alloy UNS No. C38500. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate floor grilles to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide each grille as a single unit; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in grilles are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES APRIL 17, 2026 12 48 16 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Fabricate frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins. C. Coat surface of aluminum in contact with cementitious materials with manufacturer's standard protective coating. 2.07 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Mill finish. 2.08 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: ASTM A480/A480M No. 4. C. Mill finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, size, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor grilles and frames. B. Examine roughing -in for drainage piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before floor grille and frame and drain pan installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 12 48 16 - 4 APRIL 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install recessed floor grilles and frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated and with top of floor grilles and frames in relationship to one another and to adjoining finished flooring as recommended by manufacturer. Set floor -grille tops at height for most effective cleaning action. Coordinate top of floor -grille surfaces with doors that swing across grilles to provide clearance under door. 3.03 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installations, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in floor -grille recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES APRIL 17, 2026 12 48 16 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS IW_tolailk I121011to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 13 21 50 LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLLED 6 CHAMBERS AND ROOMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Walk-in Cooler (Room 204 in Operations Building). 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Environmental rooms constructed of pre -molded, modular panels. Each panel shall have dimensions to allow passage through nonnal doorways. Rooms shall be complete with necessary controls, circulation systems, and mechanical and electrical equipment to meet these specifications. 2. Maintain noise levels in special purpose room enclosures during steady state control conditions below NC -65 curve over audible frequency range as measured by standard ASA methods when external ambient is 85 decibels or less. B. Control and Performance: 1. Temperature Range: a. Cold Room: 2 degrees C to 6 degrees C. 2. Temperature Control Stability: Plus or minus 0.5 degrees C. 3. Relative Humidity Range: a. Range: Not controlled. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Must comply with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's Product Data indicating compliance with Contract Documents. Include manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for all components. Include rough -in, clearance and maintenance requirements. Include plans, elevations, and details. Indicate utility requirements and connections. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL JULY 23, 2026 CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 13 21 50 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Informational Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit complete instruction and maintenance manual for each environmental room that includes sequential operating instructions, routine preventative maintenance instructions, and complete schematic drawings of rooms in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Warranty: Submit warranty certificate with operation and maintenance manuals for each environmental room. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm that has produced environmental rooms for not less than 10 years, with not less than 50 similar projects that have been is successful use for not less than 5 years. B. Performance and Payment Bond: Provide products from a manufacturer which has the capability to provide a Performance and Payment Bond for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 10 years of experience in successfully installation of systems of type specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store in a weather tight location and protect from corrosive environments, distortion and other damage during delivery storage and handling. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written one-year warranty against defects. Manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace items proven to be defective. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts: 1. Provide the following: a. 1 set of sealing strips. b. 1 set of spare gaskets. C. 15 percent spare fluorescent lamps. LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS JULY 23, 2026 1321 50-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Termmax LLC. 315 West Street Road, Warminster, PA 18974. 2. Telephone: (267) 308-1680. 3. Toll Free Telephone: (800) 899-3774. 4. Fax: (267) 308-1687. 5. Website: http://www.thermmax.com. B. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: Pre -fabricated walk-in rooms, metal clad, sectionals constructed and designed for accurate field assembly with provisions to facilitate disassembly for relocation and to add extra panels to increase size. B. Panel Construction: 1. Interchangeable panels, UL approved, designed for quick assembly, consisting of interior and exterior metal pans accurately formed with metal dies and checked with gauges for uniformity. 2. Panel Edges: Tongue and groove interfaces to assure a tight joint. Provide flexible vinyl gasket on interior and exterior of each panel along each tongue edge to provide sealing at each joint. 3. Do not use batten strips, pressure clips, or other fastening hardware for covering joints or joining panel sections. 4. Panel Locking Devices: Self-contained, interior cam -lock fasteners locked and released with single hex wrench tool. 5. Insulation: 4 -inch (102 mm) foamed -in -place urethane insulation, using EPA Montreal Protocol accepted non-toxic, non-flammable fluorocarbon blowing agents, adhered to interior and exterior faces of panels. The resulting cured foam shall be an odorless closed -cell product and shall not emit or outgas the fluorocarbon blowing agent. 6. Thermal Conductivity Factor K: No more than 0.14 BTU per hour per square foot between wall faces. 7. Rated U -Factor: 0.03 5. 8. R -Value: Not less than 29. 9. Flame Spread Rating: 25. 10. Closure Panels: Provide closure panels, matching materials, colors, and finishes of adjacent panel materials, to fill in between building and environmental room. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS 132150-3 MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Doors: 1. General: In -fitting, flush mounted, constructed similar to wall panels. 2. Door Opening: 36 inches by 78 inches (914 mm 1981 by mm). 3. Gasket: Vinyl type with magnetic steel core. Provide gaskets on both sides and top of door. Provide adjustable rubber wiper gasket on bottom of door. Provide gasket with enough magnetic force to form positive airtight seal. 4. Hardware: a. Heavy-duty door hardware with high luster finish. Incorporate keyed lock cylinders and padlock latches into door latch and handle assemblies. b. Hinges: Self -closing type with durable stainless steel pins and self -closing nylon cams. Provide three hinges. c. Door Handle and Latch Assembly: Automatic closing type. Provide safety release mechanism on inside of room preventing personnel from being locked from outside. 5. Door Window: Multi -layer, heated thermal pane window mounted in door with the following minimum viewing area: 14 inches by 14 inches (356 mm by 356 mm). D. Floors: 1. Provide insulated floors with similar construction as wall and ceiling panels. Design floors for 600 pounds per square foot distributed load weight. 2. Floor Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm). 3. Floor threshold must be designed to provided ADA access. 4. Interior Floor Surace: Heavy gauge galvanized steel. 5. Floor Finish: a. Seamless inlaid sheet vinyl in each environmental room complying with the following: 1) Manufacturer: Altro Walkway Type 20 or equal. 2) Covering: Seamless corner coving, extending into the sidewalls a minimum height of 4 inches (102 mm). Coving shall be vinyl capped. 3) Color: As selected. E. Sealing Strips: At exterior of environmental room wall and floors, provide sealing strips between environmental room walls and floor and adjacent building walls and floor to prevent air infiltration and environmental losses. LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS JULY 23, 2026 1321 50-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Wall and Ceiling Finish: 1. Interior: a. 26 -gauge galvalume steel faced with hard, durable, factory - applied pained finish. b. Color: White acrylic enamel. 2. Exterior (visible surfaces only): a. 26 -gauge galvanized steel faced with hard, durable factory applied painted finish. b. Color: White acrylic enamel. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Lighting Systems: Cool white fluorescent lamps, with lamps and ballasts. 2. Provide UL -approved fixtures. 3. Mount light fixtures mounted and provide in sufficient quantity for minimum intensities of 70 foot-candles measured 40 inches (1016 mm) above floor. 4. Install lights to provide uniform distribution of light. 5. Low Temperature Electronic Ballasts: Provide low temperature for cold rooms operating below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F). B. Electrical Outlets: Vapor -proof, duplex, 115 volt, 20 amp GFI receptacles installed on inside wall 45 inches (1143 mm) above floor. Wire each receptacle to terminal box on top of room for connection by others. C. Instruments and Control Systems: Control Panel System: a. Surface Mounted Control Console using an Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1400 PLC and Fuji MoniTouch, touch screen (HMI). b. Full color, six inch (6") touch screen providing all On/Off equipment controls, temperature set point and display, high/low temperature alarms, data logging and interface for remote computer recoding and monitoring via ethernet connection. c. Temperature is measured with a 100 Ohm Platinum RTD sensor. d. Data Logger Storage Capacity: Minimum of 90 days. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS 132150-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF e. The Operator Interface shall be recessed in a control console with a clear acrylic lockable door to protect tampering. All touch screen access including set points, alarm settings, and system operation shall be password protected. f. In the event of an alarm condition, a local audible buzzer shall activate until reset. All alarms shall be logged and the last ten (10) alarm conditions can be displayed on the touch screen. Isolated dry relay contacts are provided for connection to the BAS. g. Sensors shall be precision, platinum, resistance temperature devices (RTD). The controller output shall be a true proportional 4-20 mA signal from the PLC which drives a Sporlan CDS proportional valve in the suction line of each refrigeration system. h. High and Low Temperature Alarms shall be provided with dual set points, one for HIGH and one for LOW. i. Analog signals are also provided for remote monitoring of temperature and humidity at the Building System. j. Separate independent C -contact sets shall be provided for connections to the building alarm system (BAS) to activating a remote alarm in the event of over/under temperature condition. k. The following items shall be readily operated: 1) Control function to adjust temperature set point (°C). 2) Control function to adjust Relative Humidity set point (%RH) (when specified). 3) Alarm Set points for high and low temperature and/or relative humidity. 4) Data recording mode to indicate in chart recorder format temperature and humidity history over the 24 hour period. 5) Data download connector to interface with operator's standard windows based PC. Data can be archived and printed using Thermmaz provided software package. Alarm events shall also be logged. 6) Touch Screen buttons to perform the functions: a) Refrigeration on/off. b) Heat on/off. c) Ventilation on/off. d) Humidification on/off. e) Dehumidification on/off. f) Defrost on/off. g) The panel shall clearly indicate when the above operating functions are on. LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS JULY 23, 2026 1321 50-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 7) Room control parameter adjustments such as PID values, defrost times and frequencies shall be adjustable only by using password security access. Set Points and other basic operator functions are also only available by password access. Three levels of access security shall be provided. These adjustments once accessed shall not require special computer equipment or factory personnel to change. 8) All settings will be stored in non-volatile memory so that all information, adjustable parameters, and control programs are not lost on power failure. D. Ceiling Conditioning Evaporator: 1. Design environmental room air to be completely conditioned in a ceiling evaporator, with motor -driven blowers designed to recirculate air continuously to ensure temperature uniformity. 2. Provide ceiling evaporator containing heaters, copper tube with aluminum finned evaporator coil, de -humidification coils, and condensate drain pan. 3. Motors: Fractional horsepower, high -efficiency PSC type, serviceable from inside environmental room. E. Electric Heater: Non -corrosive, low -watt density, finned elements that operate in black region of optical spectrum. F. Dehumidification: 1. Moisture removal accomplished by means of specially designed, direct expansion refrigeration coil located in conditioning plenum. 2. Design coil for effective latent heat removal with minimum removal of sensible heat. 3. Provide non-freezing dehumidification system that produces low humidity condition limited by dew point of 4 degrees C. G. Refrigeration Systems: Design Requirements: a. The environmental room design and installation shall conform to applicable codes, ordinances and regulations governing the use and safety of refrigerants including, but not limited to, ASHRAE/ANSI standard 15-1992, ARI 420-77, ARI 520-78. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS 132150-7 MARY'S CREEK WRF b. Provide refrigeration system specifically designed, engineered, and manufactured of adequate capacities to achieve and maintain individual room temperature and performance requirements noted in Part 1. Provide system balanced in operation with conditioning system. In addition, allow a customer live load in the Room of 10 watts per square foot. c. Provide factory -assembled and tested system by manufacturer. Include high/low-pressure controls, receiver, sight glass, moisture indicator, replaceable dryer, thermal expansion valve, and necessary equipment to achieve specified performance. 2. Condensing Unit: Hermectic scroll compressor and spring mounted. System shall be designed to operate continuously using a hot gas bypass system control. Cycling compressor systems and electric reheat systems are not acceptable. 3. Equip each condensing unit as follows: a. High/low pressure control with automatic reset. b. Vibration eliminating devices on suction and discharge lines. c. Fusible plug. d. Liquid line dryer. e. Moisture indicating sight glass. f. Suction line filter. g. Magnetic contactor on all three phase units. h. Accessories including isolation mountings and racks, expansion valve, interconnecting piping, piping insulation, solenoid valves, fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker, motor starter and all necessary equipment to achieve the specified performance for each room. All required mechanical safety devices. j. Select refrigerant to give optimum operation considering evaporating and condensing temperatures. Refrigerant shall conform to latest protocol concerning its use based on ozone depletion potential. k. Air cooled condensers shall be manufactured and be properly matched to compressors determined by condensing unit manufacturer. 1. Condensing units shall be designed, engineered, manufactured and of adequate capacity to fulfill operating temperature requirements and performance, and shall be balanced with the air handling system in operation. m. Electrical Requirements: 460V/3 phase/3 wire power for each condensing unit. LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS JULY 23, 2026 1321 50-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Refrigeration Piping: ACR type, hard drawn, cleaned and capped Type L copper tubing soldered with silver solder (minimum of 45% Silver), except hot gas lines which shall be silver brazed. All lines shall be installed to allow for linear expansion of copper after start-up. 5. Suction Lines: Size for velocity of 500-700 FPM on horizontal runs and show a slight pitch toward condensing unit. When condensing unit is located below evaporator and there is no possibility of trapping oil, size vertical runs same as horizontal run. When condensing unit is located above evaporator, size vertical runs for velocity of 1,000-1,500 FPM and install proper (shallow) "P" traps spaced not over 10 feet apart on all tubing risers. 6. Hot Gas Lines: When hot gas lines are field installed remote from compressor, size tubing at same velocities as specified above for suction lines. 7. Liquid Lines: Size all liquid lines for maximum 2 psig pressure drop. 8. Hangers: F&M ring type or Unistrut assemblies with appropriate tubing Hydrosorb clamps to support liquid, suction, and discharge lines individually. Space hangers or clamps 8 feet o.c. maximum. 9. Condensate Drain Piping: 7/8 inch O.D., or greater, Type L copper tubing piped from evaporators to open floor drain south of the Cold Storage room. Rigidly support on walls 3 feet o.c. maximum, installed in such a manner that leaves 1 inch clearance space between finished wall and condensate drain piping, and equipped with cleanout tee near evaporator. Adequately pitch piping toward floor drain, carry through wall of refrigerated areas properly trapped and discharged directly into the floor drain. Wall penetrations shall be per the Division 40 Specifications. Modify floor drain grate as required to penetrate condensate drain piping directly into the floor drain. 10. Refrigerant Testing: Pressurize and leak test entire system at not less than 100 psig, clean and dehydrate by maintaining a vacuum of 500 microns or lower for a five hour period. 11. Add required charge of refrigerant, and oil if necessary, and test entire system for performance using an electronic leak detector for presence of refrigeration leaks. Mark each system clearly as to refrigerant type used. 12. Refrigerant: Do not use refrigerants containing CFC or HCFC. Use R -404A refrigerant for rooms operating above 0 degrees C. 13. Insulation: Fire retardant Armstrong "Armaflex Insulation" or equal for insulating refrigeration suction lines. Use minimum 1/2 -inch thick wall; apply during tubing assembly wherever possible. 14. Compressor: Scroll, heavy-duty, industrial unit with solid-state motor protection and oil pressure safety control. Provide compressor with oil sight glass, lubrication protection cutout, and integral suction and discharge service valves. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS 132150-9 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Sealants: Silicone silastic sealing compound, flexible when cured to allow for thermal contraction and expansion over its entire environmental range. B. Shelving: 1. Freestanding Shelving: Stainless steel wire rod shelving units manufactured free of burrs, sharp edges, and protrusions. 2. Manufacturer: Metro Super Erecta, Eagle Group or equal. 3. Shelves: Adjustable in freestanding rack. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer shall perform factory test and inspection on major components to assure basic quality, conformance of design, and functional operation. B. Each control console shall be bench tested using simulator panel to test logic functions, control systems function, and alarm operations. C. Each condensing unit and air unit shall be pressure tested for leaks and checked for design conformance. D. Notify Owner of testing time a minimum of 72 hours in advance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are acceptable to tolerances. B. Verify construction of substrates, building walls, and floors are in place and ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify the following is in place prior to installation: 1. Area is completely ready for proper and efficient installation of environmental rooms, floor is flat and level, area is clear of partitions, piping, obstructions, and loose articles preventing erection and assembly of environmental rooms and support equipment. 2. Electrical service to area of work of this section, including fused disconnect is in place. 3. Floor drains, condensate removal pump system, or both are installed to remove room drainage. LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS JULY 23, 2026 1321 50- 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 4. Water supply and return line, if required, are installed and final connections made. 5. Other special utilities and service connections are in place. 6. Building wall, roof, or floor penetrations are completed. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install environment rooms per manufacturer's recommendations and final approved Shop Drawings. B. Install components straight, plumb, level and true. Install service lines at right angles to walls and floors, except where required to pitch to drains. C. Seal or otherwise insure that fastenings to rooms do not compromise vapor barriers or insulation. Seal between piping and sleeves. D. Do not install damaged units. Replace components damaged during shipping, handling, or installation with new identical factory -supplied components. E. Pressurize and leak test entre system at not less than 100 psig. Clean and dehydrate by maintaining a vacuum of 500 microns, or lower, for a hour period. Add required charge or refrigerant, and oil if necessary, and test entire system for performance. Mark each system clearly as to refrigerant type used and amount of charge. F. Install filler panels to enclose spaces between top of walk-in room and finished ceiling and sides of unit and construction of surrounding area. G. Install shelving per manufacturer's instructions, with adjustable shelf heights as indicated of Drawings. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Measure temperature accuracy and uniformity inside completed room using 15 Temperature Escort (or equal) Data Loggers. Place pods throughout internal workspace at strategic locations no closer than 12 inches (305 mm) from surfaces. B. The data loggers shall remain in the test space for 24 hours. When test is complete the temperature data loggers are downloaded into a PC computer. Data is formatted in an Excel Format to provide tabular and graphical results of uniformity and stability. Test Reports will be turned over to Owner. C. Owner's representatives shall be given option of witnessing and confirming test results. Notify Owner's representative in writing, 72 hours prior to test. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 23, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS 13 21 50 - 11 MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Prior to completion of performance tests, provide manufacturer's representative to conduct demonstration for designated Owner's personnel with respect to room's controls and related systems. Manufacturer's representative will inform Owner personnel or proper room operation and maintenance. Notify Owner at least 72 hours in advance to permit Owner's authorized representative to schedule such an instruction period. 3.06 CLEANING A. Repair or remove and replace defective work, equipment, and accessories as directed upon completion of installation. Remove and refinish damaged or soiled areas. B. Clean exposed and semi -exposed surfaces, touch-up finish as required. Remove cartons and debris from the Work Site and legally dispose of the same. Leave work area in a clean condition. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protection: Adequately protect the work from damage until final acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CONTROLLED CHAMBERS AND ROOMS JULY 23, 2026 1321 50- 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers' Association (AAMA): a. 101, Standard Specifications for Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights. b. 605, Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. c. 606.1, Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. b. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. c. Design Guide 3: Serviceability Design Considerations for Steel Buildings. 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members. 4. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 5. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. c. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. d. A490/A490M, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat -Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. e. A529/A529M, Standard Specification for High -Strength Carbon -Manganese Steel of Structural Quality. f. A572/A572M, Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Columbium -Vanadium Structural Steel. g. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS MARCH 24, 2026 133419-1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY h. A792/A792M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. i. A992/A992M, Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes. j. C99 1, Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Insulation for Metal Buildings. k. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1. E96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. m. E2190, Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. n. E1514, Standard Specification for Structural Standing Seam Steel Roof Panel Systems. o. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 6. International Accreditation Service, Inc. (IAS): Quality Certification Program. 7. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code (IBC). 8. Metal Building Manufacturer's Association (MBMA): Metal Building Systems Manual. 9. Steel Door Institute (SDI): A250.8, Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 10. UL: 580, Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Complete building package using manufacturer's standard components. B. Primary Framing System: Clear span rigid frame. C. Lateral Support System in Longitudinal Direction: Cross bracing, or Portal frames located as shown on Drawings. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable Building Code: The 2021 International Building Code (IBC), as amended by the State of Texas and local agencies. B. Refer to design criteria on Drawing General Structural Notes. C. Minimum Roof Live Load: 20 pounds per square foot. D. Building system dead load. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 133419-2 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Loads: 1. Purlins and Secondary Framing: As indicated on Drawings, minimum 5 pounds per square foot collateral load. 2. Primary Frames: As indicated on Drawings, minimum 5 pounds per square foot collateral load. F. Special Equipment Loads and Bridge Crane capacity, as shown on the Drawings. G. Wind Load: Refer to General Structural Notes H. Earthquake Load: Refer to General Structural Notes. I. Deflection Criteria: 1. In accordance with AISC Design Guide 3 recommendations. Conformance is required to deflection criteria as stated in the Appendix. 2. Applies to primary and secondary framing members, bracing members, roof panels, and wall cladding. Design Standards: 1. AISC 360. 2. AISC RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts. 3. AISI Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members. 4. AWS D1.1/D1.IM. K. Consider prying action of bolts for bolted moment -resistant connections in primary framing. L. Design column bases as pinned, unless specifically indicated otherwise. 1.04 CONTRACTOR/METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURER COORDINATION A. Submit metal building shop drawings and obtain approval prior to forming foundation concrete or fabricating foundation reinforcing steel. Confirm size of concrete column pilasters for steel column baseplates and its associated anchor bolt template. B. Verify interface of building components with foundation and coordinate required foundation revisions with Engineer. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS MARCH 24, 2026 133419-3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Manufacturer's literature and technical data. b. Drawings Stamped by Designer: 1) Drawings shall be specifically prepared for this Project. 2) Mark out details that do not apply to Project. 3) Show design load criteria, material specifications for framing members and connections, roof framing plan with dimensions and member sizes, baseplate details showing anchor bolt size and bolt layout, elevations of wall framing and bracing, instructions for temporary bracing, framing around roof and wall openings, details for joining and sealing of roof panels and wall cladding, and sections and details for all components and accessories. c. Anchorage and bracing drawings and catalog information, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads provided in General Structural Notes. d. Painting System: Specifications; include paint manufacturer's name, product trade name, and preparation for shop and field coats. 2. Samples: Minimum 2 -inch by 3 -inch metal for components requiring color selection. B. Informational Submittals: Structural Calculations Stamped by Designer: a. Complete analysis and design of structural components and connections in accordance with design requirements indicated. b. Summary of building column reactions to foundation level for load cases. c. Mark out calculations that do not apply to Project. 2. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for loads General Structural Notes. Submit with Action Submittal for the same item. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, handling, storage, protection, and erection or installation of building and components. 4. Manufacturer: IAS Quality Certification: IAS certificate showing name and address of manufacturer, effective date, and category of certification. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 13 34 19 -4 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 5. Erector: a. IAS Quality Certification: IAS certificate showing name and address of erector, effective date, and category of certification, or, in lieu of IAS certification, documentation of past 5 years' experience record to include project name, location, date of completion, building manufacturer, and name and phone number of Owner's contact person. b. Certification of approval by manufacturer. 6. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Designer: Registered professional engineer valid in same state as Project. 2. Manufacturer: IAS Quality Certification: Metal Building Systems (MB). 3. Erector: a. IAS Quality Certification as Certified Steel Erector (CSE), or 5 years of experience in erection of metal building systems in lieu of IAS certification. b. Approval by manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect building components and accessories from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Deliver to Site with parts individually tagged. C. Store on wood blocking or pallets, flat and off ground, to keep clean and to prevent damage or permanent distortion. Support bundles so there is no danger of tipping, sliding, rolling, shifting, or material damage. Cover with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. D. Protect fmish of metal panels by application of removable plastic film or other suitable material placed between panels. Do not allow panels to come in contact with other material that would result in scratching, denting, staining or other damage to panel finish. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS MARCH 24, 2026 133419-5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 1.08 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Furnish manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of Owner, removal and replacement of Work specified in this Specification section found defective during a minimum period of 5 years and as stated below after date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in the General Conditions. B. Conditions: Finish on metal roof, wall panels, flashing, and trim will not chalk, crack, check, blister, peel, flake, chip, or lose adhesion for 5 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS A. Products manufactured or supplied by the following, and meeting these Specifications, may be used on this Project: 1. American Buildings Company, Columbus, GA. 2. Bigbee Steel Buildings, Inc., Muscle Shoals, AL. 3. Butler Manufacturing Co., Kansas City, MO. 4. Ceco Corp., Columbus, MS. 5. Chief Industries, Inc., Rensselaer, IN. 6. Inland Buildings, Cullman, AL. 7. Kirby Building Systems, Inc., Columbus, GA. 8. NCI Building Systems, Inc., Houston, TX. 9. Nucor Building Systems, Waterloo, IN. 10. Ruffin Building Systems, Oak Grove, LA. 11. Star Building Systems, a Robertson Ceco Co., Oklahoma City, OK. 12. United Structures of America, Inc., Houston, TX. 13. Varco-Pruden Buildings, Memphis, TN. 14. Whirlwind Building Systems, Houston, TX. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Structural Framing and Bracing: Primary Framing: ASTM A36/A36M, ASTM A529/A529M, ASTM A572/A572M, or ASTM A992 with 3/16 -inch minimum thickness and hot -dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A123. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 133419-6 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Secondary Framing: Steel for cold -formed galvanized channel and z -sections shall be ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33 or High -Strength Low -Alloy Steel (HSLAS) Grade 50 Type A or B, with G60 galvanized coating and minimum design thickness equal to 0.0346 inch. 3. Bracing: a. ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM F1554, Grade 36, for threaded rod, or ASTM A36/A36M for rolled shapes, hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. b. Do not use wire rope or cable for permanent bracing. 4. Bolted Connections: a. Primary Framing: ASTM A325 or ASTM A490/A490M high - strength bolted connections. b. Secondary Framing: ASTM A307 or ASTM A325. c. Hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. B. Roof and Wall Panels: Refer to Section 07 40 00, Roofing And Siding Panels for Basis Of Design roofing and siding panels for installation under this Work. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Accessories: 1. Circular Ventilators: As shown, with interior baffles and exterior wind blades, with bird screens and dampers operated by pull chain. a. Manufacturer's standard items. b. Material and finish to match wall or roof panels. 2. Continuous Ridge Ventilator: Building manufacturer's standard. 3. Factory finish to match Basis Of Design wall and roof panels. B. Thermal Blocks: High -density, 3/4 -inch thick extruded polystyrene, for installation over structural framing members. C. Trim: Factory -formed and factory -painted ridge cap, rake trim, simple cave trim, panel side trim, corner trim, door trim, and other trim as necessary. 1. Factory finish to match Basis Of Design wall and roof panels. D. Gutter Fascia and Downspouts: 1. Material: ASTM A653/A653M, 26 -gauge galvanized steel. 2. Gutter Fascia: a. Prefinish. b. Furnish hangers with factory -applied paint. c. Factory finish to match Basis Of Design wall and roof panels. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS MARCH 24,2026 133419-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Preformed Corner Closures: Furnish to match configuration of gable fascia. a. Factory finish to match Basis Of Design wall and roof panels 4. Downspouts: a. Configuration: Nominal 4 -inch corrugated rectangular box with minimum 11 square inches of cross section area. b. Factory finish to match Basis Of Design wall and roof panels. E. Miscellaneous: Furnish fasteners, metal -backed neoprene washers, weatherstripping, sealants, roof jacks, roof curbs, gaskets, and other items as required for a complete installation. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Factory Fabricate: To manufacturer's written standards, MBMA Metal Building Systems Manual, and AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. B. Building Parts: Accurate and true to dimension to facilitate building erection without cutting, fitting, or other alterations. C. Welded Connections: In accordance with AWS Dl. 1/D1.1M. D. Shop Primer for Primary Framing: Clean and apply one coat of manufacturer's standard primer in accordance with MBMA Metal Building Systems Manual. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting concrete foundation and anchor bolt placement for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of metal building. 3.02 BUILDING ERECTION A. Erect building system in accordance with manufacturer's standards and instructions. B. Provide temporary bracing in accordance with MBMA standards and as required for safe installation. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 133419-8 MARCH 24, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Structural Framing: 1. Do not field cut or alter primary or secondary framing members. 2. Installation and Tolerances: In accordance with MBMA Metal Building Systems Manual. D. Roof and Wall Panels: 1. Field cutting of panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Attach panels to structural supports to maintain a weathertight seal while allowing for thermal and structural movement. a. Install exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment. b. Field seam side laps of standing seam roof panels using electrically operated seaming machine. c. Use proper tools to install screw fasteners to compress neoprene washer without damaging washer or stripping metal. 3. Install manufacturer's standard joint sealants, gaskets, and closure strips as required for weathertight installation. 4. Install roof curbs for roof top equipment. 5. Field Cutting and Patching: Perform in manner not to impair appearance, weathertightness, or structural capacity of panel system. 3.03 REPAIR, CLEANING, AND PAINTING A. Immediately following erection, remove unused material, screws, fasteners, and other debris from completed installation. Use caution in removing metal cuttings from surface of prefinished metal panels. B. Replace damaged, dented, buckled, or discolored metal panels. C. Repair damaged painted and galvanized surfaces as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. D. Finish Painting: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special inspection will be provided by Owner where indicated on Drawings. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's representative at Site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services, for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of proper installation. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS MARCH 24, 2026 133419-9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF SECTION 13 34 23 PRE -FABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for requirements for furnishing operation and maintenance information and materials. 2. Electrical Specification requirements for furnishing all components and completed systems described in this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Prefabricated fiberglass shelters. a. Odor Control System 1 — Water Panel and Nutrient Storage b. Odor Control System 2 — Water Panel and Nutrient Storage c. Odor Control System 3 — Water Panel and Nutrient Storage 2. Electrical items, lights, outlets, breaker panel, and related devices. 3. Heating and ventilation. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND CRITERIA A. Fabrication Requirement: Provide factory -built prefabricated fiberglass shelter(s) in accordance with Drawings and Specifications, delivered to the Project site for installation by the CONTRACTOR. B. Design Criteria: 1. General: a. Provide an insulated, corrosion -resistant, molded fiberglass composite structure comprised of molded wall panels, roof, and door(s) designed for the site conditions and providing adequate strength to support equipment and associated loads to be imposed. b. Structure shall provide means for securing to the concrete foundation. c. Structure shall comply with the 2021 International Building Code requirements and the 2021 International Energy Conservation Code requirements for structures used primarily to house unattended equipment. 2. Shelter Requirements: a. Type and Size: 1) Prefabricated fiberglass shelter to house Odor Control Nutrient Barrel and Water Panel a) Inside Wall Width: 10 feet. b) Inside Wall Length: 13 feet. 2) Height, at Wall: 8 feet (minimum). PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS JULY 30, 2026 13 34 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF 3) Roof, Walls, and Floor: a) Roof Thickness, Minimum: 4 inches at edge. b) Roof Slope, Gable Roof: i. Provide 4:12 slope. c) Wall Thickness, Minimum: 2-1/2 inches d) Floor: Provide a floorless building. b. Specifications: 1) Roof Live Load: 30 psf. 2) Wind Load: V„it = 120 MPH, Exp "C". 3) Site Classification and Seismic Design Coefficients: a) Seismic Design Category: B b) Site Coefficient, Fa: 1.6 c) Site Coefficient, F,: 2.4 d) Mapped spectral response acceleration for short periods, Ss: 0.09 g. e) Mapped spectral response acceleration for a 1 -second periods, Si: 0.05 g. C. Comply with NEMA 3R requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Provide plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail building components; indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Specific design parameters for this project as specified herein. 3. Layout, sizes, types, and materials for anchor bolts to be furnished. 4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 5. Building weights and lifting points. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." D. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance shall include a Letter of Design Certification signed and sealed by a professional engineer, licensed to practice in Texas. Include the following: a. Name and location of Project. b. Order number. c. Name of manufacturer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Building dimensions, including width, length, height, and roof slope. PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 133423-2 JULY30,2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF f. Indicate compliance with governing building code and energy code requirements, including year of edition. g. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, deflection, and wind loads/speeds and exposure. h. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code. i. Building -Use Category: Indicate the effect on load importance factors for a building classified at Category IV because it provides service and support to other critical facilities that must remain functional during severe weather conditions. 2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 4. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and manufacturer's representative, if applicable. 5. Factory tests. 6. Warranties and service agreements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Prefabricated fiberglass shelter shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least ten (10) U.S. installations of the shelter type being proposed, each with a minimum of 5 years of satisfactory service. 2. A list of similar installations shall be furnished with the shop drawing submittal, including names and telephone numbers of contacts. B. Source Limitations: Prefabricated fiberglass shelter of each type specified in this section shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. This does not require that all equipment be manufactured by a single manufacturer but does require that the manufacturer of the system shall be responsible for the complete system. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle and store equipment components in accordance with shop drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and the product requirements. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Store building on dunnage placed at proper locations to prevent cracking, distortion, or any other physical damage. 2. Building shall be provided with lifting fixtures for lifting and setting without incurring damage to the walls or roof. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: a. Prefabricated Fiberglass Shelter: Five (5) years from date of Final Completion. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS 133423-3 MARYS CREEK WRF b. All Other Components: Two (2) years from date of Final Completion. 2. Cost for the removal, shipment, repair, and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in warranty, as well as correction of defective work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Plasti-Fab® 2. Shelter WorksTM 3. Jacobs Manufacturing Corp. 4. Warminster Fiberglass Co. 5. Engineer approved equivalent. A. Material Properties: 1. Structural characteristics for 1/8 -inch chopped strand laminate shall meet the following minimum physical properties listed in Table 1. e ' e e Tensile Strength, psi D-638 14,000 Flexural Strength, psi D-790 23,000 Flexural Modulus, psi 0.80 x 106 Notched Izod Impact, ft lbs/in D-256 9.0 Water Absorption D-570 0.15% in 24 hours 2. Closed cell rigid foam insulation shall be dimensionally stable over the specified range of operating temperatures, contain no CFC's, and meet the physical properties listed in Table 2. ' eeV1 ti Density, lbs/ft3 2.0 Closed Cell Content 90% Thermal Conductivity, BTU in/hr ft2 °F 0.14 Temperature Range, °F -100 to +225 Flame Spread 30 or less B. Wall Panels: 1. Seamless, one-piece wall composed of 2 1/2 -inch minimum insulating foam core PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 133423-4 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF encapsulated between two 1/8 -inch fiberglass reinforced polyester skins. 2. Insulation Value: R-17, or as required to satisfy 2021, IECC. 3. Exterior and interior surfaces shall be composed of a 10 to 20 mil gelcoat finish backed by a resin rich layer of resin and chopped glass, containing a UV inhibitor. 4. When equipment is to be secured to the walls, provide a layer of 19/32 -inch OSB sheeting bonded to the foam and encapsulated in the wall if not already required for other design reasons. 5. Wall penetrations are to be reinforced, integrally molded as applicable, designed for the loads involved. 6. Provide an integrally molded wide flange or similar method for mounting the wall panels to a concrete foundation or mold walls integrally with floor as specified. C. Roof: 1. Vaulted hip or gabled design, seamless, one-piece roof composed of 4 -inch minimum insulating foam core encapsulated between two 1/8 -inch fiberglass reinforced polyester skins. 2. Insulation Value: R-25, or as required to satisfy 2021 IECC. 3. Provide roof trusses, molded, and integrated into roof panels, as required for support and to suspend loads from roof. 4. Exterior and interior surfaces shall be composed of a 10 to 20 mil gelcoat finish backed by a resin rich layer of resin and chopped glass, containing a UV inhibitor. 5. Provide 2 -1/2 -inch overhang all around. 6. Any lifting eyes molded into the structure for lifting the building shall be Type 316 stainless steel and shall be sealed at the penetrations into the fiberglass structure. D. Doors: 1. Construction: Insulated FRP door of similar construction to walls, mounted in a recess, having a clear opening as specified, and a 1/2 -inch -high raised all-weather sill. 2. Seal: Provide a resilient, closed cell form neoprene or EPDM seal per ASTM D1056 on all four edges. 3. Hardware: a. Provide stainless steel hardware consisting of a 3 -point door catch holding door closed at top, middle and bottom. b. Provide locking door handle, heavy duty hinges, and a spring -loaded door holder. c. Hinges shall be of a tamper proof design. d. Provide panic hardware with keyed external lever and floor mounted door stops with latches. Key system shall be Best brand. Provide construction cores and control keys. e. On double doors, one door receives hardware described above and the other is held closed with a slide bolt. 4. Provide a rain deflector installed over the door. 5. Door Styles: a. Width: Single door 3 -ft -4 -in. b. Height: 7 -ft. E. Finishes: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS 133423-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Exterior: Finished with a smooth gelcoat surface of minimum 10 mil thickness with color as indicated below. a. Walls: white. b. Roof: White. c. Door: white. 2. Interior: Finished with a smooth white gelcoat surface of minimum 10 mil thickness 2.3 ELECTRICAL AND HVAC A. All electrical equipment including plugs, switches, and other components shall be mounted a minimum of 36 inches above the bottom of the fiberglass shelter and/or 12 inches above base 100 -year flood level elevation, with exception of grounding. Conduit shall be mounted flush with interior surfaces. B. Electrical Requirements: Provide the following main power distribution, lighting, convenience outlets, and related electrical devices. 1. Power Service: ; phase, 60 Hertz. 120/240V, single phase, 60 Hertz. 2. Disconnect Switch: 200A 60A exterior disconnect switch, service entrance rated. 3. Main Distribution Panel: 120/240V, single phase, 3 4. Surge Suppression: 5. Interior WP/GFI Outlets: 6. Exterior WP/GFI Outlets: 7. Timer Switch: 200A, I 20/208\T, three phase, 30 . 60A; 0 spaces, NEMA 4X 316 SS. 40K peak amp surge suppressor. two (2) 120V/20A Duplex outlets. one (1) 120V/20A Duplex outlets. (1) Six hour for lighting and ventilation. C. Lighting: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings provide the following interior and exterior lighting. 1. Interior: (2 each) 4 -foot strip LED, vapor tight, 4000K and 4,000 lumens. 2. Exterior: (1 each) Weatherproof LED full cutoff wall pack with photocell and motion sensor, 4000K, 24W min., with photocell and motion detector centered above each door. 3. Emergency: (1 each) Emergency exit fixture with dual flood lights located inside and over each door. 4. Switch: (1 each) 20 -amp light switch located inside and adjacent to each door. 5. Controls for Interior Lighting: Manual and automatic operating modes using an exterior wall mounted, NEMA 4, 3 -position selector switch located at the entrance door. a. Identification: "Interior Lights" b. Positions labeled AUTO/OFF/ON. 1) "AUTO" position; lights shall be energized when the enclosure door is opened and de -energize when timer expires. 2) "ON" position; the lights shall be on continuously. 3) "OFF" position will de -energize the lights. c. Interior lights shall not share a circuit breaker with wall receptacles. D. Grounding: Refer to drawing site plans for grounding and ground bar locations. PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 13 34 23 - 6 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS D D D MARYS CREEK WRF E. Conduits, Boxes, and Related Items: PVC construction. F. Additional Items: 1. Smoke detector: (1 each) Smoke detector with relay for local and remote alarm. 2. Fire extinguisher: (1 each) Fire extinguisher cabinet containing one 10 -lb, Class C fire extinguisher. 3. Log Book: (1 each) Literature Holder, heavy duty, wall mounted. 4. Exterior Identification Sign mounted on the outer face to the right of the door. a. "Odor Control System 1 — Water Panel and Nutrient Storage" b. "Odor Control System 2 — Water Panel and Nutrient Storage" c. "Odor Control System 3 — Water Panel and Nutrient Storage" G. Heating: 1. Provide a forced air electric space heater for freeze protection. Heater shall be thermostatically controlled, and shall be capable of maintaining 60 degrees F with an outdoor ambient temperature of 0 degrees F. 2. Location: As specified by the fiberglass shelter manufacturer to meet requirements. 3. Heat load calculations shall be included in required submittal. 4. Thermostat shall be adjustable from 60 to 80 degrees F. H. Ventilation: 1. Intake Fan: a. Provide one (1) supply fan with gravity shutter, canopy, remote power switch, and removable aluminum insect screen, wall mount in upper portion of building. All components shall be constructed of PVC, FRP, and/or aluminum. The intake fan shall be Hartzell Series 59 or approved equal. b. Capacity: Unless otherwise specified, provide a minimum of 20 air changes per hour. c. Location: As specified by the fiberglass shelter manufacturer to meet requirements. d. Control: Manual and automatic operating modes using an exterior wall mounted, NEMA 4, 3 -position selector switch located at the entrance door. 1) Identification: "Intake Fan". 2) Positions labeled AUTO/OFF/ON. a) "AUTO" position; fan shall be energized when the enclosure door is opened and de -energize when timer expires. b) "ON" position, the fan shall run continuously. c) "OFF" position will de -energize the fan. 3) Intake fan shall not share a circuit breaker with wall receptacles. 2. Vents: Wall mounted exhaust louver in lower portion of building, with gravity shutter and removable aluminum insect screen. All components shall be constructed of PVC, FRP, and /or aluminum. Locations to be specified by the fiberglass shelter manufacturer. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fiberglass Shelter: Factory inspected prefabricated fiberglass shelter as follows: PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS JULY 30, 2026 13 34 23 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS D MARYS CREEK WRF 1. Visual inspection for defects shall be made without the aid of magnification. 2. Defects shall be classified as to type and level as shown in ASTM D2563. 3. Allowable surface tolerances shall not exceed tolerances listed in Table 3. 1 ri 1,I.A I 1 1 Cracks, crazing, chips, pits, blisters, dry spots, fish eyes, burned areas, or None entrapped air Scratches None more than 0.002 inches in depth Exposed glass, exposure of cut edges None Wrinkles and solid blisters Maximum deviation: 10% of thickness, but not to exceed 1/8 -inch Surface porosity (pinholes or pores in None the laminate surface Foreign matter None Electrical Testing: 1. Inspect and test electrical systems prior to shipment. Inspection and testing results shall be documented, signed by the inspector, and a copy of the inspection checklist provided. 2. Electrical components and parts will be inspected for quality workmanship and installation. Inspection includes conduit, conduit couplings, conduit brackets, electrical panels, exterior and interior lights, outlets, smoke detectors, and alarms. In addition, the following tests will be performed as a minimum: a. Polarity test. b. Continuity test. c. Dielectric test. d. Operational test. C. Product Inspection: Provide Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance indicating the product has been manufactured in compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. If repairs are required, they will be performed and reinspected before the product is approved for shipment. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Install and adjust equipment in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate the equipment until the installation is approved by the manufacturer's representative. B. Shelter should be handled in such a manner at the jobsite such that they are not damaged from equipment and excessive stresses. Lift gear, rigging, etc. shall be as specified by the manufacturer. C. Examine and inspect shelter upon arrival for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 13 34 23 - 8 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRF Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Lift shelter per manufacturer's instruction and place on concrete slab. Install shelter on the concrete foundation in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. B. Prefabricated fiberglass shelter shall bear fully on a concrete foundation that is larger than the shelter footprint. Concrete foundation should be level to 1/8 -inch in all directions. Provide positive drainage from the foundation. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS 133423-9 MARYS CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS SHELTERS 13 3423 - 10 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 JULY 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARYS CREEK WRY SECTION 13 34 23.33 PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Factory built precast concrete building or pre -cast reinforced, concrete building to be field -assembled on -site. As designated pre -cast concrete building may be placed or erected on CONTRACTOR's poured in placed foundation or on pre -cast floor panels. 2. Building designation: COMMUNICATIONS BUILDING a. Outside dimensions: 8'W x 12'T x 12'H 12'W x 16'L x 12'H b. Door is located on the 8'W side. 3. Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning. 4. Installation, startup, testing, and placing in service assistance. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Bid Documents, including Division 0, Special Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Division 23 — HVAC 3. Division 26 — Electrical 4. Failure to obtain the reference specifications does not excuse supplier from meeting the requirements of the reference specifications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. References: Following is a list of standards, which might be referenced in this Section: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 2. American Society of Civil Engineers: ASCE 7 —Building Code Requirement for Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures 3. ASTM International, Inc. (ASTM): a. A36 - Specification for Carbon Structural Steel b. A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed for Concrete Reinforcement c. A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement d. A615 - Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement e. A706 - Specification for Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. f. C150 - Portland Cement MARCH 30, 2026 PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-1 MARYS CREEK WRF g. C260 - Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete h. C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 4. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1/D 1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel b. D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel 5. International Building Code (IBC): 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70, National Electric Code. 7. Uniform Building Code (UBC): 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND CRITERIA A. Fabrication Requirement: Provide one of the following types of buildings: 1. Factory -built pre -cast reinforced, concrete building in accordance with Drawings and Specifications, delivered to the Project site for installation by the CONTRACTOR. Manufacturer shall provide all lifting cables and hardware required for the off-loading and installation of the building. 2. Pre -cast reinforced, concrete building to be field -assembled by manufacturer on -site. B. Design Criteria: 1. Structural: a. Structural design calculations for the building shall be prepared and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in the state where project is located. b. Conform to following building codes: UBC, IBC, ACI-318, ASCE-7, and local and state design standards. 2. Design Loads: a. Flood Load: 250 PSF (If provided by manufacturer) b. Roof Live Load: 65 PSF c. Wind Load: 110 MPH, Exp "C" d. Seismic Zone: Zone 4, Seismic Design Category C 3. Dimensions: a. Dimensions shown on Drawings are minimum inside dimensions. Wall thickness shall be adjusted for structural/manufacturing requirements and to provide R- 12 insulation rating. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Provide plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail building components; indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING MARCH 30, 2026 280005-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Specific design parameters for this project as specified herein. 3. Layout, sizes, types and materials for anchor bolts to be furnished. 4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 5. Building weights and lifting points. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 1 Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." D. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. 2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 4. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and manufacturer's representative, if applicable. 5. Welding certificates. 6. Factory tests. 7. Warranties and service agreements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Precast concrete building shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least ten (10) U.S. installations of the building type being proposed, each with a minimum of 5 years of satisfactory service. 2. A list of similar installations shall be furnished with the shop drawing submittal, including names and telephone numbers of contacts. 3. Fabricated building manufactured in a PCI certified plant. Manufacturer shall have "Certification in Good Standing" for product groups B & C, under the PCI plant certification program. B. Source Limitations: Precast building units of each type specified in this section shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. This does not require that all equipment be manufactured by a single manufacturer but does require that the manufacturer of the system shall be responsible for the complete system. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code — Steel" and D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle and store equipment components in accordance with shop MARCH 30, 2026 PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-3 MARYS CREEK WRF drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Store building on dunnage placed at proper locations to prevent cracking, distortion, or any other physical damage. 2. Building provided with lifting fixtures for lifting and setting without incurring damage to walls or roof. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: a. Precast Building: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. b. All Other Components: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Cost for the removal, shipment, repair and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in warranty, as well as correction of defective work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AES Precast Company, Inc. 2. EASI-SETTM/EASI-SPANTM, Manufactured by Smith-MidlandTM Corporation or Smith-CarolinaTM Corporation. 3. Lonestar Prestress Mfg., Inc. 4. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. 2.2 MANUFACTURING A. Forms: Forms shall be of steel construction and designed for the fabrication of the specified unit. Tolerances of form construction shall be such that no leakage of concrete mixture occurs, and specified product dimensions are achieved. Forms shall be clean and free of excessive buildup, rust, tape, polystyrene, and other items. B. Reinforcement Steel: 1. Reinforcing steel shall be placed conforming to the design requirements relative to the size, spacing, and location. All reinforcing bars shall be adequately tied at crossover points and lap joints to assure rigidity during handling of the cage and placement of the concrete. 2. Reinforcing shall be supported properly and adequately chaired to provide the proper concrete cover and prevent maintained during concrete placement and consolidation. C. Embedded Items: Positioned at locations specified on the Drawings and as PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING MARCH 30, 2026 280005-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRY required by manufacturer. Inserts, weld plates, lifting devices, and other items to be cast in concrete shall be held rigidly in place so that they do not move during pouring operations. D. Concrete Placement: 1. Deposited into the forms as near to its final location as practical; keeping free fall of the concrete to a minimum; and placed uniformly around the form. 2. Concrete pouring operation should be continuous, making sure to avoid letting the previous placed concrete begin hardening. 3. Concrete shall be consolidated in such a manner that segregation of the concrete is minimized. 4. Concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, working the concrete completely around reinforcement, embedment, and into corners eliminating all air and stone pockets. E. Openings: 1. Wall block -outs determined by equipment locations and as shown on Drawings but cannot exceed the structure's design limitations. F. Product Handling: Precast concrete building shall only be handled from the designed lifting locations. Care must be taken when stripping a product from its form to prevent damage. 2.3 CONCRETE A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II or I/II. Supplement with the following: 2. Aggregates: Furnished from one source complying with ASTM C33. a. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, Class 3S, coarse aggregate or better, graded. 1) Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or other deleterious substances. 2) Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 3) Wash gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of slag and pit or bank run gravel is not permitted. 4) Coarse Aggregate Size: Size to be ASTM C33, No. 8, 1/2" maximum well graded crushed stone. b. Fine Aggregates: ASTM C33, fine aggregate, free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 1) Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loan, clay, lumps, or other deleterious substances. Dune sand, bank run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. 3. Water: Clean and portable containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides. B. Admixtures: MARCH 30, 2026 PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-5 MARYS CREEK WRF 1. General: Furnish from one manufacturer having characteristics compatible with each other and free of chlorides or other corrosive materials. 2. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 3. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B 4. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 5. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 6. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017, Type II. 8. Superplasticizer: ASTM C494 type F or G. Concrete shall be placed at a slump of between 5 and 8 inches. C. Steel Reinforcement and Inserts: 1. Steel Reinforcement: a. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A496 and A497. b. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 or A706 (for welded). 2. Inserts and Embedded Metal: a. Structural steel plates, angles, and related metal fabrications shall conform to ASTM A36. b. Provide lifting inserts. 3. Provide supports for reinforcement including chairs, bolster bars, and other devices for spacing and securing reinforcing in accordance with CRSI requirements. Legs of all supports in contact with exposed -to -view surfaces shall be plastic coated in accordance with CRSI, class I. D. Mix Designs: 1. Concrete mixes shall be developed in accordance with ACI 211.1; designed by a Professional Engineer or Certified Testing Lab to meet the specified strength requirements. Maximum allowable water/cement ratio shall be 0.50. 2. Compressive Strength: 5000 psi at 28 days. 3. Air Content: Total air content percent by volume shall be 4% to 6%. 2.4 PANEL CONNECTIONS A. Precast Concrete Building Assembled On -Site: 1. Panels shall be securely fastened together with 3/8 -inch -thick steel brackets. Steel shall be structural quality, hot -rolled carbon complying with ASTM A283, Grade C, hot dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Fasteners: 1/2 -inch diameter bolts, ASTM A307. 3. Cast -Place Anchors: Dayton -Superior No. F-63. Inserts for corner connections shall be bolted directly to form before casting panels. 4. Wall panels shall be connected to floor foundation with 4 -inch expansion anchors. PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING MARCH 30, 2026 280005-6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRY 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Doors, Frames and Door Hardware 1. Doors and Frames: Shall comply with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI- 100), Level 4, 1 3/4" thickness, maximum duty and as herein scheduled and specified. 2. Doors shall be insulated with an inorganic, noncombustible material 3. Doors and frames shall be painted with one coat of rust inhibitor primer and an electrostatically applied, oven -cured urethane enamel, and shall conform to ANSI A250.3, dark brown, if no other color is selected during submittal review. 4. Door Hardware: a. Door hardware shall include the following: 1) Hydraulic heavy-duty door closer 2) High frequency service, heavy duty full mortise ball bearing hinges, 316 stainless steel 3) Escutcheon level design mortise lock, key retracts latch bolt, otherwise always locked 4) Interchangeable core and key cylinder, Keying shall be as directed by the OWNER 5) Emergency panic bar mortise lock exit device 6) Latch Protector 7) Door bottom shoe 8) Door sweep, aluminum alloy channel with a type 6 soft brush insert. 9) Aluminum drip cap with stainless steel screws 10) Stainless steel kickplate 5. Schedule Door Schedule SDI Door Building ID Door ID Door Size Window Size Nomenclature Electrical BLDG D1 F 4'-0"w x 9'-0" NA B. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 1. Packaged Vertical, Wall -Mount Air -Conditioning Unit(s): a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Specific Systems 2) Industrial Climate Engineering - Custom Air Products & Services b. Manufactured Units 1) Description: Factory -assembled and tested, self-contained, packaged wall -mount air conditioning units with electric MARCH 30, 2026 PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-7 MARYS CREEK WRF refrigeration system and temperature controls; fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil. 2) Cabinet: 0.052 -inch (1.32 -mm) thick, stainless steel. a) Mounting: Wall with wall brackets. b) Finish: Epoxy coating. c) Access Door: Hinged door in cabinet for access to controls. d) Wall Sleeves: Factory -furnished double -wall galvanized steel with integral insulation. 3) Refrigeration System: Direct -expansion coils with capillary restrictor, hermetically sealed scroll compressor with internal spring isolation, external isolation, permanent -split -capacitor motor, and overload protection. Provide corrosion -protection coating to both coils. 4) Indoor Fan: Centrifugal, with two -speed permanent -split - capacitor motor and positive -pressure ventilation damper with concealed manual operator. 5) Filters: MERV-8 Pleated 6) Condensate Drain: Drain pan and piping to direct condensate to a gravel pocket enclosed in precast handhole. 7) Outdoor Fan: Propeller type with separate permanent -split - capacitor motor. c. Controls 1) Control Module: Factory controller in control cabinet 2) Control Panel Door: Lockable with key. 3) Low Ambient Control: Allows cooling -cycle operation to 20°F, outdoor -air temperature. 4) Fan -Cycle Switch: Allows fan operating mode to be either continuous or cycled on and off by thermostat. 5) Compressor Override: Manual switch prevents compressor operation. 6) Remote Temperature Monitoring: Remote -mounted, low -voltage temperature sensors. 7) Programmable Thermostat: Microcomputer based with adjustable setpoints. 8) Led/Lag Alternator Controller. d. Schedule Packaged Vertical. Wall -Mount Air -Conditioning Unit Schedule Building ID Unit ID Nominal Cooling Capacity Electric Heat KW Electrical Voltage Electrical BLDG AC1 -5 3 Tons 4-0-5 480V, 3PH. Electrical BLDG AC2 -5 3 Tons 4-0-5 480V, 3PH. D PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING MARCH 30, 2026 280005-8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRF C. Addition Items: 1. Smoke Detector: 2. Fire Extinguisher: 3. Log Book: (1) Smoke detector. (1) 5 -lb CO2 fire extinguisher, wall mounted by each door. (1) Literature Holder, wall mounted. D. Positive Pressure Unit 1. Refer to Section 23 81 00 for additional requirements of the positive pressure unit. 2. Schedule Positive Pressure Unit Schedule Tag Facility Area Supply Outdoor Return ACH ESP Stage Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage Stage V/PH/H Manufacturer Model Notes No. Served Room Air Air (IN 1 4 5 Z No. (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) WC) 100- Commu Electrical 1000 200 1200 6 0.5 2" BD -12H BD -12H 2" 6" 460/3/6 ATMOSAIR BI0- ALL PPU nication Room MER Modules/ Modules/ MER MER 0 203 -1 s House V 10 BC -900K BC -900K V 10 V 14 Media Media Notes: 1. Provide weather hood with insect screen for OA intake. 2. Equipment is commercially unavailable with a 65 kaA SCCR. Unit will be provided with Manufacturer's standard SCCR. Division 26 (Electrical) shall provide branch circuit current -limiting upstream of the unit, sized to reduce the peak let-throgh fault current to a value equal to or less than the HVAC equipment's nameplate SCCR. 2.6 CAULKING A. All joints between panels shall be caulked on the exterior and interior surface of the joint using SikaFlex-lA elastic sealant or equivalent. B. Precast Site Assembled Building: Exterior caulk joint to be 3/8 -inch by 3/8 -inch square so that sides ofjoint are parallel for correct caulk adhesion. Back ofjoint to be taped with bond breaking tape to ensure adhesion of caulk to parallel sides ofjoint and not to back. MARCH 30, 2026 PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 28 00 05 - 1 MARYS CREEK WRY 2.7 FINISHES A. Exterior Walls: 1. Chamfered; prepare concrete surface per coating supplier's instructions and apply two coat epoxy coating system, 9.0 MDFT, tan color. B. Interior Walls and Ceiling: Finished with R-12 insulation with FRP laminated 3/4 -inch wheat board or equivalent; color white or be of sandwich construction. C. Roofing: Provide smooth trowel finish, sealed with elastomeric coating system; color white. 2.8 ROOF INSULATION (FURRED AND INSTALLED ON UNDERSIDE OF ROOF PANELS): A. Polyisocyanurate rigid panel: 1. ASTM-C1289 Type 1, Class II. 2. Compressive strength: 25 psi minimum 3. Density: 2 pcf nominal. 4. Vapor transmission: 0.03 perm -IN maximum. 5. Water absorption: 0.3 percent maximum. 6. Thermal conductivity (k -value at 75 DegF): 0.14. 7. Reflective foil facer both sides. 8. Minimum thickness as noted. B. Flame spread: ASTM E84, not greater than 25. 2.9 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLES 1. Interior lighting shall consist of open type, 4 ft strip LED fixtures that provide 50 -foot candles of light at a level three feet above the floor. This lighting shall be controlled by a single pole or three-way switches located at each personnel door. 2. Exterior lighting, if specified, shall be provided above each personnel door. Exterior light fixtures shall be LED wall pack suitable for use in wet locations and have automatic dusk to dawn photo control. 3. Emergency lighting, if specified, shall be a self-contained battery powered unit with two directionally adjustable illuminating heads. The unit shall switch on automatically upon loss of AC power and provide 1.5 hours of continuous illumination, and then recharge when AC power is resumed. 4. Duplex receptacles rated 120VAC, 20A, spec grade, shall be located near each door. Additional receptacles shall be provided as specified. 2.10 WIRING MARCH 30, 2026 PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-1 MARYS CREEK WRF A 6" x 6" metal wireway, with hinged cover shall be provided around the Prefabricated Electrical Building perimeter at the junction of the walls and ceiling. This wireway shall contain all Prefabricated Electrical Building facilities wiring. 2. All Prefabricated Electrical Building lighting and power wiring, No. 12 AWG to No. 6 AWG, shall be single conductor, stranded copper, with THHN/THWN 600V insulation (minimum size of No. 12 AWG). All Prefabricated Electrical Building power wiring, No. 4 AWG and above, shall be single conductor, stranded copper, with XHHW 600V insulation. Control, instrumentation, and alarm wiring shall be no smaller than No. 24 AWG. All wiring shall be installed in the 6" x 6" perimeter wireway, rigid aluminum conduit, or other approved raceway in accordance with the National Electric Code. 3. The grounding system shall provide system and equipment grounding for all electrical equipment and the power center frame. The ground bus of all electrical equipment within the Prefabricated Electrical Building shall be connected to the Prefabricated Electrical Building 4/0 AWG, copper ground loop cable. NEMA standard copper or stainless steel four -hole ground pads shall be at each corner of the exterior of the power center on the Prefabricated Electrical Building base. The Prefabricated Electrical Building ground cable shall be connected to the four- (4) grounding pads. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS Other requirements and special features may be provided. Typical additional requirements could be: a. Wall bulkheads with gasketed cover plate b. Space heaters c. AC panelboards d. Control wiring termination cabinets e. Fire detection/suppression equipment f. Cable tray g. Platforms and stairs must comply with local and national codes for access to the facility. 2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled precast concrete building according to ACI, ASTM, IEEE, NEMA, and appropriate building codes standards. 1. Concrete Testing: a. As a minimum, concrete testing will be once per day. Testing will be performed by an ACI Certified Concrete Field -Testing Technician PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING MARCH 30, 2026 280005-2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRY Grade I. b. Concrete testing will include the following: 1) Slump Test per ASTM C143. 2) Temperature per ASTM C 1064. 3) Obtain Concrete Cylinder Test Samples per ASTM C31 in accordance with ASTM C 172. 4) Air content percentage determined by ASTM C23 1. c. Concrete Test Cylinders: Quantity of test cylinders will be a set of four with compressive strength tests performed at ages of 1 day, 7 days and 28 days (2 cylinders). After curing per ASTM C3 1, cylinders will be compression tested to failure per ASTM C39. 2. Mill Certificates: Provide mill certificates for reinforcing steel, cement, and chemical admixtures to verify compliance with material specifications. 3. Aggregate Testing: Provide latest coarse aggregate test results demonstrating compliance with ASTM C33. B. Product Inspection: 1. Provide Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance indicating the product has been manufactured in compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. If repairs are required, they will be performed and re -inspected before the product is approved for shipment. 2. Precast building installation for Projects constructed in Texas, CONTRACTOR shall comply with have Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR) requirements; have an independent third party provide the required inspection; and complete TDLR Form 035ihb "Industrialized Housing and Building application for Installation Permit." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Install and adjust equipment in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate the equipment until the installation is approved by the manufacturer's representative. 1. Comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section 01700 "Execution Requirements". 2. Store building on dunnage placed at the proper locations to prevent cracking, distortion, or any other physical damage. B. Buildings should be handled in such a manner at the jobsite such that they are not damaged from equipment and excessive stresses. Lift gear, rigging, etc. shall be as specified by the manufacturer. C. Examine and inspect precast concrete building upon arrival for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDINGS 280005-3 MARYS CREEK WRF A. Precast concrete building shall bear fully on a raised concrete foundation that is larger than the building footprint. Concrete foundation should be level to 1/8 -inch in all directions. Provide positive drainage from the foundation. Floor foundation shall have a 1/2 -inch step down around the entire perimeter to prevent water migration into the building along the bottom of the wall panels. B. Install building on the concrete foundation in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 3.3 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES A. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Installation stating that the equipment is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. END OF SECTION PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING MARCH 30, 2026 280005-4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED MARYS CREEK WRY THIS PAGE IS LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY. MARCH 30, 2026 PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 MCKIM & CREED 280005-5 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 21 13 13 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, and 250. b. B 16.4, Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250. c. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. b. A135/A135M, Standard Specification for Electric -Resistance - Welded Steel Pipe. c. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. d. A197/A197M, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. e. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. f. A563/A563M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Inch and Metric). g. A795/A795M, Standard Specification for Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems. b. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). c. 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. d. 291, Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants. 4. UL: a. b. C. d. e. PW\JACOBS AMERICA 193, Standard for Safety Alarm Valves for Fire -Protection Service. 199, Safety Automatic Sprinklers for Fire -Protection Service. 213, Rubber Gasketed Fittings for Fire -Protection Service. 262, Standard for Gate Valves for Fire -Protection Service. 312, Check Valves for Fire -Protection Service. S\WFXR7900 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MARCH 30, 2026 21 13 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF f. 346, Standard for Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. g. 393, Standard for Safety Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire - Protection Service. h. 405, Standard for Fire Department Connection Devices. i. 464, Audible Signaling Devices for Fire Alarm and Signaling Systems, Including Accessories. j. 753, Standard for Alarm Accessories for Automatic Water -Supply Control Valves for Fire -Protection Service. k. 789, Standard for Indicator Posts for Fire -Protection Service. 1. 1091, Butterfly Valves for Fire -Protection Service. m. 1474, Standard for Adjustable Drop Nipples for Sprinkler Systems. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Standard -Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet -pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum. B. Wet -Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. C. Abbreviations: 1. American National Taper Pipe Thread (NPT). 2. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). 3. Hertz (Hz). 4. Pounds per square inch, gauge (psig). 5. Single -pole, double -throw (SPDT). 6. Volts alternating current (V ac). 7. Volts direct current (V dc). 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide design criteria and area densities for automatic sprinkler systems as indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide sprinkler systems and hangers designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. C. Hydraulically design systems. Submit calculations to verify that, at minimum, densities indicated on the Drawings are met. WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 21 13 13 - 2 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Base hydraulic calculations on water flow tests conducted within time specified by local regulations and recorded at or near proposed system tie-in point. E. Contract Drawings are provided for general layout of sprinkler system. Contractor design responsibility includes determining exact layout and dimensions of system. Clearly identify deviations from Drawings or Specifications in the Shop Drawing submittal. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Shop Drawings: a. Drawings for wet -pipe sprinkler systems; include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. b. Product Data: For pipe, fittings, valves, sprinklers and all other attachments and components needed to provide a complete and compliant installation. For electricallalarm components include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. c. Contractor -Design Submittal: Sprinkler system design; include analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer. Submit for approval by Owner's and the fire marshal prior to the start of construction. d. Coordination Drawings: 1) Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, illustrating coordination of sprinkler system with: a) Process piping. b) Domestic water piping. c) Compressed air piping. d) HVAC hydronic piping and duct work. e) Items penetrating finished ceiling, include the following: (1) Lighting fixtures. (2) Air outlets and inlets. (3) Ceiling access doors. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: Qualified installer, design technician, and professional engineer. 2. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MARCH 30, 2026 21 13 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Welding certificates. 4. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 5. Field test reports and certificates. 6. Field quality control reports. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the applicable fire protection codes, building codes, and government regulations, and requirements of the Owner's as identified on the Drawings. B. Provide approvals, permits, and required inspections. C. Provide materials and equipment UL listed and in compliance with applicable NFPA standards and fire marshal's requirements. Submit documentation that specific items furnished under this section for this Project conform to such requirements. D. Welding Qualifications: Refer to NFPA 13 for qualifications and restrictions. E. Preinstallation Meeting: 1. In accordance with Section 01 3119, Project Meetings. 2. Convene minimum 4 weeks prior to commencing work of this section. F. Conduct fire hydrant flow test and generate report. 1.06 A: QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide layout drawings for fire protection systems prepared by or under the supervision of a NICET Fire Protection Engineering Technician, Level 3 or Level 4, subfield of Fire Protection Engineering Water -Based Systems Layout or as otherwise permitted by State or local Statute. If required by State or local Statute, provide Drawings reviewed and stamped by a registered professional engineer having registration in the State of TX or other procedure acceptable to the AHJ. Submit a copy of the current certification of the NICET technician and the registered Engineer with the initial submittal. WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 21 13 13 - 4 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts, special tools, and materials: Item Sprinkler Cabinet Sprinklers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL uanti One each Six of each different size unit A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with additional requirements of NFPA 72. B. Refer to Section 28 31 00, Fire Detection and Alarm, for additional requirements and interface to wet -pipe sprinkler systems. C. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing: comply with NFPA 13. D. Piping Materials: Comply with requirements in Piping Schedule located on the Drawings. 2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: 1. Standard Weight, Schedule 40 Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A153. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. 2. Do not use light wall pipe and Schedule 5 pipe. B. Fittings: 1. Uncoated Gray -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. Provide uncoated fittings and couplings: a. Where scheduled. b. Exterior locations. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MARCH 30, 2026 21 13 13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Flanges: a. Cast Iron: ASME B 16.1 or AWWA C 110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11, AWWA C115/A21.15, 250 psi water service rating, Class 125 dimensions and bolt pattern. b. Uncoated, Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.5, Class 150, dimensions and bolt pattern. 3. Grooved -Joint, Steel Pipe Appurtenances: a. And Uncoated, Grooved -End Fittings and Couplings for Steel Piping: UL 213 listed for fire protection service, malleable -iron casting or ductile -iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. Standard EPDM gaskets. Rigid type except where flexible type is required for vibration isolation or stress relief. b. Manufacturers: 1) Tyco. 2) Victaulic Company. 4. Certify fittings, couplings, flanges, and flange adaptors used with thinwall pipe or Schedule 40 pipe by the fitting manufacturer as dimensionally compatible with and fully connectable to the pipe used without field modifications. 5. Welded or segmented fittings are not acceptable. 2.03 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Piping Between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Uncoated, standard -weight steel pipe with A: threaded ends; cast-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. B. Standard -pressure, Wet -pipe Sprinkler System, 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Standard -weight Schedule 40 black steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray -iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. Standard -weight Schedule 40 black steel pipe with roll- grooved ends; uncoated, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved -end pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 3. Type L, cast -brazed joints. 4. Type L, and pressure -sealed joints. 5. 2 inches, Type L, grooved -end fittings; grooved -end tube couplings; and grooved joints. C. Standard -pressure, Wet -pipe Sprinkler System, 2-1/2 inches and greater: 1. Standard -weight Schedule 40 black steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray -iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. Standard -weight Schedule 40 black steel pipe with cut- or roll- grooved ends; uncoated, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved -end pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 21 13 13 - 6 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.04 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C 110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 -inch (3.2 mm) thick. 1. Class 125, Cast -Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat -Face Flanges: Full -face gaskets. 2. Class 250, Cast -Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised -Face Flanges: Ring -type gaskets. B. Metal Pipe Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307 Grade B, galvanized, with galvanized nuts in accordance with ASTM A563/A563M Grade A. C. Unions: 150 psig galvanized malleable iron, ASTM A197, threaded, ground joint, integral seat. 2.05 VALVES A. General Requirements: 1. Valves shall be UL listed. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard -Pressure Piping: 175 psig. 3. Make flanged end and wafer type valves compatible for installation with flanges as specified. B. Ball Valves: 1. Standard: UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc. 2. 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 3. 2 Inches and 2-1/2 Inches: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile -iron body with grooved ends. 4. 3 Inches: Ductile -iron body with grooved ends. 5. Manufacturers: a. ASC Engineered Solutions. b. Victaulic Company. C. Iron Butterfly Valves: 1. Standard: UL 1091. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 4. Stem: Stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers: a. Global Safety Products, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Tyco. d. Victaulic Company. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MARCH 30, 2026 21 13 13 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Check Valves: 1. Standard: UL 312. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Type: Swing check or spring assisted swing check. 4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 6. Manufacturers: a. Kennedy Valve. b. Mueller Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Tyco. e. Victaulic Company. E. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves: 1. Standard: UL 262. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 4. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 5. Manufacturers: a. Kennedy. b. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. c. NIBCO INC. d. Tyco. e. Victaulic Company. F. Indicating -Type Butterfly Valves: 1. Standard: UL 1091. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Valves 2 Inches and Smaller: a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly. b. Body Material: Bronze. c. End Connections: Threaded or grooved. 4. Valves 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: a. Valve Type: Butterfly. b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. c. Stem Material: Stainless steel. d. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer. WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 2113 13 - 8 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 5. Valve Operation: Weatherproof actuator housing with handwheel and integral dual single -pole, double -throw (SPDT) (Form C) contacts, rated for a minimum of 10 amps at 125/250V ac, 2 amps at 30V dc, 10 mA minimum at 24V dc in tamper -proof cover with mounting and required hardware for attachment to indicated valves A: visual indicating device. 6. Manufacturers: a. Kennedy Valve. b. NIBCO INC. c. Tyco. d. Victaulic Company. G. NRS Gate Valves: 1. Standard: UL 262. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange. 4. Stem: Nonrising. 5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 6. Manufacturers: a. Kennedy Valve. b. Mueller Co. c. NIBCO INC. d. Tyco. e. Victaulic Company. 2.06 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES A. General: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. B. Angle Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. ASC Engineered Solutions. b. Potter -Roemer. c. United Brass Works, Inc. C. Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. NIBCO. b. Tyco. c. Victaulic Company. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MARCH 30, 2026 21 13 13 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.07 SPECIALTY VALVES A. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing. 2. Pressure Rating: a. Standard -Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum. 3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. B. Alarm Valves: 1. Standard: UL 193. 2. Design: Vertical installation. 3. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gauges, and fill -line attachment with strainer. 4. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping. 5. Manufacturers: a. Tyco; Series AV. b. Victaulic Company; Series 751. c. Viking Corporation; Series J-1. 2.08 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Flush -Type: 1. Standard: UL 405. 2. Type: Flush, for wall mounting. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Corrosion -resistant metal. 5. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers. 6. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain. 7. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type. 8. Outlet: With pipe threads. 9. Body Style: Horizontal. or Vertical. 10. Number of Inlets: Two. 11. Outlet Location: a. Back. b. Bottom. c. Left side. d. Right side. e. Top. WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 21 13 13 - 10 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 12. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR." 13. Finish: Polished chrome plated. Rough brass or bronze. Rough chrome plated. 14. Outlet Size: 4 inches. 15. Manufacturers: a. Elkhart Brass. b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. c. Potter Roemer. B. Fire Department Outlet Test Fitting: 1. Brass body and polished brass polished chrome plate lettered HYDRANT. 2. Polished brass female 4 -inch NPT by 2 -1/2 -inch male hose thread snoots with caps and chains. 3. Two-way hydrant with two outlets and inlet configuration as required for location. 4. Manufacturers: a. ASC Engineered Solutions. b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. Potter Roemer. 2.09 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Branch Outlet Fittings: 1. Standard: UL 213. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Body Material: Ductile -iron housing with EPDM seals, bolts, and nuts. 4. Type: Mechanical -cross fittings and mechanical -tee. 5. Configurations: Snap -on and strapless, ductile -iron housing with branch outlets. 6. Size: Dimension to fit on sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping. 7. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain -end pipe, or threaded. 8. Manufacturers: a. ASC Engineered Solutions. b. Tyco. c. Victaulic Company. B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MARCH 30, 2026 21 13 13 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Body Material: Cast-iron or ductile -iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 5. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded or grooved. 6. Manufacturers: a. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Tyco. d. Victaulic Company. C. Branch Line Testers: 1. Standard: UL 199. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Body Material: Brass. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 5. Inlet: Threaded. 6. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped. 7. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler. 8. Manufacturers: a. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. b. Potter -Roemer. c. Tyco. D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Body Material: Cast -bronze, cast-iron, or ductile -iron housing with sight glass. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 5. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded or grooved. 6. Manufacturers: a. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. b. Tyco. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation. 2.10 SPRINKLERS A. General: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing. 2. Pressure Rating: a. Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum. WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 21 13 13 - 12 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Sprinkler Schedule: 1. Use sprinkler types below for the following applications: a. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. b. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed sprinklers. c. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers. d. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Pendent, dry sprinklers. Sidewall, dry sprinklers. e. Special Applications: Flow control. 2. Provide sprinkler types below with finishes indicated: a. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory -painted white cover plate. b. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon. c. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon. d. Upright Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes, and corrosion -resistance where applicable. C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat -Responsive Element: 1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 2. See Drawings for additional information. 3. Sprinkler Finishes: a. Chrome plated. b. Bronze. c. Painted. 4. Special Coatings: a. Wax. b. Lead. c. Corrosion -resistant paint. 5. Sprinkler Escutcheons: a. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed -type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. b. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome -plated steel, one piece, flat. c. Sidewall Mounting: Corrosion -resistant, one piece, flat. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MARCH 30, 2026 21 13 13 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 6. Sprinkler Guards: a. Standard: UL 199. b. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler. 7. Manufacturers: a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Tyco. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation. 2.11 ALARM DEVICES A. Alarm -device types shall match piping and equipment connections. B. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell: 1. Standard: UL 464. 2. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell. 3. Size: Minimum 6 -inch (150 -mm) diameter. 4. Finish: Red enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use. 5. UL listed. 6. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation, inspection, testing, and maintenance. Bell shall be powered with supervised circuit. 7. Manufacturers: a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; Honeywell Company. b. Notifier; a Honeywell Company. c. Potter Electric Signal Company. C. Water Flow Indicators: 1. Standard: UL 346. 2. Water Flow Detector: Electrically supervised. 3. Components: Provide device with two sets of SPDT (Form C) contacts. Provide minimum switch electrical rating of 10 amps at 125/250V ac, 2 amps at 30V dc resistive, 10 mA at 24V dc. 4. Type: Paddle operated. 5. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 6. Installation: Horizontal or vertical. 7. UL listed. 8. Manufacturers: a. Potter Electric Signal Company. b. System Sensor; a Honeywell company. c. Tyco. d. Viking Corporation. WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 2113 13 - 14 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Pressure Switches: 1. Standard: UL 346. 2. Type: Electrically supervised water flow switch. 3. Components: Provide device with two sets of SPDT (Form C) contacts. Provide minimum switch electrical rating of 10 amps at 125/250V ac, 2 amps at 30V dc resistive, 10 mA at 24V dc. 4. Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow. 5. UL listed. 6. Manufacturers: a. Potter Electric Signal Company. b. System Sensor; a Honeywell company. c. Tyco. d. Viking Corporation. E. Valve Supervisory Switches: 1. Standard: UL 346. 2. Type: Electrically supervised. 3. Components: Single unit composed of dual single -pole, double -throw (SPDT) (Form C) contacts, rated for a minimum of 10 amps at 125/250V ac, 2 amps at 30V dc, 10 mA minimum at 24V dc in tamper- proof cover with mounting hardware for attachment to indicated valves. 4. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully OPEN position. 5. UL listed. 6. Manufacturers: a. ADT Security Services, Inc. b. Potter Electric Signal Company. c. System Sensor; a Honeywell company. 2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Description: 1. Standard: UL 393. 2. Dial Size: 3 -1/2 -inch to 4 -1/2 -inch (90 -mm to 115 -mm) diameter. 3. Pressure Gauge Range: 0 psig to 175 psig minimum. 4. Manufacturers: a. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division. b. Ashcroft, Inc. c. Brecco Corporation. d. WIKA Instrument Corporation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MARCH 30, 2026 21 13 13 - 15 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.13 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS A. Sleeves: 1. Walls: a. Interior and Exterior Walls: Schedule 40 carbon steel. b. Concrete: Cast-iron wall sleeves with integrally cast water stop. c. Interior Partitions: 22 -gauge (U.S. Standard) minimum galvanized sheet steel. 2. Interior Floor: Schedule 40 carbon steel. 3. Slab on Grade: Cast-iron wall sleeves with integrally cast water stop. 4. Underground (Beneath Foundations, Footings, Grade Beams): Standard weight corrugated steel, bituminous coating inside and outside, with close -fitting bituminous coated plate at each end. B. Sleeve and Penetration Packing: 1. Modular Wall and Casting Seals: Link -Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, Flexicraft PipeSeal. Sleeve and modular wall and casting seal to be furnished together as a single integrated unit. 2. Penetration Packing (With or Without Sleeve) for Interior Walls and Interior Elevated Floors: a. UL listed materials and sealant systems, by 3M Fire Barrier Wrap/Strip FS -195+. b. Flexible elastomeric material unless specified otherwise. c. Include additional materials and accessories to meet requirements of manufacturer and this section. d. Compatible with penetrated surface. e. Hazard Ratings: 1) Pipes Penetrating Fire Rated Walls, Fire Rated Ceilings, and Fire Rated Floor Slabs (1 hour or greater): Material having maximum flame spread of 25 and maximum smoke develop rating of 50, selected to maintain fire rating of penetrated surface. 2) Pipes Penetrating Other Interior Walls: Material having maximum smoke develop rating of 50, selected to prevent smoke transmission through penetration. 3) Pipes Penetrating Nonrated Interior Floors: Mineral wool and fire -rated caulk. WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 21 13 13 - 16 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Perform fire hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. B. Submit test results promptly. C. Reference Piping Schedule on the Drawings and Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for additional pipe and pipe support requirements. 3.02 SERVICE -ENTRANCE PIPING A. Connect sprinkler piping to water service piping for service entrance to building. B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gauge, drain and other accessories indicated at connection to water service piping. 3.03 WATER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS A. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gauge, drain and other accessories indicated at connection to water service piping. 3.04 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locations and Arrangements: 1. Install piping in accordance with approved Shop Drawings, schematics, and diagrams which indicate general location and arrangement of piping. 2. Deviations from approved piping Shop Drawings require written approval from AHJ. Submit written approval to Engineer before deviating from approved working plans. B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 sprinkler piping installation requirements. C. Seismic Design Category (SDC) is A, shown on fire suppression general notes and details sheets in Drawings. D. Based on the SDC, seismic bracing is not required for this Project. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MARCH 30, 2026 21 13 13 - 17 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF E. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. F. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipe 2 inches and smaller. G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13. H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. I. Install automatic drain valve at each check valve for fire department connection, to drain piping between fire department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building. J. Install alarm devices in piping systems. K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for hanger materials. L. Install pressure gauges on riser or feed main and at each sprinkler test connection. 1. Include pressure gauges with connection not less than 1/4 inch and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged to drain pipe between gauge and valve. 2. Install gauges to permit removal, and where not subject to freezing. M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water. N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. 3.05 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Steel Piping: 1. Pressure -Sealed Joints: Join with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. 2. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to NFPA 13, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Article Quality Assurance. a. Shop -weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. b. Do not use welded joints for galvanized -steel pipe. WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 21 13 13 - 18 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Cut -Grooved and Roll -Grooved Joints: a. Cut square -edge groove or roll rounded -edge groove in end of pipe according to NFPA 13. b. Install grooved joints in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation instructions. c. Provide grooved ends clean and free from indentations, projections, and tool marks. d. Join steel pipe and grooved -end fittings according to NFPA 13 for steel pipe joints. B. Dissimilar -Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.06 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install listed fire protection valves, drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and AHJ. B. Install listed fire protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply other than fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve. C. Install check valve in each water supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable water supply sources. D. Specialty Valves: 1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system. 2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain line connection. E. Specialty Sprinkler Fittings: Install downstream of control valves instead of specified fittings if indicated in approved Shop Drawings. 3.07 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels. B. Install dry -type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet -type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MARCH 30, 2026 21 13 13 - 19 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Do not install any sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or show a visible loss of fluid. Never install any sprinkler with a cracked bulb. D. Remove sprinkler bulb protector by hand. Do not use any tools or devices that could damage the bulb. 3.08 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install wall -type, fire department connection. B. Install automatic drain valve at each check valve for fire department connection. 3.09 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to NFPA 13 requirements. B. Identify system components. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until leak free. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13. 4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required. 6. Coordinate with fire pump tests. Operate as required. 7. Demonstrate that equipment hose threads match local fire department equipment. B. Sprinkler piping system is defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13; include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping." WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 21 13 13 - 20 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.11 ONSITE TRAINING A. Conduct a training course for the responding fire department and operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Training must be performed on two separate days (to accommodate different shifts of Fire Department personnel) for a period of 8 hours of normal working time and must start after the system is functionally complete and after the final acceptance test. The on -site training must cover all of the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions. B. See Sections 01 45 33, Special Inspection Observation and Testing, 01 75 01, Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing, and 01 78 43, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 3.12 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 30, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 21 IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air -Conditioning Engineers Inc. (ASHRAE): 90.1, Energy -Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. b. C533, Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. c. C534, Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. d. C547, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Product description, include list of materials, thickness for each service scheduled, and locations. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide standard, cataloged products, new and commercially available, suitable for service requiring high performance and reliability with low maintenance, and free from all defects. B. Provide materials by firms engaged in the manufacture of insulation products of the types and characteristics specified herein, whose products have been in use for not less than 5 years. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION MARCH 17, 2026 22 07 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY C. UL Listing or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory is required to indicate fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Manufacturer's Stamp or Label: 1. Deliver insulation, jackets, cements, adhesives and coatings with a manufacturer's stamp or label attached, giving name of manufacturer, brand, and description of material. 2. Insulation Packages and Containers: Mark "asbestos -free." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Insulation Exterior: Cleanable, grease -resistant, nonflaking, and nonpeeling. B. Conform to referenced publications and specified temperature ranges and densities in pounds per cubic foot. C. Insulation for Fittings, Flanges, and Valves: Premolded, precut, or job - fabricated insulation of same thickness and conductivity as used on adjacent piping. D. Fire Resistance: 1. Provide noncombustible insulation, adhesives, vapor barrier materials and other accessories, except as specified herein. 2. Use no fugitive or corrosive treatments to impart flame resistance. 3. Flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration as a result of effects of moisture or high humidity are not acceptable. 4. Fire Hazard Rating for Materials including Facings, Mastics, and Adhesives: Not to exceed 25 for flame spread without evidence of continued progressive combustion, and 50 for smoke, developed as per tests conducted in accordance with NFPA 255 methods. 5. Materials exempt from fire-resistant rating: a. Nylon anchors. b. Treated wood inserts. 6. Materials exempt from fire-resistant rating when installed in outside locations, buried, or encased in concrete: a. Polyurethane insulation. b. PVC casing. c. Fiberglass -reinforced plastic casing. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 220700-2 MARCH 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.02 PIPE INSULATION A. Type P1 —Fiberglass (ASTM C547, Type 1 (Minus 20 Degrees F to 500 Degrees F): 1. Fiberglass, UL -rated, preformed, sectional rigid, minimum 4 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) density, K factor 0.23 maximum at 75 degrees F mean, with factory -applied all -service jacket (ASJ) composed of reinforced kraft paper and aluminum foil laminate. Provide jacket with self-sealing lap to facilitate closing longitudinal and end joints. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. CertainTeed; Preformed Pipe Insulation. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok HP -T. c. Owens/Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. d. Knauf Pipe Insulation; Crown Pipe Insulation. B. Type P3—Elastomeric (ASTM C534, Minus 40 Degrees F to 220 Degrees F): 1. Flexible, closed cell elastomeric. 2. Nominal 6 pcf density, K factor 0.27 maximum at 75 degrees F mean. 3. Water Vapor Transmission: 0.1 perm -inch, or less. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Armacell; AP Armaflex. b. Nomaco; K -Flex LS. C. Type P4 —Cellular Glass: 1. Cellular glass, closed cell, rigid, nominal 8 pcf density, maximum K factor 0.33 at 75 degrees F mean, with factory -applied FSK (foil- scrim-kraft) vapor barrier jacket, for temperatures to 900 degrees F. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Pittsburgh -Corning; Foamglas. 2.03 INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS A. Type Fl —PVC: 1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing, white, for straight run piping and fitting locations, temperatures to 150 degrees F. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. Ceel-Co; 550. B. Type F2 —Paint: 1. Acrylic latex paint, white, and suitable for outdoor use. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Armstrong; WB Armaflex fmish. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION MARCH 17, 2026 22 07 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY C. Type F3 —Aluminum: 1. Aluminum Roll Jacketing: For straight run piping, wrought aluminum Alloy 3003, 5005, 1100, or 3105 to ASTM B209 with H-14 temper, minimum 0.016 -inch thickness, with smooth mill finish. 2. Moisture Barrier: Provide factory -applied moisture barrier, consisting of 40 -pound kraft paper with 1 -mil -thick low -density polyethylene film, heat and pressure bonded to inner surface of the aluminum jacketing. 3. Fitting Covers: Material as for aluminum roll jacketing, premolded, one - or two-piece covers, which includes elbows, tee/valves, endcaps, mechanical line couplings, and specialty fittings. 4. Manufacturer and Product: RPR Products; INSUL-MATE. D. Type F4 —Ceramic: 1. Insulating duct coating, fluid -applied coating with ceramic insulating particles. 2. Manufacturer: ASTEC, by Insulating Coatings Corp., Inverness, FL. E. Type F5 —Pit Wrap Jacket: 1. Heat sealing multi -laminate protection system for protection of underground cellular glass insulation. 2. Provide and install in accordance with cellular glass manufacturer's instructions. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Pittsburgh -Corning; PITT WRAP. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Apply insulation over clean, finish painted, and dry surfaces. C. Install insulation after piping system has been pressure tested and leaks corrected. D. Use insulating cements, lagging adhesives, and weatherproof mastics recommended by insulation manufacturer. E. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run. Do not use cut pieces of scraps abutting each other. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 220700-4 MARCH 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. G. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. Seal open ends of insulation with mastic. Sectionally seal butt ends of chilled water and condensate drain piping insulation at fittings with white vapor barrier coating. H. Cover valves, flanges, fittings, and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job -fabricated units. Finish cold pipe fittings with white vapor barrier coating and hot piping with white vinyl acrylic mastic, both reinforced with glass cloth. I. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. Install protective metal shields and foamglass inserts where pipe hangers bear on outside of insulation. K. Insulation on piping that is to be heat traced shall be installed after installation of heat tape. L. Insulate valve bodies, flanges, and pipe couplings. M. Insulate and vapor seal hangers, supports, anchors, and other piping appurtenances that are secured directly to cold surfaces. N. Do not insulate flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints. O. Do not allow insulation to cover nameplates or code inspection stamps. P. Install removable insulation sections on devices that require access for maintenance of equipment or removal, such as unions and strainer end plates. Q. Connection to Existing Piping: Cut back existing insulation to remove portion damaged by piping revisions. Install new insulation. R. Cold Surfaces: Provide continuous vapor seal on insulation on cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used. S. Placement: 1. Slip insulation on pipe or tubing before assembly, when practical, to avoid longitudinal seams. 2. Insulate valves and fittings with sleeved or cut pieces of same material. 3. Seal and tape joints. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION MARCH 17, 2026 22 07 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF T. Insulation at Hangers and Supports: Install under piping, centered at each hanger or support. U. Roof Drains: Insulate vertical drops from roof drain to horizontal pipe, exposed and concealed horizontal piping, and 2 feet down on vertical risers from horizontal pipe. V. Roof and Overflow Drain Sumps: Insulate underside. W. Vapor Barrier: 1. Provide continuous vapor barrier at joints between rigid insulation and pipe insulation. 2. Install vapor barrier jackets with pipe hangers and supports outside jacket. 3. Do not use staples and screws to secure vapor sealed system components. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS A. Use a continuous friction type joint to hold jacket in -place, providing positive weatherproof seal over entire length of jacket. B. Secure circumferential joints with preformed snap straps containing weatherproof sealant. C. On exterior piping, apply coating over insulation and vapor barrier to prevent damage when aluminum fitting covers are installed. D. Do not use screws or rivets to fasten the fitting covers. E. Install removable prefabricated aluminum covers on exterior flanges and unions. F. Caulk and seal exterior joints to make watertight. 3.03 INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Potable Cold Water: 1. Type P3, elastomeric. 2. 1 -inch thickness for all pipe sizes. B. Potable Hot Water: 1. Type P1, fiberglass. 2. 1 -inch thickness for all pipe sizes. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 22 07 00 - 6 MARCH 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Sump: 1. Type P1, fiberglass. 2. 1 -inch thickness. D. Pipe Hangers: 1. Type P1, Fiberglass: UL -rated, preformed rigid pipe insulation inserts of thickness equal to adjoining insulation, 10 inches in length, with factory -applied, vinyl -coated and embossed vapor barrier jacket with self-sealing lap. 2. Type P3, Elastomeric: Rigid insulation section with 9 -inch -long, 16 -gauge galvanized steel saddle. 3.04 INSULATION FINISH APPLICATIONS A. Piping Insulation (Concealed Areas): Factory finish. B. Piping Insulation (Exposed to View, Indoors): Type Fl, PVC. C. Piping Insulation (Outdoors): 1. Type F2, paint (for use with Type P3, elastomeric). 2. Type F3, aluminum. D. Apply coating of insulating cement where needed to obtain smooth and continuous appearance. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test factory -applied materials assembled. Field -applied materials may be tested individually. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION MARCH 17,2026 220700-7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 10 01 PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Gas Association (AGA): a. B109.1, Diaphragm Type Gas Displacement Meters (under 500 Cubic Feet Per Hour Capacity). b. B 109.2, Diaphragm Type Gas Displacement Meters (500 Cubic Feet Per Hour Capacity and Over). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. American Public Works Association (APWA): Uniform Color Code. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. b. B31.9, Building Services Piping. 5. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE): a. 1010, Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters. b. 1050, Performance Requirements for Stack Air Admittance Valves for Sanitary Drainage Systems. c. 1051, Performance Requirements for Individual and Branch Type Air Admittance Valves for Sanitary Drainage Systems. d. 1070, Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting Devices. e. 1071, Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Plumbed Emergency Equipment. 6. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A47/A47M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. b. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. c. A74, Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. d. A105/A105M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. e. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. f. A179/A179M, Standard Specification for Seamless Cold -Drawn Low -Carbon Steel Heat -Exchanger and Condenser Tubes. g. A181/A181M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General -Purpose Piping. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 22 1001- 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF h. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. i. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. j. A197/A197M, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. k. A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 1. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. m. A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure -Containing Parts. n. A518/A518M, Standard Specification for Corrosion -Resistant High -Silicon Iron Castings. o. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. p. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. q. A861, Standard Specification for High -Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings. r. A888, Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. s. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. t. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. u. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. v. B75B75M, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. w. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. x. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper -Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes. y. B 127, Standard Specification for Nickel -Copper Alloy (UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip. z. B 139/B 139M, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod, Bar, and Shapes. aa. B 164, Standard Specification for Nickel -Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire. bb. B 194, Standard Specification for Copper -Beryllium Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar. cc. B306, Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). dd. C564, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. ee. Cl 173 Standard Specification for Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Piping Systems. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF ff. C1277, Standard Specification for Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. gg. C 1460, Standard Specification for Shielded Transition Couplings for use with Dissimilar DWV Pipe and Fittings Above Ground. hh. C 1540, Standard Specification for Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. ii. D 1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. jj. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. kk. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 11. D2239, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. mm. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. nn. D2513, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings. oo. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. pp. D2683, Standard Specification for Socket -Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter -Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing. qq. D2855, Standard Practice for Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. rr. D3035, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR -PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter. ss. D3261, Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing. tt. D3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials. uu. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. vv. E438, Standard Specification for Glasses in Laboratory Apparatus. ww. F656, Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. xx. F714, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 221001-3 MARY'S CREEK WRY yy. F876, Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. zz. F877, Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Hot- and Cold -Water Distribution Systems. aaa. F1412, Standard Specification for Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings for Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems. bbb. F 1924, Standard Specification for Plastic Mechanical Fittings for Use on Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene Gas Distribution Pipe and Tubing. ccc. F 1973, Standard Specification for Factory Assembled Anodeless Risers and Transition Fittings in Polyethylene (PE) and Polyamide 11 (PA 11) and Polyamide 12 (PA 12) Fuel Gas Distribution Systems. ddd. F2023, Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance of Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe, Tubing and Systems to Hot Chlorinated Water. eee. F2080, Standard Specification for Cold -Expansion Fittings with Metal Compression -Sleeves for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe and SDR9 Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT) Pipe. 7. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. Cl 04/A2 1.4, Standard for Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. b. C110/A21.10, Standard for Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings. c. C111/A21.11, Standard for Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. d. C 115/A21.15, Standard for Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. e. C151/A21.51, Standard for Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. f. C203, Coal -Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines, Enamel and Tape, Hot -Applied. g. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm). h. C505, Resilient -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. i. C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. j. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. k. C65 1, Disinfecting Water Mains. 1. C904, Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pressure Pipe, 1/2 In. (13 mm) Through 3 In. (76 mm), for Water Service. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -4 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 8. Canadian Gas Association CGA 3.11, Lever -Operated Pressure - Lubricated Plug -Type Gas Shut -Off Valves. 9. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): a. 301, Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. b. 310, Specification for Couplings for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Strom Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 10. CSA Group. 11. FM Global (FM). 12. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO). 13. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS): a. SP -58, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation. b. SP -69, Pipe Hangers And Supports - Selection And Application. c. SP -80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves. d. SP -110, Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. 14. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. 15. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): WH 201, Water Hammer Arresters Standard. 16. UL. 17. United States Department of Transportation (USDOT), 49 CFR Part 192, Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Where pipe diameter, thickness, pressure class, pressure rating, or thrust restraint is not shown or specified, design piping system in accordance with the following: 1. Building Service Piping: ASME B31.9, as applicable. 2. Sanitary Building Drainage and Vent Systems: ICC International Plumbing Code. Local plumbing code. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 26, 2026 AND ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 22 1001 -5 MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.03 SUBMITTAL A. Action Submittals: 1. Product data sheets. 2. Shop Drawings: Show Contractor recommended changes in location of fixtures or equipment. 3. Isometric riser diagrams. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Changes in location of equipment or piping that affect connecting or adjacent work, before proceeding with the Work. 2. Complete list of products proposed for installation. 3. Test records produced during testing. 4. For Polyethylene (PE) Pipe: a. Certificates of qualification for persons to be fusing PE pipe. b. Experience and training record of persons to be fusing PE pipe. c. Testing Plan: 1) Submit at least 15 days prior to testing; include following as a minimum: a) Testing dates. b) Piping systems and section(s) to be tested. c) Method of isolation. d) Method of conveying water from source to system being tested. d. Certifications of Calibration: Approved testing laboratory certificate if pressure gauge for hydrostatic test has been previously used. If pressure gauge is new, no certificate is required. e. Test report documentation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372. 1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -6 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2.02 PIPING A. Piping Material: Refer to Piping Data Sheet(s), Article Supplements. 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers: 1. Clevis Type: MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69, Type 1 or Type 6. a. Anvil; Figure 104 or 260, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches. b. B -Line; Figure B3198H or B3100, sizes 3/8 inch through 30 inches. 2. Hinged Split -Ring Pipe Clamp: MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69, Type 6 or Type 12. a. Anvil; Figure 104, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches. b. B -Line; Figure B3198H, sizes 3/8 inch through 3 inches. 3. Hanger Rods, Clevises, Nuts, Sockets, and Turnbuckles: In accordance with MSS SP -58. 4. Attachments: a. I -Beam Clamp: Concentric loading type, MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69, Type 21, Type 28, Type 29, or Type 30, which engage both sides of flange. b. Concrete Insert: MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69, Type 18, continuous channel insert with load rating not less than that of hanger rod it supports. B. Saddle Supports: I. Pedestal Type: Schedule 40 pipe stanchion, saddle, and anchoring flange. a. Nonadjustable Saddle: MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69, Type 37 with U -bolt. 1) Anvil; Figure 259, sizes 4 inches through 36 inches. 2) B -Line; Figure B3090, sizes 2-1/2 inches through 36 inches. b. Adjustable Saddle: MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69, Type 38 without clamp. 1) Anvil; Figure 264, sizes 2-1/2 inches through 36 inches. 2) B -Line; Figure B3093, sizes 2-1/2 inches through 36 inches. C. Wall Brackets: 1. Welded Steel Bracket: MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69, Type 33 (heavy- duty). a. Anvil; Figure 199, 3,000 -pound rating. b. B -Line; Figure B3067, 3,000 -pound rating. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 26, 2026 AND ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 22 1001 -7 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. One -Hole Clamp: Anvil; Figure 126, sizes 3/8 inch through 4 inches. 3. Channel Type: a. Unistrut. b. Anvil; Power -Strut. c. B -Line; Strut System. d. Aickinstrut (FRP). D. Pipe Clamps: 1. Riser Clamp: MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69, Type 8. a. Anvil; Figure 261, sizes 3/4 inch through 24 inches. b. B -Line; Figure B3373, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches. E. Channel Type Support Systems: 1. Channel Size: 12 -gauge, 1 -5/8 -inch -wide minimum steel, 1 -1/2 -inch - wide minimum FRP. 2. Members and Connections: Design for all loads with safety factor of 5. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. B -Line; Strut System. b. Unistrut. c. Anvil; Power -Strut. d. Aickinstrut (FRP System). F. Accessories: 1. Insulation Shields: a. Type: Galvanized steel or stainless steel, MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69, Type 40. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Anvil; Figure 167, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. 2) B -Line; Figure B3151, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. 2. Welding Insulation Saddles: a. Type: MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69, Type 39. b. Manufacturers and Products: c. Anvil; Figure Series 160, sizes 1 inch through 36 inches. d. B -Line; Figure Series B3160, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. G. Galvanize hangers, rods, clamps, protective shields, and hanger accessories. H. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Assembly consisting of structure attachments with rod size dependent upon total weight supported, and spacing of assemblies determined by minimum pipe size included in group supported. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -8 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Trapeze Horizontal: Structural angle or channel section of sufficient size to prevent measurable sag between rods. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Unistrut. b. B -Line; Strut System. c. Anvil; Power -Strut. d. Aickinstrut (FRP System). 2.04 INSULATION A. As specified in Section 22 07 00, Plumbing Piping Insulation. 2.05 VALVES A. General: 1. Furnish complete with necessary operating hand wheels, chain wheels, extension stems, floor stands, worm and gear operators, operating nuts, chains, and wrenches. 2. Renewable Parts Including Discs, Packing, and Seats: Types as recommended by valve manufacturer for intended service. 3. Units shall have name of manufacturer and size of valve cast on body or bonnet or shown on a permanently attached plate in raised letters. B. Design Features: 1. Brass and bronze components, including appurtenances in contact with water. 2. Alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and 2 percent aluminum. 3. Alloys are of the following ASTM designations: a. B61, B62, B98/B98M (Alloy A, B, or D), B127, B139 (Alloy A), B 164, and B 194. b. Stainless steel Alloy 18-8 may be substituted for bronze as an option with approval of Engineer. 4. Gland Bolts on Iron Body Valves: Bronze, fitted with brass nuts. C. Valve Operators: 1. Open by turning counterclockwise. 2. Worm and Gear Operators On Manually Operated Valves: Totally enclosed design, proportioned as to permit operation of valve under full operating head with maximum pull of 40 pounds on handwheel or crank. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 26, 2026 AND ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 22 1001 -9 MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Self-locking type to prevent the disc or plug from creeping. 4. Self -Locking Worm Gears: a. One-piece design of gear bronze material, accurately machine cut. b. Worm: Hardened alloy steel, with thread ground and polished. c. Reduction gearing shall run in a proper lubricant. 5. Galvanize handwheels. D. Gate Valves: 1. Type V100, 3 Inches and Smaller for Water and Air Services: a. All -bronze with screwed bonnet, single solid wedge gate with nonrising stem, and handwheel operator. b. Rated 125 -pound SWP, 200 -pound WOG. c. Manufacturers and Products for Threaded Ends: 1) Crane; No. 438. 2) Nibco; Model No. T-1 13. d. Manufacturers and Products for Soldered Ends: 1) Crane; No. 1701S. 2) Nibco; Model No. S-113. 2. Type V 101 Gate Valve 3 Inches and Smaller: a. All -bronze, screwed bonnet, packed gland, single solid wedge gate, rising stem, Class 125 rated 200 psi CWP, complies with MSS SP -80 Type 2. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Crane; Figure 428, NPT threaded ends. 2) Stockham; Figure B-100, NPT threaded ends. 3) Crane; Figure 1334, soldered ends. 4) Stockham; Figure B-108, soldered ends. 3. Type V102 Gate Valve 3 Inches and Smaller: a. All -bronze, screwed bonnet, packed gland, NPT threaded ends, single solid wedge gate, nonrising stem, Class 150 rated 150 psi SWP/300 psi CWP, complies with MSS SP -8O Type 1. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Crane; Figure 437. 2) Stockham; Figure B-128. 4. Type V103 Gate Valve 3 Inches and Smaller: a. All -bronze, screwed bonnet, packed gland, NPT threaded ends, single solid wedge gate, rising stem, Class 150 rated 150 psi SWP/300 psi CWP, complies with MSS SP -8O Type 2. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Crane; Figure 431. 2) Stockham; Figure B122. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 5. Type V108, 4 Inches and Larger for Water and Air Services: a. Iron body, bronze mounted, with flanged ends, solid wedge gate with nonrising stem, and handwheel operator. b. Rated 125 -pound SWP, 200 -pound WOG. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Crane; No. 461. 2) Nibco; Model No. F-619. 6. Type V137 Resilient Seated Gate Valve 4 Inches to 12 Inches: a. UL listed and FM approved for fire protection, iron body, resilient seat, bronze mounted, nonrising stem, 2 -inch operating nut, in accordance with AWWA C509, design working water pressure 200 psig, full port, fusion -epoxy coated inside and outside per AWWA C550, NSF/ANSI 61 certified. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Kennedy Valve; Ken -Seal II. 2) M&H Valve; Style 4067. 3) Mueller; P-2360. 7. Type V140 Gate Valve 3/4 Inch to 2 Inches: a. UL listed and FM approved, all bronze, solid wedge disc, outside screw and yoke, screwed ends rated 175 -pound WOG minimum. b. Manufacturer and Product: Kennedy; UL/FM. E. Hose Valves and Hydrants: 1. Wall Hydrant: a. Nonfreeze box type with chrome -plated face, integral vacuum breaker, bronze casing, T -handle key, and 3/4 -inch inlet and hose connection. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) J. R. Smith; Figure 5509. 2) Josam; 71000 Series. 3) ZurnZ-1300. 2. Hydrant: a. Sill faucet with removable T -handle, polished chrome finish, and 3/4 -inch inlet and hose connection. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) ZurnZ1341. 2) Chicago; No. 387, with No. E27 vacuum breaker. 3) Acorn; No. 8121. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 22 1001 - 11 MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Globe Valves: 1. Type V200 Globe Valve 3 Inches and Smaller: a. All -bronze, union bonnet, packed gland, inside screw, rising stem, TFE disc, Class 150 rated 150 psi SWP/300 psi CWP, complies with MSS SP -80 Type 2. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Stockham; Figure B -22T, NPT threaded end. 2) Crane Co.; Figure 7TF, NPT threaded end. 3) Milwaukee; Model 1590T, soldered ends. 4) NIBCO; Figure S -235-Y, soldered ends. 2. Type V201 Angle Pattern Valve 2 Inches and Smaller: a. All -bronze, NPT threaded ends, union bonnet, packed gland, inside screw, rising stem, TFE disc, Class 150 rated 150 psi SWP/300 psi CWP, complies with MSS SP -8O Type 2. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Stockham; Figure B -222T. 2) Crane Co.; Figure 17TF. 3. Type V235 Angle Type Hose Valve 3/4 Inch: a. 3/4 -inch NPT female inlet, 3/4 -inch male hose thread outlet, heavy rough brass body rated 125 psi, lockshield bonnet, removable handle, atmospheric vacuum breaker conforming to ASSE 1011 and IAPMO code. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Acorn; 8126, surface pipe mount valve, bent nose without flange. 2) Acorn; 8121, surface mount through wall valve, bent nose with flange. 3) Acorn; 8131, pipe and pedestal mounted valve located above 6 inches, straightnose. 4) Acorn; 8136, pedestal mounted valve located lower than 6 inches, inverted nose. 4. Type V236 Globe Style Hose Valve 1 Inch to 3 Inches: a. All -bronze, NPT threaded ends, inside screw -type rising stem, TFE disc, complies with MSS SP -80, rated 300 WOG. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Stockham; Figure B -22T. 2) Crane Co.; Cat. No. 7TF. 3) Nibco; Figure T -235-Y. 5. Type V237 Angle Pattern Hose Valve 1 Inch to 2 Inches: a. All -bronze, NPT threaded ends, inside screw -type rising stem, TFE disc, complies with MSS SP -80, rated 300 WOG. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Stockham; Figure B -222T. 2) Crane Co.; Cat. No. 17TF. 3) Nibco; Figure T -335-Y. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF G. Ball Valves: 1. Type V300 Ball Valve 3 Inches and Smaller for General Water and Air Service: a. Two-piece, standard port, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and end piece, hard chrome -plated solid bronze or brass ball, RTFE seats and packing, blowout -proof stem, adjustable packing gland, zinc -coated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip, rated 600 -pound CWP, 150 -pound SWP, complies with MSS SP -110. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Threaded: a) Conbraco Apollo; 70-100. b) Nibco; T-580-70. 2) Soldered: a) Conbraco Apollo; 70-200. b) Nibco; S-580-70. 2. Type V301 Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for General Water and Air Service: a. Two-piece, full port, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and end piece, hard chrome -plated solid bronze or brass ball, RTFE seats and packing, blowout -proof stem, adjustable packing gland, zinc - coated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip, rated 600 -pound WOG, 150 -pound SWP, complies with MSS SP -110. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Threaded: a) Conbraco Apollo; 77-100. b) Nibco; T-585-70. 2) Soldered: a) Conbraco Apollo; 77-200. b) Nibco; S-585-70. 3. Type V304 Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for General Water and Air Service: a. Three-piece body type, bronze body and end pieces, hard -chrome plated bronze or brass ball, full bore port, RTFE seats and packing, blowout -proof stem, zinc -plated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip. b. Rated 6 -pound WOG, 150 -psi SWP. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Threaded Ends: a) Milwaukee; BA -300. b) Nibco; T -595-Y. c) Conbraco Apollo; 82-100. 2) Soldered Ends: a) Milwaukee; BA -350. b) Nibco; S -595-Y. c) Conbraco Apollo; 82-200. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 22 10 01 - 13 MARY'S CREEK WRY 4. Type V311 Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for Natural Gas and Propane Service: a. UL Listed for gas to 125 psig and flammable liquids to 250 psig: b. Two-piece body type, bronze or forged brass body and end pieces, hard -chrome plated bronze or brass ball, full bore port, RTFE seats and packing, blowout -proof stem, zinc -plated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip. c. Full port through 1 inch. Standard port 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches. d. Rated 250 -pound WOG. e. Approvals: 1) CSA certified. 2) UL 842 Listed for flammable liquids and gases. 3) MSS SP -1 10 compliant. f. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Threaded Ends: a) Conbraco Apollo; 80-100. b) Norgas; S95 Series. c) Watts; FBV-3C. d) Nibco; T -585 -70 -UL (1/4 inch to 1 inch), T -580 -70 -UL (1-1/4 inch to 2 inches). 5. Type V330, Thermoplastic Ball Valves 2 Inches and Smaller for Water Service: a. Rated 150 psi at 105 degrees F, with ASTM D1784, Type I, Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) body, ball, and stem. b. End entry, double union design, with replaceable Teflon seats and Viton or Teflon O-ring stem seals. c. Furnish with hand lever operator. d. Single union ball valves with flanged ends drilled to 150 -pound ANSI Standard are acceptable. e. Manufacturers: 1) Asahi/America. 2) R&G Sloane Manufacturing Co., Inc. H. Plug Valve: Type V409 Lubricated Tapered Plug Valve 1/2 Inch to 6 Inches for Natural Gas Service: a. Lubricated type with grey iron or semi -steel body and plug, rated 200 CWP working pressure, with bubble -tight gas shutoff. b. Plug lubrication with side mount sealant injection fitting. c. Plug mechanically balanced with spring for predictable operating torque. d. Flanged ends 2-1/2 inches and larger, threaded ends for smaller valves. e. Actuator rated with actuator mounting pads where required. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 - 14 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF f. Round or rectangular port of no less than 80 percent of connecting pipe area. g. Buna-N O-ring, stainless spring and stem, TFE stem seal. h. Standards Conformance: 1) Canadian Gas Association CGA 3.11, Lever -Operated Pressure -Lubricated Plug -Type Gas Shut -Off Valves. 2) United States Department of Transportation (DOT), 49 CFR Part 192, Pipeline Safety Regulations. i. Operators: 1) 3 -Inch and 4 -Inch Valves: Wrench lever manual. 2) 6 -Inch Valves: Totally enclosed, geared, manual operator, with handwheel, 2 -inch nut, or chain wheel. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Flowserve Nordstrom; Figure 114 (1/2 inch to 2 inches), Figure 115 (2-1/2 inches to 4 inches). 2) Homestead; Figure 601 (1/2 inch to 2 inches), Figure 602 (2-1/2 inches to 6 inches). 3) Milliken; Series 200M (1/2 inch to 2 inches), Series 201M (2-1/2 inches to 6 inches). I. Check Valves: 1. Type V600, Check Valves 3 Inches and Smaller: a. Bronze body, wye pattern, threaded ends and cap, regrinding seat, and swing type disc. b. Rated 125 -pound SWP, 200 -pound WOG. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Crane; No. 37. 2) Walworth Co.; Figure 406. 2. Type V602 Check Valve 2 Inches and Smaller: a. All bronze, threaded cap, threaded ends, swing type replaceable Teflon disc and bronze disc holder, rated 150 -pound SWP, 300 -pound WOG. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Walworth; Figure 3412. 2) Milwaukee; Figure 510. 3. Backwater Check Valve 2 Inches to 8 Inches: a. Coated cast iron backwater check valve, integral offset type swing -check assembly. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) J. R. Smith; Figure 7012. 2) Josam; Series 67500. 3) Zurn; Model Z-1095. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 22 10 01 - 15 MARY'S CREEK WRY J. Balancing Valves (Recirculating Hot Water): 1. Bronze, calibrated balancing type with provisions for connecting a portable differential pressure meter. Meter connections shall have built-in check valves. 2. An integral pointer shall register degree of valve opening. 3. Construct with internal seals to prevent leakage around rotating element. 4. Rated for 125 psig working pressure at maximum temperature of 250 degrees F. 5. Furnish one pressure gauge type readout meter in carrying case. 6. Furnish with preformed polyurethane insulation valve enclosure, suitable for use on hot water systems. 7. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bell & Gossett; No. CB circuit setter. b. TACO; Series 790. K. Water Pressure Reducing Valves 1/2 Inch Through 2-1/2 Inches: 1. Spring controlled, with a neoprene diaphragm. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Fisher; Type 75. b. Watts; No. 223. L. Pressure Reducing Valve, Natural Gas High Pressure: 1. Direct diaphragm, spring controlled cast-iron body, spring aluminum diaphragm and spring case, nitrile disc/diaphragm/O-rings, internal relief, NPT thread ends, 125-psig rated. 2. Valve Body Size: 1/2 inch to 2 inches, as indicated. 3. Inlet pressure of 5 psig to 125 psig, as indicated. 4. Outlet Pressure: Set at 2 psig to 10 psig, as indicated. 5. Valve Orifice Size: 1/4 inch to 1-3/16 inches, as indicated. 6. Manufacturer and Product: Fisher; S201H, S202H, and S202K. M. Gauge Cock Valves 1/8 Inch to 3/8 Inch: 1. Bronze body, hexagon male and female ends, and tee head. 2. Rated for 125 -pound SWP. 3. Manufacturers and Product: a. Ernst Gage Co. b. Lunkenheimer. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 - 16 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF N. Manual Air Vent Valves: 1. With coin -operated air vent. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bell & Gossett; No. 4V. b. Dole; No. 9. O. Point of Use Thermostatic Mixing Valve Assembly (3/8 -inch Under Sink): 1. Function: Provide tempered water at 0.5 gpm to 2.25 gpm. 2. Listed per ASSE 1070. Bronze body, lead free construction rated to 150 psig maximum inlet pressure. 3. Inlets: One each, 3/8 -inch compression fittings, cold and hot water. 4. Outlet: 3/8 -inch compression fittings. 5. Self-contained; no electrical requirements. 6. Performance: With 120 degrees F to 180 degrees F hot inlet and 39 degrees F to 85 degrees F cold inlet, deliver 80 degrees F to 100 degrees F at inlet pressures between 30 psig and 100 psig. 7. Set outlet at 105 degrees F maximum unless otherwise noted. 8. Manufacturers and Products: a. Watts; LFUSG-B-M2. b. Powers; LFe480. c. Leonard Valve; Model 170-LF. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Strainers for Water Service: 1. Iron body, Y -pattern, 125 -pound rated, with screwed bronze or bolted iron cap. 2. Screen: Heavy -gauge stainless steel or monel, 30 mesh. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Crane; No. 988-1/2. b. Mueller; No. 758. B. Flexible Connectors for Stainless Steel Gas Lines: 1. Corrugated, Type 316 stainless steel hose, with 10 -inch live length and Type 316 stainless steel male NPT pipe connectors at each end. 2. Manufacturers and Product: a. Flexonics; Braided Rex -Weld. b. Kin -Line. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 26, 2026 AND ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 22 10 01 - 17 MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Vacuum Breakers 2 Inches and Smaller: 1. Angle type, as required. 2. Manufacturers: a. Febco. b. Watts. D. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Materials: ASSE 1010 certified, Type L copper tube, HHPP piston with two lubricated EPDM O -rings, FDA approved lubricant, rolled piston stop, wrought copper male thread adapter. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Sioux Chief Mfg. Co., Inc.; Series 650 and Series 660. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. E. Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. J. R. Smith; Figure 1720. b. Josam; No. 26400. F. Flashing Sleeves for Roof Penetrations: 1. Built -Up Bituminous Roofing: Fabricate of lead as specified in Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 2. Single -Ply Membrane Roofing: Pipe seals as specified in Section 07 70 01, Roof Specialties and Accessories. G. Insulating Dielectric Unions and Flanges: 1. Galvanically compatible with piping to which attached and pressure ratings suitable for system working pressures. 2. Unions 2 Inches and Smaller: Screwed or solder joint type. 3. Unions 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Flanged type, complete with bolt insulators, dielectric gasket, bolts, and nuts. 4. Manufacturers: a. Epco Sales, Inc., Cleveland, OH. b. Capitol Insulation Unions. H. Air Admittance Valve (AAV): 1. PVC construction with internal air check valve and insect screen. 2. Unit shall meet ASSE 1051 for fixture and branch air admittance valves. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 - 18 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Unit shall bear seal of ASSE approval. 4. Manufacturer and Product: Studor, Inc., Dunedin, Florida; Maxi -Vent (2 inches to 4 inches). I. Joint Solder: 95-5 wire solder, ASTM B32, Grade 95 TA. Lead free, NSF certified. Do not use cored solder. J. Pipe Joint Sealer: Compound insoluble in water or Teflon tape; approved by NFS for use in potable water. K. Rubber Gaskets: ASTM C564. 2.07 MEASURING DEVICES A. Thermometer: 1. Adjustable angle, organic spirit type, blue in color, with 9 -inch case and scale range in degrees F, as shown. 2. Furnish with 3 -1/2 -inch stem length and separable NPT lead-free brass thermowell. 3. For locations above 6 feet off floor or grade. 4. Manufacturers and Product: a. Trerice Co.; Model BX9140304. b. Weksler. B. Thermometer Dial Type: 1. Compact dial type, 2-1/2 inch diameter, adjustable angle, zinc plated steel case with center back entry. 2. Scale range in degrees F, as shown. 3. Bimetal spiral spring sensing elements. 4. Furnish with separable NPT lead-free brass thermowell. 5. Provide at each water heater and tempering valve outlet, and at the return on each recirculating hot or tempered water system. 6. Manufacturers and Product: a. Watts, Bimetal Model LFTB-2-1/2. b. Trerice Co. c. Weksler. C. Pressure Gauges: 1. Construction: 3 -1/2 -inch gauge size, 0 kPa to 690 kPa, 0 psi to 160 psi range, steel case, glass crystal, brass movement, and 1/4 -inch NPT lower connection. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 26, 2026 AND ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 22 10 01 - 19 MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Furnish with 1/4 -inch brass gauge cock. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Ashcroft; Type 1008. b. Marsh; J80. c. Marshalltown. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to the Area Classification and Materials Selection Table in the General Section on the Drawings for installation material requirements. B. Install plumbing systems to meet applicable plumbing code. C. Field Obstructions: 1. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of piping. Provide offsets around obstructions. 2. Do not modify structural components, unless approved by Engineer. D. Sleeves: 1. Pipe sizes shown are nominal sizes, unless shown or specified otherwise. 2. Provide piping passing through walls, floors, or ceilings with standard - weight pipe sleeves. 3. Provide pipes passing through finished walls with chrome -plated canopy flanges. 4. Dry pack sleeves in existing work in -place and provide finished appearance. 5. Pack holes left by removal of existing piping with grout and finish to match adjacent surface. E. Provide unions in piping systems at connections to equipment. F. Provide shielded transition couplings, insulating dielectric unions and flanges between ferrous and nonferrous piping and where otherwise required for electrically insulated connection. G. Pipe air release valves, water -lubricated bearings, and other appurtenances having water effluent with copper tubing to nearest drain. H. Provide isolation valves and strainers at pressure regulators. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -20 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe (Above Ground Only): 1. Ream, clean, and remove burrs and mill scale from piping before making up. 2. Seal joints with pipe joint sealer or Teflon tape. 3. Steel pipe used for natural gas shall gas rated per Fuel Gas Code. B. Copper Tubing: 1. Cut tubing square and remove burrs. 2. Clean both inside of fittings and outside of tubing with steel wool and hydrochloric acid before soldering. 3. Prevent annealing of fittings and hard -drawn tubing when making connections. 4. Do not use mitered joints for elbows or notching of straight runs of pipe for tees. 5. Underground shall be pit wrapped. C. Rigid PVC or CPVC: 1. Cut, make up, and install in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Ream, clean, and remove burrs from cut ends before joining pipe. 3. Lay in trench by snaking pipe from one side to other. 4. Offset: As recommended by manufacturer for maximum temperature variation between time of solvent welding and final use. 5. Do not lay pipe when temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F when exposed to direct sunlight. 6. Shield ends to be joined from direct sunlight prior to and during laying operation. 7. Use strap wrenches only for tightening threaded plastic joints. Do not over tighten fittings. D. Polyethylene Piping for Natural Gas (Below Ground): 1. Join pipes, fittings, and flange connections by means of thermal butt - fusion. 2. Perform butt -fusion in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations as to equipment and technique. 3. Lay pipe snaking from one side of trench to other. 4. Offset: As recommended by manufacturer for maximum temperature variation between time of solvent welding and during operation. 5. Do not lay pipe when temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F when exposed to direct sunlight. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 22 10 01 - 21 MARY'S CREEK WRF 6. Shield ends to be joined from direct sunlight prior to and during laying operation. 7. Joint Fusion: a. Measure and log each joint fusion by an electronic monitoring device (data logger) affixed to fusion machine capable of being retrieved electronically. Data to be logged shall include the following: 1) Pipe size and dimensions. 2) Machine model and size. 3) Operator identification. 4) Job identification number. 5) Weld number. 6) Fusion, heating, and drag pressure settings. 7) Heater plate temperature. 8) Time stamp showing when weld was performed. 9) Heating and curing time of weld. 10) Curing temperature readings and time stamps of readings. 11) Error messages and warnings for out of range temperature or pressure settings. b. In addition to logged items above, the following shall be logged or annotated on report: 1) Location of fused joint by pipeline station or by reference to pipe Shop Drawing. 2) Ambient temperature and humidity. 3) If internal bead was removed. E. Water System Balancing: Provide a qualified registered engineer or firm specializing in testing and balancing to adjust domestic water system. Balance system for required water flows at each plumbing fixture, terminal device, and recirculating hot water loop. F. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Install in piping systems where shown on the Drawings and adjacent to pieces of equipment where quick closing valves are installed. 2. Install at all emergency safety showers and eyewashes. 3. Size and install in accordance with PDI-WH20 1. 4. Shock arresters to have access panels or to be otherwise accessible. G. Valves: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -22 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF H. Miscellaneous Piping Specialties: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I. Measuring Devices: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 SANITARY AND WASTE DRAINS AND VENTS PIPING A. Installation: 1. Set piping above floor slab true and plumb. 2. Set exposed risers as close to walls as possible. 3. Slope drain lines at minimum 2 percent slope, unless otherwise noted. Vent lines shall be installed level or sloped, with no low spots. 4. Where vent stacks pass through roof slab, fit with flashing sleeve secured to roof. 5. Extend vents minimum 1 foot above roof. 6. Provide cleanouts where shown and where required by code. 3.04 ACID -RESISTANT DRAINS AND VENTS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Drainage Vents: Same piping system as used for acid -resistant drains. C. Make connections between polypropylene piping systems and other acid - resistant drainage systems with adapters recommended by manufacturer. D. Buried Polypropylene Pipe: 1. Heat join and test for leakage before placing in trench. 2. Snake slightly on long runs placed in trench. 3. When installed in extremely hot or cold weather, make proper allowance for expansion or contraction. E. Buried Acid -Resistant Cast Iron Pipe With Teflon -Lined Couplings: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not allow acid waste to contact pipe and Teflon until installation is complete and tested. F. Buried Polypropylene Drain and Vent Pipe: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Trench shall have a clean sand bed graded to proper pitch. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 26, 2026 AND ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 22 1001 -23 MARY'S CREEK WRY 3. Completely cover pipe with clean sand prior to backfilling. 4. Compact sand by flooding with water. 5. Do not permit sharp stones in backfill surrounding pipe. 3.05 HVAC CONDENSATE PIPING A. Set piping true and plumb. B. Slope piping 1/8 inch per foot minimum. 3.06 WATER SUPPLY PIPING A. Water supply piping includes potable and nonpotable systems as indicated. B. Flush water piping systems clean of internal debris, clean faucet aerators, and adjust plumbing fixture valves for manufacturer's recommended flow. C. Do not run water piping through electrical rooms, stairwells, or immediately over or within a 3 -foot horizontal clearance of electrical panels, motor starters, or environmental control panels. D. Hose Valves and Hydrants: Attach handle with setscrew and provide manufacturer's recommended gravel fill around drain hole of post hydrants. E. Provide valve operators with position indicators, where indicated, to show position of valve disc or plug. F. Provide bypass with globe valve for emergency throttling around each reducing valve. G. Protect buried copper and steel pipe and fittings with a single wrap of coal -tar saturated felt in accordance with AWWA C203. H. Vacuum Breakers 2 Inches and Smaller: Install minimum 6 inches above flood line of equipment they serve. I. Provide manual air vents at high points in domestic hot water system. 3.07 NATURAL GAS PIPING A. Install in compliance with applicable local gas code. B. If gas is wet, slope piping 1/4 inch per foot downward in direction of flow. Provide drip traps at low spots. C. If gas is wet, install drip traps at end of runs, where pipe changes elevation. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -24 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Provide dirt leg, ground union joint, and isolation valve adjacent to each flexible connector hose at each appliance connection. E. Label "NATURAL GAS, X PSIG", at intervals not to exceed 5 feet, indicating fuel type and pressure. 3.08 INSULATION A. As specified in Section 22 07 00, Plumbing Piping Insulation. 3.09 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install pre-engineered support equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Hanger Rod Sizing and Spacing for: 1. Steel Pine: Pie Size Max. Hanger Spacing (feet) Min. Rod Size (inches) 1 inch and smaller 6 1/4 1-1/4 through 2-1/2 inches 8 1/4 3 and 4 inches 10 3/8 6 inches 12 3/8 8 inches 12 1/2 2 3. 4. Copper Pipe: a. Rod Size: Same as for steel pipe. b. Spacing: 2 feet less per size than for steel pipe, except pipe 1-1/4 inches and smaller shall be supported every 6 feet. Cast Iron Pipe: a. Rod Size: Same as for steel pipe. b. Spacing: Locate hanger rods at each pipe joint and change of direction, 10 -foot maximum spacing. Plastic Pipe: a. Rod Size: Same as for steel pipe. b. Spacing: As recommended by manufacturer and required by applicable plumbing code for flow and temperature in pipe. c. No metal portion of hanger shall contact pipe directly. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 26, 2026 AND ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 22 1001 -25 MARY'S CREEK WRF C. Attach Support Rods For Horizontal Piping: 1. To steel beams with I -clamps. 2. To concrete with inserts or with flanges fastened with flush shells. 3. To wood with thickness of 2-1/2 inches or more with bolts or angle clips. D. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of individual hangers where horizontal piping is arranged with two or more parallel lines. 2. Attach lines to horizontal with U -bolts or one -hole clamps. E. Vertical Piping: 1. Support by channel type support system and pipe clamps on 10 -foot maximum centers. 2. Copper and Plastic Piping: Isolate from channels and pipe clamps with pipe isolators. F. Insulated Piping: Furnish galvanized protection shield and oversized hangers under insulated piping. 3.10 INSTALLATION —CONCRETE ENCASED A. Where horizontal piping is encased in concrete such as a floor or equipment slab, rigidly mount pipe to rebar and subbase to prevent lateral movement, sagging, and uplifting during concrete installation and finishing. Provide at least two temporary strut supports wired to rebar and supported from the engineered fill or subbase below for each section of pipe. B. To account for building settling where construction joints occur, or where piping leaves concrete encasements at buildings, utility trenches, vaults, slabs and other structures. C. Prevent accumulation of weld rod, weld spatter, pipe cuttings and filings, gravel, cleaning rags, and other foreign material within piping during fabrication and assembly. D. Examine piping to assure removal of foreign objects prior to assembly. E. Conventional commercial cleaning methods of cleaning are acceptable if method and cleaning material does not corrode, deform, swell, or otherwise alter physical properties of material being cleaned. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -26 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.11 TESTING A. General: 1. Conduct pressure and leakage tests on newly installed pipelines. 2. Provide necessary equipment and material, and make taps in pipe, as required. 3. Engineer will monitor tests. Provide 24 -hour advance notice of start of testing. 4. Test Pressures: As specified herein and in Piping Schedule. 5. Test Records: a. Make records of each piping system installation during test to document the following: 1) Date of test. 2) Description and identification of piping tested. 3) Test fluid. 4) Test pressure. 5) Remarks, including: a) Leaks (type, location). b) Repairs made on leaks. 6) Certification by Contractor and signed acknowledgment by Engineer that tests have been satisfactorily completed. B. Testing New Pipe Connected to Existing Pipe: Isolate new pipe with grooved end pipe caps, spectacle blinds, or blind flanges. C. Preparation and Execution: 1. Buried Pressure Piping: a. An initial service leak test may be conducted with a partially backfilled trench and the joints left open for inspection, if field conditions permit, as determined by Engineer. b. Expose joints for the acceptance test on buried pressure piping to be pneumatically tested or subjected to an initial service leak test. c. Conduct final hydrostatic acceptance tests after trench has been completely backfilled. 2. Exposed Piping: Conduct tests after piping has been completely installed including supports, hangers, and anchors, but prior to insulation. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 221001-27 MARY'S CREEK WRY D. Hydrostatic Leak Tests: Equipment: a. Provide the following: Amount Description 2 Graduated containers 2 Pressure gauges 1 Hydraulic force pump Suitable hose and suction pipe as required 2. Procedure: a. Use water as the hydrostatic test fluid. b. Provide clean test water of such quality as to minimize corrosion of the materials in the piping system. c. Open vents at high points of the piping system to purge air pockets while the piping system is filling. d. Venting during filling of system may also be provided by loosening flanges with a minimum of four bolts or by the use of equipment vents. e. Test piping systems at test pressure specified in Piping Schedule. f. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 30 minutes minimum and for such additional time as necessary to conduct examinations for leakage. g. Examine joints and connections for leakage. h. Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of weeping or leaking. i. Correct visible leakage and retest to satisfaction of Engineer. 3. Buried Water Lines: a. A limited amount of leakage is permissible according to formula specified. b. Conduct hydrostatic testing as follows: 1) Pipe with Concrete Thrust Blocking: Do not make pressure test until a minimum of 5 days after thrust blocking is installed. 2) If high -early strength cement is used for thrust blocking, time may be reduced to 2 days. c. Cement -Lined Piping: Slowly fill test section with water and allow to stand for 24 hours under slight pressure to allow cement lining to absorb water. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -28 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF d. Expel air from piping system prior to testing. e. Apply and maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force pump. f. Valve off the piping system when test pressure is reached. g. Conduct pressure test for 2 hours, reopening isolation valve only as necessary to restore test pressure. h. Accurately measure amount of water required to maintain test pressure by placing pump suction in a barrel or similar device, or by metering. i. Measurement represents leakage, defined as the quantity of water necessary to maintain the specified test pressure for the duration of the test period. j. Determine maximum allowable leakage in gallons per hour from the following formula: ND(P )1/2 L= 7400 where: L = Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour N = Number of joints in the length of pipe tested D = Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches P = Test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch k. Correct leakage greater than the allowable determined under this formula, and retest to satisfaction of Engineer. 4. Test Pressure for Water: 1-1/2 times system pressure. 5. Gravity Sewers and Drains: a. Test by water or air exfiltration tests as prescribed by local or state plumbing codes and visually examine for leaks. b. Repair leaks and retest system until no further leakage is evident. E Pneumatic Leak Tests: 1. Perform on compressed air, natural gas, and vacuum piping. 2. Equipment: a. Provide the followiniz: Amount Description 1 Pneumatic compressor separator -dryer system capable of providing oil -free dry air and equipped with one or more full capacity safety relief valves set at a pressure of not more than 105 percent of the required primary test pressure 1 Calibrated test gauge PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 26, 2026 AND ACCESSORIES ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 22 1001 -29 MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Procedure: a. Perform pneumatic testing using accurately calibrated instruments and oil -free, dry air. b. Perform tests only on exposed piping, after piping has been completely installed, including supports, hangers and anchors, and inspected for proper installation. c. Test piping system at test pressure specified in Piping Schedule. d. Protect test personnel from hazards associated with air testing. e. Secure piping to be tested to prevent damage to adjacent piping and equipment in event of a joint failure. f. Prior to test, remove or suitably isolate appurtenant instruments or devices that could be damaged by test. g. Apply maximum 25 psig preliminary pneumatic test to piping system prior to final leak testing, to locate major leaks. h. Examine joints and connections for leakage with soap bubbles. i. Correct visible leaks and retest. j. Gradually increase pressure in system to not more than one-half of test pressure. k. Thereafter increase pressure in steps of approximately 1/10 of maximum test pressure until required test pressure is reached. 1. Maintain pneumatic test pressure continuously for minimum 10 minutes and for such additional time as necessary to conduct a soap bubble examination for leakage. m. Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no evidence of leakage. n. Correct visible leakage and retest to satisfaction of Engineer. o. Following pneumatic testing, thoroughly purge lines that are to carry flammable gases with nitrogen to assure no explosive mixtures will be present in system during filling process. 3.12 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Prior to fmal acceptance, following assembly and testing, flush pipelines with water, except for plant process air lines and instrument air lines, and remove accumulated construction debris and other foreign matter. B. Minimum Flushing Velocity: 2.5 feet per second. C. Insert cone strainers in the connections to attached equipment and leave until cleaning has been accomplished. D. Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by dropping spools and valves. E. Immediately after draining flushed lines, dry piping with compressed air. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -30 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF F. Use compressed air to remove loose debris from plant process air and instrument air piping. G. Disinfect potable water pipelines before placing in service: 1. Meet the requirements of AWWA C65 1, unless otherwise specified. 2. Disinfecting Mixture: a. A chlorine -water solution having a free chlorine residual of 40 ppm to 50 ppm. b. Prepare by injecting one of the following: 1) Liquid chlorine gas -water mixture. d. e. f. g. h. 2) Dry chlorine gas. 3) Calcium or sodium hypochlorite and water mixture. Inject mixture into pipeline at a measured rate while freshwater is allowed to flow through the pipeline at a measured rate so the combined mixture of freshwater and chlorine solution or gas is of the specified strength. Apply liquid chlorine gas -water mixture by means of a chlorinating device. Feed dry chlorine gas through proper devices for regulating the rate of flow and providing effective diffusion of gas into water within pipe being treated. Chlorinating devices for feeding solutions of chlorine gas or gas itself must prevent backflow of water into chlorine cylinder. Calcium Hypochlorite: If this procedure is used, first mix dry powder with water to make a thick paste, then thin to approximately a 1 percent solution (10,000 ppm chlorine). Sodium Hypochlorite: If this procedure is used, dilute liquid with water to obtain a 1 percent solution. The following proportions of hypochlorite to water will be required: Product Quantity Water Calcium Hypochlorite' 1 lb 7.5 gal (65 - 70 percent Cl) Sodium Hypochlorite2 1 gal 4.25 gal (5.25 percent Cl) 'Comparable to commercial products known as HTH, Perchloron, and Pittchlor. 2Known as liquid laundry bleach, Clorox, and Purex. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 22 10 01-31 MARY'S CREEK WRY H. Point of Application: 1. Inject chlorine mixture into pipeline to be treated at the beginning of the line through a corporation stop or suitable tap in the top of pipeline. 2. Control clean water from existing system or another source so it flows slowly into newly installed piping during chlorine application. 3. Manipulate valves so the strong chlorine solution in the line being treated will not flow back into line supplying the water. Use check valves, if necessary. I. Retention Period: 1. Retain treated water in pipeline for a minimum of 24 hours or long enough to destroy nonspore-forming bacteria. 2. At the end of the retention period, the disinfecting mixture shall have strength of at least 10 ppm of chlorine. 3. Operate valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances during disinfection to assure disinfecting mixture is dispersed into all parts of the pipeline including dead ends, new services, and similar areas that otherwise may not receive the disinfecting solution. 4. Do not place concentrated quantities of commercial disinfectants in pipeline before filling with water. 5. After chlorination, flush water from permanent source of supply until water through pipeline is equal chemically and bacteriologically to permanent source of supply. J. Disposal of Disinfecting Water: 1. Dispose of disinfecting water in accordance with permits and regulations. Protect the public and receiving waters from harmful or toxic concentrations of chlorine. 2. Do not allow disinfecting water to flow into a waterway without adequate dilution or other satisfactory method of reducing chlorine concentrations to a safe level. 3.13 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protective Covers: 1. Provide over floor and shower drains during construction, to prevent damage to drain strainers and keep foreign material from entering drainage system. 2. Cover roof drains and emergency overflow drains during roofing process so roofing material and gravel do not enter drain piping. 3. Remove at time of Substantial Completion. PLUMBING PIPING PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 AND ACCESSORIES MARCH 26, 2026 22 1001 -32 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3.14 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are part of this specification. 1. Plumbing Piping Data Sheets. Section Number Title 22 10 01.02 Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste and Vent (PVC-DWV) Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.03 Cast Iron Soil Pipe (CISP) and Fittings 22 10 01.04 Acid -Resistant Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.06 Acid -Resistant Polypropylene Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 10 01.08 High -Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe and Fittings — Water and Sewer Service 22 10 01.12 Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings —Natural Gas Service END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 22 10 01 - 33 IW_telx1019210111to] ►r_1Iwa12102:3W:v1:1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 10 01.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE DRAIN WASTE AND VENT (PVC-DWV) PIPE AND FITTINGS Item Size Description Pipe and Fittings All PVC-DWV Schedule 40 nonpressure application, Class 12454B conforming to ASTM D2665 and ANSI/NSF Standard 14 system. Joints All Solvent cemented conforming to ASTM D2855 except where connection to equipment may require future removal. Solvent Cement All As recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer conforming to ASTM D2564. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS POLYVINYL CHLORIDE DRAIN WASTE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS 22 10 01.02 DATA SHEET - MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 10 01.03 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE (CISP) AND FITTINGS Item Size Description Pipe 6" and smaller Hubless, CISPI 301, service weight, no -hub ends. 8" and larger Hub and spigot, ASTM A74, service weight, single hub and spigot. Joints 6" and smaller Coupling: Conform to ASTM C564, ASTM C1277, ASTM C 1540and CISPI 310. Compression: Neoprene sealing sleeve with 24 -gauge Type 304 stainless steel shield and clamp assembly. Joints to dissimilar material shall comply with ASTM C 1460. 8" and larger Rubber gaskets, ASTM C564. Fittings 6" and smaller Conform to ASTM A888 and CISPI 301 8" and larger Conform to ASTM A74 Coating All Bituminous -coated inside and out; marked with manufacturer's name or trademark and CISPI symbol. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE (CISP) MARCH 17, 2026 AND FITTINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 22 10 01.03 DATA SHEET - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 10 01.04 ACID -RESISTANT CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Item Size Description Pipe and Fittings All High silicone cast iron, no -hub ends, extra heavy grade, conforming to ASTM A518/A518M and ASTM A861. Joints All No -hub type compression coupling, with Teflon inner sleeve, neoprene outer sleeve, and stainless steel shield and clamp assembly. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 ACID -RESISTANT CAST IRON MARCH 17, 2026 PIPE AND FITTINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS 22 10 01.04 DATA SHEET - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 10 01.06 ACID -RESISTANT POLYPROPYLENE WASTE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS Item Size Description Pipe All Polypropylene, ASTM F1412, Type 1, Schedule 40; resin meeting ASTM D4101. Conforming to ASTM D2447, ASTM D635, and ASTM D2843. Fittings All Polypropylene, ASTM F1412, Type 1, Schedule 40, socket type ends conforming to ANSI B16.12, ASTM D2657, and ASTM D4101. Joints All Socket -weld type, electrically fused. Manufacturers R & G Sloane Manufacturing Co., Inc. Celanese Piping Systems, Inc. Orion Fittings, Inc. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS ACID -RESISTANT POLYPROPYLENE WASTE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS 22 10 01.06 DATA SHEET - MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 10 01.08 HIGH -DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE AND FITTINGS - WATER AND SEWER SERVICE Item Size Description General All IPS size controlled outside diameter pipe. Pipe lengths, fittings, and flanged connections to be joined by thermal butt -fusion; shall be of the same type, grade, and class of polyethylene compound and supplied from same raw material supplier. Pipe and fittings manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C901-20 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing for 3/4 In. Through 3 In., for Water Service. Or, ANSI/AWWA C906-21 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 In. Through 65 In., for Waterworks. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 HIGH -DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) MARCH 17, 2026 PIPE AND FITTINGS - ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS WATER AND SEWER SERVICE 22 10 01.08 DATA SHEET - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 10 01.08 HIGH -DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE AND FITTINGS - WATER AND SEWER SERVICE Item Size Description Pipe 1/2" to 4" Cell class ASTM D3350 high -density polyethylene. Polyethylene Resin: Conform to Type PE 3408/PE4710. Provide protection against ultraviolet light degradation using carbon black, not less than 2 percent, well dispersed in resin. Pipe wall thickness shall reflect required SDR* for required working pressure. Pressure Rating (psi) at 100 degrees F SDR* 128 13.5 100 17.0 90 19.0 Identification: Colored marking tape for identification of type of service, in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code. For potable water distribution, provide SDR 9 with 250 psig working pressure at 73.4 degrees F, NSF 61 certified. *SDR: standard dimension ratio = OD/thickness Fittings 4" & smaller Molded fittings, butt fusion joined, conforming to ASTM D3261. HIGH -DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE AND FITTINGS - WATER AND SEWER SERVICE 22 10 01.08 DATA SHEET -2 PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 10 01.08 HIGH -DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE AND FITTINGS - WATER AND SEWER SERVICE Item Size Description Flanges All Van Stone type, cast ASTM A351/A351M, Type 316 stainless steel backing ring, IPP Deltaflex convoluted design, "or -equal" for bolting to ANSI B16.1, Class 125; ANSI B 16.5, Class 150; and AWWA C207, Class E. Pressure performance of backing ring equal to SDR rating of pipe with safety factor of two. Stub ends same grade HDPE and pressure rating as pipe. Bolting Stainless steel, ASTM A193/A193M Grade B8M studs and ASTM A194/A194M Grade 8M hex head nuts. Washers shall be same material as bolts. Gaskets Flat ring, 1/8 inch ethylene propylene rubber (EPR). Manufacturer JM Eagle PE 3408; Driscoplex 4000/4100 PE 3408; dura- line PolyPipe. p e. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 HIGH -DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) MARCH 17, 2026 PIPE AND FITTINGS - ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS WATER AND SEWER SERVICE 22 1001.08 DATA SHEET -3 MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 10 01.12 POLYETHYLENE (PE) PIPE AND FITTINGS - NATURAL GAS SERVICE Item Size Description General All Pipe lengths, fittings, and connections to be joined by thermal fusion; shall be same type, grade, and class of polyethylene compound and supplied from same raw material supplier. Pipe tubing and fittings manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2513. Pipe 1/2" to 12" ASTM D2513 medium -density polyethylene, maximum allowable hoop stress 1,250 psi at 73.4 degrees F. Polyethylene Resins: Conform to Type PE 2406/2708 or better. Pipe wall thickness shall reflect required SDR* and diameter, as shown in Table 8, ASTM F714. Design Stress Rating: ASTM F1924, 1,250 psi hydrostatic design basis (HDB). Pressure Rating (psi) at 100 degrees F SDR* 100 7.0 100 7.3 100 9.0 97 9.3 80 11.0 64 13.5 Note: Installed outdoors and underground only. Operating pressure for natural gas piping shall be limited to 100 psig or less per 2009 IFGC. Identification: Pipe and fittings shall be yellow in color and shall be marked "ASTM D2513". *SDR: standard dimension ratio = OD/thickness PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 17, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS POLYETHYLENE (PE) PIPE AND FITTINGS - GAS SERVICE 22 10 01.12 DATA SHEET - MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 10 01.12 POLYETHYLENE (PE) PIPE AND FITTINGS - NATURAL GAS SERVICE Item Size Description Fittings 4" & smaller Molded Fittings: Conform to PE 2406/2708. Socket Fusion Fittings: Meet requirements of ASTM D2683. Butt Fusion Fittings: Meet requirements of ASTM D3261. Flanges All Flanges not permitted underground. Above ground, flanges and bolting shall be part of approved, listed transition fitting. Risers and Conform to ASTM F 1973. Transitions Manufacturer Pipe: JM Eagle UAC 2000 MDPE yellow gas pipe; Driscoplex 6500 series. Risers and Transitions: Georg Fischer Central Plastics. END OF SECTION POLYETHYLENE (PE) PIPE AND FITTINGS- PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 GAS SERVICE MARCH 17, 2026 22 10 01.12 DATA SHEET -2 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 14 29 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP PART 1- GENERAL A. Provide, install, startup, and test submersible sump pumps with local control panel, complete and operable as shown on the plans. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment specified herein shall be capable of pumping process drainage and/or sludge containing stringy/gritty material with minimum clogging. The equipment will be designed for exposure to gaseous and aqueous hydrogen sulfide concentrations typical of wastewater treatment plants, and a moist environment. B. All equipment, supports, anchors and fasteners shall be of adequate strength to withstand loads associated with starting, turbulence, thrusts from liquid movement, thermal expansion and contraction and other loads encountered under normal operating conditions. C. The driver horsepower for all the pumps described herein shall be non -overloading at all points along the pump performance curve. A. Submittals shall be prepared in accordance with Division 1 Section 01 30 00 "Submittal Procedures." B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes for rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. C, Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments specific to the project, bound neatly in a single package. The following information shall be included as a minimum: 1. Manufacturer and model number of equipment. 2. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions on layout drawings, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over the entire operating ranges of the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. a. Indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the guarantee point. 4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 5. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor manufacturer, and include any motor specifications. 6. Documentation demonstrating factory finish is equivalent to finish system specified in this Section. 7. Manufacturer's warranty for each product indicated. July 30, 2026 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 22 14 29 - 1 MARY'S CREEK WRY D. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 5. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of one year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current pricing information. 6. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 7. Manufacturer's warranty for each product indicated. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each pumping system to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Provide in accordance with Division 1 Section 01 30 00 "Project Documentation." F. Partial or incomplete submittals may be returned by the ENGINEER without review. G. All deviations from contract documents shall be submitted separately by CONTRACTOR as a Contract Modification Request. H. Provide any other information necessary for the ENGINEER to determine compliance with the specifications. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. All equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least twenty (20) similar system installations in the United States of the type proposed, each with a minimum of five (5) years of satisfactory service. 2. A list of similar installations shall be furnished with the shop drawing submittal, including names and telephone numbers of contacts. B. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. C. Source Limitations: All equipment units of each type specified in this section shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the equipment specified herein shall be responsible for the satisfactory operation and the associated equipment listed herein. D. Manufacturer shall maintain a complete stock of spare parts commonly needed for the equipment specified at a location within the State of Texas, or spare parts shall be delivered within 48 hours. E. All equipment shall have a 316 stainless steel manufacturer's nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place on the equipment showing the ratings, serial number, model number, manufacturer and other pertinent nameplate data. F. Manufacturer's installation report is required prior to final acceptance. G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 20, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle and store pumping system components in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and the requirements of Division 1 Section 01 30 00 "Project Documentation." SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP July 30, 2026 221429-2 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Refer to Division 1 Section 01 60 00 01 61 00"Product Requirements" for Warranty requirements. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of the pumping unit that fail(s) in materials or workmanship 6 P P P p p� g� within specified warranty period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work, include the following: 1. Goulds. 2, Hydromatic. 3. Barnes. 2.2 SUMP PUMP A. Pump Construction 1. Pump: a. Type: Heavy duty, centrifugal and floor mounted style, capable of dry operation without damage to motor or seals. b. Pump Housing: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 25. C. Impeller: Multiple vane, non -clog, bronze, threaded to shaft. d. Shaft: 400 Series stainless steel. e. Fasteners: 300 Series stainless steel. f. FBMA B-10 Bearing Life: 40,000 hours. g. Mechanical Seals: 1) Seal and O -Rings: Buna N. 2) Seal Faces: Silicon carbon 3) Other: Oil filled chamber. 2. Motor: a. Type: Submersible rated, continuous duty, built-in automatic reset overload protection. b. Shaft Material: Series 400 stainless steel. c. Horsepower: Minimum horsepower listed in Pump Schedule. d. Voltage: As listed in Pump Schedule. e. Power Cable: Water and oil resistant with epoxy seal on motor. f. Other: Oil filled with ball thrust bearing and radial bearing with sleeve - permanent lubrication. g. Motor shall be non -overloading at all points on the pump performance curve. 3. Appurtenances: a. Data Plate; Stainless steel suitably attached to pump containing manufacturer's name, pump size and type, serial number, impeller diameter, capacity and head rating, and other pertinent data. 4. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Capable of Passing Spherical Solid Size: 3/4 -inch b. Fluid: Wastewater containing solids and stingy materials. c. Fluid Temperature: 65 to 90 deg F 5. Protective Coating: July 30, 2026 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 22 1429-3 MARY'S CREEK WRY a. Apply a protective coating to exterior of pump and motor housing in accordance with Division 9 Section 09 91 00 "Painting and Protective Coatings." 2.3 CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTATION A. All instrumentation, control and electrical components provided under this section shall comply with the requirements on the Drawings and Division 26 and 40 Sections. B. Type I 1. Instrumentation a. Float Switch, Mechanical, Tether, Normally Open, Plug Connection, Max. Amps Running 15, Voltage 115, Wire Gauge 14, Pumping Range Min./Max. 5" to 3"0, Float Material ABS, Agency Compliance UL. Float shall be by Dayton. C. Type II 1. Control Panel a. General: Refer to Section 40 05 91 "Common Process Equipment" 40 67 00 "Control Panels and Components" for the general requirements of the Control Panel. Control panel shall also include all required transformers, controls, starters, breakers, variable frequency drives, and related electrical components required for electric motors. b. Panels: Provide control system for equipment system, but not limited to, for monitoring the following instruments and controls. This list is not intended to completely depict all of the functional requirements of the control system provided under this Section. The system supplier shall provide all additional instrumentation and controls necessary to produce a safe and operable system. 1) Controls shall be mounted on panel face. 2) Panel shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel, coated with a white powder coating with three point latching handle. 3) Panel shall have the following controls mounted on the panel a) ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC switch. b) ON allows the pump to be started, stopped from the panel. c) AUTO allows the pump to be started, stopped from the control system. d) RUN, Fail, and OFF push -to -test LED indicating lights, for the pump. e) Fail reset button, for the pump. f) Elapsed Time Meter, for the pump. g) Alarm Horn and Beacon. 4) Provide the following outputs: a) Run and Fail status of each pump. b) Power failure alarm c) High level alarm 2, Instrumentation a. High level shall be a single float switch. Switch shall be lead and mercury free hermetically sealed switch, with a weighted PVC coated cable suspended float level switch. Switch shall be conically in shaped, filled with plastic foam and weighted to side, 6.2" in diameter. Switch shall be Automation Products Group, Inc., Model KA-3HE. D. Type III SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP July 30, 2026 221429-4 D COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF Control Panel a, General: Refer to Section 40 05 91 "Common Control Panel negufrement for ProceG Equipment" 40 67 00 "Control Panels and Components" for the general requirements of the Control Panel. Control panel shall also include all required 6 transformers, controls, starters, breakers, variable frequency drives, and related electrical components required for electric motors. b. Panels: Provide control system for equipment system, but not limited to, for monitoring the following instruments and controls. This list is not intended to completely depict all of the functional requirements of the control system provided under this Section. The system supplier shall provide all additional instrumentation and controls necessary to produce a safe and operable system. 1) Controls shall be mounted on panel face. 2) Panel shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel, coated with a white powder coating with three point latching handle. 3) Panel shall have the following controls mounted on the panel a) ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC switch for each pump. b) ON allows the pump to be started, stopped from the panel. c) AUTO allows the pump to be started, stopped from the control system. d) RUN, Fail, and OFF push -to -test LED indicating lights, for each pump. e) Fail reset button, for each pump. t) Elapsed Time Meter, for each pump. g) Alternator. h) Alarm Horn and Beacon. 4) Provide the following outputs: a) Run and Fail status of each pump. b) Power failure alarm c) High level alarm 2. Instrumentation a. Duplex Pump Down and High level switch shall be combined into a single flow with four internal switches. Switch shall be lead and mercury free hermetically sealed switch, with a weighted PVC coated cable suspended float level switch. Switch shall be conically in shaped, filled with plastic foam and weighted to side, 6.2" in diameter. Switch shall be Automation Products Group, Inc., Model KA-4H5E. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Each pumping unit shall be leveled, plumbed, and aligned into position to fit connected piping. Installation procedures shall be as recommended by pump manufacturer. 3.2 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES A. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Installation stating that the equipment is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. B. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Performance stating that the equipment meets or exceeds the performance requirements as defined hereinbefore. July 30, 2026 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP O COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER 22 1429-5 MARY'S CREEK WRY 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturers services shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 75 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup." B. Manufacturer's Representative for the Installation: Present at Project site or classroom designated by OWNER, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: Manufacturer's Representative Field Visits No. Person Days Work Description 1 Installation assistance and inspection. 0 Functional and performance testing. '/2 Facility startup. '/4 Startup training of OWNER'S personnel. C. Services Provided: 1. Furnish test forms and procedures for field-testing. 2. Furnish startup services. 3. Furnish training of OWNER'S personnel at such times requested by OWNER. 3.4 SUPPLEMENT A. The Pump Data Sheets included after "End of Section" shall be part of this Section. END OF SECTION SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP July 30, 2026 221429-6 COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF TABLE 1: TYPE I SCHEDULE D EQUIPMENT EQB_B01_SUP PFS01 B01 S EQPF01_B01_ PFS01 B01 EQPF01_B01 PFS01 B01 EQB_B01_ TAG 01 - - UP01 SUP01 - - SUP10 - SUP10 - SUP02 SUP02 RS01-B01 SUP01 - NUMBERS PUMP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QUANTITY LOCATION Eq Influent PF Influent Overflow Valve PF Pump EQ Pump Vault PF Effluent EQ Effluent RS/WS Pump Station Valve Vault Valve Vault Vault Vault Valve Vault Valve Vault CAPACITY, 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 40 GPM TOTAL DISCHARGE 14 26 18 9 10 13 14 31 HEAD, FEET PUMP CURVE EXTEND TO, 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 FEET DISCHARGE, INCHES 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 HORSEPOWER 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.33 0.33 0.5 VOLTAGE 115/230 115/230 115/230 115/230 115/230 115/230 115/230 115/230 MAX SPEED, 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 RPM CONTROL TYPE TYPE I TYPE I TYPE I TYPE I TYPE I TYPE I TYPE I TYPE I Explosion Proof Explosion Proof Explosion Proof (Including (Including (Including (Including_____ NOTES Appurtenances) Appurtenances) for Class I for Class I for Class 1 Division 2 Division 2 Division 2 July 30, 2026 C COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP 221429-7 MARY'S CREEK WRF TABLE 1: TYPE I SCHEDULE CONTINUED EQUIPMENT TAG RSWO1 TOO SUPOI RPS01 TO1 SUPOI RPSO1 TO! SUPOI RSWO1 TOO SUP02 NUMBER(S) - - - - - - - - PUMP QUANTITY 1 1 1 1 RETURN FLOW VALVE RETURN FLOW VALVE POTABLE WATER LOCATION REUSE METER VAULT VAULT 1 VAULT 2 METER VAULT CAPACITY, GPM 20 20 20 20 TOTAL DISCHARGE HEAD, 8 8 8 6 FEET PUMP CURVE EXTEND TO, 3 3 3 3 FEET DISCHARGE, INCHES 2 2 2 2 HORSEPOWER 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 VOLTAGE 115/230 115/230 115/230 115/230 MAX SPEED, RPM 1800 1800 1800 1800 CONTROL TYPE TYPE I TYPE I TYPE I TYPE I NOTES D SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP July 30, 2026 22 1429-8 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF TABLE 2: TYPE II SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT TAG NUMBER(S) CBN01 B01 SUP01 FER01 B01 SUP01 CST B01 SUP01 PST01 B01 SUP01 PUMP QUANTITY 1 1 1 1 LOCATION CBN TANK MS TANK NAOCL TANK POLYMER SYSTEM CAPACITY, GPM 20 20 20 20 TOTAL DISCHARGE HEAD, FEET 10 10 10 10 PUMP CURVE EXTEND TO, FEET 3 3 3 3 DISCHARGE, INCHES 2 2 2 2 HORSEPOWER 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 VOLTAGE 115/230 115/230 115/230 115/230 MAX SPEED, RPM 1800 1800 1800 1800 CONTROL TYPE TYPE II TYPE II TYPE II TYPE II July 30, 2026 C COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP 221429-9 MARY'S CREEK WRF TABLE 3: TYPE III SCHEDULE BRB0 1_BO 1_SUP01 BRB0 1_B0 1_SUP02 BRB0 1_B0 1_SUP03 GRT01_C00_SUP01 BRB01_B01_SUP04 EQUIPMENT TAG NUMBER(S) GRT0 1_C00_SUP02 BRB0 1_B01_SUP05 BRB0 1_B0 1_SUP06 BRB01 B01 SUP07 BRB01 B01 SUPO8 PUMP QUANTITY 2 (1 Duplex System) 8 (4 Duplex Systems) LOCATION Preliminary Treatment Units Biological Reactor Basin CAPACITY, GPM 60 40 TOTAL DISCHARGE HEAD, FEET 40 30 PUMP CURVE EXTEND TO, FEET 3 3 DISCHARGE, INCHES 4 2 HORSEPOWER 5 1 VOLTAGE 480 480 MAX SPEED, RPM 1800 1800 CONTROL TYPE TYPE III TYPE III NOTES Explosion Proof (Including PanellAppurtenances) for Class 1 Division_2 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP July 30, 2026 22 14 29 - 10 © COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER MARY'S CREEK WRF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK July 30, 2026 C COPYRIGHT 2025 PLUMMER SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP 22 14 29-11 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineer's (ASME). 4. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE): a. 1013, Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Backflow Preventers. b. 1015, Performance Requirements for Double Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies and Double Check Backflow Fire Protection Assemblies. 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C5 10, Double Check Valve Backflow Prevention Assembly. b. C511, Reduced -Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly. c. C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. 6. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48/A48M, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. 7. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): a. B64.4, Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle Type (RP). b. B64.5, Backflow Preventers, Double Check Valve Type (DCVA). 8. FM Global (FM). 9. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). 10. Foundation for Cross -Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at University of Southern California (FCCHR): Manual of Cross - Connection Control. 11. International Code Council (ICC): International Plumbing Code (IPC). 12. National Electrical Code (NEC). 13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, (NEMA): MG 1, Motors and Generators. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MARCH 26, 2026 22 30 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 14. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. 15. UL. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer's product data. 1.03 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Where note below, provide manufacturer's extended guarantee in writing with Owner named as beneficiary. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of products found defective during the stated period after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited. 2.02 WATER HEATERS A. Instantaneous Electric Water Heater: 1. Description: UL listed, tankless with removable cover, replaceable heating element, immersion -type thermostat, replaceable inlet filter, and flow regulator. 2. Capacity: See data sheet at end of section. 3. Manufacturers: a. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc. b. EEMAX, Inc. c. Bradley. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 22 30 00 - 2 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Electric Water Heater (Commercial): 1. Description: a. Automatic, vertical, electric storage type. b. Regulatory Compliance: UL listed, ASME, ASHRAE 90.1, and NSF. c. Tank: Steel, glass -lined, 150 psig working pressure, and ASME rate. d. Insulation: Foam or fiberglass type with minimum R value per ASHRAE 90.1. e. Dip Tube: Required on inlet connection down to bottom section of tank. f. Anode: Heavy-duty, tank -mounted, screw -in type. g. Pressure/Temperature Relief Valve: ASME rated. h. Connections: Inlet and outlet with factory -installed dielectric unions and brass drain valve with hose thread. i. Heating Element: Watt -density (maximum of 75 watts per square inch) incoloy sheath; immersion type. j. Controls: Fully automatic, house in hinged control panel, and including the following: 1) Terminal block. 2) Close differential immersion -type thermostat. 3) Control transformer for 120 -volt circuit and fusing. 4) Magnetic contactors for each stage. 5) Manual reset high -limit switch. 6) Adjustable temperature range, 95 degrees F to 180 degrees F. 7) Power circuit fusing as required by NEC and UL. k. Guarantee: 3 years. 2. Capacity: See data sheet at end of section. 3. Manufacturers: a. AO Smith. b. Bradford White Corporation. c. Lochinvar Corporation. 2.03 DOMESTIC WATER EXPANSION TANK A. Description: 1. Type: Prepressurized diaphragm type, horizontal or vertical per expansion tank data sheet at end of section. 2. Shell: Welded steel. 3. Diaphragm: FDA -approved, heavy-duty butyl with polypropylene liner. 4. Connection Size: Per expansion tank data sheet at end of section. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MARCH 26, 2026 22 30 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY 5. Maximum Operating Pressure: Per expansion tank data sheet at end of section. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: Per expansion tank data sheet at end of section. 7. Finish: Manufacturer's standard air-dry enamel. B. Capacity: See data sheet at end of section. C. Manufacturer: AMTROL, Inc.; Model AST. 2.04 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMP A. Description: 1. Type: In -line, direct -drive, close -coupled centrifugal pump. 2. Construction: Bronze body, stainless steel face plate, glass -filled noryl impeller, carbon steel shaft, mechanical carbon on ceramic seals, and bronze oil lubricated motor bearings. 3. Motor: Permanent split -capacitor with thermal overload protection. 4. Accessories: Aquastat and automatic timer kit. B. Capacity: See data sheet at end of section. C. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett. 2. Taco, Inc. 3. Grundfos Pump Corporation. 2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Double Check Backflow Preventer (3/4 Inch Through 2 Inches): 1. Description: a. Regulatory Compliance: AWWA C510, CSA B64.5, FCCHR of USC Section 10, ASSE 1015, ICC (IPC). b. Valve Body: Bronze. c. End Connections: Threaded, NPT. d. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi (350 psi test). e. Temperature Range: 32 degrees to 140 degrees F. f. Shutoff Valve: Full port, resilient seated, bronze ball valve with bronze ball valve test cock. g. Inlet Strainger: Bronze wye strainer. 2. Sizes: See data sheet at end of section. 3. Manufacturers and Products: See Plumbing Fixture Schedule. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 22 30 00 - 4 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF B. Double Check Backflow Preventer (2-1/2 Inches Through 10 Inches): 1. Description: a. Regulatory Compliance: AWWA C510, CSA B64.5, FCCHR of USC Section 10, ASSE 1015, ICC (IPC). b. Valve Body: Ductile or cast iron, Class 125, epoxy -coated (FDA approved). c. End Connections: Flanged. d. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi (350 psi test). e. Temperature Range: 32 degrees to 140 degrees F. f. Shutoff Valve: Nonrising stem, resilient seated gate valve with bronze ball valve test cock. g. Inlet Strainer: Cast-iron wye strainer. 2. Sizes: See data sheet at end of section. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Febco; Model 850. b. Watts Regulator Company; Model 709. C. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers (1/4 Inch Through 1/2 Inch): 1. Description: a. Regulatory Compliance: AWWA C511, CSA B64.4, ASSE 1013, ICC (IPC), FM, USC-UL. b. Valve Body: Bronze. c. End Connections: Threaded, NPT. d. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi (350 psi test). e. Temperature Range: 32 degrees to 140 degrees F. f. Shutoff Valve: Full port, resilient seated, bronze ball valve with bronze ball valve test cock. g. Accessories: Drainline air gap fitting. 2. Sizes: See data sheet at end of section. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Conbraco Industries; Series 20-400. D. Reduced -Pressure Backflow Preventers (3/4 Inch Through 2 Inches): 1. Description: a. Regulatory Compliance: AWWA C511, CSA B64.4, FCCHR of USC Section 10, ASSE 1013, ICC (IPC). b. Valve Body: Bronze. c. End Connections: Threaded, NPT. d. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi (350 psi test). e. Temperature Range: 32 degrees F to 140 degrees F. f. Shutoff Valve: Full port, resilient seated, bronze ball valve with bronze ball valve test cock. g. Inlet Strainer: Bronze wye strainer. h. Accessories: Drainline air gap fitting. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MARCH 26, 2026 22 30 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Sizes: See data sheet at end of section. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Febco; Model 860. b. Watts; Model 909. E. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers (2-1/2 Inches Through 10 Inches): 1. Description: a. Regulatory Compliance: AWWA C511, CSA B64.4, FCCHR of USC Section 10, ASSE 1013, IAPMO (UPC), SBCCI. b. Valve Body: Ductile or cast iron, Class 125, epoxy -coated (FDA approved). c. End Connections: Flanged. d. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi (350 psi test). e. Temperature Range: 32 degrees F to 140 degrees F. f. Shutoff Valve: Nonrising stem, resilient seated gate valve with bronze ball valve test cock. g. Inlet Strainer: Cast-iron wye strainer. h. Accessories: Drainline air gap fitting. 2. Sizes: See data sheet at end of section. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Febco; Model 860. b. Watts; Model 909. F. Water Meter and Meter Boxes: Refer to Section 33 12 13, Water Service Connections. 2.06 ICE MAKER A. Description: 1. Ice cube machine, 290 -pound storage, 30 inches wide by 30 inches deep by 39 inches high with legs and front air circulation. 2. Integral refrigeration system, electronic controls, water pump motor, and water control valve. 3. Factory installed photoelectric eye bin control. 4. Solid state microprocessor electronic controls. 5. Reusable, cleanable air filter. 6. 115 volt, single-phase. B. Manufacturer: Scotsman; Model SCE -275. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 22 30 00 - 6 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install, arrange, and connect equipment as shown on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pumps: Do not hydrostatic test pumps with mechanical seals. B. Startup: 1. In accordance with Section 01 9114, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup, and Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 2. Piping Systems: Verify that flushing, cleaning, and testing has been completed prior to startup. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MARCH 26, 2026 22 30 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 2. American Gas Association (AGA). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE): 1010, Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters. 5. ASTM International (ASTM): D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. 6. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). 7. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. 8. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): a. Code Guide 302 and Glossary of Industry Terms. b. WH-20 1, Water Hammer Arrester Standard. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Catalog information and rough -in dimensions for plumbing fixtures, products, and specialties. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and local and state requirements. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 26, 2026 22 40 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372. 1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Fixture Trim: 1. Supply Stops and Traps: a. McGuire. b. American Standard. c. Kohler. 2. Flush Valves: Sloan. 3. Water Closet Seats: a. Bemis. b. Church. c. Olsonite. 4. Lavatory Supply, Tailpiece, and Trap Insulation: a. McGuire. b. Trap Wrap. c. Truebro. B. Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Water Closets, Lavatories, and Urinals: a. American Standard. b. Kohler. c. Eljer. 2. Service Sinks: a. Kohler. b. Eljer. PLUMBING FIXTURES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 22 40 00 - 2 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 3. Faucet Fittings: a. Sinks: 1) Chicago. 2) T&S Brass. b. Lavatories: 1) Chicago. 2) Symmons. 4. Shower Trim: a. Symmons. b. Powers. 5. Stainless Steel Sinks: a. Elkay. b. Just. 6. Mop Sinks: a. Stern -Williams. b. Fiat Products Inc. c. Fixture Manufacturers. 7. Electric Water Coolers: a. Elkay. b. Haws. c. Western. C. Emergency Showers and Eyewashes: 1. Haws. 2. Western. 3. Bradley. 4. Guardian. D. Drainage Products: 1. General: a. Smith. b. Wade. c. Zurn. 2. Acid Resistant: a. Enfield. b. R&G Sloane. c. T&C Plastic Drain Co. E. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Shock Arresters: a. Smith. b. Sioux Chief. c. Precision Plumbing Products. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 26, 2026 22 40 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Trap Primers: a. Precision Plumbing Products. b. Smith. c. Wade. 3. Trap Guards: Proset. 4. Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves: a. Cash -Acme. b. Kunkle Valve. c. Watts. 5. Pressure Gauges: a. Ashcroft. b. Marsh. c. Marshalltown. 6. Thermometers: a. Trerice. b. Weksler. 7. Automatic Washer Supplies: a. Guy Gray. b. Symmons. 2.03 GENERAL A. Fixture Trim: Provide plumbing fixture trim where applicable on fixtures. B. Plumbing Fixtures: Indicated by fixture number as shown on Drawings. C. Drainage Products: Indicated by fixture number as shown on Drawings. D. Plumbing Specialties: Indicated by fixture number as shown on Drawings. E. Exposed fixture connections and piping shall be polished chrome -plated. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Fixture Trim: 1. Supply Stop: a. Flexible supply with heavy cast brass, loose key, 1/2 -inch IPS by 3/8 -inch outside diameter tubing angle stop to wall with escutcheon plate; chrome -plated finish. b. Provide stop with stuffing box. c. Manufacturer: McGuire Manufacturing Company, Inc. PLUMBING FIXTURES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 22 40 00 - 4 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF 2. Trap: a. Chrome -plated, 17 -gauge, semicast P -trap with compression ring cast brass waste and vent connection and cleanout. b. 1-1/2 inches for lavatories and drinking fountains. c. 1-1/2 inches for sinks. d. Manufacturer: McGuire Manufacturing Company, Inc. 3. Water Closet and Urinal Flush Valves: Sloan Valve Co., Royal Continental, low flush, quiet action with screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker. B. Plumbing Fixtures: 1. EWC-1, Electric Water Cooler (ADA Compliant, Dual Height): a. Finish: No. 4 satin finish stainless steel rectangular receptors, back panel, and grille. b. Valve: Front pushbutton operated with automatic stream regulation. c. Trim: Screwdriver stop, strainer, and P -trap with cleanout. d. Cooler: NonCFC, air-cooled. e. Mount: Wall mounting can. f. Manufacturer and Product: See Plumbing Fixture Schedule. 2. LAV-1, Lavatory (Wall -Hung Type, ADA Compliant): a. Fixture: Vitreous china, for floor -mounted concealed arm carrier, . American Standard Companies, Inc.; Lucerne, Model 0356.421. b. Faucet: See plumbing fixture schedule. c. Trim: 3/8 -inch supply stop with loose key, 17 -gauge chrome - plated cast brass P -trap. d. Insulation: McGuire Manufacturing Company, Inc., Prowrap antimicrobial PVC resin seamless insulation for trap, tailpiece, and hot and cold water supply piping. e. Strainer: McGuire Manufacturing Company, Inc.; Model 155WC chrome -plated grid strainer with tailpiece. £ Carrier: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.; 700 series concealed arm. 3. MSB-1, Mop Sink (Floor Mounted): a. Fixture: See plumbing fixture schedule. b. Faucet: Chicago Faucet Co.; Model 897-CRCF, concealed supplies with hose threads, vacuum breaker, and rod support. Faucet mounted 36 inches above finish floor. c. Accessories: See plumbing fixture schedule. 4. S-1, Sink (Counter, Stainless Steel, Single Compartment): a. Fixture: See plumbing fixture schedule. b. Faucet: See plumbing fixture schedule. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 26, 2026 22 40 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRY c. Trim: 1- 1/2 -inch outside diameter, 17 -gauge chrome -plated cast tailpiece and cast brass P -trap with cleanout, and 1/2 -inch wall supply stop with loose key. d. Strainer: See plumbing fixture schedule. 5. S-2, Sink (Counter, Stainless Steel, Double Compartment): a. Fixture: See plumbing fixture schedule. b. Faucet: See plumbing fixture schedule. c. Trim: 1 -1/2 -inch outside diameter, 17 -gauge chrome -plated cast tailpiece and cast brass P -trap with cleanout, and 1/2 -inch wall supply stop with loose key. d. Strainer: See plumbing fixture schedule. 6. SH-1, Shower: a. Showerhead: See plumbing fixture schedule. b. Hand Spray: See plumbing fixture schedule. c. Mixing Valve: See plumbing fixture schedule. d. Trim: See plumbing fixture schedule. 7. SH-2, Shower (ADA Compliant): a. Showerhead: See plumbing fixture schedule. b. Hand Spray: See plumbing fixture schedule. c. Mixing Valve: See plumbing fixture schedule. d. Trim: See plumbing fixture schedule. 8. UR-1, Urinal (Flush Valve, Floor Mounted Type, ADA Compliant): a. Fixture: Vitreous china, siphon jet action with flushing rim, top spud. American Standard Companies, Inc.; Stallbrook 6400.001. b. Trim: See Plumbing Fixture Schedule. 9. WC -1, Water Closet (Flush Valve, Floor mounted Type): a. Fixture: Vitreous china, siphon jet action, top spud, elongated bowl. American Standard Companies, Inc.; Madera 1.28 GPF, Model 3461.001. b. Trim: See plumbing fixture schedule. c. Seat: See plumbing fixture schedule. 10. WC -2, Water Closet (Flush Valve, Wall -Hung Type, ADA Compliant): Same as WC- 1 but mounted for handicap access with flush valve handle pointed to wide side of stall enclosure and meeting ADA requirements. C. Safety Equipment: ESS-1, Safety Shower/Eyewash Combination (All PVC): a. Model: See plumbing fixture schedule. b. Shower: PVC deluge. c. Eyewash: PVC aerated eye/face wash and PVC bowl. d. Valve: Stay open. e. Support: Freestanding, 2-1/2 inches, Schedule 80, PVC pipe standard, stanchion, and floor flange. f. Alarms: Magnetically operated proximity switches. PLUMBING FIXTURES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 22 40 00 - 6 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF D. Drainage Products: 1. DCO-1, Cleanout (Exterior): a. Material: Taper thread, bronze plug, heavy-duty, scoriated cast-iron top. b. Manufacturer and Product: See plumbing fixture schedule. 2. FCO, Floor Cleanout (Finished Areas): a. Material: Tapered thread, bronze plug with round adjustable scoriated secured nickel bronze top. b. Manufacturer and Product: See plumbing fixture schedule. 3. FD- 1, Floor Drain (Finished Areas): a. Materials: Cast-iron body, adjustable nickel bronze strainer. b. Options: See plumbing fixture schedule. c. Manufacturer and Product: See plumbing fixture schedule. 4. WCO, Wall Cleanout: a. Material: Stainless steel cover and screw. b. Manufacturer and Product: See plumbing fixture schedule. E. Hose Valves: Refer to Section 22 10 01, Plumbing Piping and Accessories. F. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Water Hammer Arresters: a. Materials: ASSE 1010 certified, Type L copper tube, HHPP piston with two lubricated EPDM O -rings, FDA approved lubricant, rolled piston stop, wrought copper male thread adapter. b. Manufacturer and Product: Sioux Chief Mfg. Co., Inc.; Series 650 and 660. 2. TP-1, Trap Priming Valve: a. Materials: Cast bronze, line pressure drop activated, antisiphon port, 1/2 -inch connection. b. Manufacturer and Product: Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.; Model P-1 trap priming valve and Model DU -4, distribution unit. 3. TP-2, Trap Priming Valve: a. Materials: Cast bronze, line pressure drop activated, antisiphon port, 1/2 -inch connection. b. Manufacturer and Product: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.; Figure 2699. 4. ETP- 1, Automatic Trap Priming System: a. Materials: Electronic controller, manual override switch, solenoid valve, 1/2 -inch connection, calibrated water distribution manifold, and air gap. b. Power: 120V, single-phase. c. Manufacturer and Product: Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.; Model MP -500. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-7 MARY'S CREEK WRY 5. ETP-2, Automatic Trap Priming System: a. Materials: Preset 24 -hour clock, manual override switch, solenoid valve, 3/4 -inch connection, calibrated water distribution manifold, water hammer arrester, and wall -mounted steel cabinet with access door. b. Power: 120V, single-phase. c. Manifold outlet quantity as required. d. Manufacturer and Product: Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.; Prime -Time Model PT. 6. ETP-3, Energy Management Controlled Trap Priming Valve with Solenoid: a. Materials: Solenoid valve, air gap assembly and receiver, 6 -foot cord. b. Manufacturer and Product: Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.; Solo Prime. 7. Pressure/Temperature Relief Valve: a. Materials: ASME/AGA rated, bronze body construction, vacuum relief valve vent in drain, backup emergency safety fuse plug, tamper -resistant bonnet screws, test lever, short thermostat, and automatic reseating. b. Manufacturer and Product: Watts Industries, Inc.; Series 40. 8. Pressure Gauge: a. Materials: 3 -1/2 -inch gauge size, 0 to 160 psi range, steel case, glass crystal, brass movement, and 1/3 -inch NPT lower connection. b. Manufacturer and Product: Ashcroft Dresser Instrument Division, Dresser Industries, Inc.; Type 1008. 9. Thermometer: a. Materials: Adjustable angle, red reading mercury type with 9 -inch case and 30 degrees F to 180 degrees F range, 3 -1/2 -inch aluminum stem, and separate NPT brass thermowell. b. Manufacturer and Product: H.O. Trerice Co.; Model A005. 10. WS -1, Automatic Washer Supply: a. Materials: Recessed box with 2 -inch drain connection, single lever shutoff with 1/2 -inch hot and cold water connections, and with shock arresters on both hot and cold water supplies. b. Manufacturer and Product: Guy Gray Manufacturing Co. Specialty Products; Model WB-200HA. G. Sealant: In accordance with Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. PLUMBING FIXTURES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 22 40 00 - 8 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of fixtures. Changes in locations of fixtures, advisable in opinion of Contractor, shall be submitted to Engineer for review before proceeding with the Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Fixture Trim: Install fixture trim where applicable on fixtures. B. Plumbing Fixtures, Mounting Heights: 1. Standard rough -in catalogued heights, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 2. Caulk fixtures in contact with finished walls with waterproof, white, nonhardening sealant which will not crack, shrink, or change color with age. See Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. C. Exact fixture location and mounting arrangement shall be as indicated on toilet room elevations and details as shown on Drawings. D. Unless noted otherwise and as a minimum, fixtures shall be supported as indicated in PDI Code Guide 302. E. Safety Equipment: 1. System Shutoff Valves: a. Shutoff valves shall give visual indication of position (open or closed). b. Shutoff valves shall be lockable valves and locked in open position. 2. Each safety shower, eyewash, combination safety shower/eyewash shall have red safety signoff tag. After completing requirements listed below, Contractor and Owner shall sign red safety signoff tag. Requirements are as follows: a. Visually check safety shower/eyewash piping for leaks. b. Verify that upon operation, stay -open valves remain open. c. Showerheads to be between 82 inches and 96 inches above standing surface. d. Shower spray pattern, when valve is full open, shall be a minimum 20 inches in diameter at 60 inches above standing surface. PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 26, 2026 22 40 00 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF e. Water arcs from eyewash spray heads must cross. Test with eyewash gauge; Haws Drinking Faucet Co., Model 9015. f. Minimum flow rates for safety showers shall be 20 gpm. g. Minimum flow rates for eyewashes shall be 3 gpm. h. Tempered water shall be temperature indicated on Drawings. F. Drainage Products: 1. Floor Drains: Set top flush with floor. Provide membrane clamps where required. 2. Cleanouts: Install where shown or required for purposes intended. Set cover flush with finished floor. 3. Hub Drains: Set top of hub 2 inches above finished floor. G. Plumbing Specialties: Shock Arresters: a. Install PDI-certified and rated shock arresters, sized and located in accordance with PDI WH-201 and as shown on Drawings. b. Install adjacent to equipment wherein quick closing valves are installed. c. Install at each emergency safety shower. d. Shock arresters to have access panels or to be otherwise accessible. 2. Drain P -Trap Priming: a. Pipe: Type K, soft copper. b. Trap and prime floor drains and hub drains, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. No attempt has been made to show trap primer valve locations or trap primer pipe routing. c. Field route trap primer piping during installation of floor drains and hub drains, and install trap primer valves in mechanical rooms, janitor rooms, or other locations acceptable to Engineer. 3. Trap Priming Valves: a. Floor drain traps primed with priming valves, 1/2 -inch copper to floor drain. b. Two traps maximum primed from one priming valve or as recommended by manufacturer. Locate in mechanical spaces or janitor's rooms and as indicated on Drawings. c. Provide shutoff valve ahead of priming valves. 4. Thermometers and Pressure Gauges: a. Arrange devices to facilitate use and observation. b. Install in orientation that will allow clear observation from ground level. c. Provide pressure gauges with block valves. d. Install thermometers in thermowells. PLUMBING FIXTURES PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 22 40 00 - 10 MARCH 26, 2026 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS MARY'S CREEK WRF H. Caulk penetrations of exterior walls with weatherproof sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. I. Adjust water flows in domestic water systems for reasonable water flows at each plumbing fixture, terminal device, and recirculation loop. Flush valve fixtures shall be adjusted for proper flush cycle time and water quantity. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform visual inspection for physical damage, blocked access, cleanliness, and missing items. B. Notify Owner and Engineer 48 hours prior to shower testing. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to witness all tempered water and safety shower testing. C. Test safety shower and eyewash units. Water flow must be tested at both showerhead and eyewash/face ring. 1. Shower Flow: a. Test with tube -type water gauge (Haws Drinking Faucet Co., Model 9010) and 5 -gallon container. b. Container shall fill in 10 seconds or less, with a minimum 20-gpm flow. 2. Eyewash Flow: a. Test with tube -type water gauge (Haws Drinking Faucet Co., Model 9010) and 1 -gallon container. b. Container shall fill in 20 seconds or less. 3. Contractor shall log, date, and initial inspection upon passing flow tests. D. Verify alarm operation both locally and systemwide. Notify security prior to test if alarm is connected systemwide. END OF SECTION PW\JACOBS AMERICAS\WFXR7900 PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 26, 2026 22 40 00 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2026 JACOBS